RE 00112 - Part 7

1
Hydraulic-Components
for industrial applications
Part 7: ATEX units
for potentially explosive atmospheres
Catalogue for the product range of hydraulic components
by Bosch Rexroth, Hydraulics
Industrial applications Part 1: Hydraulic pumps and motors RE 00112-01
Industrial applications Part 2: On/off valves
Isolator, directional, pressure and flow valves
RE 00112-02
Industrial applications Part 3: Proportional, high-response and servo-valves
Directional, pressure and flow valves
RE 00112-03
Industrial applications Part 4: Electronics
and electro-hydraulic systems
RE 00112-04
Industrial applications Part 5: Control plates, Hydraulic power units
and accessories
RE 00112-05
Industrial applications Part 6: Hydraulic cylinders RE 00112-06
Industrial applications Part 7: ATEX units
RE 00112-07
Mobile applications Part 1: Axial piston units, gearboxes,
mobile electronics RE 90005-01
Mobile applications Part 2: External gear units, radial piston motors,
mobile controls RE 90005-02
Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics RE 00112-07
Publisher Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
D-97813 Lohr a. Main
Zum Eisengieer 1 D-97816 Lohr a. Main
Phone ++49 (0) 93 52/18-0
Fax ++49 (0) 93 52/18-23 58
Telex 6 89 418-0
eMail documentation@boschrexroth.de
Internet www.boschrexroth.de
Catalogue No. RE 00112-07/11.05
Printers Schleunungdruck GmbH
97828 Marktheidenfeld
Reprints and translation, in whole or in part, only with the
publishers prior consent.
Subject to revision.
Should you have queries with regard to the
products in this catalogue, please contact
the Rexroth sales partner in your vicinity.
2
Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 00112-07
Table of contents
Page
General 7 108
i
01
A
T
E
X
-
u
n
i
t
s

f
o
r

p
o
t
e
n
t
i
a
l
l
y

e
x
p
l
o
s
i
v
e

a
t
m
o
s
p
h
e
r
e
s
Hydraulic cylinders 109 154
02
Switching valves 155 366
03
Proportional and servo valves 367 512
04
Electronics and accessories 513 538
05
G
U
3
4
ATEX-units
Hydraulic cylinders Hydraulic valves Electronics and
accessories
Mill type cylinder with piston
diameters from 40 to 320 mm and
stroke lengths up to 6000 mm
Equipment groups und categories
II2G, II2D and II3D according to
EU Directive 94/9/EC
Switching valves as directio-
nal poppet valves and directional
spool valves
IM2, II2G, II3G and II3D accor-
ding to EU Directive 94/9/EC
Proportional and servo valves
II1G, II2G, II3G and II3D accor-
ding to EU Directive 94/9/EC
Amplifier and associated
safety modul for explosion-proof
proportional valves
Pressure switch
Equipment group und category
II3D according to
EU Directive 94/9/EC
01 01
6
General
i
Designation
Data
sheet no. Page
Basics
Modern Explosion Protection Product Solutions
for Industrial Hydraulics, brochure 00837 9
ATEX-units - Installation, commisioning and maintenance
Explosion-proof hydraulic products
Operating Instructions for explosion-proof control valves, conti-
nuous valves, pressure switches, accumulator safety blocks
Part I - General Information 07010-X-B1 21
Hydraulic cylinders for potentially explosive atmoshperes,
Operating Instructions 07100-X-B 29
General - Installation, commisioning and maintenance
General product information on hydraulic products 07008 37
Installation, commissioning, maintenance of industrial valves 07300 69
Installation, commissioning, maintenance of servo valves
07700 71
Installation, commissioning and maintenance
of proportional valves 07800 73
Hydraulic cylinders, tie rod design / mill type design,
Operating Instructions 07100-B 77
Installation, commissioning, maintenance of hydraulic systems
07900 105
01
03
04
05
06
7
8
9
Industrial
Hydraulics
Electric Drives
and Controls
Linear Motion and
Assembly Technologies Pneumatics
Service
Automation
Mobile
Hydraulics
Modern Explosion Protection
Product Solutions for Industrial
Hydraulics
ATEX Directive 94 / 9 / EG
10
Explosion Protection
Directive 94/9/EG ATmosphre EXplosible
Directive 94/9/EC of the European
Parliament, that lays down minimum
requirements for the improvement
of health and safety at work for
employees working in areas with an
explosion hazard, came into force
on 01.07.2003.
Since that day, all products that
have been placed on the market,
or put into service must comply
with this new directives, because
since this date both old directives
and national regulations became
invalid in all EU member states.
The member states must transpose
the European regulations into
national law!
This ensures total harmonization
regulations regarding explosion
protection, free trade and uni-
form requirements for quality
assurance and additional monito-
ring of quality assurance for the
development and production of
such components within the EU.
Since 01.07.2003 Rexroth has
exclusively supplied products for
these specic applications that
comply with this directive and are
accompanied by the relevant docu-
mentation.
It is no longer permitted in the EU
to sell new components that are in
manufactured in accordance with
old standards.
2
11
01
The Directive is valid for:
Equipment (devices, protective
systems and components)
intended for use in a potentially
explosive atmospheres.
Safety devices, controlling
devices and regulating devices
intended for use outside
potentially explosive atmospheres
but required for or contributing
to the safe functioning of
equipment.
Equipment capable of causing an
explosion through its own
potential source of ignition.
Electrical equipment, which
source of ignition could be
electricity and all related effects
such as heat, sparks and radi-
ation.
Non-electrical equipment, which
source of ignition could be hot
surfaces, friction and
mechanically generated sparks.
Equipment intended for use in
areas with a potentially explosive
atmosphere caused by dust.
3
12
It is required to assign equipment to
certain zones of hazard, equipment
groups and categories. This classi-
cation must be in accordance with
the following table:
Group I
(mines, redamp / combus-
tible dusts)
Group II
(explosive atmospheres consisting of gas/air or dust/air mixtures, mists or vapors)
Category M Category 1 Category 2 Category 3
1 2
G (gas)
Zone 0
D (dust)
Zone 20
G (gas)
Zone 1
D (dust)
Zone 21
G (gas)
Zone 2
D (dust)
Zone 22
For equip-
ment that
ensures a
very high
level of
protection.
Operation
is ensured
also in the
rare case of
incidents.
For equip-
ment that
ensures a
high level of
protection.
Shutdown
possible in
the event of
an explosive
atmosphere.
For equipment that
ensures a very high level of
protection.
Intended for the case of
an expected permanent,
frequent or longterm
explosiv atmosphere.
For equipment that
ensures a high level of
protection.
Intended for the occasional
occurrence of an explosive
atmosphere.
For equipment that
ensures the normal level of
protection.
Intended for the rare case
that explosive atmospheres
are unlikely to occur, or if
they do occur are likely to
do so far a short period
only.
Two inde-
pendent
means of
protection,
or function-
ing ensured
if two faults
occur de-
pendently
of each
other.
Suitable for
normal
operation
and more
severe
operating
conditions.
Two independent means
of protection, or
functioning ensured if two
faults occur independently
of each other.
Protection during normal
operation and faults which
normally have to be taken
into account.
Protection during normal
operation.
Classication and Identication
of Potentially Explosive Atmospheres
4
13
01
Be on the Safe Side with Rexroth as your
Partner for Industrial Hydraulics
Our products are designed, manu-
factured and delivered strictly in
accordance with the ATEX Direc-
tive.
Thanks to in-depth analyses, risks
occurring in the design and pro-
duction phases and during opera-
tion can be recognized at an early
stage and ruled out right from the
start. For this reason, our products
meet the high safety and health
requirements laid down in Direc-
tive 94/9/EC.
To ensure compliance with these
high standards, new processes
were integrated in our production
sequence, or existing ones were
revised and modernized, as appro-
priate.
Risk analysis and conformity
assessment procedure
Type tests
Quality assurance with process
representation and assurance of
traceability of products
Issue of a declaration of
conformity, CE marking and Ex
marking
Preparation and supply of
operating instructions for
components, devices and power
units
Presentation of design
documents to notifed bodies
Nomination of an offcer for
explosion protection
5
14
To meet the exacting demands
placed on health and safety of emp-
loyees and to guarantee quality,
comprehensive technical docu-
mentation has been produced.
Each component is accompanied
by a documentation package that
includes the following items.
Written operating instructions in
four languages and a CD-ROM
with all further EU languages
General information about the
use of equipment in potentially
explosive atmospheres
Product data sheet
Product specifc instructions
together with compulsory
declaration of conformity
Labour intensive and costly
processes of this type can only be
handled by a manufacturer such as
Rexroth. Beneft from our know-
how and experience of our Product
Units.
The required technical product
data sheets are, of course, also
available online.
Servicing and repair of equipment
according to the old Directive
is still permitted in the EU and
worldwide. This is carried out
quickly and competently by our
Service Centers.
Safety, Health
and Quality
The Conformity Assessment Procedure
Category to
94/9/EG
Type of
product
Procedure Storing of ducumentation
IM1/ II1G/ II1D Electrical and
non-electrical
EC type testing by noti-
ed body
Rexroth + to notied body with
conrmation
IM2/ II2G/ II2D Electrical EC type testing by noti-
ed body
Rexroth + to notied body with
conrmation
IM2/ II2G/ II2D non-electrical Conformity assessment
by manufacturer
Rexroth + to notied body
II3G/ II3D Electrical and
non-electrical
Conformity assessment
by manufacturer
Rexroth
Depending on the category and equipment group, the following requirements must be met:
6
Our product spectrum ranges
from simple isolator valves trough
to highly dynamic servo-valves.
The required type of explosion
protection of, for example on/off
valves, can be selected depending
on the application at hand. Some
valves are also available as cart-
ridge type valves. Due to the strin-
gent demands that Rexroth places
on its ATEX valves, potential risks
during design, production and
operation of the components have
been eliminated.
Industrial Controls
in Accordance with the ATEX Directive
We offer a comprehensive and
application-oriented product range
of on/off and high-response, servo
and proportional valves in accor-
dance with the ATEX Directive.
7
15
01
16
Hydraulic Cylinders
Hydraulic cylinders from Rexroth
allow you, as a manufacturer of
plant and machinery intended for
use in potentially explosive atmos-
pheres, to employ tie rod cylinders
of our preferred product range
with bores of 25 to 320 mm in
different pressure stages and with
stroke lengths of up to 6000 mm.
On the basis of our ATEX-compli-
ant cylinders you can equip your
plant and machinery with hydrau-
lic cylinders from Rexroth to meet
the requirements set out in EU
Directive 94/9/EC.
8
17
01
Hydraulic power units intended
for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres are developed in close
cooperation with the client and in
accordance with the new ATEX
Directive. The modular design
principle offers a high level of
fexibility for a wide performance
spectrum - in spite of the res-
rictions imposed by Directive
94/9/EC.
System Technology in Accordance
with the ATEX Directive
Of course, Rexroth also develops
complete drive and control soluti-
ons in accordance with the ATEX
Directive and in close cooperation
with the customer. We offer appli-
cation-related system solutions and
turnkey systems for potentially
explosive atmospheres.
Hydraulic Power Units
All of our hydraulic power units
which are intended for use in
potentially explosive atmospheres
are subjected to an ignition risk as-
sessment according to the relevant
requirements. This procedure
results in safe hydraulic power
units without any source of igniti-
on in gas and dust atmospheres.
9
18
Escaping gases
Foundry machines
Core-shooting machines
Chemical plant
Firedamp in mines
Formation of vapors from uids
In foaming systems
On drilling platforms
In chemical plant
In tank systems
Formation and sedimentation of
dusts
Plastics processing machines
Woodworking machines
Mills
Mining machines
Machines for the production of
animal feed
ATEX-compliant equipment
from Rexroth is used in many
hazardous environments
10
19
The Drive & Control Company
Rexroth offers a unique and
comprehensive range of pro-
ducts and services across
technologies in its six business
units and service areas in high-
quality individual technologies
and combined with highest ap-
plication-specic competence in
system packages with integrated
complete solutions.
You can rely on service across
technologies
Rexroth integrates all services
for the entire product spectrum
in the eld of factory and indus-
trial automation into a single
organization: from immediate
support, spare parts service,
eld and repair service, retro-
t/modernization through to
training.
Intelligent Hydraulics
in New Dimensions
Wherever forces need to be utilized
economically, the advantages of in-
dustrial hydraulics are obvious -
whether it is required to lift and lo-
wer loads smoothly, perform linear
or rotary movements, achieve con-
stant acceleration, maintain given
speeds, approach positions exactly,
transmit powers or interlink se-
quences.
Rexroth is the technology and
market leader in industrial hydrau-
lics with a comprehensive product
range and distinct application
expertise.
At Rexroth you can select from the
world's largest standard product
range in the feld of hydraulics,
application and customer-specifc
system solutions of high quality.
With advanced micro-electronics
Rexroth has made hydraulics even
more powerful.
For you, Rexroth is the ideal partner
for developing highly effcient
machines and production facilities
- from the frst point of contact to
commissioning and throughout the
entire life cycle. Teams that operate
worldwide carry out the complete
engineering of your systems and,
if requested, up to the hand-over
of turnkey systems and beyond -
service included.
Thanks to the use of hydraulic
drive and control technology from
Rexroth you will be more competi-
tive than ever.
11
Industrial
Hydraulics
Electric
Drives and
Controls
Linear
Motion and
Assembly
Technologies
Pneumatics
Service
Automation
Mobile
Hydraulics
20
Bosch Rexroth AG
Industrial Hydraulics
Zum Eisengieer 1
97816 Lohr, Germany
Tel.: +49(0)9352/18 - 0
Fax: +49(0)9352/18- 3241
www.boschrexroth.com
Printed in Germany
RE 00837/01.04
1/8
Explosion-proof
hydraulic products
RE 07010-X-B1/03.05
Replaces: 03.03
Operating Instructions
for explosion-proof
control valves
continuous valves
pressure switches
accumulator safety blocks
ATEX - units
For potentially explosive atmospheres
Operating Instructions
Part I General Information
What you need to know about these Operating Instructions
These operating instructions apply to Rexroth explosion-proof hydraulic products and consist
of the following three parts:
Part I General Information RE 07010-X-B1
Part II Technical Data Sheet
Part III Product-specic instructions
For further information on the correct use of Rexroth hydraulic products please refer
to our publication General product information on hydraulic products, RE 07008.
21
01
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics Operating Instructions RE 07010-X-B1
1 Important basic information
1.1 Conventions used in this product
information document
Cross-references are printed in italics.
DANGER
This symbol indicates a threat of danger which will result
directly in death or very serious injury if not avoided.
WARNING
This symbol indicates a threat of danger which may result
in death or very serious injury if not avoided.
CAUTION
This symbol indicates possible danger which may lead to
minor or serious injury and/or material damage.
1 Important basic information 2
1.1 Conventions used in this product information document 2
2 Responsibilities 3
2.1 Liability, warranty, guarantee 3
2.2 Operator/user responsibilities 3
2.3 Copyright 3
3 Important basic safety instructions 4
3.1 Requirements of personnel, duty of care 4
3.2 Ancillary dangers and protective measures 5
3.3 Proper use 6
3.4 Use in areas endangered by explosion 6
3.5 Improper use 8
3.6 Disposal 8
IMPORTANT
This symbol indicates additional information.
Contents Page
22
Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 07010-X-B1 Operating Instructions 3/8
If the hydraulic product is part of another product, e.g. a
hydraulic system, then the person or organisation responsible
for this other product (e.g. the designer/constructor of the sys-
tem) shall ensure that
the hydraulic product is used only in accordance with the
proper use as dened in these Operating Instructions;
the hydraulic product is used only in such a manner that
the technical data, as well as the ambient and operating
conditions indicated in these Operating Instructions, are
complied with, and in particular that the limiting values
given in the Technical Data Sheet are not exceeded as far
as anyone can judge and are in compliance with its users
manual;
the applicable regulations and directives on explosion pro-
tection are complied with.
2.3 Copyright
This product information may only be reproduced electroni-
cally or mechanically, in whole or in part with the express per-
mission of Bosch Rexroth AG. Similarly, it may not be distrib-
uted, amended, transmitted, translated into another language,
or employed or copied for other purposes or by other parties
without such consent.
2 Responsibilities
2.1 Liability, warranty, guarantee
Bosch Rexroth AG shall not be liable for damages resulting
from these Operating Instructions not being adhered to or not
being adhered to in full.
Unauthorised tampering shall render the warranty null and void.
Bosch Rexroth shall only be liable if the scope of delivery was
shown to be defective. Bosch Rexroth shall not be liable if a
deciency occurs that involves parts that are replaced by the
customer with equivalent but not identical parts as specied by
the manufacturer.
Please refer to our general terms of supply or your contract for
details of the guarantee and manufacturers warranty.
2.2 Operator/user responsibilities
Mineral-oil-based pressure uid is hazardous to water and am-
mable.
It may be used only if the relevant safety datasheet from the
manufacturer is available and all the measures stipulated
therein have been implemented.
If there is a risk of uid leaking from the hydraulic product and
contaminating water or the ground, the hydraulic product in
question must be placed in a suitable collecting trough.
The operator is responsible for ensuring that
proper use as dened in these Operating Instructions;
technical data, as well as the ambient and operating con-
ditions indicated in these Operating Instructions, and in
particular that the limiting values given in the Technical
Data Sheet are not exceeded;
the applicable rules, regulations, and directives on explo-
sion protection are complied with.

23
01
3 Important basic safety instructions
3.1 Requirements of personnel, duty of care
3.1.1 General requirements, qualications
Persons under the age of 18 who are currently receiving
instruction or training or are working under supervision may not
work on Rexroth hydraulic products.
This does not apply to young persons of 16 or over if
working on Rexroth hydraulic products is necessary in
order for them to accomplish their training objective;
their protection is guaranteed through the supervision of
an experienced, specialist member of staff;
they are only allowed to use tools, equipment, and protec-
tive gear that preclude the risk of injury.
Specialist personnel are those who, using their specialist train-
ing, knowledge, and experience as well as familiarity with
the relevant conditions, can recognise possible dangers and
undertake the necessary measures to eliminate possible acci-
dents.
3.1.2 Requirements of maintenance personnel
It may be necessary to carry out maintenance tasks on the
hydraulic product in order to keep it in proper working order.
For details, please refer to Part III, Product-specic Instruc-
tions. Maintenance tasks include the inspection, servicing, and
repair of hydraulic and electrical components. Personnel carry-
ing out these various tasks must have certain minimum quali-
cations.
For the inspection of the hydraulic components, personnel
must full the following requirements:
They must be instructed about the tasks.
Specialist knowledge of hydraulics is not required.
For the servicing of the hydraulic components, personnel must
full the following requirements:
They have been instructed in the relevant activity.
Specialist knowledge of hydraulics is not required to carry
out servicing work.

For the maintenance of the hydraulic components, personnel
must full the following requirements:
They must be hydraulics experts instructed in the tasks as
dened above.
They must be familiar with the function of the hydraulic
system as a whole, from subsystems to their interaction
with the function of the machine as a whole.
They must be able to read hydraulic circuit diagrams, inter-
pret individual functions from their symbols, and under-
stand function diagrams.
They must possess knowledge of the function and con-
struction of hydraulic elements.
The following applies to work on the electrical systems:
All work on electrical equipment may only be carried out by an
authorised, qualied electrician, or by instructed persons under
the guidance and supervision of an authorised qualied electri-
cian, in accordance with the rules applicable to electro-techni-
cal products.
24
3.2 Ancillary dangers and protective measures
DANGER
Danger zone Ancillary danger Protective measure(s), safety instructions
Connections and pres-
sure lines
(pipes and conduits)
Risk of injury or loss of life from
sprayed pressure uid under high pres-
sure during maintenance work.
Depressurise hydraulic system before starting mainte-
nance work. Relieve any accumulators of pressure.
Rectify leaks immediately.
Surfaces of compo-
nents and pressure
lines
Risk of burning due to high surface
temperatures
Allow hydraulic parts to cool before commencing mainte-
nance work.
Wear protective clothing.
Electrical components Electric shock
Loss of explosion protection
Work on electrical components only in a non-powered
state.
Switch electrical connections off before assembly and dis-
assembly work begins.
All tasks that require product components to be disman-
tled may be performed only within the scope given in
Part III, Product-specic instructions.
Failure caused by excessive moisture
penetration following cleaning with a
high pressure cleaner
Shield the hydraulic product from the direct effect of high
pressure water jets.
Handling pressure uid without protection is
hazardous to your health.
Please observe the manufacturers safety instructions for
the pressure uid used and the associated Safety Data Sheet.
CAUTION
Danger zone Ancillary danger Protective measure(s), safety instructions
Connections and
pressure lines (pipes
and conduits)
Water or ground pollution due to leak-
age
Collecting trough.
Rectify leaks immediately.
IMPORTANT
See also 2.2 Operator/user responsibilities.
25
01
3.3 Proper use
Your hydraulic product has been conceived and designed
for the transmission, open-loop control, or closed-loop con-
trol of energy and signals with the aid of the ow of oil. It ful-
ls the requirements of EU Directive 94/9/EC on Equipment
used in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres (Atex). The equip-
ment groups and categories can be found in the Technical
Data Sheet under Areas of use in accordance with Directive
94/9/EC.
Safety components integrated in the Bosch Rexroth hydraulic
product satisfy at least Safety Category B in accordance with
EN 954-1.
However, only by carefully observing this users manual can
accidents be prevented and the problem-free operation of your
Bosch Rexroth hydraulic product be guaranteed.
Store the hydraulic product only in a dry, dust-free environment
that is free of corrosive agents and vapours, has a low moisture
content, and undergoes no large variations in temperature. We
recommend the use of clean conservation oil for storage peri-
ods longer than six months.
IMPORTANT
The factory-applied corrosion protection is adequate for stor-
age under the conditions given above, provided that no con-
densation or leaked water can penetrate the hydraulic product.
The hydraulic product is only to be used with the operating
uids listed in the Technical Data Sheet. Information on using
products with different pressure uids is available on request.
Use the hydraulic product only if it is in perfect technical con-
dition and only in accordance with the proper use as dened
in these Operating Instructions. The connections, operating
conditions and performance data dened in these Operating
Instructions must not be changed.
IMPORTANT
Please contact Bosch Rexroth AG rst should you wish to use
the hydraulic product under other connection, usage, or per-
formance data than those specied by Bosch Rexroth AG in
these operating instructions. The hydraulic product may not be
used with any other connection, usage, or performance data
other than those described in these operating instructions with-
out written permission from Bosch Rexroth AG.
The hydraulic product must only be converted within the scope
given in Part III, Product-specic Instructions.
During setting up or maintenance work, the safety devices t-
ted by Bosch Rexroth AG must be present, properly installed,
and in full working order, unless this is impossible. They must
not be relocated, bypassed, or rendered ineffective.
Rexroth hydraulic products must never be operated or main-
tained by persons under the inuence of alcohol, drugs, or
other medication which can affect ones ability to react.
3.4 Use in areas endangered by explosion
DANGER
The hydraulic product is only to be used in the areas indi-
cated in the Technical Data Sheet, Requirements for explo-
sion protection or in areas with lower requirements.
3.4.1 Zones, equipment groups, and categories
The user/operator must divide areas endangered by explosion
into zones in accordance with EU Directive 1999/92/EC. The
following table shows the equipment groups and categories
alongside the zones.
The hydraulic product is to be used exclusively in the area and
zone corresponding to the appropriate equipment group and
category. Use of the product must also comply with the other
Requirements for explosion protection in the Technical Data
Sheet.
26
Comparison of the equipment groups and categories in accordance with 94/9/EC and the associated zone in accordance with
1999/92/EC
Equipment
group to
94/9/EC
Category
to
94/9/EC
Area of use, characteristics (extract from the Directive) Usable in zone
according to
1999/92/EC
I M1 Atmospheres endangered by redamp (equipment group I), i.e. under-
ground mines and their surface installations.
Can remain operational in the presence of a potentially explosive atmo-
sphere.
Very high level of safety.
-
I M2 Atmospheres endangered by redamp (equipment group I), i.e. under-
ground mines and their surface installations.
Must be able to be switched off in the presence of a potentially explosive
atmosphere.
High level of safety.
-
II 1G Potentially explosive atmospheres in which potentially explosive gases,
mists, or vapours are present permanently, or frequently, or for long periods
(equipment group II).
Equates to Zone 0 in accordance with Directive 1999/92/EC.
0, 1, 2
mists, or vapours are occasionally present (equipment group II).
1,2
mists, or vapours are normally not present, or present only infrequently, or
for short periods (equipment group II).
Normal level of safety.
2
II 1D Potentially explosive atmospheres in which potentially explosive dust/air
mixtures are present permanently, or frequently, or for long periods (equip-
ment group II).
20, 21, 22
II 2D Potentially explosive atmospheres in which potentially explosive dust/air
mixtures are occasionally present (equipment group II).
21, 22
II 3D Potentially explosive atmospheres in which a potentially explosive atmo-
sphere from raised dust is normally not present, or present only infre-
quently, or for short periods (equipment group II).
Normal level of safety.
22
27
01
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengiesser 1
97816 Lohr am Main, Germany
Tel. + 49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Fax + 49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
documentation@boschrexroth.de
www.boschrexroth.de
This document, as well as the data, specications and other information
set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not be
reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
The data specied above only serve to describe the product.
No statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain appli-
cation can be derived from our information. The given information does not
release the user from the obligation of own judgement and verication. It
must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of
wear and aging.
3.4.2 Temperature classes in equipment group II
In potentially explosive atmospheres where a risk of explosion
from explosive gases, mists, or vapours exists (zones 0, 1, 2,
applicable devices: equipment group II, categories 1G, 2G and
3G), the maximum surface temperature of the hydraulic product
must, in addition, be below the ignition temperature of the sur-
rounding potentially explosive gases, mists, or vapours.
These hydraulic products are divided in accordance with
EN 13463-1 into the temperatur e classes T1 to T6, in line with
their maximum surface temperature. With hydraulic products
of equipment group II and categories 1G, 2G and 3G, the tem-
perature class is a constituent of the explosion protection mark,
see Part II, Technical Data Sheet, providing information on the
suitability of the hydraulic product for use in a particular poten-
tially explosive atmosphere where there are potentially explo-
sive gases, mists, or vapours.
Temperature
class
Highest
permissible
surface
temperature
Permissible ignition
temperature of the
gas, mist, or vapour
T1 450 C > 450 C
T2 300 C > 300 C
T3 200 C > 200 C
T4 135 C > 135 C
T5 100 C > 100 C
T6 85 C > 85 C
3.5 Improper use
DANGER
Modications to the product are only permitted within the
scope given in Part III, Product-specic Instructions.
The hydraulic product is pre-coated at the factory with a sur-
face protection ready for service. This surface protection must
not normally be altered through the application of paint, for
example as this would render the explosion protection inef-
fective. Should, by way of exception, alteration to the surface
protection be permitted, this will be expressly stipulated in
Part III, Product-specic Instructions. Please observe the limi-
tations specied here, where applicable.
3.6 Disposal
Empty the hydraulic product and dispose of it as scrap
metal.
Collect residual oil and dispose of it in accordance with
the instructions in the safety datasheet for hydraulic uids.
Dispose of any electronic components properly and in
accordance with applicable regulations.
28
1/8
Hydraulic cylinders for
potentially explosive
atmoshperes
Operating instructions
RE 07100-X-B/10.04
29
01
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Operating instructions Atex equipment in potentially explosive atmospheres
Table of contents
1. What you should know about these operating instructions 3
1.1 Conventions 3
2 Responsibilities 3
2.1 Liability, warranty 3
2.2 Responsibilities of the operator/user 3
3 Important fundamental safety notes 4
3.1 Intended use 4
3.2 Wrongful use 6
3.3 Use in potentially explosive atmospheres 6
3.4 Demands made on personnel, duty of care 6
3.4.1 General requirements, qualification 6
3.4.2 Demands made on maintenance personnel 7
3.5 Residual risk and precautions 7
3.6 Waste disposal 7
30
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 07100-X-B/10.04 3/8
1. What you should know about these operating instructions
These operating instructions are valid for Rexroth hydraulic cylinders used in potentially explosive atmos-
pheres.
Further information about the correct handling of hydraulic products by Rexroth can be found in our bro-
chure General product information for hydraulic products, RE 07008.
1.1 Conventions
Danger
This symbol refers to imminent danger that, if it is not averted, can immediately cause
severest injury or death.
Warning
This symbol refers to imminent danger that, if it is not averted, can cause severest injury or
death.
Caution
This symbol refers to possible danger that can cause light or serious injuries or damage to
property.
This symbol refers to supporting information.

2 Responsibilities
2.1 Liability, warranty
Bosch Rexroth AG is not liable for damage resulting from the non-obervance or incorrect observance of
these operating instructions.
Unauthorised interventions result in the expiration of warranty.
If parts are replaced by similar parts, but not by identical parts specified by the manufacturer, Bosch
Rexroth AG is only liable, if the scope of supply was already defective before the parts were replaced.
For details with regard to warranty and manufacturers guarantee, please refer to our General Terms and
Conditions or your contract documents.
2.2 Responsibilities of the operator/user
Caution
Hydraulic oil based on mineral oil is water-endangering and combustible. It may only be used, if
the relevant safety data sheet of the manufacturer is at hand and the measures prescribed in it
are taken.
If leakage on the hydraulic product can lead to contamination of water or soil, the hydraulic
product must be placed in a suitable oil drip tray.
In Germany, the following is valid for hydraulic systems: Systems for handling water-endan-
gering substances in the sense of the Water Resources Act (WHG). In this context, please
observe in particular 1 and 19 WHG (19g, 19i, 19l).
31
01
The operator is responsible for ensuring that
the hydraulic cylinder is used exclusively for its intended purpose as defined in these operating instruc-
tions,
the hydraulic cylinder is stored, operated and serviced exclusively in accordance with the technical data,
operating and ambient conditions specified in the data sheet and in particular that the limit values given
in the technical data sheet are not exceeded,
in the case of accumulation of dust, standard EN 50281-1-2 (presence of combustible dust) is com-
plied with,
the clamping screw provided on the cylinder for equipotential bonding is always connected,
valid regulations, rules and directives with regard to explosion protection are observed.
If the hydraulic cylinder is an integral part of another product, for example a hydraulic system, the party
responsible for the other product (e.g. designer/manufacturer of the system) must take care that the hy-
draulic cylinder
is used exclusively for its intended purpose as defined in these operating instructions,
is employed so that the technical data, operating and ambient conditions given in these operating
instructions are adhered to and, in particular, does not exceed the limit values specified in the technical
data sheet to the best ones judgement and taking into account the operating instructions,
and valid regulations and directives with regard to explosion protection are complied with.
3 Important, fundamental safety notes
3.1 Intended use
The hydraulic cylinder is designed and built to convert hydraulic energy into linear movements. The driving
force is determined by the hydraulic pressure in the cylinder chamber. It meets the requirements laid down
in the EU Explosion Protection Directive 94/9/EC. The equipment group and category are specified in the
technical data sheet under Application according to D 94/9/EC.
The user/operator must subdivide potentially explosive atmospheres into zones in accordance with EU Di-
rective 1999/92/EC. The following table shows the zones in relation to equipment groups and categories.
The hydraulic cylinder may exclusively be used in areas and zones assigned to the equipment group and
category. Also observe the other details about explosion protection given in the technical data sheet.
32
Equipment
group
to 94/9/EC
Category
to 94/9/EC
Application, properties
(excerpt from Directives)
Can be used in zone
to 1999/92/EG
I M1
Areas endangered by firedamp and/or com-
bustible dust (= equipment category I), i.e. un-
derground parts of mines and parts of surface
installations of such mines.
Operation is still possible when a potentially
explosive atmosphere occurs.
Very high level of protection.
I M2
Areas endangered by firedamp and/or com-
bustible dust (= equipment category I), i.e. un-
derground parts of mines and parts of surface
installations of such mines.
A shutdown of the equipment must be possible
when a potentially explosive atmosphere occurs.
High level of protection.
II 1G
Potentially explosive atmospheres, in which
explosive gases, mists or vapors (= equipment
category II) are likely to be present continu-
ously, for long periods or frequently.
Corresponds to Zone 0 to Directive 1999/92/EC.
0, 1, 2
II 2G
category II) are likely to occur occasionally.
High level of protection.
1, 2
II 3G
category II) are unlikely to occur, or if they do
occur, are likely to do so for a short period only.
Normal level of protection
2
II 1D
Potentially explosive atmospheres, in which ex-
plosive dust/air mixtures (= equipment category
II) are likely to be present continuously, for long
periods or frequently.
20, 21, 22
II 2D
Potentially explosive atmospheres, in which ex-
plosive dust/air mixtures (= equipment category
II) are likely to occur occasionally.
II 3D
Potentially explosive atmospheres, in which explo-
sive dust/air mixtures (= equipment category II) are
likely to occur rarely or for a short period only. Cor-
responds to Zone 22 to Directive 1999/92/EC.
Normal level of protection.
The safety components installed in Rexroth hydraulic cylinders comply at least with safety category B ac-
cording to EN 954-1.
Only when you strictly observe these operating instructions can accidents be prevented and trouble-free
operation of your Rexroth hydraulic cylinder be ensured.
33
01
The corrosion protection provided in the factory is sufficient for storage under the specified
conditions, provided that no condensate or leaking water can get into the hydraulic cylinder.
The hydraulic cylinder may be operated exclusively with the hydraulic fluids specified in the tech-
nical data sheet. For information about the use of the product with other hydraulic fluids, please
consult Bosch Rexroth.
The hydraulic cylinder may only be used when in technically perfect condition and in accord-
ance with these operating instructions. The connection conditions, application conditions and
performance data defined in these operating conditions must not be changed.
If you wish to use the product with connection, application or performance data other than those
defined by Bosch Rexroth, please contact Bosch Rexroth in advance. The product must not be
used with connection, application or performance data that differ from those described in these
operating instructions without Bosch Rexroths prior written permission.
The hydraulic cylinder may only be modified to the extent described in the product-specific operating
instructions, part III.
Protective equipment fitted by Bosch Rexroth AG must be available, properly installed and fully operable,
unless this is not useful for setup or servicing. Its position must not be changed, and it must not be by-
passed or made ineffective.
Persons under the influence of alcohol or other drugs or medicine that affects responsiveness are generally
not allowed to operate or service Rexroth hydraulic products.
3.2 Wrongful use
Danger
Modifications to the product are permitted only to the extent described in part III of the product-
specific operating instructions.
The hydraulic cylinder is provided with ready-to-install surface protection in the factory. Changes
to this factory-provided surface protection, for example by painting, result in the loss of explo-
sion protection.
3.3 Use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Danger
The hydraulic cylinder may only be used in the fields of application listed in the technical data
sheet under data on explosion protection or in areas with low requirements.
3.4 Demands made on personnel, duty of care
3.4.1 General requirements, qualification
Persons to be instructed or undergoing professional training or persons under 18 who are to be supervised
must not carry out any work on Rexroth hydraulic products.
This is not valid for young persons who are at least 16 years old, if
working on Rexroth hydraulic products is required to achieve training objectives
the protection of the young person is ensured by supervision of an experienced expert and
operating equipment, tools and protective equipment are used that rule out any injuries.
An expert is a person who, due to his or her professional training, knowledge and experience as well as
knowledge of relevant regulations can asses the work assigned to him/her, can recognize risks and take
measures required to avert the risks of accidents.
34
3.4.2 Demands made on service personnel
Servicing may be required to maintain the operability of the hydraulic cylinder. For details, please refer to
part III of the operating instructions for hydraulic cylinders.
3.5 Residual risks and protective measures
Danger
Risk area Residual risk
Protective measure(s),
safety note
sure lines (pipes and
hoses)
Spirting of hydraulic oil
under high pressure
during servicing.
Environmental pollution
Before carrying out servicing work,
depressurize the hydraulic oil; unload
hydraulic accumulators, if any.
Immediately eliminate leakage
Surfaces of compo-
nents and pressure
lines
Risk of burns due to
high surface tempera-
tures.
Before carrying out servicing work, let the
hydraulic system cool down.
Wear protective clothing.
Electrical components Electrical shock
Loss of explosion pro-
tection
Work on electrical components may only
be carried out when these are discon-
nected from the power supply.
Disconnect the electrical connection
before carrying out disassembly and as-
sembly work.
Any work that involves the disassembly
of hydraulic cylinders may only be carried
out to the extent provided in the operating
instructions.
Failure due to exposure
to excessive humidity
as a result of cleaning
by means of jet cleaner.
Protect hydraulic cylinder against the di-
rect exposure to high-pressure water jets.
Caution
Working with hydraulic oil while being unprotected is detrimental to health.
Please observe the safety notes by the hydraulic oil producer and the safety data sheets for the
hydraulic oils used by you.
Risk area Residual risk
Protective measure(s),
safety note
sure lines (pipes and
hoses)
Contamination of water
and soil due to leakage.
Oil drip tray.
Immediately eliminate leakage.

See also 2.2, Responsibilities of the operator / user.
3.6 Waste disposal
Drain hydraulic cylinders and dispose of them like metal scrap:
Collect residual amounts of oil and dispose of them in accordance with the safety notes in the safety data
sheet for the hydraulic fluid.
For more details, please refer to section 7.2 Part III of the operating instructions for hydraulic cylinders
35
01
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
This document, as well as the data, specications and other informa-
tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. Wit-
hout their consent it may not be reproduced or given to third parties.
The data specied above only serve to describe the product. No
statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
application can be derived from our information. The given information
does not release the user from the obligation of own judgement and
verication. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and
aging.
36
37
01
1/32
RE 07008/02.05
General product information on
hydraulic products
1/32
DE Ihre Sprache? Siehe Rckseite!
EN Your language? See back page!
FR Votre langue ? Voir au dos !
IT La vostra lingua? Vedi retro!
FI Kohdekielet? Katso takankatta!
ES Su idioma? Vea al dorso!
NL Uw taal? Zie achterzijde!
SV Ditt sprak? Se omslagets baksida!
PT O seu idioma? Consulte a contracapa!
DA Dit sprog? Se bagside!
EL ; !
2/32 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics General product information RE 07008
Contents Page
1 Important basic information 4
1.1 Conventions used in this product information 4
1.2 What you need to know about this product information 4
1.3 The contents of this product information 4
2 Scope of delivery and responsibilities 5
2.1 Scope of delivery and responsibilities of Bosch Rexroth 5
2.2 Responsibilities of the plant operator 5
2.3 Liability, guarantee, warranty 6
2.4 Copyright 6
3 Important basic safety instructions 7
3.1 What to do in an emergency 7
3.2 Safety labelling on the hydraulic product 7
3.3 Proper use 7
3.4 Requirements for personnel, duty of care 8
3.5 General ancillary dangers and protective measures
when operating hydraulic products 9
4 Technical data and ambient conditions 11
4.1 Information about pressure uids 11
4.2 Ambient conditions 11
5 What you need to know about pressure uids 13
5.1 How to handle pressure uids safely 13
5.2 Functions and effectiveness 13
5.3 Viscosity 13
5.4 Leakage uid 14
5.5 Topping up/relling 14
6 Construction and mode of operation of a hydraulic system 15
6.1 Denitions of terms 15
6.2 Schematic 15
6.3 Safety concept 15
7 Moving hydraulic units/components 16
8 Storage and longer standstills 16
8.1 Hydraulic systems - subsequent bringing into use after storage 16
8.2 Seals, hoses and hose lines 17
38
Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 07008 General product information 3/32
Contents Page
9 Assembly and bringing into rst use 18
9.1 Safety advice for assembly and bringing into rst use 18
9.2 Before bringing into rst use 18
9.3 Bringing into rst use, subsequent bringing into use 19
10 Operation 22
11 Trouble-shooting 22
11.1 What to do in the event of a fault 22
11.2 The basic approach to trouble-shooting 22
11.3 Trouble-shooting tables 23
12 Maintenance 24
12.1 Denitions of terms 24
12.2 Safety during maintenance tasks 24
12.3 Inspection and servicing 25
12.4 Service and storage lives of hose lines 28
12.5 Topping up the pressure uid 29
12.6 Servicing pressure accumulators 29
12.7 Repair 29
13 General information about hydraulic pressure accumulators 30
13.1 General 30
13.2 Safety devices relating to hydraulic pressure accumulators 30
14 Hydraulic systems 31
14.1 Effects of leaks in the hydraulic system on the machine 31
39
01
1 Important basic information
1.1 Conventions used in this product
information
DANGER
This symbol indicates a threat of danger which will result
directly in death or very serious injury if not avoided.
WARNING
This symbol indicates a threat of danger which may result
in death or very serious injury if not avoided.
CAUTION
This symbol indicates possible danger which may lead to
minor or serious injury and/or to material damage.
IMPORTANT
This symbol indicates additional information.
1.2 What you need to know about this
product information
This product information applies to the following types of
hydraulic products:
Hydraulic components
Hydraulic power units
Hydraulic systems.
This product information applies exclusively to hydraulic prod-
ucts that are operated with mineral-oil-based pressure uids, if
the Operating Instructions do not expressly permit the use of
other pressure uids.
IMPORTANT
As this product information for Rexroth hydraulic products
applies in a general sense, some of the content may not neces-
sarily apply to the hydraulic product you have purchased.
However, only by strictly observing this product information
and the Operating Instructions can accidents be prevented
and problem-free operation of your Rexroth hydraulic product
be guaranteed.
Observing the product information and Operating Instructions
reduces downtimes and maintenance costs
increases the service life of your hydraulic products.
The Operating Instructions must be directly accessible to one
of the personnel at the hydraulic product and kept readily avail-
able at all times in a place known to the personnel.
The Operating Instructions must be read and understood and
all its provisions observed by those responsible and by the
operative personnel. We recommend that a record is made in
writing of the employees familiarisation with all the relevant
parts.
The cross-references to directives, standards and regulations
contained in this product information refer to the versions cur-
rent at the time of writing of this product information, which can
be obtained from the title page of this product information.
1.3 The contents of this product information
In addition to this document, product information for Rexroth
hydraulic products normally includes Operating Instructions
consisting of three parts:
Part I, the general Operating Instructions for the relevant
class of products
Part II, the Technical Datasheet
Part III, the Product- and Application-specic Operating
Instructions.
If you do not have all three parts, please request the missing
part from Bosch Rexroth. Only if all the information contained
in all parts of the three-part Operating Instructions is observed
can safe operation of Rexroth hydraulic products be ensured.
Specic cross-references are used to draw your attention to
information that you can nd in the Operating Instructions.
The Operating Instructions contain detailed information about
the product, including
Information about the scope of delivery
Safety instructions
Technical data and operating limits
Information about bringing into (rst) use and maintenance
Information about the mode of operation
Layouts, drawings
Parts lists if appropriate
Information about replacement parts and accessories.
40
2 Scope of delivery and responsibilities
2.1 Scope of delivery and responsibilities of
Bosch Rexroth
Rexroth hydraulic products full all safety requirements applica-
ble to uid power systems and their components.
IMPORTANT
For the scope of delivery and the responsibilities of
Bosch Rexroth with respect to the product, please refer to the
Product-specic Operating Instructions.
2.2 Responsibilities of the plant operator
CAUTION
If Rexroth hydraulic products are positioned in the vicinity
of sources of ignition or strong radiators of heat, protec-
tion must be put in place that would prevent any escaping
pressure uid from igniting and the hose lines from aging
prematurely.
Mineral-oil-based pressure uid is hazardous to water and
ammable. It may only be used if the relevant safety data-
sheet from the manufacturer is available and all the mea-
sures stipulated therein have been implemented.
If there is a risk of uid leaking from the hydraulic prod-
uct and contaminating water or the ground, the hydraulic
product in question must be placed in a suitable collect-
ing trough. In connection with this, the applicable statutory
regulations must be observed.
You must also observe the EU directives for the use of work
equipment (Directive 89/391/EC) and the associated individ-
ual directives, especially Directive 1999/92/EC for the protection
from the danger arising from potentially explosive atmospheres
and their implementations in national legislation. The legisla-
tion contains minimum requirements with respect to the making
available by the employer of work equipment and for the use
of work equipment by employees at work, including the regu-
lations for operating equipment requiring supervision and the
obligation to produce explosion protection documentation. This
involves, for example, dividing areas endangered by potentially
explosive atmospheres into zones and specifying suitable work
equipment and procedures for these areas.
2.2.1 Noise protection
The A-weighted equivalent continuous sound power level of
Rexroth hydraulic products can be obtained from the relevant
Operating Instructions. If no values are documented then it can
be taken that the value is less than 70 dB(A).
Installation of Rexroth hydraulic products in a machine or sys-
tem may increase this value, and if so, the manufacturer of the
machine/system must document this.
At or above 85 dB(A), the plant operator must make suitable
hearing protection available to the personnel.
2.2.2 Special points concerning the installation of
certain products
A Rexroth hydraulic product is intended above all for installa-
tion in machines, systems and power units as a part machine
or a component for installation into another machine or system
and is not a complete machine in the sense of the EU directive.
In addition to the Machinery Directive, still further directives
may apply, such as the Pressure Equipment Directive or the
Explosion Protection Directive.
A wide range of dangers can arise from the combined actions
of the hydraulic product and the machine or system in which
the hydraulic product is installed. Therefore you must always
make sure that the hydraulic product is also suitable without
restriction for the proposed application at the installation loca-
tion. The interfaces with the overall machine and the operat-
ing conditions are also of the greatest importance. We recom-
mend that the results of the hazard analysis (risk assessment)
of the overall machine are taken into account in the design of
the hydraulic product.
The functioning of the hydraulic product is also inuenced by
the machine or system in which it is installed.
For this reason, you must also always observe the Operating
Instructions of the overall system in which your hydraulic prod-
uct is installed. It is most important for you to also consider the
possible use of the hydraulic product in a potentially explosive
atmosphere (see 94/9/EC).
IMPORTANT
Bosch Rexroth points out that, at the time of their rst intro-
duction on to the market, hydraulic products comply with the
requirements of all relevant EU directives and/or their imple-
mentation into national legislation in Germany. If the scope of
delivery is intended to be installed in a machine or system, then
the Machinery Directive applies as appropriate including the
then currently applicable amendments in that the scope of
delivery does not necessarily comply with the requirements
of the Machinery Directive because the scope of delivery is
intended for installation in a machine or because the scope of
delivery is intended for combination with other machines into a
machine or a hydraulic system.
The bringing into use of the scope of delivery shall there-
fore not be permitted until the machine or system in which the
scope of delivery is to be installed or of which it represents a
component complies with the requirements of all relevant EU
directives.
Details of further responsibilities can be found in
3 Important basic safety instructions and in the Operating
Instructions.
41
01
2.3 Liability, guarantee, warranty
Bosch Rexroth shall not be liable for damages that result from
non-compliance with or disregard of these and other parts of
the Operating Instructions.
Unauthorised tampering shall render the warranty null and void.
Bosch Rexroth shall only be liable if the scope of delivery was
shown to be defective. Bosch Rexroth shall not be liable if a
deciency occurs that involves parts having been replaced by
the customer with equivalent but not identical parts as speci-
ed by the manufacturer.
Please refer to our general terms of supply or your contract for
details of the guarantee and manufacturers warranty.
2.4 Copyright
This product information may only be reproduced electroni-
cally or mechanically, in whole or in part with the express writ-
ten permission of Bosch Rexroth. It may likewise not be distrib-
uted, amended, transmitted, translated into another language
or employed or copied for other purposes or by other parties
without such consent.
42
3 Important basic safety instructions
3.1 What to do in an emergency
In the event of an emergency, fault or other abnormal occur-
rences:
1. Switch off the hydraulic system.
2. Secure the main switch against being unintentionally
switched on again.
3. Secure the danger area so that no one can enter the dan-
ger area unknowingly or uncontrolled.
4. Notify the relevant specialist personnel immediately.
5. In the event of re, observe the provisions of the safety
datasheets issued by the manufacturer of the pressure
uid and the re precautions specically applicable to
your place of work, which must be documented in the
plant operators operating manual.
WARNING
Fighting res with materials other than those permitted
can lead to explosions and/or more rapid spread of the
re!
Danger to life from smoke inhalation!
3.2 Safety labelling on the hydraulic product
IMPORTANT
The meanings of the safety labelling on the Rexroth prod-
uct are explained in the Operating Instructions.
For a diagram of the nameplate and an explanation of the
information on it please refer to the Operating Instructions.
3.3 Proper use
Rexroth hydraulic products are designed and constructed for
the provision, transmission, control or regulation of energy and
signals using the ow of oil.
Unless otherwise agreed, the Rexroth hydraulic product satis-
es at least safety category B in accordance with EN 954-1.
If the hazard analysis/risk assessment of the overall machine
in which the Rexroth hydraulic product is to be installed indi-
cates that a safety category higher than category B in accor-
dance with EN 954-1 is required for the Rexroth hydraulic
product, then a correspondingly higher rated hydraulic product
can be supplied and installed only after special agreement with
Bosch Rexroth.
IMPORTANT
The hydraulic product shall be operated exclusively with pres-
sure uids complying with DIN 51524. Where other pressure
uids are permitted, for example brake uids for brake valves,
this is specially mentioned in the Operating Instructions.
For details on proper use see 4 Technical data and ambient
conditions.
The following information can be found in the Operating
Instructions:
the proper use, specic to the hydraulic product
where applicable, the safety category in accordance with
EN 954-1
non-permitted and improper use.
3.3.1 Proper use, requirements before operation
Rexroth hydraulic products may only be operated if they
are in perfect technical condition.
In the event of disturbances in the power supply and/
or damage to the electrical equipment, switch off
immediately and secure the main switch against being
switched on again without authorisation.
Report and rectify all faults and damage indicated by
the system or discovered by other means.
The connections, operating conditions and performance
data specied in the Operating Instructions must be
observed and never changed.
Rexroth hydraulic products shall not be converted or
otherwise modied without prior consultation with
Bosch Rexroth.
The plant operator shall not modify the program code of
programmable control systems.
Dependencies and time factors shall not be modied with-
out prior consultation.
The safety devices tted by Rexroth must be present,
properly installed and in full working order except when
this is impractical during setting up or maintenance work.
They shall not be relocated, bypassed or rendered ineffec-
tive.
Safety components such as limit switches, valves and
other control components shall not be rendered inopera-
tive.
Tamperproof lead seals installed by the manufacturer shall
not be removed or damaged except when this is neces-
sary in the course of maintenance tasks dened in the
Operating Instructions.
The specied maintenance tasks in the Operating Instruc-
tions shall be carried out at the intervals stated in the
43
01
Uncontrolled access by persons unfamiliar with the sys-
tem to the immediate operating zone of Rexroth hydraulic
products is prohibited (even if the product in question has
been shut down).
Rexroth hydraulic products must never be assembled,
operated or maintained by persons under the inuence of
alcohol, drugs or other medication which affect ones abil-
ity to react.
3.4 Requirements for personnel,
duty of care
3.4.1 Qualications of specialist personnel
A specialist person is someone who, using his specialist train-
ing, knowledge and experience as well as familiarity with the
relevant conditions, can
safely carry out the tasks allocated to him and correctly
assess the scope and implications of his work
recognise possible dangers
undertake the necessary measures to eliminate possible
accidents.
3.4.2 Requirements for hydraulics maintenance
personnel
In accordance with DIN 31051, maintenance comprises the
individual activities of inspection, servicing and repair. All
personnel involved in maintenance shall be familiar with and
observe all parts of the Operating Instructions and this product
information.
Inspection personnel shall full the following requirements:
Specialist knowledge of hydraulics is not required for
purely inspection activities but the personnel must be
aware of the particular dangers associated with hydraulic
products.
Servicing personnel (who carry out lter and oil changes, for
example) shall full the following requirements:
Specialist knowledge of hydraulics is not required to carry
out servicing work.
Repair personnel shall full the following requirements:
The personnel must be hydraulics experts, who have been
instructed and meet the denition given above,
Repair personnel must be familiar with the function of the
hydraulic system as a whole, from subsystems to their
interaction with the function of the entire machine.
Repair personnel must be able to read hydraulic circuit
diagrams, interpret individual functions from their symbols
and understand function diagrams.
Repair personnel must possess knowledge of the function
and construction of hydraulic elements.
3.4.3 Requirements for electrical maintenance
personnel
All work on electrical equipment shall only be carried out by
an authorised, qualied electrician, or by instructed persons
under the guidance and supervision of a qualied electrician, in
accordance with the rules applicable to electrotechnical prod-
ucts.
3.4.4 Minimum age
Persons under the age of 18 who are currently receiving
instruction or training or are working under supervision may not
work on Rexroth hydraulic products.
This does not apply to young persons of 16 or over if
working on Rexroth hydraulic products is necessary in
order for them to accomplish a training objective
their protection is guaranteed by the supervision of an
experienced, competent person
they are allowed to use only tools, work implements and
protective gear that preclude the risk of injury.
44
3.4.5 Training
The plant operator using Bosch Rexroth hydraulic products
shall train his personnel regularly in the following subjects:
Observation and use of the Operating Instructions and
legal requirements
Proper operation of the Rexroth hydraulic product
Observation of the instructions of safety ofcers and the
plant operators operating manual
What to do in an emergency.
IMPORTANT
Bosch Rexroth can provide you with training support in special-
ist areas.
An overview of the training can be found on the Internet at
http://www.boschrexroth.de/didactic.
3.5 General ancillary dangers and
protective measures when operating
hydraulic products
DANGER
In the interests of your safety, all safety instructions shall be
carefully observed, especially those in the Operating Instruc-
tions.
In spite of the high intrinsic safety of Rexroth hydraulic prod-
ucts, the risk of personal injury or damage to the environment
cannot be excluded, even when the equipment is properly
used.
New, additional dangers may arise if the hydraulic product is
installed in another machine or installed with other machines
in a system. This shall apply in particular to mechanical move-
ments generated by the hydraulic product.
Information on these additional dangers can be found in the
overall operating manual of the supplier of the overall system in
which the hydraulic product is installed.
3.5.1 Dangers from pressure uid
CAUTION
Handling pressure uid without protection is hazardous to
health.
Please observe the manufacturers safety instructions and the
safety datasheets for the pressure uid that you are using.
DANGER
Serious damage to health or death may result if pressure uid
enters the blood stream or is swallowed. If this occurs, contact
a doctor immediately!
3.5.2 Malfunctions due to contamination of
pressure uid
Contamination of the pressure uid can be caused by:
Wear during operation of the machine/system (metallic
and non-metallic abrasion)
Leaks of the hydraulic product
Contaminants introduced during servicing/repair
The use of dirty (unltered) pressure uid when the pres-
sure uid is changed.
Contaminants lead to malfunctions, increased wear and shorter
service life of the hydraulic product. This can have negative
effects on the safety and reliability of the hydraulic product.
Therefore the maintenance tasks specied in the Operating
Instructions shall be carried out at regular intervals and the
utmost cleanliness is required during work on the hydraulic
product.
CAUTION
When changing the pressure uid, always use factory-fresh
pressure uid and lter it before lling to remove any contami-
nants in the pressure uid that it often contains from the pack-
aging container (drum). Flush out lines and hoses before instal-
lation.
The cleanliness class of a pressure uid is specied in accor-
dance with ISO 4406. Detailed information can be obtained
from the relevant datasheet or the Operating Instructions.
45
01
In older datasheets, the cleanliness class is sometimes speci-
ed in accordance with NAS 1638. The following table can
be used to convert this to an equivalent ISO 4406 cleanliness
class:
Comparison table for cleanliness classes
Earlier class to
NAS 1638
Current class to
ISO 4406 (c)
Class 7 Class 18/16/13
Class 9 Class 20/18/15
3.5.3 Electrical dangers
When working on electrical systems:
De-energise the hydraulic system before beginning any
maintenance work.
Cordon off the working area with red-white safety chain
and warning signs.
Lock the main switch, remove the key and keep it in a safe
place until the work is completed.
Attach a warning sign to the main switch.
Check that there is no voltage using a two-pole voltage
detector.
Earth and short-circuit the point where you are working.
Cover neighbouring live parts.
Clear your workplace to prevent contact with live parts as
a result of tripping or slipping. Wear safety footwear.
Always use electrically insulated tools.
Disconnect plugs at sensors and valves even those with
low voltages after the system has been de-energised.
DANGER
Even after disconnection of the electrical supply
(main switch OFF) the following supply systems/danger
areas can still give rise to life-threatening voltages:
Electrics, electronics, hydraulics (e.g. accumulators,
rechargeable batteries)
Main switch
Power supply cables
Points identied with an electric shock warning sign.
3.5.4 Product-specic ancillary dangers
All product-specic ancillary dangers and precautions can be
found in the relevant Operating Instructions.
3.5.5 Disposal
Take metal, cable and plastic ducts to a recycling materi-
als collection centre.
Dispose of electronic components as electronic waste.
Dispose of back-up batteries as special waste.
Cleaning agents, operating uids and other materials:
CAUTION
Please observe the disposal regulations specied in
the appropriate Safety Datasheets.
46
4 Technical data and ambient conditions
IMPORTANT
The product-specic technical data, operating limits and ambi-
ent conditions for the operation of your Rexroth hydraulic prod-
uct can be found in the Operating Instructions.
This includes the following information:
Minimum ow rate for adequate cooling
Permissible maximum temperature of the coolant
Performance data
Type of control and regulation functions
Permissible pressures, ow rates
Connections.
4.1 Information about pressure uids
Unless otherwise indicated in the Operating Instructions, the
following specication applies to the pressure uid to be used:
Mineral-oil-based pressure uid complying with the
requirements of DIN 51524.
Operating temperature range 0 C+80 C
(in tank < 72 C).
Any deviations from this can be found in the Operating Instruc-
tions.
IMPORTANT
Bosch Rexroth recommends a maximum operating tempera-
ture of 55 C, because the rate of ageing of the pressure uid
increases and the service life of the seals and hoses is reduced
at higher temperatures.
Viscosity ranges:
see RE 07075 and RE 90220
Max. permissible contamination class of the pressure uid
in accordance with ISO 4406: see 3.5.2 Malfunctions
due to contamination of pressure uid.
The maximum permissible cleanliness class can be found in the
Operating Instructions. The following types of pressure uids
shall be used.
IMPORTANT
Rexroth hydraulic components are tested with test oil MZ45
manufactured by ESSO (class ISO VG 46 at 40 C),
(Viscosity = approx. 46 mm
2
/s).
4.2 Ambient conditions
4.2.1 Use in potentially explosive atmospheres
DANGER
Rexroth hydraulic products shall be used in potentially
explosive atmospheres only if they are designed for this
purpose and this is expressly stated in the Operating
Instructions.
IMPORTANT
Directive 1999/92/EC of the European Parliament and Coun-
cil dated 16 December 1999 concerning the minimum require-
ments for improving the safety and health protection of work-
ers potentially at risk from explosive atmospheres governs
protection from danger from potentially explosive atmospheres.
Observe the requirements contained in the regulations for
operating equipment requiring supervision and the obligation to
produce explosion protection documentation.
This involves, for example, dividing areas endangered by poten-
tially explosive atmospheres into zones and specifying suitable
work equipment and procedures for these areas.
Observe the requirements of Directive 94/9/EC of the Euro-
pean Parliament and Council dated 23 March 1994 on the
approximation of laws of the member states concerning equip-
ment and protective systems intended for use in potentially
explosive atmospheres (ATEX Product Directive) and/or the
corresponding national legislation by means of which the Direc-
tive was implemented in law in the EU member states. The
directive contains requirements for the use of equipment and
protective systems in potentially explosive atmospheres.
47
01
4.2.2 Climatic operating conditions
Unless otherwise indicated in the Operating Instructions,
the permissible ambient temperature
for control units: 0 C+50 C
for drive units with electric motors without heat exchang-
ers, surface-cooled by free air circulation:
0 C+30 C
for drive units with heat exchangers: < +40 C.
Unless otherwise specied, Rexroth hydraulic products are
designed for use in temperate climate zones and in covered
areas (not in the open air) at relative air humidities of < 70 %
and at room temperatures of 22 C.
IMPORTANT
For systems with oil-air heat exchangers:
Observe the information given in the circuit diagram in the
In relation to the electronic equipment, the permissible ambient
conditions apply to installed and protected electrical connec-
tions of class IP 55.
Ambient temperature +5 C+40 C
assuming that the average air temperature over a 24 hour
period does not exceed +35 C.
Relative air humidity: 2395 %, non-condensing.
Altitude: up to 1000 m above national datum.
DANGER
Rexroth hydraulic products shall not be used in aeronau-
tical equipment, except where they have been specially
approved and appropriately labelled to this effect.
48
5 What you need to know about
pressure uids
5.1 How to handle pressure uids safely
DANGER
Mineral-oil-based pressure uid is hazardous to water and
ammable.
It may only be used if the relevant safety datasheet from
the manufacturer is present and all the measures stipu-
lated therein have been implemented.
5.2 Functions and effectiveness
Due to the many tasks of pressure uid, its selection, inspec-
tion and maintenance are of vital importance for:
proper functioning
operating safety
service life
and the cost effectiveness of the hydraulic product.
The tasks of pressure uid:
to transmit hydraulic energy from the pump to the hydrau-
lic cylinder/motor
to lubricate parts moving against one another
corrosion protection
to remove contaminants
to remove locally accumulated heat.
5.2.1 Reduced function due to ageing
The effectiveness of pressure uid diminishes as it ages
(undergoes chemical changes). Acids and resinous residues
form, which may cause valve spools to stick.
The following factors accelerate the ageing process:
high temperatures
oxygen in the pressure uid
air humidity
water
metallic catalysers
operating pressure
contaminants.
IMPORTANT
Observe the following rules of thumb:
At pressure uid temperatures >70 C, the rate of ageing
doubles for each 10 C.
5.3 Viscosity
5.3.1 Viscosity grades
The most important characteristic of a pressure uid is its vis-
cosity, i.e. stickiness. Viscosity range always plays a priority
role in the selection of a pressure uid.
Viscosity is measured in the SI unit [mm
2
/s]. Many manufactur-
ers still provide their information in centiStoke [cSt], the equiv-
alent of [mm
2
/s].
The viscosity grades (VG = viscosity grade) in accordance with
ISO 3448 relate to the viscosity at 40 C. The viscosity grade
is appended to the type designation or the commercial name of
the pressure uid.
Example: A pressure uid with a viscosity grade of ISO VG 46
has a viscosity of 46 mm
2
/s at 40 C.
The relationship between medium temperature and viscosity for
hydraulic oil (example)
Medium
temperature
Viscosity
3 C 800 mm
2
/s
8 C 500 mm
2
/s
25 C 100 mm
2
/s
60 C 20 mm
2
/s
77 C 12 mm
2
/s
Too high a viscosity leads to the formation of air and vapour
bubbles as a result of low pressure (cavitation). Too low a vis-
cosity leads to increased leakage losses. Increased leakage
losses cause the pressure uid to heat up more, leading in turn
to a further reduction in viscosity. The pressure uid then loses
its ability to lubricate.
Valves, pumps and hydraulic motors, in particular, require exact
compliance with the dened viscosity ranges.
For certain ambient and operating temperatures, not all the
requirements can always be covered with the available ranges
of the viscosity grades.
In order to comply with all the requirements, high viscosity
pressure uids with viscosity index improvers or a pressure
uid cooler/heater may be used.
49
01
5.4 Leakage uid
Clearances and play mean that some leakage uid escapes
from all hydraulic products. Leakage uid can be lead away
internally or externally, depending on the component. It can be
fed back into the tank or must be disposed of.
CAUTION
Make sure that the leakage uid is fed back into the tank
in a proper manner.
Dispose of leakage uid that is not fed back into the tank
properly, in compliance with the applicable environmental
protection regulations.
5.5 Topping up/relling
CAUTION
When topping up/relling your hydraulic system, make
sure that you use pressure uid of the same sort and type
and from the same manufacturer.
If the uid is heavily contaminated or prematurely aged,
then the system, including the tank must be cleaned and
ushed before relling. New pressure uid must always be
ltered in accordance with the required cleanliness class,
as it does not normally meet the required cleanliness class
in the as-supplied state.
50
6 Construction and mode of operation
of a hydraulic system
6.1 Denitions of terms
Hydraulics (uid technology)
Transmission, control and distribution of energy and signals
using a pressurised uid medium.
Hydraulic system
Arrangement of interconnected components for transferring
and controlling hydraulic energy.
Component
A single unit (e.g. a valve, lter, cylinder, motor) that consists
of one or more parts and which is a functional constituent of a
hydraulic system.
Drive
A component that converts the energy of the hydraulic uid
into mechanical energy (e.g. motor, cylinder).
6.2 Schematic
In a system operated with hydraulic oil, rst of all mechani-
cal energy is converted into hydraulic energy, transported and
controlled in this form, to nally be converted once more into
mechanical work.
The hydraulic elements are arranged in accordance with these
functions. The following diagram shows a schematic represen-
tation of the elements of a complete hydraulic system.
To demonstrate their operating principle, standardised symbols
(ISO 1219) are used instead of sectional diagrams of the vari-
ous devices. Line connections are represented by simple lines,
as can be seen in the example.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 Tank
Oil preparation
2 Filter
3 Pump Energy conversion
4 Pressure limiting valve
Energy control
5 Directional valve
6 Check valve
7 Throttle valve
8 Hydraulic cylinder
Energy conversion
9 Hydraulic motor
6.3 Safety concept
Hydraulic products contain sensors and actuators, the interac-
tion of which is particularly important with regard to the full-
ment of technical safety functions.
Individual hydraulic products form part of an overall safety con-
cept.
Applications required to perform safety functions are designed
using special hydraulic components that satisfy the require-
ments of the relevant directives, such as the Pressure Equip-
ment Directive and other standards.
The manufacturer of the overall machine or system denes and
bears responsibility for the safety category to EN 954-1 to be
fullled.
IMPORTANT
A more detailed description of the safety concept and the spe-
cic safety components installed can be found in the Operating
Instructions and the Operating Instructions of the supplier of
the overall system in which the hydraulic product is installed.
51
01
7 Moving hydraulic units/components
Hydraulic units or components may be moved by a fork-lift
truck or a hoist, depending on their size and the local condi-
tions.
IMPORTANT
For details see the Operating Instructions.
CAUTION
Always ensure hydraulic products are empty of pressure
uid for transportation.
Rexroth hydraulic products are delivered empty of pressure
uid. However, products may contain oil residues left over from
the nal inspection at our factory.
8 Storage and longer standstills
8.1 Hydraulic systems - subsequent bringing
into use after storage
Corrosion, especially oxidation, can cause metal surfaces to
lose the standard of surface nish required for the hydraulic
system to function properly.
Rust and other metallic and non-metallic particles lead to abra-
sive wear (erosion), which detrimentally affects the functioning
of the hydraulic system.
CAUTION
If a hydraulic system is to be brought into use again fol-
lowing a long standstill, it must rst be ushed clean.
8.1.1 Factory-applied corrosion protection
Rexroth hydraulic products are tested in accordance with
Class III using a hydraulic oil that has additional anti-corrosive
properties. The lm of oil that remains in the product after the
test provides sufcient internal corrosion protection.
This factory lubrication ensures that valves do not stick during
subsequent use of the hydraulic product, and guarantees com-
patibility with seals and the pressure uid to be used.
IMPORTANT
The factory-applied corrosion protection is adequate provided
that
no condensation or leakage water can enter the system
long standstills are avoided.
Contact Bosch Rexroth if you are not clear about the conse-
quences of long standstills on the state of the hydraulic prod-
uct.
8.1.2 Storage times in relation to the ambient
conditions
Delays in bringing into use, long shipping and storage times or
long periods of non-use can lead to rust formation in Rexroth
hydraulic products. Additional corrosion protection measures
must be implemented to prevent this.
IMPORTANT
If all the openings on the hydraulic products are not sealed so
as to be air-tight, this will reduce the storage life of the hydrau-
lic product by nine months.
After the specied storage time has expired, in any event not
longer than 24 months, the corrosion protection must be
checked and further conservation measures applied if neces-
sary.
52
8.2 Seals, hoses and hose lines
CAUTION
Seals:
Observe the requirements of ISO 2230 and/or DIN 7716
and the specic manufacturers data on seals.
Hoses and hose lines:
In the Federal Republic of Germany, please observe the
requirements of DIN 20066, ZH 1/74 Safety rules for
hydraulic hose lines and the specic manufacturers data
on hoses and hose lines.
In addition, the following conditions shall be observed:
Seals, hoses and hose lines are stored in cool, dry and
dust-free conditions.
The hoses and hose lines can be enclosed in plastic foil to
ensure low-dust storage conditions. Ideal storage conditions
for hoses and hose lines are temperatures from +15 C to
+25 C and a relative humidity of below 65 %.
Do not store elastomers below 10 C. The ideal stor-
age conditions for seals are temperatures from +10 C
to +20 C and a relative humidity of between 65 % and
75 %.
Store hoses and hose lines in the original packaging if
possible. Prevent the entry of air.
Avoid direct sunlight and UV radiation and shield from
nearby sources of heat.
Darkened storage locations are preferred.
Do not use ozone-forming light sources or equipment
(e.g. uorescent lamps, mercury-vapour lamps, copiers,
laser printers) or electrical spark-forming devices in the
vicinity of hoses and hose lines.
Seals, hoses and hose lines must not come into contact
in particular with materials or vapours that could damage
them (e.g. acids, alkalis, solvents).
Store seals, hoses and hose lines lying down and free
from tension. If the hoses and hose lines are coiled, take
care not to bend them to less than the smallest bending
radius specied by the manufacturer.
Maximum storage times
NBR seals: 4 years
FKM seals: 10 years
Hoses: 4 years
Hose lines: 2 years
For reasons of safety, seals, hoses/hose lines shall not be
used once these permissible storage times are reached or
exceeded. Permissible storage times could be considerably
reduced if the permissible storage conditions are not main-
tained. If you are not clear about the storage times and/or stor-
age conditions then you should not use the product.
53
01
9 Assembly and bringing into rst use
IMPORTANT
Only the permissible pressure uids given in the Operating
Instructions are to be used. Information on other pressure u-
ids can be found in the Operating Instructions or are available
on request.
Filling the pressure uid tank must always take place through a
suitable lter unit. Experience has shown that even new pres-
sure uid can often have more than the maximum permissible
level of contamination.
All information specic to assembly and bringing into rst use
can be found in the Operating Instructions.
Pay attention to cleanliness:
Do not use cleaning wool or cloths containing bres for
cleaning.
Depending on the condition of the system or machine,
cleaning with bre-free cloths may be sufcient. Use suit-
able liquid cleaning agents to remove lubricants and other
stronger contaminants. Make sure that cleaning agent
does not get into the hydraulic system.
Never use hemp and putty as sealants.
The functional or failure behaviour of identical hydraulic prod-
ucts may vary due to conditions specic to the machine or sys-
tem in which the hydraulic product is installed (mass, speed,
electrical triggering at setpoint values, etc.), see also Section
11 Trouble-shooting.
9.1 Safety advice for assembly and
bringing into rst use
DANGER
Hydraulic products are generally intended for installation
in machines/systems or devices.
The function of the hydraulic product must therefore
always be seen in relation to the function of this machine
i.e. seemingly identical hydraulic products may demon-
strate different functional behaviours as a result of the
function of the machine in which they are installed.
For this reason, a hydraulic drive must not be brought into
use until it has been determined that the machine in which
it is installed conforms to EU standards.
Do not bring hydraulic drives into use until you have famil-
iarised yourself completely, rstly with the function of the
hydraulic product and hydraulic equipment and secondly
with the hydraulically powered machine functions, and
have claried and dealt with any possible dangers.
Bringing into (rst) use shall only be done by an instructed,
authorised hydraulics expert who has the required special-
ist knowledge.
Specialist hydraulics knowledge means, among other things,
that the person can read and fully understand hydraulics draw-
ings. In particular, he must fully comprehend the range of func-
tions of the integrated safety components as part of the overall
safety concept.
9.2 Before bringing into rst use
1. Check the scope of delivery for transport damage.
2. Check that the Operating Instructions for the Rexroth
hydraulic product are present and complete.
Contact us if the Operating Instructions are not there or
are incomplete.
3. Assemble the hydraulic product.
Observe the Operating Instructions and this product
information.
Assemble the hydraulic components, so that they are
mounted strain-free on even surfaces.
Tighten the fastening bolts evenly using the specied
tightening torque.
4. Ensure that the interfaces of the system/machine and the
installation conditions provide for safe operation of the
hydraulic product. If in doubt, consult the people responsi-
ble for the overall system/functional machine.
5. Check the construction of the hydraulic product against
the circuit diagrams, lists of equipment and assem-
bly drawings. If there are any differences, draw this to
the attention of the people responsible. If important
documents are missing, they can be requested from
Bosch Rexroth. Only documents issued by the bodies
authorised to do so shall be used.
6. Based on the Operating Instructions for the system or
machine in which the hydraulic product is installed, check
whether bringing the hydraulic system into use could lead
to uncontrolled, dangerous movements. Where appropri-
ate, take into account the hazard analysis/risk assessment
for the system or machine.
7. Take the precautions appropriate to the anticipated dan-
gers, e.g.
Ensure that the cylinder piston rod can move out
without danger.
Use a hoist or other lifting device to additionally
secure lifted loads.
54
8. As part of bringing into (rst) use, check whether the elec-
tric motors and valve solenoids can be switched manually
using the electrical controls of the system/machine. If they
cannot be switched manually or can but with difculty
you must provide a remote control (e.g. test boxes for
Rexroth proportional valves) for the internal function test of
the hydraulic system.
IMPORTANT
Starting up the hydraulics solely by means of emergency man-
ual operation is not recommended, as several valves at once
cannot be switched as required in the correct sequence.
9. Draw up a sequential program for bringing into (rst) use
and store it with the technical documentation as an appen-
dix to the Operating Instructions.
For this you should consider the following:
Hydraulic drives basically consist of the following func-
tional groups
Pump circuit (generation of pressurised oil ow);
pump, electric motor, oil tank, lters, monitoring
devices, etc.
Control system for at least one hydraulic consumer
(cylinder, motor); directional control valves, pressure
and ow control valves, check valves
Hydraulic consumers (cylinders, motors) with spe-
cially assigned valves, e.g. braking valve.
10. Divide the functional circuit diagram into separate mini-cir-
cuits that can each be started up in succession.
11. Read the functional circuit diagram and seek clarication
of any unclear text or diagrams. More information about
the functioning of components, e.g. a pump regulator, is
available in the Technical Datasheet.
12. Establish into which position valves are to be switched, or
how valves are to be set.
13. Put up any necessary directional, prohibitive or informative
signs and check whether the meaning of these signs are
explained in the Operating Instructions.
14. Follow this sequence for bringing into (rst) use
Pump circuit
Parts of control system:
e.g. pressure cut-off and switchover,
open centre,
pressure reduction etc.
Cylinder and motor circuits:
First move,
ll and bleed,
then nally optimise all settings.
9.3 Bringing into rst use,
subsequent bringing into use
DANGER
Before bringing into (rst) use, have all pressure accumu-
lators and safety systems checked by an expert or special-
ist in accordance with national regulations.
1. Clean the lock on the transport and storage container
before opening.
2. Clean the hydraulic unit and all other component groups,
so that no dirt can get into the hydraulic system during
bringing into (rst) use.
3. Check the paint on the tank for integrity.
4. Flush the connection lines to remove dirt, scale, chips etc.
5. Pickle and ush welded pipes.
CAUTION
Remove all residues of water and cleaning agents
before performing further work.
6. Clean the interior of the hydraulic components to get rid of
contaminants:
Clean the ller plug of the pressure uid tank.
Remove dust and chips using an industrial vacuum
cleaner, by rinsing parts or similar cleaning method.
Completely remove any oil residues left over from the
factory test.
Remove any gummed oil which may have formed due
to incorrect storage.
7. Connect up all connection lines.
IMPORTANT
Observe the installation instructions from the manufacturer
of the connection components.
DANGER
Make sure that pipes and hoses are connected at all
ports or that the ports are sealed with screw plugs.
8. Carry out a special check to make sure that the union nuts
and anges are correctly tightened at the pipe connec-
tions and anges.
55
01
IMPORTANT
Mark all the checked connections, e.g. with paint.
Make sure that all pipes and hoses and every combination of
connection pieces, couplings or connection points with hoses
or pipes are checked for their operational safety by someone
who has the appropriate knowledge and experience.
9. Connect the hydraulic consumers. Dimension the connec-
tion lines in accordance with the performance data in the
Circuit Diagram and the Operating Instructions.
10. Install the electrical system for the drive and control sys-
tem:
Check the connected loads.
Connect coolant water if necessary.
Check the direction of rotation of the pumps
(e.g. as indicated by attached arrow markings).
11. Check the pressure uid to ensure that no water has
entered it.
12. Before lling the pressure uid tank, please observe the
following requirements:
The pressure uid must conform to the specication
in the Operating Instructions.
CAUTION
Never ll new hydraulic products with used pressure
uid.
The drums of pressure uid must be sealed and clean
on the outside.
IMPORTANT
If the pressure uid has a high level of initial contamination
(see 4 Technical data and ambient conditions):
Use a lter unit to ll the pressure uid tank. Ensure that the l-
ter element is clean.
IMPORTANT
The neness of the lter shall correspond to the cleanliness
class required by the overall system and if possible be even
ner.
The lter unit used shall full the requirements for functional
safety and service life.
If possible, ll the pressure uid tank via a lling coupling,
using a return lter if possible.
CAUTION
Use oil ller units (lter units) suitable for pres-
sure uids.
Do not remove the lter strainers from ller necks or the
lter element from lters before lling the pressure uid
tank.
13. Fill the pressure uid tank up to the upper mark on the
inspection window. Observe the maximum uid level, tak-
ing into consideration the volume in the connection lines
and hydraulic consumers.
14. Set the pressure and ow control valves, pump regula-
tor, signalling elements such as pressure switches, limit
switches and temperature regulators to the settings and
values dened in the sequential program (see 9.2 Before
bringing into rst use).
DANGER
Do not change the settings of valves with a safety
function, valves with a position switch or valves with
preset electronics.
Set operating-pressure valves and ow control valves
to the lowest possible values.
Set directional control valves to their basic setting.
Reduce the setpoint values of proportional valves to
minimum values.
Do not remove the tamperproof lead seals. Damaged
or removed tamperproof lead seals indicate improper
use of the hydraulic product.
15. If applicable:
Fill the pressure accumulator to the specied gas pre-
charge pressure and then check the pressure, see Operat-
ing Instructions.
16. Fill the pump body:
Use the leakage oil port to ll pump bodies that have this
feature, see Operating Instructions.
17. If applicable:
Open the cocks in the suction line.
18. Start the drive motors:
With electric motor in jogging mode, allow to start
briey
Combustion engines in idle
Pay attention to the direction of rotation.
56
19. Bleed the hydraulics (valve, pump, motor, line, cylinder).
IMPORTANT
Details on bleeding can be found in the Operating Instruc-
tions.
Operate the hydraulic product at low pressure until it
is fully bled.
Bleed the hydraulics lines to consumers or measuring
points at the highest point, if possible.
Operate the directional valves in jogging mode.
Next, advance and retract all hydraulic consumers
several times.
Increase the load slowly. Check the pressure uid
level in the pressure uid tank. If necessary, top it up
with pressure uid.
Bleeding has been accomplished fully and correctly if the pres-
sure uid in the tank does not foam, if the hydraulic consumers
do not make any jerky movements and if no abnormal noises
can be heard.
20. Set the valves and sensors and start up the machine:
Set the switching operations of valves with a
switching time adjustment/ramp in accordance with
the dynamic conditions, see Operating Instructions.
Finely adjust and optimise the setting of proportional
valves without on-board electronics (OBE).
Manufacturing tolerances mean that valves and ampliers have
to be adjusted in line with one another. Valves with in-built elec-
tronics (OBE, On Board Electronics) have the valve and ampli-
ers adjusted in line with one another at the factory.
Ampliers for valves without OBE are supplied from the fac-
tory with a basic setting. Depending on the type of valve and
amplier, you may have to ne-tune the null point and sensitivity
before bringing the valve into use.
IMPORTANT
Details on ne-tuning can be found in the Operating Instruc-
tions.
21. Check the operating temperature after the machine has
been running continuously for several hours. Too high an
operating temperature indicates that there are faults that
need to be analysed and rectied.
22. Rectify any leakages, e.g. by relieving couplings from pres-
sure and then retightening.
IMPORTANT
Apart from moisture, which should not be sufcient to form one
drop, no measurable, unintentional leakage shall be found.
23. After bringing the machine into rst use, have a sample of
the pressure uid analysed to ensure that it achieves the
required cleanliness class. Change the pressure uid if the
required cleanliness class is not achieved.
If the pressure uid is not tested in the laboratory after
bringing the machine into rst use:
Change the pressure uid.
24. Replace the pressure uid lter.
25. Document and le all set values.
DANGER
26. To ensure the safety of persons and the system, after
bringing the machine into rst use, perform the following
tests using the dened maximum values:
Function test
Pressure test.
Prepare a record of the bringing into (rst) use or accep-
tance and have it signed by the plant operator. This record
is an important document and requires to be led.
IMPORTANT
Information on how to perform the function test and pres-
sure test can be found in the Operating Instructions.
57
01
10 Operation
IMPORTANT
Please refer to the Operating Instructions for all information on
how to operate the Rexroth hydraulic product.
11 Trouble-shooting
11.1 What to do in the event of a fault
DANGER
In the event of abnormal occurrences or malfunctions, stop
all work on the Rexroth hydraulic product immediately and
inform the responsible personnel.
IMPORTANT
A table for product-specic trouble-shooting can be found in
the Operating Instructions.
If the responsible personnel are unable to rectify the problem
immediately:
Switch off the main switch. If applicable, turn off any
combustion engines used as drive motors.
Secure the main switch against being unintentionally
switched on again.
Inform the machine manufacturer.
11.2 The basic approach to trouble-shooting
The information in this section is intended to help you create
the ideal conditions for carrying out trouble-shooting as ef-
ciently as possible.
11.2.1 General conditions
Is all the necessary technical documentation to hand?
If no hydraulic circuit diagram is available:
Can a hydraulic circuit diagram be drawn using the struc-
ture, signs and labelling of the equipment?
Are there enough measuring points?
Has the customer provided useful information about how
the malfunction manifests itself and about the functional
behaviour of the system/component prior to the malfunc-
tion?
Is there a machine record book that may document similar
malfunctions in the past?
11.2.2 Recommended way of working when
trouble-shooting
Successful trouble-shooting for a hydraulic product requires
precise knowledge about the structure and method of opera-
tion of the individual components.
Where hydraulics are combined with electrics/electronics, in
particular, trouble-shooting is rendered more difcult and co-
operation between electricians and hydraulic specialists is
required.
Even if you are under time pressure, proceed systemati-
cally and methodically.
Indiscriminate, hasty dismantling and readjustments may,
in the worst case, result in the original cause of failure
being impossible to determine.
Make sure that you gain an overview of the function of the
hydraulics in respect of the overall system in which the
hydraulics are installed.
Try to nd out whether the hydraulics performed the
required function in the overall system prior to the
occurrence of the fault.
Try to determine any modications to the overall system in
which the hydraulics are installed:
Have the operating conditions or operating range of
the hydraulics been changed?
Have modications (e.g. retrotted equipment)
or repairs been carried out on the overall system
(machine/system, electrics, control system) or on the
hydraulics? If yes: What were they?
Have the set values of the hydraulics been changed?
Have the hydraulics recently undergone mainte-
nance?
Has the hydraulic product/machine been operated
improperly?
How does the malfunction manifest itself?
Form a clear picture of the cause of the fault. Ask the
machine operators directly, if necessary.
Document any work undertaken, changed set values, etc.
Document any amendments/additional information that
should be included in the Operating Instructions.
58
11.2.3 Systematic trouble-shooting procedure
Is there an inspection and maintenance book which might
provide information about the trend of test parameters
(e.g. temperature of hydraulic uid, replacement intervals
of lter elements, noises)?
Have there been any identical or similar failures in the
past?
Make a note of causes of failures with a low
probability. Only investigate the failure causes you
have noted down if all failure causes with a high
probability have been proven to be inapplicable.
Draw up a list of priorities of the most probable failure
causes.
Verify these listed failure causes one after the other
(by means of theoretical conclusions, disassembly,
measurements or tests).
Document the causes of failure you have discovered,
and note down how you discovered them.
11.3 Trouble-shooting tables
IMPORTANT
The causes of failure in hydraulic systems can be extremely
complex. Therefore, general rules for trouble-shooting can only
be laid down to a limited degree.
Please refer to the relevant Operating Instructions for product
specic information about trouble-shooting the Rexroth hydrau-
lic product.
59
01
12 Maintenance
12.1 Denitions of terms
The term Maintenance as dened in DIN 31051 encompasses
all measures to maintain and restore the desired conditions
and to determine and assess the actual condition of the techni-
cal devices of a system .
These measures are divided into the following categories:
Inspection (determining the actual condition)
Servicing (maintaining the desired condition)
Repair (restoring the desired condition).
The above measures include:
Adapting maintenance objectives to suit company objec-
tives
Determining appropriate maintenance strategies.
12.2 Safety during maintenance tasks
DANGER
In the interests of safety, please observe all the following
safety instructions carefully and at all times.
Check safety devices regularly to see that they are
working properly.
Perform all maintenance work properly, completely and
within the stipulated periods and make a record of the
work.
Inform all personnel before commencing maintenance
work.
Generously cordon off the maintenance zone before
commencing work.
Inform all persons of ongoing maintenance work by means
of the appropriate signs.
In particular, attach warning signs to the control cabinet,
main switch, actuators and points of access.
If you have to switch off the hydraulic product, secure it against
being unintentionally switched on again as follows:
Switch off all drives, disconnect the hydraulics from the
mains at the main switch.
Depressurise the hydraulic product (relieve any pressure
accumulators of pressure).
Secure the main switch against being unintentionally
switched on again.
Before undertaking any manual intervention in the Rexroth
hydraulic product:
DANGER
Please refer to the Operating Instructions for all the neces-
sary information on depressurisation and on those parts of
the Rexroth hydraulic product that are not depressurised
automatically.
Advance all cylinders to their safe end position.
Lower all loads.
Switch off all pumps.
Mechanically support vertical cylinders so that they
cannot drop. Never perform any maintenance work on
raised units without external support.
Relieve any accumulators of pressure in the proper
manner.
Switch off the pressure supply and secure the
hydraulic product against being inadvertently switched
on again.
Ensure that only authorised personnel remain in the
work zone.
Wear safety glasses, gloves and boots.
Allow pressure lines and sections of the system which
have to be opened to cool down before commencing
maintenance work.
Open with care any segments that have to remain
under pressure.
Since check valves are located in the pressure lines above the
pumps, the hydraulic system may still be under pressure even
after it has been disconnected from the actual pressure supply.
Certain segments, such as servo cylinders, also continue to
remain under pressure because the proportional valves remain
in the closed position (all valves are illustrated in their basic
position in the hydraulics diagram).
Observe the following:
Only new, interchangeable and tested components,
replacement parts and lubricants in original-equipment
quality are approved for use/replacement.
For reasons of safety, the installation of used and/or
untested components is strictly prohibited and leads to
loss of EU Conformity.
Exercise extreme vigilance when operating the hydraulic prod-
uct in maintenance mode, which may in certain circumstances
necessitate the temporary removal of certain safety devices.
60
Make sure that all safety devices are properly installed and
have undergone a function test before bringing the system
(back) into use.
Perform welding, burning or grinding work on the hydraulic
unit or its attachments only with the approval of local
safety authorities/re brigade and with suitable protective
covering to prevent ingress of contaminants.
When performing assembly work above your height, use
the steps and platforms provided by the plant operator. Do
not climb on any parts of the system.
Remove all tools and materials needed for maintenance
from the hydraulic product.
Always rectify any leakage from the hydraulic product
immediately.
Always inform personnel before (re)starting the hydraulic
product.
12.3 Inspection and servicing
The objective of inspection and servicing is
To maintain all system functions along with the initial
parameters of the system
To ensure continual availability of the system
To detect weak points
To ensure that the system attains the required service life.
IMPORTANT
The following general specications are based on use of the
hydraulic product in central Europe and under the usual operat-
ing conditions of commercial and industrial plants.
We strongly recommend the use of an inspection and servicing
book, in which all work specic to that site, and all inspection
and servicing intervals should be dened and documented.
An inspection and servicing book is also helpful in that
It provides comparison values to aid with early detection of
malfunctions
It allows warranty claims to be dealt with more easily.
CAUTION
Ensure cleanliness during all work.
Please observe the requirements for pressure uids
mentioned in Section 9 Assembly and bringing into rst
use.
Clean the external environment of couplings/joints and
devices before disassembly. Do not use cleaning wool or
cloths containing bres for cleaning.
Seal all openings using protective caps.
Bleed the hydraulic product after each item of servicing
work.
Document and le details of any work undertaken,
changed set values, etc.
Document and le details of any amendments/additional
information that should be included in the Operating
Instructions.
Modications and additions could affect the validity of the
EU Conformity Declaration/Manufacturers Declaration.
Always consult Bosch Rexroth about any proposed
modications or additions.
61
01
12.3.1 Inspection procedures and test equipment,
general
The following are some of the typical inspection and testing
procedures that are regularly used in connection with hydraulic
systems and components.
IMPORTANT
Keep the indicated typical test equipment ready for this type of
work.
Type of test Typical test
equipment
Typical
testing activities
Pressure
measure-
ment
Pressure gauge
or sensor with
suitable measuring
range and connec-
tion pipe and con-
nection coupling
Checking of
specified pressure
opening pressure
pressure difference
before and after the
object under test
Visual
inspection
Checks for
all components
securely seated
damage
wear
leakage (formation of
oil droplets)
presence of all
warning and
informative signs
Touch
inspection
Checks for
unusual local
vibrations
Temperature
inspection
Temperature
measuring
instrument
Checks for
unusual local
temperature zones
Acoustic
inspection
Checks for
changes in running
noise of the unit
changes in flow noise
changes in operating
noise in the unit and
valve control.
12.3.2 Location of testing and measuring points
IMPORTANT
Please refer to the Operating Instructions for the installation
location of lling level indicators, lling points, drainage points,
lters, testing points, strainers, solenoids, etc. that require reg-
ular inspection and servicing.
12.3.3 Inspection and servicing plan, hydraulic
products, general
The graph illustrates the concept of wear/wear margin.
The wear margin is a characteristic feature used to describe
the condition of the system for the purpose of maintenance.
100%
0
t
s
t
0
t
i1
t
i2
Z
0
1
4
2
3
6
5
1 Wear margin Z
0
2 Time t
3 Repair (corrective maintenance) time (t
i2
t
i1
)
4 Damage threshold (damage time t
S
)
5 Desired condition after corrective maintenance
6 Failure
The reduction in the wear margin reects wear. The curve rep-
resents one possible form of the wear prole during the period
of use. It is determined during inspection and varies depend-
ing, rstly, on the system itself (e.g. material selection, sur-
face treatment, quality) and secondly on external inuences
or boundary conditions such as servicing levels, corrosive cir-
culating air and dust. Thirdly, it depends on how the system
is operated; whether with partial load or partially with excess
load, whether it is subject to surge loads or steady load, etc.
Where hydraulic systems are concerned, the curve is also inu-
enced by the cleanliness class and degree of fouling of the
pressure uid, the number of cycles and the ambient condi-
tions.
62
All the factors mentioned above can exert an inuence on the
curve but this need not necessarily adversely affect the quality
of its information, as wear always signies the reduction in the
wear margin, which is understood to be the primary initial vari-
able before wear commences.
Consequently, this means that a sudden change in the wear
margin must also count as wear, and that the element of time
on its own is not of decisive importance for wear, but is of con-
siderable interest in the assessment and evaluation of such
wear.
An increase in the wear margin to over 100 % above its base-
line may be achieved through corrective maintenance, if such
measures entail an improvement and this increase is estab-
lished as the new desired condition for future corrective main-
tenance.
Certain system parts may be subject to a wear margin which
diminishes in such a way that the time available for use is insuf-
cient for the requirements of the plant or operation. In this
case, investigations must be carried out to ascertain whether
the introduction of suitable technical measures might counter
this reduction in the wear margin to a satisfactory extent. The
time and expenditure required for such measures must natu-
rally be kept in reasonable proportion to the expected degree
of success.
If such conditions arise, we refer to these parts as weak points.
Since their elimination may provide economic and safety
advantages, weak points require to be rectied immediately.
IMPORTANT
The inspection and servicing plan for your particular product
can be found in the Operating Instructions.
12.3.4 Inspection and servicing plan,
electrohydraulic systems
Electrohydraulic systems with proportional valves must be ser-
viced in accordance with hydraulic requirements and strate-
gies. However, technical control components must also be
incorporated in these servicing cycles.
On this basis, an overall strategy for system servicing must be
developed and documented.
IMPORTANT
The appropriate component characteristics relevant to servic-
ing can be found in the Operating Instructions.
12.3.5 Inspection and servicing plan: electrics and
control system
IMPORTANT
The product-specic inspection and servicing plan for electrics
and control systems can be found in the Operating Instruc-
tions.
12.3.6 Lubrication points, lubricants, intervals
IMPORTANT
The details of the specied lubricants, lubrication points and
associated lubrication cycles can be found in the Operating
Instructions.
12.3.7 Set values of valves, regulators and
signalling elements
Pressure and ow control valves, pump regulators and signal-
ling elements such as pressure sensors, pressure switches,
limit switches and temperature regulators are given their opti-
mum setting when the system is brought into rst use.
Check regularly whether all values are correctly set with the aid
of the hydraulics diagram and the documented values.
DANGER
The set values of valves with position switches shall only
be calibrated or readjusted at the factory.
The set values of safety valves shall not be altered by the
user. Any readjustment shall be performed by authorised
testing bodies only.
Too low a pressure difference between the operating pres-
sure and the opening pressure can lead to frequent opening
of safety valves. This leads to increased power losses and an
unacceptable increase in temperature of the pressure uid. In
this event, select a lower operating pressure.
63
01
12.3.8 Replacement of pressure uid lters and
ventilation lters
CAUTION
Unltered pressure uid lters lead to increased wear of
all the systems hydraulic products and can cause func-
tional failures with dangerous effects. Therefore, always
replace contaminated oil lters immediately.
Clogged ventilation lters result in inadequate cooling and
can therefore cause excessive heating up and malfunc-
tions of the hydraulic system. Therefore, always replace
contaminated ventilation lters immediately.
Clogged lters must always be replaced immediately.
Do not clean clogged lters.
Allow the contents of the replaced oil lter to drip and
fully drain.
Dispose of the lter in accordance with the applicable
regulations.
Exact instructions on how to replace a lter can be found in the
Filter manufacturers instructions for use.
12.3.9 Checking lters with a contamination indicator
Filters with contamination indicators continuously measure the
degree of fouling. The dirt-retention capacity of the lter is uti-
lized to the full.
IMPORTANT
Check the contamination indicator when the pressure uid is
warm (during or immediately after operation).
If the ambient temperature is low or the pressure uid is cold,
its high viscosity may cause clogging to be indicated, although
the pressure uid is in fact clean.
Procedure:
1. Wait until the hydraulic product has reached operating
temperature.
2. Press the indicator button (check function):
If the indicator button pops out again immediately, the lter
must be replaced by the end of the shift at the latest.
Due to the progressive loss in pressure as the lter becomes
increasingly contaminated, the indicator point has a certain
reserve capacity, i.e. generally sufcient for a work shift of 8 h.
If the lter is not replaced after 8 h, dirt may penetrate the sys-
tem, resulting in contamination of the hydraulic product.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances the contamination indicator does
not show a required lter replacement.
If the check function never indicates lter replacement and the
contamination indicator is functioning correctly, this may have
the following causes:
Faulty lter
A bypass valve may have been installed and is not closing
correctly, e.g. due to the entry of dirt particles.
12.4 Service and storage lives of hose lines
IMPORTANT
In terms of the service life of hydraulic hose lines in these
Operating Instructions, replacement and storage lives are mea-
sured from the date of manufacture of the hose line.
Even when properly stored and subjected to permissible loads,
seals, hoses and hose lines undergo a natural ageing process.
The replacement and storage lives of seals, hoses and hose
lines are therefore limited (see 8.2 Seals, hoses and hose
lines).
DANGER
Hose lines must be replaced in accordance with the provi-
sions of the servicing plan, even if there are no detectable
technical defects in the hose line.
Hoses that have already been used as part of a hose line
shall not be reused in a hose line.
The rst use may have changed the properties of the hose
material to such an extent that reuse of the hose repre-
sents a very high risk.
64
12.5 Topping up the pressure uid
IMPORTANT
Only pressure uids specied in the Operating Instructions are
to be used.
When changing or topping up the pressure uid, ll the pres-
sure uid tank on the hydraulic product as follows:
1. Fill the pressure uid tank using a special lling unit with
an integral lter (min. 10 m).
2. Drop the system pressure right down by resetting the
pump. Set the pressure setting value on the pump pres-
sure control to minimum or zero pressure.
3. Fill and bleed the line system of the hydraulic product from
the unit to the cylinder. To do this actuate the cylinder in
both directions, see Operating Instructions.
4. Top up the pressure uid volume to the specied quantity.
5. Raise the pump pressure to the system pressure.
The hydraulic product is ready for operation.
6. Carry out a test run.
7. Check the level of the uid after the hydraulic product has
warmed up to the operating temperature and adjust if nec-
essary.
IMPORTANT
Check the contamination indicator when the pressure uid is
warm (during or immediately after operation).
If the ambient temperature is low or the pressure uid is cold,
its high viscosity may cause clogging to be apparently indi-
cated.
12.6 Servicing pressure accumulators
DANGER
Pressure accumulators are subject to the national legisla-
tion on safety requirements for pressure vessels applica-
ble in the place of installation.
Observe the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
IMPORTANT
The gas precharge pressure is measured with a testing and ll-
ing device.
Details of the procedure can be found in the Operating Instruc-
tions.
Inspection and servicing
Carry out the tests required by law.
Test and monitor the gas precharge pressure regularly.
12.7 Repair
IMPORTANT
Repair (corrective maintenance) is the restoring of the desired
condition.
In addition, observe the special safety instructions in
12 Maintenance and the safety instructions in the Operating
Instructions.
DANGER
Ensure cleanliness during all work.
Clean the external environment of couplings/joints and
devices before disassembly. Do not use cleaning wool or
cloths containing bres for cleaning.
Seal all openings using protective caps.
Bleed the hydraulic product after each item of repair work.
If appropriate, follow the procedure for bringing into rst
use, see 9.3 Bringing into rst use, subsequent bringing
into use.
Document any amendments/additional information that
should be included in the Operating Instructions.
65
01
12.7.1 General safety instructions for repair work
DANGER
Repair work shall only be done by an authorised hydraulics
expert who has the required specialist hydraulics knowl-
edge.
Specialist hydraulics knowledge means, among other things,
that the person can read and fully understand hydraulics draw-
ings. In particular, he must fully comprehend the range of func-
tions of the integrated safety components.
Components may only be dismantled for the purpose of repair
to the extent described in the Operating Instructions.
Never repair a defective safety valve. It must be completely
replaced.
Faulty parts may only be replaced by new, interchangeable,
tested components in original-equipment quality. Any devia-
tions from this can be found in the Operating Instructions.
Before each subsequent bringing into use after repair work, the
hydraulic product shall be accepted by a hydraulics expert.
The operator of the hydraulic product is required to check by
means of a servicing record that the inspection and servicing
plan as been complied with.
Pressure vessels have to be pressure tested every 10 years
and the information recorded in accordance with the Pressure
Equipment Directive 97/23/EC or its implementation in national
legislation.
13 General information about
hydraulic pressure accumulators
13.1 General
The regulations applicable at the place of installation concern-
ing hydraulic pressure accumulators (hydrostatic accumula-
tors) must be observed before bringing into use and during
operation.
The plant operator bears sole responsibility for compliance with
the existing regulations.
Hydrostatic accumulators are subject to the national implemen-
tation of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
Documents supplied with accumulators must be preserved
with care; they will be required during recurring inspections by
specialists.
The bringing into use of hydrostatic accumulators shall be car-
ried out by trained expert personnel only.
WARNING
Do not perform any welding, soldering or mechanical work
on accumulator vessels.
Welding and soldering carry a risk of explosion!
Mechanical tampering may cause the vessel to burst and
the operating permit will be withdrawn.
Do not charge hydrostatic accumulators with oxygen or air.
Risk of explosion!
Depressurise the system before working on hydraulic
installations.
Improper installation can lead to serious damage to per-
sons and property.
13.2 Safety devices relating to
hydraulic pressure accumulators
The equipping, installation and operation of hydrostatic accu-
mulators is regulated by the national implementation of the EU
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC and additionally in the
Federal Republic of Germany by the Technical Regulations for
Pressure Vessels (TRB). This legislation requires the following
safety equipment:
Device to protect against excessive pressure
(prototype-tested)
Pressure relief device
Pressure measuring device
Test gauge connection
Shut-off device
Optional: electromagnetically operated pressure relief
device
Safety device to protect against overheating.
IMPORTANT
See the Operating Instructions.
66
14 Hydraulic systems
Hydraulic systems are generally intended for installation in
machines or systems. In addition to the basic information about
the installed components, the information contained in the
Operating Instructions made available for each hydraulic sys-
tem by Bosch Rexroth also applies to hydraulic systems.
By installing the hydraulic system in a machine or system, the
interaction of the hydraulic system with the overall machine
may give rise to changes in the potential dangers. In particular
the effect of hydraulic and electrical control of hydraulic drives
that create mechanical movement are to be considered.
This information shall be included in the hazard analysis/risk
assessment of the overall machine carried out by its supplier
and in the Operating Instructions of the overall machine. This
also applies to the specication of the interfaces between the
hydraulic system and the overall machine.
Hydraulic systems are subject to legislation including the Pres-
sure Equipment Directive and other relevant EU directives that
have been implemented in national legislation. Exact informa-
tion can be found in the EU Conformity Declaration or Manu-
facturers Declaration that is supplied with the hydraulic system
or the hydraulic product.
WARNING
Before installing a hydraulic system in a machine or mod-
ifying an existing hydraulic system in a machine, satisfy
yourself that
the hydraulic system is suitable for its application in the
machine
the ambient conditions in the machine are suitable and/or
permissible for the use of the hydraulic system
other installed items on or in the machine cannot disturb
or endanger the functioning or the safe operation of the
hydraulic system.
If the overall machine is to be used in a potentially explosive
atmosphere, then it must be ensured that the hydraulic system
has been designed and is suitable for this use.
14.1 Effects of leaks in the hydraulic system
on the machine
If pressure uid escapes from the hydraulic system and comes
into contact with hot surfaces on the machine, this can lead to
the generation of life-threatening smoke, re and/or other dan-
gerous operating conditions.
These risks shall be determined by the machine manufacturer
by means of a hazard analysis and if necessary provision made
for the appropriate safety devices.
67
01
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengiesser 1
Tel. + 49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Fax + 49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
All rights reserved, Bosch Rexroth AG, including applications for intellec-
tual property rights. We reserve all power of disposal, rights of reproduction
and issue.
The data specied above only serve to describe the product.
No statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
application can be derived from our information. The given information does
not release the user from the obligation of own judgement and verication. It
wear and aging.
DE Bestellinformation fr deutsche Produktinformation: RD 07008
EN Ordering Information for Product Information in English: RE 07008
FR Information de commande pour la notice franaise Informations gnrales sur les produits : RF 07008
IT Informazioni dordine per le informazioni tedesche sul prodotto: RI 07008
ES Informacin para el pedido de la informacin del producto en espaol: RS 07008
FI Tilaustiedot - suomenkieliset tuotetiedot: RSF 07008
NL Bestelinformatie voor Nederlandse productinformatie: RNL 07008
SV Bestllningsnummer fr svensk produktinformation: RSK 07008
PT Informao dos dados de encomenda para informao de produto alem: RP 07008
DA Bestillingsinformationer vedr. dansk produktinformation: RDK 07008
EL : RGR 07008
http://www.boschrexroth.com/bri-products
Datenblatt-Suche/Datasheet search
Suche nach Datenblatt/Search by datasheet
07008
68
1/2 RE 07 300/12.02
2003
by Bosch Rexroth AG, Industrial Hydraulics, D-97813 Lohr am Main
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or stored, processed, duplicated or circulated using
electronic systems, in any form or by any means, without the prior written authorisation of Bosch Rexroth AG.
In the event of contravention of the above provisions, the contravening party is obliged to pay compensation.
This document was prepared with the greatest of care, and all statements have been examined for correctness.
This document is subject to alterations for reason of the continuing further developments of products.
No liability can be accepted for any incorrect or incomplete statements.
RE 07 300/12.02
Replaces: 02.01
Installation, commissioning and
maintenance of industrial valves
1. General
Before commissioning industrial valves, observe the notes in the
following data sheets:
Related data sheet
German standard DIN 24 346
ISO standard ISO 4413
2. System flushing
With external pilot oil supply, ensure that this connection is also
flushed.
The hydraulic fluid volume contained in the system should be flushed
through the filter at least 150 to 300 times.
As a rule, the recommended flushing time can be calculated as
follows:
V
t = x 2.5 to 5
q
V
Where:
t = flushing time in hours
V = tank capacity in litres
q
V
= pump flow in l/min
A decisive factor for the flushing time is the degree of contamina-
tion of the hydraulic fluid according to section 4.3. To achieve the
required minimum cleanliness the hydraulic system must be flushed
sufficiently long. This can be ensured only through continuous
monitoring using a particle counter.
If the hydraulic fluid is changed over to special fluids that are not
compatible or miscible with the hydraulic fluids used before, con-
siderably longer flushing times may be required.
During the flushing process, all filters must be checked at short
intervals and the filter elements replaced as required.
3. Installation
3.1 Rules for the installation
Before installing the valve on the system, compare the type desig-
nation of the valve with the order data.
Make sure that the connection surfaces of the valve and the
subplate are dry and free from oil.
Cleanliness:
When installing the component, make sure that the industrial
valve and the surroundings are clean
The tank must be sealed against external contamination
Pipes and tank must be freed from contamination, scale, sand,
chips, etc. prior to the installation.
Warm-bent or welded pipes must be pickled, flushed and oiled.
For cleaning use only lint-free cloth or special paper.
Sealing materials such as hemp, putty or sealing tape are not
permitted.
For pipework use seamless precision steel pipes to DIN 2391/
parts 1 and 2.
The mounting face must feature a surface quality of
R
t max
4 m and a flatness of 0.01 mm/100 mm length.
Fixing screws must comply with the dimensions and the strength
class specified in the data sheet and must be tightened at the
specified tightening torque.
As filler/breather filter we recommend a filter with the same
mesh width as the filter in the hydraulic system!
3.2 Valve installation
When installing the valve, make sure that the mounting face and
the subplates are dry and free from oil. If the presence of oil on the
connecting faces cannot be avoided, the fixing screws must be
tightened manually, not with the aid of power tools. In the case of
more than 4 fixing screws, care should be taken that the central
screws are tightened first.
This measure ensures that the seal rings seal properly against the
valve connection face.
69
01
RE 07 300/12.02 2/2
Bosch Rexroth AG
D-97813 Lohr am Main
Zum Eisengieer 1 D-97816 Lohr am Main
Telefon 0 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax 0 93 52 / 18-23 58 Telex 6 89 418-0
The data specified above only serve to describe
the product. No statements concerning a
certain condition or suitability for a cetain
application can be derived from our
information. It must be remembered that our
products are subject to a natural process of
wear and ageing.
Bosch Rexroth Limited
Cromwell Road, St Neots,
Cambs, PE19 2ES
Tel: 0 14 80/22 32 56
Fax: 0 14 80/21 90 52
E-mail: info@rexroth.co.uk
3.3 Installation position
Optional, preferably horizontal for directional valves!
For valve versions such as, for example,
without spring centring of the spool
or with solenoids hanging downwards,
other installation positions can lead to malfunction or restrictions
with regard to the specified technical data.
In the case of pressure switches with drain port the installation
position must be selected so that the max. permissible pressure of
2 bar is not exceeded.
3.4 Electrical connection
For circuit examples and pin assignments, see the relevant data
sheet.
4. Commissioning
4.1 Hydraulic fluid
Observe the recommendations given in the data sheet!
Observe pressure and temperature ranges!
In general, the following fluids can be used:
Mineral oil (HL; HLP) to DIN 51 524
1)
Fast bio-degradable fluids to VDMA 24 568
(see also RE 90 221)
HETG (rape seed oil)
1)
HEPG (polyglycols)
2)
HEES (synthetic esters)
2)
(other hydraulic fluids on enquiry)
The maximum temperatures recommended by the fluid sup-
plier should not be exceeded. To ensure constant response char-
acteristics it is recommended that the hydraulic fluid tempera-
ture be kept constant ( 5 C).
4.2 Is the sealing material used suitable?
For hydraulic fluids (e.g. HEPG and HEES) and in the case of
temperatures > 80 C FKM seals must be used (identified with
V in the type code).
4.3 Filtration
Reliable filtration prolongs the service life of valves.
Please also observe the recommendations with regard to the
max. permissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic fluid
according to NAS 1638 in our data sheet.
The max. permissible differential pressure across the filter ele-
ment must not be exceeded.
We recommend the use of filters with clogging indicator.
Observe strict cleanliness when changing the filter.
Contamination on the outlet side of the filter is flushed into
the system and causes malfunction.
Contamination on the inlet side reduces the useful life of the
filter element.
4.4 Bleeding
Bleeding of the valves is not necessary!
However, to ensure proper operation of the valves, draining
of the tank line must be avoided (installation of a precharge
valve).
5. Maintenance
5.1 The valves are basically maintenance-free; since seals are sub-
ject to natural wear and aging, they must be replaced as re-
quired.
6. Storage
Storage requirements:
Dry, dust-free room, free of corrosive substances and vapours
When storing for periods of more than 6 months:
Fill the valve with preserving oils and seal it.
1)
Suitable for NBR and FKM seals
2)
Suitable for FKM seals only
70
1/2 RE 07 700/12.02
2003
electronic systems, in any form or by means, without the prior written authorisation of Bosch Rexroth AG. In the event
of contravention of the above provisions, the contravening party is obliged to pay compensation.
RE 07 700/12.02
Ersetzt: 02.01
Installation, Commissioning and Maintenance
of Electro-hydraulic Servo and High-response Control Valves
1. General
Before commissioning servo valves, the guidelines stated within
the following data sheets have to be taken into account:
Relevant catalogue sheet
The German standard DIN 24 346
ISO standard 4413
Note:
Each servo valve is subjected to functional tests prior to
delivery. This functional test is documented in test reports,
which can be ordered when a valve is purchased.
Commissioning must be carried out by specialist personnel
using the relevant calibration equipment.
Depending on the size and the requirements of an installation,
the customer's operating personnel may carry out the
commissioning (provided that they have a sufficient experience
with hydraulics or have completed a corresponding training
course).
2. Flushing of the system
The system must be flushed without the servo valves being
fitted. Instead of the servo valves use either flushing plates or, if
the system allows, directional valves of the same size (symbol G
or H), thus, allowing also the service lines and the actuator to
be flushed. With an external pilot oil supply make sure that this
line is also flushed.
In order to obtain the required minimum cleanliness the
hydraulic system must be flushed for a sufficiently long time.
The oil volume in the system should be flushed through the
filter at least 150 to 300 times. As a rough guide, the flushing
time may be calculated as follows:
V
t x 2.5 to 5
q
V
With:
q
V
= pump flow in L/min
A decisive factor for the flushing time is the degree of
contamination of the hydraulic fluid according to paragraph
6.2., which can only be determined by continuous monitoring
by means of a particle counter.
When changing over to special fluids, which are not compatible
or cannot be mixed with the hydraulic fluids used so far, the
required flushing time may be considerably longer.
During the flushing procedure, check all the filters at short
intervals and, if required, replace the filter elements.
3. Rules for correct installation
3.1. Cleanliness
When installing or removing valves, take care that the
immediate area is clean.
The tank must be fitted with a filler breather to prevent
external contamination from entering the tank and to permit
the fluid level to vary according to system requirements. For
servo systems a pore size of 5 m is recommended.
Piping and reservoir must be cleaned of dirt, scale, swarf, etc.
before being installed into the system.
Hot-bent or welded pipes must then be pickled, flushed and
oiled.
Use only lint-free cloth or special paper for cleaning.
3.2 Valve assembly
When assembling the valve care is to be taken, to ensure that
the valve and subplate mounting surfaces are dry and free of
oil. If it is not possible to carry out the assembly without oil
being present then the fixing screws must be tightened
manually, not with the aid of power tools. If there are more
than four fixing screws then care should be taken to ensure that
the centre screws are tightened first.
By adhering to these procedures it is ensured that the seal rings
correctly seal against the valve connection surface..
3.3. Sealing materials such as hemp, putty or sealing tape are not
permissible.
3.4. Hoses, especially for the connection to the actuator, should be
avoided wherever possible.
3.5. The connecting lines to the actuator should be kept as short
as possible. We recommend that the servo valve is mounted
directly onto the actuator. The required finish of the mounting
face is as follows:
71
01
RE 07 700/12.02 2/2
Bosch Rexroth AG
Telefon 0 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax 0 93 52 / 18-23 58 Telex 6 89 418-0
The data specified above only serves to describe
the product. No statements concerning a certain
condition or suitability for a certain application
can be derived from our information.
The details stated do not release you from the
responsibility for carrying out your own
assessment and verification. It must be
remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and ageing.
Cambs, PE19 2ES
Tel: 0 14 80/22 32 56
Fax: 0 14 80/21 90 52
eMail: info@boschrexroth.co.uk
0,006/100 mm
R
max
4
3.7. Before installing the valve, compare the nameplate of the
valve with the ordering data.
3.8. Install the servo valves after completion of the flushing
procedure and observe strictest cleanliness.
Remove the protective cover from the servo valve only
immediately prior to the installation of the valve and keep it
safe for possible maintenance work (paragraph 7.3) in the
future.
3.9. Tighten the fixing screws to the torque specified in the data
sheet.
3.10.All hydraulic functions must first be tested at low pressures
under controlled conditions.
To facilitate commissioning and trouble-shooting, battery or
mains powered control units are available for the servo
valves.
4. Installation position
A horizontal position is preferred, but the possible spool
position in relation to the type of feedback being used must be
taken into account.
If the servo valve is mounted directly onto an actuator, a
position in which the valve spool is in parallel to the actuator's
direction of acceleration should be avoided.
5. Electrical connection
For the electrical connection, please refer to the relevant data
sheet. The servo valve can be operated in parallel or series
circuits. For reasons of operational safety and to reduce the coil
inductivity we recommend that a parallel circuit is used.
Special types of electrical insulation require special measures
to be taken to ensure the safe operation of the system.
6. Commissioning
6.1. Hydraulic fluid
The preferred fluid is mineral oil to DIN 51 524. Other hydraulic
fluids on enquiry. In order to protect the hydraulic fluid the
manufacturer's recommendations concerning maximum
temperatures should be observed. In order to obtain constant
response characteristics from the system, it is recommended
that the fluid temperature should be held constant ( 5 C).
3.6. Pipes should be seamless precision pipes to DIN 2391/C in
order to ensure the required pressure resistance.
6.2. Filtration
Install a filter with high pressure differential without by-pass,
if possible with a clogging indicator, immediately before the
servo valve (possibly a sandwich plate filter).
Permissible maximum degree of contamination of the
hydraulic fluid for internally pilot operated valves: Class 7 to
NAS 1638.
For externally pilot operated valves, the permissible maximum
degree of contamination in the X-line is: Class 7 to
NAS 1638; in the P-line: Class 9 to NAS 1638.
When changing the filter observe absolute cleanliness:
Contamination on the inlet side reduces the service life of
the filter elements.
Contamination on the outlet side of the filter will be flushed
into the system and eventually cause the system to
completely break down.
6.3. As part of the final inspection in the factory, the hydraulic
zero point of every valve is adjusted. However, in order to
obtain an optimum control quality for the specific
application, it may be necessary to re-adjust the hydraulic
zero point either on the valve or in the closed loop control
electronics.
7. Maintenance
7.1. If the tank volume is topped up by more than 10 % or if an
oil change is carried out, the system must again be flushed
according to paragraph 2.
7.2. Contamination in the flapper jet system is caused by
insufficient system filtration of the hydraulic fluid.
Without special knowledge of servo valves, servicing is
limited to changing the protective filter inside the valve and
to re-adjusting the valve zero point.
7.3. Return of valves for repair
When returning a defective servo valve, it is necessary to fix a
clean protective plate (see paragraph 3.7) to the base of the
valve. Careful packaging is advisable in order to prevent any
damage during transportation.
7.4. Storage
When storing servo valves for periods longer than 6 months,
they should be filled with a clean preservative oil.
Storage rooms must meet the following requirements: dry,
dust-free, low humidity, free of corrosive materials and
vapours, and no wide temperature fluctuations.
72
1/4
Installation, commissioning and
maintenance of proportional valves
RE 07800/07.05
Replaces: 12.02
1. General
Before commissioning proportional valves, observe the
notes in the following data sheets:
Associated data sheet
German standard DIN 24346
2. System flushing
With external pilot oil supply, it must be ensured that this
port is also flushed.
The hydraulic fluid volume contained in the system should
be flushed at least 150 to 300 times through the filter.
This results in the following flushing time guideline:
Where:
q
V
= pump flow in l/min
V
t x 2.5 to 5
q
v
The decisive factor for the flushing time is the degree of
contamination of the hydraulic fluid according to section
4.3. The hydraulic system must be flushed until the re-
quired minimum cleanliness is achieved. This is only pos-
sible with permanent monitoring with the help of a parti-
cle counter.
When changing over to special fluids, which are not com-
patible or miscible with the hydraulic fluid used so far,
considerably longer flushing times may be required.
During flushing, check all filters at short intervals and
change the filter elements as required.
Continued on page 2
73
01
2/4 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics
Installation, commissioning and maintenance RE 07800/07.05
3. Installation
3.1 Rules for the installation
Before installing the valve in the system, compare the
type designation of the valve with the ordering data.
Cleanliness:
Ensure cleanliness of both, the surroundings and
the proportional valve when installing the compo-
nent
The tank must be sealed against external contami-
nation
Clean pipes and tanks from dirt, scale, sand, chips,
etc. before installing the valve
Hot-bent or welded pipes must be pickled, flushed
and oiled
Use only lint-free cloth or special paper for cleaning
Sealing materials such as hemp, putty or sealing tape
are not permitted.
In the interest of obtaining high stiffness, hoses
between valves and the actuators should be avoided.
Use seamless precision steel pipes to DIN 2391/
parts 1 and 2 for the pipework.
The connecting pipes between the actuator and the
valve should be as short as possible; we recommend
the installation of the hydraulic valve as close as pos-
sible to the actuator. The mounting face must feature
a surface quality of R
t max
4 m and a flatness of
0.01 mm/100 mm length.
Fixing screws must be of the dimensions and
strength class specified in the data sheet and be
tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
As a filler/breather filter we recommend a filter with
the same mesh width as the filters used in the hy-
draulic system!
3.2. Valve mounting
When mounting the valve, take care that the base of
the valve and the subplates are dry and free from oil.
If mounting without the presence of oil is impossible,
the fixing screws must generally be tightened manually
and not with the aid of power tools. In the case of more
than 4 fixing screws, care should be taken to tighten
the central screws first.
This ensures that the seal rings seal correctly on the
valve mounting face.
3.3. Installation orientation
Preferably horizontal; however, if the proportional valve
is to be mounted onto an actuator, see to it that the
valve spool is not arranged in parallel to the direction of
acceleration of the actuator.
3.4. Electrical connection
For the electrical connection, please refer to the rel-
evant data sheet.
Special types of protection require special measures
that are described in the relevant data sheet.
4. Commissioning
4.1. Hydraulic fluid
Observe the recommendations given in the data sheet!
Observe pressure and temperature ranges!
In general, the following fluids can be used:
Mineral oil to DIN 51524 (HL; HLP)
1)
Fast bio-degradable hydraulic fluids to VDMA 24568
(see also RE 90221)
HETG (rape seed oils)
1)
HEPG (polyglycols)
2)
HEES (synthetic esters)
2)
Other hydraulic fluids on enquiry!
1)
2)
Suitable only for FKM seals
Whenever possible, the maximum temperatures recom-
mended by the manufacturer should not be exceeded
in order to the spare the hydraulic fluid. To ensure sta-
ble response characteristics of the system, it is recom-
mended that the hydraulic fluid temperature be kept
constant ( 5 C).
4.2. Are the seal materials used compatible?
For hydraulic fluids (e.g. HEPG and HEES) and in the
case of tem pe ra tu res > 80 C FKM seals must be
used (identified with V in the type code).
4.3. Filtration
Reliable supply filtration (10 m absolute) prolongs
the service life of the pilot control.
Please take also note of the recommendations for
the max. permissible degree of contamination of the
hydraulic fluid to ISO 4406 (c) in our data sheet.
The permissible maximum differential pressure across
the filter element must not be exceeded.
We recommend filters with clogging indicators.
Observe strictest cleanliness when changing filters.
Contamination on the outlet side of the filters is
flushed into the system and cause malfunction.
Contamination on the inlet side reduces the service
life of the filter element.
4.4. Operating pressure for the pilot valve
For pilot operated proportional directional valve type
WRZ:
The pilot pressure must not be less than 30 bar. If
the pilot pressure exceeds 100 bar, a sandwich plate
pressure reducing valve must be installed in the sup-
ply line. Pressure surges from the tank line can be
avoided with the help of a check valve.
For other pilot operated proportional directional
valves:
The pilot pressure for other proportional directional
valves can be found in our data sheet.
74
Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 07800/07.05 Installation, commissioning and maintenance 3/4
4.5 Solenoid bleeding
To ensure proper functioning, the valve must be bled at
the highest point during commissioning. Depending on
the installation situation, draining of the tank line must
be prevented by installing a preload valve.
5. Maintenance
5.1. Return of the valve for repair purposes
When returning a defective valve, the base of the valve
must be protected against contamination.
Careful packaging is recommended to prevent any fur-
ther damage in transit.
6. Storage
Requirements for the storage room:
Dry, dust-free room, free from etching agents and
vapours
For storage periods longer than 3 months:
Fill the housing with preservative oil and close the
valve
75
01
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengieer 1
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
This document, as well as the data, specifications and other information
set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not
be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain application
can be derived from our information. The information given does not
release the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It
wear and aging.
4/4 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics Installation, commissioning and maintenance RE 07800/07.05
Notes
76
1/28
RE 07100-B/10.04
Replaces: 12.96
Hydraulic cylinders
Tie rod design / mill type design
Operating instructions
H20615
77
01
2/28 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Operating instructions for hydraulic cylinders
Table of contents
1 Product-specific information 5
1.1 General information 5
1.2 Type and scope of documentation 5
1.3 Operating and ambient conditions 5
1.3.1 Climate 6
1.3.2 Ambient temperature 6
1.3.3 Hydraulic fluid 6
1.3.4 Risk potential 6
1.3.4.1 Water-endangering substances 6
1.3.4.2 Potentially explosive atmosphere 6
1.4 Impermissible use 7
1.5 Residual risks of the hydraulic system 7
2 General information 7
2.1 Scope 7
2.2 Liability 7
2.3 Qualification of personnel 7
2.3.1 Personnel for maintenance and inspection 7
2.3.2 Personnel for commissioning, repair and decommissioning 8
2.4 Fundamental safety notes 8
2.5 Responsibilities and duties of the machine manufacturer/
operator 8
2.6 Conventions 9
3 Transport and storage 9
3.1 Transport 9
3.1.1 Transport using a forklift truck 9
3.1.2 Transport using lifting gear 9
3.2 Storage 10
3.2.1 Corrosion protection provided in the factory 10
3.2.2 Execution of internal preservation 10
3.2.3 Notes on external preservation 11
3.2.5 Notes on packed hydraulic cylinders 11
4 Description of hydraulic cylinders 11
4.1 Technical data 11
4.2 General description of hydraulic cylinders 12
4.2.1 Piston rod 12
4.2.2 Piston 12
4.2.3 Cylinder head 13
4.2.4 Cylinder barrel 13
4.2.5 Cylinder cap 13
4.2.6 Mounting elements 13
4.2.7 Seals 14
4.2.8 Guide 14
4.2.9 End position cushioning 14
4.2.10 Proximity switches 15
4.2.11 Position measuring systems 15
78
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 07100-B/10.04 3/28
5 Commissioning 15
5.1 General notes 15
5.1.1 Safety 15
5.1.2 Qualification of personnel 16
5.1.3 Cleanliness 16
5.1.4 Painting 16
5.2 Commissioning of function-tested hydraulic cylinders 16
5.2.1 Installation of hydraulic cylinders 16
5.2.1.1 Visual inspection for shipping damage and contamination 16
5.2.1.2 Installation of hydraulic cylinders and assemblies 16
5.2.1.3 Connection of hydraulic drives 17
5.2.2 Before commissioning 17
5.2.3 Commissioning of a system 17
5.2.4 Flushing of a system 17
5.3 Hydraulic fluid 19
6 Maintenance 19
6.1 Maintenance and inspection 19
6.1.1 General notes 19
6.1.1.1 Qualification of personnel 19
6.1.1.2 Safety 19
6.1.1.3 Inspection documentation 20
6.2 Regular maintenance of hydraulic cylinders 20
6.3 Maintenance of the piston rod 20
6.4 Repairs 21
6.4.1 General notes 21
6.4.1.1 Qualification of personnel 21
6.4.1.2 Safety 21
6.4.1.3 Cleanliness 21
6.4.2 Maintenance tasks 21
6.4.2.1 Troubleshooting 21
6.4.2.2 Elimination of faults 22
6.4.2.3 Function testing and acceptance 22
6.4.3 Removal of complete hydraulic cylinders 22
6.5 Before starting work 23
6.6 Draining of hydraulic fluid 23
6.7 Disassembly of the hydraulic cylinder 23
6.8 General assembly instructions 24
6.8.1 Fitting of bolts (also applicable to
tie rods on tie rod cylinders) 24
6.8.2 Securing using Loctite 243 25
6.8.3 Mounting of guide strips 25
6.8.4 Installation of piston rod seals 25
6.8.5 Installation of piston seals 26
6.8.6 Installation of piston seals using expanding and calibrating
sleeves 27
6.9 Assembly of hydraulic cylinders 27
6.10 Required tools / required auxiliary material 27
79
01
7 Decommissioning 28
7.1 Decommissioning, storage and recommissioning 28
7.2 Decommissioning and disposal 28
80
1 Product-specific information
1.1 General information
Hydraulic cylinders are manufactured in accordance with Directive 89/37/EC (EC MCD) in the valid issue
and associated technical regulations.
According to EC MCD and EN 982 this hydraulic cylinder is a component that is not ready for use and
intended exclusively for integration into a machine or system.
According to the Pressure Equipment Directive hydraulic cylinders are not classified as pressure equip-
ment, but as hydraulic actuators, since it is not the pressure that is the essential design factor, but strength,
inherent stability and stability against static and dynamic operating stresses.
These operating instructions are intended to provide information and avoid risks when
hydraulic cylinders are being installed in the machine and to provide information and
notes on the transport, storage and maintenance of hydraulic cylinders.
Only when these operating instructions are strictly observed can damage to property be avoided
and trouble-free operation of the hydraulic cylinders ensured.
Moreover, observing the operating instructions results in the following:
Reduced downtimes and repair cost,
increased service life of the hydraulic cylinders.
Warning
These operating instructions are not a substitute for the operating instructions of the
complete machine.
The installation of hydraulic cylinders in a machine results in changes in the risk potentials due to the in-
teractions between the hydraulic cylinders and the complete machine. In particular the influence of hydrau-
lic and electrical controls on hydraulic drives that generate mechanical movements results in the necessity
of a risk analysis and operating instructions for the complete machine.
If the cylinder is to be installed in a hydraulic system that is provided by BR, observe
operating instructions AB01-01.02 : 2003-02-24.
Definitions:
Maximum operating pressure The highest pressure at which the system or parts of the system may be
operated under uniform (steady-state) conditions.
Drive The hydraulic cylinder is used for converting the energy of the hydraulic me-
dium into mechanical energy.
Mounting elements Components that are used for mounting hydraulic cylinders in the machine
or system are standardised in accordance with DIN/ISO or determined in
factory standards with regard to their dimensions. They are not necessarily
fatigue endurable (107 load cycles).
For the type of mounting , all load cases must be taken into account.
Remark:
The pressures specified for hydraulic cylinders may refer solely to the load
carrying capacity of the pressurised barrel, but not to the mounting element.
In this context, consult the manufacturer or supplier of the hydraulic cylinders.
(Excerpt from: E DIN ISO 4413: 1999-10/ 6.2.1.3)
1.2 Type and scope of documentation
The documentation includes the current catalogue documentation and spare parts lists. A product-specific
documentation will be created in accordance with the agreements laid down in the contract documents.

1.3 Operating and ambient conditions
Unless other technical data are agreed in the contract, the data specified in the valid catalogue documen-
tation or the following conditions are valid.
81
01
1.3.1 Climate
Temperate climatic zones; in rooms, the relative humidity of air should be < 70 % at 22 C room tempera-
ture.
1.3.2 Ambient temperature
Care must be taken to ensure that the hydraulic cylinder is stored and operated within the permissible
temperature range. For the permissible temperature range, see the catalogue documentation and/or instal-
lation drawings.
1.3.3 Hydraulic fluid
Hydraulic oil based on mineral oil in accordance with DIN 51524 part 2 (other hydraulic fluids on enquiry).
Temperature Recommended for continuous operation +25 ... +55 C
min./max. permitted 0 ... +80 C
Viscosity Recommended for continuous operation 20 ... 100 mm
2
/s
max. permitted 12 ... 500 mm
2
/s
Contamination The permissible contamination (undissolved foreign particles in the hydraulic fluid)
depends on the component of the hydraulic system that is most susceptible to
contamination. The specified cleanliness class is the max. permissible value that
should not be exceeded in view of operational reliability (clogging of gaps, orifices
as well as seizing of control spools) and service life (wear reduction) (see Filter
concept AB 01-02.35).
Required cleanliness classes in accordance with:
ISO 4406 CL. 21/18/15 Hydraulic cylinders with pressurised seals
ISO 4406 CL. 19/16/13 Servo-cylinders with hydrostatic plain gap pocket
bearings
1.3.4 Risk potentials
1.3.4.1 Water-endangering substances
The operation with water-endangering substances results in a hazard to waters.
According to the Water Resources Act (WHG) and the Ordinance on systems for handling water-en-
dangering substances (VAwS) the following is valid in Germany:
Hydraulic systems fall under the category of HBV systems (systems for the production, treatment and
utilisation of fluids).
According to 19 h section 1 S.1 No. 2.b WHG, section. 2, the suitability needs not to be established
for systems and no design approval is required, if the water-endangering substance is used in the oper-
ating cycle. This is valid for hydraulic systems.
Unless specified otherwise, hydraulic systems are intended for use with mineral oil according to
DIN 51524 part 2. These mineral oils are usually classified in water-endangering class 2.
19 I of the Water Resources Act (WHG) stipulates for systems, in which water-endangering sub-
stances are used, that these may only be installed, erected, serviced and cleaned by specialist compa-
nies. Bosch Rexroth AG, Lohr am Main, is a member of the Fachbetriebsgemeinschaft Maschinenbau
e.V. (Association of specialist companies of the machinery construction sector) and therefore a special-
ist company in accordance with 19 i WHG.
For further information, see AB 01-02.15
1.3.4.2 Potentially explosive atmosphere
Rexroth hydraulic cylinders may only be used in potentially explosive atmospheres, if they are designed for
this purpose and this is expressly documented in the product-specific documentation.
Note:
Directive 94/9/EC (also referred to as ATEX 100), sets out the use of equipment and protective systems in
potentially explosive atmospheres.
82
1.4 Impermissible use
The operation of hydraulic cylinders is not permitted
Warning
at operating pressures higher than those specified in the catalogue documentation or installation
drawings
with fluids that do not comply with the specifications
under different operating and environmental conditions.

1.5 Residual risks of the hydraulic system
Residual risks of the hydraulic system are described in operating instructions AB 01-01.02 : 2003-02-24
section 1.6.
Warning
The required protective measures and the residual risks that are relevant to the user can
be derived from the risk assessment of the complete machine.
2 General information
2.1 Scope
These operating instructions are valid for hydraulic cylinders manufactured by Bosch Rexroth AG, Business
Unit Industrial Hydraulics, Product Division Hydraulic Cylinders.
2.2 Liability
In the case of damage that results from wrongful use and unauthorised interventions, which are not re-
ferred to in these operating instructions, any claims in conjunction with quality defects and liability claims
towards Bosch Rexroth AG become void.
For details with regard to claims for quality defects, please refer to your contract documents.
2.3 Qualification of personnel
Specialised knowledge in the field of hydraulics means that personnel must
be able to read and completely understand the technical specifications such as circuit diagrams and
product-specific drawings,
have knowledge of the function and structure of hydraulic components.
A skilled person is, who, due to his or her professional training and experience, has gained sufficient
knowledge and is familiar with relevant regulations to the extent that he or she
can assess the work assigned to him or her
can recognise possible hazards,
can take the required measures for averting hazards,
has the required knowledge in the field of repair, assembly and installation.
2.3.1 Personnel for maintenance and inspection
The following requirements must be met:
Instructed specialist personnel,
sufficient specialised knowledge of hydraulics

Caution
Filter and oil changes are an integral part of repair activities.
83
01
2.3.2 Personnel for commissioning (chapter 5.2), repair (chapter 6.4) and
decommissioning (chapter 7)
The following requirements must be met:
Instructed specialist personnel,
sufficient specialised knowledge of hydraulics
Danger
Improper working results in the risk of injury as well as safety risks in the operation of the
system, including danger to life.
2.4 Fundamental safety notes
Observe the fundamental safety notes in the operating instructions for hydraulic systems
AB-01-01.02 : 2003-02-24 section. 2.4.
2.5 Responsibilities and duties of the machine manufacturer/operator
The operating instructions do not include in-house operating instructions that are to be created
by the operator/entrepreneur and refer to the correct behaviour in the company to prevent risks
of accident and danger to health and the environment.
Bosch Rexroth AG points out that the scope of supply is exclusively intended for integration into
a machine or assembly with other components to provide a machine.
Warning
Commissioning of the scope of supply is not permitted until it has been established that
the machine, into which the scope of supply is to be integrated, complies with all regula-
tions of all relevant EU Directives.
These operating instructions form the basis for the operating instructions for the complete machine
that are to be created by the machine manufacturer.
These operating instructions must be read, understood and observed in all aspects by responsible person-
nel and personnel giving effect to instructions.
They must be kept in the direct vicinity of the hydraulic system at a place that is known and accessible to
the personnel at any time.
In Germany, hydraulic systems that are operated with mineral oil (DIN 51524; usually WGK (water en-
dangering class) 2) are systems for handling water-endangering substances in the sense of the Water
Resources Act.
Hydraulic systems fall under the category of HBV systems (systems for the production, treatment and
utilisation of fluids).
According to 19 h section 1 S.1 No. 2.b WHG, section. 2, the suitability needs not to be established for
systems and no design approval is required, if the water-endangering substance is used in the operating
cycle. This is valid for hydraulic systems.
The statutory obligations of operators of a water-endangering system (WHG 19 i) are laid down in the
relevant VawS for each federal state.
84
2.6 Conventions
Danger
This symbol indicates imminent danger that can immediately cause severest injury or
death, if it is not averted.
Warning
This symbol indicates imminent danger that can cause severest injury or death, if it is not
averted.
Caution
This symbol indicates possible danger that can cause light or serious injuries or damage
to property.
This symbol refers to supporting information.
3 Transport and storage
3.1 Transport
Depending on their size and the situation on site, hydraulic cylinders can be transported using a forklift
truck or lifting gear.
When handling and lifting hydraulic cylinders, observe the following guidelines:
Hydraulic cylinders should be transported in the horizontal position while being supported on secured
wooden blocks or, if possible, in their original packaging.
Use soft lifting belts to prevent damage to the preservation. The use of chains and carbine swivels is
permitted only in conjunction with the lifting eyes provided.
Due to tolerances, the weight to be lifted could be approx. 10 % greater than specified on the drawing or
in the catalogue documentation.
Caution
Observe the general safety regulations for transport.
Rexroth hydraulic cylinders are despatched without oil fill. Due to the final test in the factory, a residual
amount of oil remains in the product (for deviations, see 3.2.1 Increased internal corrosion protection
through filling).
3.1.1 Transport using a forklift truck
Add-on parts (components, pipework, etc.) must not be used for lifting.
Position the fork under the hydraulic cylinder,
carefully raise the cylinder and ensure a stable position with regard to the centre of gravity.
3.1.2 Transport using lifting gear
Add-on parts (components, pipework, etc.) must not be used for lifting purposes.
Suitable lifting gear is to be attached to hydraulic cylinders with lifting eyes,
carefully lift the cylinder and observe a stable position with regard to the centre of gravity
(see loading regulations, transport devices, lifting equipment AB 02-70.01).
85
01
3.2 Storage
3.2.1 Corrosion protection provided in the factory
As a standard, Rexroth hydraulic cylinders are tested with mineral oil HLP 46 to DIN 51524 part 2. The oil
film that is left over after testing ensures a short-time internal corrosion protection. In the case of longer
storage times, preservative oil is used as an optional alternative. Increased internal corrosion protection is
achieved by filling internal chambers with preservative oil.
3.2.2 Execution of internal preservation
Internal preservation of hydraulic cylinders is achieved through testing or filling with a preservative in ac-
cordance with the values listed in table 1.
Testing means short commissioning of the hydraulic cylinder followed by draining. All ports are connected
to the test bench during testing.
If preservation is required by filling with a preservative as specified in table 1, the hydraulic cylinder is filled
with the corresponding preservative after functional testing.
The line ports are plugged by means of screw plugs or flange covers. Components such as control devices
and filters that may be built on or installed must also be filled with the relevant protective agent.
When storing filled hydraulic cylinders, the customer must connect a pipe from the line connection of the
annulus chamber to the line connection of the piston chamber.
Hydraulic cylinders with oil fill must not be exposed to direct sunlight, since due to the increase in ambient
temperature the hydraulic pressure in the hydraulic cylinder rises.
Table 1
Storage conditions Packaging
Pre-
serva-
tive
Storage time in months
12 9 6 3 24
Storage in dry
rooms at uniform
temperature
Seaworthy A
Not sea-
worthy
A
B
Storage in the
open air (protected
against damage and
ingress of water)
Seaworthy A
B
Not sea-
worthy
A
B
Testing with preservative A = Mineral oil
Filling with preservative B = Preservative oil
In the case of longer periods of storage, hydraulic cylinders must be disassembled and cleaned from resi-
dues of preservatives using a suitable cleaning agent. Since deformation of the seals cannot be ruled out,
seals should be replaced, if required.
86
3.2.3 Notes on external preservation
External preservation (corrosion protection) is achieved with coating substances according to AB 01-
03.05.
In the case of storage periods up to 6 months in dry rooms at even temperatures, the primer coating is suf-
ficient for external preservation.
In the case of storage periods of more than 6 months, a corresponding finish coating must be provided
(see AB 01-03.05).
Unprotected parts such as fitting surfaces or mechanical interfaces must be protected using Tectyl Valvo-
line 894 or a similar protective agent.
Spherical or other bearings must be wrapped in Densoband or similar and then packed in plastic material
to protect them against humidity.
3.2.4 Inspection during storage
To ensure that the condition of the cylinder does not deteriorate during storage, the following conditions
must be fulfilled:
The cylinder must be thoroughly inspected once a year. Here, the following points are of particular impor-
tance:
Preservation; check for damage ad corrosion
Hydraulic fluid; check for oxidation or souring
Inspection and greasing of spherical bearings that require maintenance
Inspection and preservation of fitting surfaces or mechanical interfaces
In addition, the cylinder must be extended or retracted by several centimetres once a year to prevent bond-
ing of seals. Depending on the results, corrective measures may be required.
To prevent damage to seals, we recommend that the cylinders be rotated through 90 every six weeks.
3.2.5 Note on packed hydraulic cylinders
If teh packaging is opened for checking purposes, they must be carefully reclosed.
In the case of seaworthy packaging, a new drying agent is to be added.
For further information about internal preservation, see AB 01-02.11
4 Description of hydraulic cylinders
This chapter contains an overview of technical data of hydraulic cylinders according to valid catalogues
and/or installation drawings as well as a general description of the most important components of the
cylinders.
4.1 Technical data
See current catalogue documentation, descriptions and valid drawings of the individual hydrau-
lic cylinders.
87
01
4.2 General description of hydraulic cylinders
A hydraulic cylinder converts hydraulic energy into a linear movement. The driving force is determined by
the hydraulic pressure in the cylinder chamber and the piston and annulus areas of the cylinder.
The hydraulic cylinder consists of the following main and functional parts:
Piston rod
Piston
Cylinder head
Cylinder barrel
Cylinder cap
Tie rods / screws
External mounting elements
Seals
Guide rings / bushings
Cushioning bushings
The main parts can vary depending on the cylinder series.
4.2.1 Piston rod
The piston rod of the hydraulic cylinder is made of steel; the surface (running face) is finely machined and
coated with a chrome layer.
The basic material determines the mechanical properties of the piston rod.
The piston rod surface is decisive for the running characteristics and has a major influence on the service
life of the seals.
A wrench face is usually provided for mounting purposes.
For the selection and determination of the piston rod diameter, a whole series of parameters must be taken
into account.
The following parameters are of particular importance for the selection:
Buckling safety on the basis of the given pressure force and installation position.
Stresses incurring as a result of compressive and tensile forces.
Geometric requirements with regard to the mounting type of the piston and mounting on the machine /
structure that is to be driven.
To prevent leakage between the rod surface and the cylinder head (piston rod guide), it is essential that
the fine-machined piston rod surface is handled with the greatest care possible. Damage to the piston rod
surface can result in damage to the seals and corrosion of the basic material, which deteriorates the seal-
ing effect.
4.2.2 Piston
Since the piston is guided in the cylinder barrel, concentric running of the piston rod is ensured. Pistons
are often designed so that they are bolted directly onto the piston rod or connected to the piston rod by
means of a threaded ring.
The piston is mounted on the piston rod in a way that unintentional loosening is prevented with greatest
security. Depending on the series, this is ensured by means of a certain tightening torque or bonding (Loc-
tite) and an additional mechanical securing feature (see also spare parts list and catalogue of the relevant
series).
On double and single-acting cylinders, the piston ensures the separation of the cylinder chambers on the
cap and rod side.
The piston is required for transmitting forces. The gap between the piston and the cylinder barrel that is re-
quired for the movement is sealed by means of a piston seal. The narrow gap of fit between the piston and
the piston rod is sealed by means of an R-ring or sealant (e.g. Loctite). The piston is made of grey casting,
spheroidal cast iron, steel or bronze.
88
4.2.3 Cylinder head
The cylinder head incorporates many functions in one or several parts, e.g. guidance of the piston rod,
external sealing of the cylinder by means of the piston rod seal, and prevents the ingress of dirt into the
cylinder with the help of the scraper.
Depending on the different design principles, the cylinder head is in most cases bolted, flanged or mount-
ed by means of a tie rod to the cylinder barrel.
When the piston rod extends, the piston can touch the head. In this case, the compressive force of the
cylinder and the possible external load is absorbed by the cylinder head. Depending on the series and ver-
sion, the cylinder head can be made of spheroidal cast iron or steel.
The following functional elements can be integrated in the cylinder head:
Line connection
Piston rod seal and scraper
Guide rings or bushings
Throttle valves and check valves
Safety bleed or bleed points
Built-on valve blocks / pipework
Mounting elements
External mounting elements
4.2.4 Cylinder barrel
The cylinder barrel is made of steel and, with regard to nominal, operating and test pressures, is calculated
and dimensioned in accordance with the data in the valid catalogue documentation or the values specified
in the installation drawing. The internal running face is fine-machined.
The barrel expands due to internal pressure, which increases the gap at the piston seal. The wall thickness
of the cylinder barrel is designed so that the increase in the gap remains within the range of values that is
required for proper operation of the bearings and sealing of the piston.
4.2.5 Cylinder cap
The cylinder cap forms the end cover of the cylinder and, depending on the design principle, is bolted,
flanged, welded or mounted by means of a tie rod to the cylinder barrel.
When the cylinder retracts, the piston can touch the cap. In this case, the tensile force of the cylinder and
possible external load is absorbed by the cylinder cap. Depending on the series and version, the cylinder
cap can be made of spheroidal cast iron or steel.
The following functional elements can be integrated in the cylinder cap:
Line connection
Check valves and throttle valves
Safety bleed and bleed points
Built-on valve blocks / pipework
Mounting elements
4.2.6 Mounting elements
For the installation of a cylinder in a system or machine, at least two mechanical interfaces are required that
introduce the generated forces into the mounting elements of the structure.
The interfaces are standardised with regard to their dimensions and are not necessarily fatigue endurable
(107 load cycles).
Arrangement of mounting elements
Hydraulic cylinders must not be stressed by mounting faces, and thermal expansion must be possible. The
mounting type of hydraulic cylinders must allow ease of access for the purpose of maintenance, the adjust-
ment of cushioning features and the complete replacement of the hydraulic cylinder (excerpt from: E DIN
ISO 4413: 1999-10/ 6.2.2.1)
89
01
Fixing screws
Fixing screws for hydraulic cylinders and add-on parts must be designed and mounted so that they absorb
all foreseeable forces. The screws must be free from shearing stress as far as possible. Hydraulic cylinders
with foot mounting should be provided with other means for absorbing thrust forces than via the fixing
screws. The fixing screws must be able to absorb tilting moments.
(Excerpt from: E DIN ISO 4413: 1999-10/ 6.2.2.2). See also 1.1 Definitions.
In situations, where the cylinder must drive a rotating structure or in situations, where minor
alignment errors must be expected, mounting elements with spherical bearings are often used
(here, the calculation principles for spherical bearings must be observed).
4.2.7 Seals
Two types of seals that differ in terms of function are used in hydraulic cylinders:
Static seals are used between two parts that do not move in relation to each other, for example the seal
between the head and the barrel, the cap and the barrel, the piston and the piston rod. In general, the
seals used are O-rings or rectangular rings.
Dynamic seals are used between moving parts, for example the seal between the piston rod and the
cylinder head, and the seal between the piston and the cylinder barrel.
The seals used are listed in the valid catalogue documentation and spare parts lists that accompany the
seal kits.
4.2.8 Guide
The guide in the cylinder head and the piston guide ensure concentric running of the piston rod and the
cylinder barrel. Any transverse forces or stresses resulting from the hydraulic cylinders own weight are
introduced via the piston rod or the cylinder barrel into the guide.
Caution
Transverse forces must always be avoided!
Transverse forces that were not taken into account at the draft stage can shorten the service life
of guides and seals and affect proper operation of the hydraulic cylinder.
Depending on the series and version, hydraulic cylinders can be fitted with various types of guides, which
feature specific characteristics with regard to the permissible surface pressure, dry running characteristics
and resistance to wear. The guides mainly differ in the material used:
Guide directly in the cylinder head, e.g. spheroidal cast iron
Guide bushings, e.g. made of bronze or grey cast iron
Guide rings, e.g. made of compound material
4.2.9 End position cushioning
The task of end position cushioning is to reduce the kinetic energy of a mass that is moved by the cylinder
to a level at which neither the cylinder nor the machine or system, into which the cylinder is integrated, is
damaged.
Self-aligning end position cushioning causes a controlled deceleration (braking) in the end positions.
When adjustable end position cushioning is used, it must be noted that the full cushioning performance
can only be achieved when the throttle valve is closed.
Always observe the data given in the valid data sheets.
90
4.2.10 Proximity switches
Inductive proximity switches are used for monitoring the end positions of hydraulic cylinders. They operate
contact-less and are therefore wear-free.
Proximity switches are factory-set so that they output a signal when the switching area is passed in the
cylinder. The switching point is usually located between 1 and 5 mm before the end of the stroke.
Warning
For safety reasons, the proximity switch must not be screwed in too deep. Adjustments may
therefore only be made in the relevant end positions. Proximity switches must never be removed
while the cylinder is under pressure. When connecting electrical parts, always observe the
details given in the valid data sheets.
Proximity switches may only be installed and removed by a skilled worker (the associated work-
ing instructions must be observed).
Plug-in connectors must never be plugged or unplugged when under load (power applied).
4.2.11 Position measuring systems
Position measuring systems are used for measuring the position and travel of hydraulic cylinders. Depend-
ing on the series, position measuring systems of different types and versions can be used. Please observe
the information provided in the valid catalogue documentation.
Warning
Position measuring systems must never be removed while the cylinder is pressurised.
For electrical connections, always observe the information provided in the valid data sheets.
Position measuring systems may only be installed and removed by a skilled worker (the associ-
ated working instructions must be observed).
Plug-in connectors must never be plugged or unplugged when under load (power applied).
5 Commissioning
5.1 General notes
Caution!
In accordance with EC MCD Annex II B, commissioning is prohibited until it was established that the
machine, into which the hydraulic cylinder is to be installed, complies with the regulations of all relevant EU
Directives (see 2.5 Responsibilities and duties of the machine manufacturer / operator)
The assembly of components can result in other types of hazard. It is therefore indispensable to observe
the notes in the operating instructions for the complete machine.
This is valid in particular for Mechanical hazards EN 292-1 section 4.2, which can result from mechanical
movements initiated by the hydraulic system and drives (cylinder, motor).
5.1.1 Safety
AB-01-01.02: 2003-02-24 section 2.4.

91
01
5.1.2 Qualification of personnel
Commissioning may only be carried out by trained and instructed personnel who have a specific knowl-
edge of hydraulics (see 2.3 Qualification of personnel).
5.1.3 Cleanliness
When carrying out any kind of work, observe strictest cleanliness, for contamination causes faults and
can affect the safe operation of components. Before loosening fittings and components, clean the direct
surrounding area. All openings must be plugged with protective caps to prevent the ingress of dirt into the
system. Do not use waste cotton for cleaning.
5.1.4 Painting
If hydraulic systems are to be finish painted, care must be taken that elastic materials (seals, hoses, rubber-
metal connections, etc.), labels, displays and scales of measuring and control elements as well as the run-
ning faces of cylinders and contact faces of valves and connections are covered to prevent their painting.
5.2 Commissioning of function-tested hydraulic cylinders
5.2.1 Installation of hydraulic cylinders
5.2.1.1 Visual inspection for shipping damage and contamination
Improper storage can result in brittling of seals and gumming of the preservative oil (see 3.2.2 Execution of
internal preservation).
Mounting and alignment
Hydraulic cylinders should preferably be mounted so that the load acts axially on the centre line of the
hydraulic cylinder. The mounting elements must minimise
a) excessive deformation of the hydraulic cylinder due to pushing or pulling loads;
b) the introduction of lateral or bending loads;
c) swivelling speeds in the case of trunnion mounting that requires continuous external lubrication,
(Excerpt from: E DIN ISO 4413: 1999-10/ 6.2.2)
See also 4.2.6 Mounting elements.
Orientation
Mounting faces must be designed so that the cylinder is protected against torsion when installed. The
cylinder must be installed so that unwanted lateral loading is prevented during operation. (Excerpt from:
E DIN ISO 4413: 1999-10/ 6.2.2.3)
5.2.1.2 Installation of hydraulic cylinders and assemblies
Care must be taken to provide sufficient space for access, operation and maintenance and, with regard to
the arrangement and mounting of components and systems, to ensure stability and operational safety.
Hydraulic cylinders must be installed stress-free so that the supporting points and guides are not subject-
ed to unnecessary stress. Higher stresses can shorten the service life of supporting points and guides and
hence of the hydraulic cylinder.
Damage to the hydraulic cylinder and in particular to the piston rod must be prevented.
92
5.2.1.3 Connection of hydraulic drives
Connecting lines must be dimensioned in accordance with the performance data specified on the circuit
diagram.
Warning
The required nominal pressures for fittings and hose connections are sometimes higher
than the values specified in DIN EN ISO 8434-1. Use only components made by manufac-
turers who guarantee these higher nominal pressures.
Caution: Before commissioning, remove all plug screws and flange covers used for internal preservation!
Pipes must be freed from dirt, scales, chips, etc. before being installed. Especially welded pipes must be
bright inside and flushed. Do not use waste cotton for cleaning.
Observe the installation instructions of the fitting manufacturer. Recommend are fittings with a soft seal
and a screwed plug (pipe thread to ISO 1179-2, metric thread to ISO 9974-2). Sealants such as hemp
and putty are not permitted, because these can cause contamination and hence malfunction. Bosch
Rexroth recommends the pipe forming system Walform to AB 20-06 that cannot be torn out.
Hoses must comply with all relevant European and/or international standards.
5.2.2 Before commissioning
The basic contamination of the hydraulic fluid used must not exceed the max. permissible cleanli-
ness class.
The pipe system must be inspected by a specialist for its safe condition.
Observe the fundamental safety notes from the operating instructions for hydraulic sys-
tems AB-01-01.02: 2003-02-24 section 2.4.
5.2.3 Commissioning of a system
Open valves in the suction line, if provided.
Slowly start up drive motors; electric motors in the inching mode, combustion engines in the idle mode.
Observe the direction of rotation.
5.2.4 Flushing of a system
Hydraulic cylinders must not be connected to the hydraulic system while the system is being
flushed.
When installing the hydraulic system in the machine (mounting of components, line systems and drives)
make sure that the max. permissible cleanliness class to ISO 4406 class 21/18/15 is not exceeded in
the complete system.
Systems that include servo-valves = cleanliness class to ISO 4406 KL. 19/16/13 must be flushed. The
servo-valves must be substituted by flushing plates or directional valves of the same size. The system is
to be operated at operating temperature and at minimum pressures until the required cleanliness class
to ISO 4406 is achieved. Measure the cleanliness class using a particle counter.
Change filter elements as required.
Since air easily compresses, air that is entrapped in the hydraulic cylinder can affect the operability of
seals. Compressed air can result in the destruction of seals. To ensure proper functioning of the hydrau-
lic cylinder, it must be completely filled and bled.
Danger
A hydraulic cylinder that is bled poorly or not at all can cause dangerous situations!
93
01
Bleed the system / hydraulic cylinder at the bleed screws provided for this purpose or at the actuator
lines; if possible, at the highest point. Actuate control valves and extend and retract the actuator several
times. Slowly increase the load. Bleeding is completed when the oil does no longer foam in the tank,
the actuator does no longer perform jerky movements and no abnormal noise can be heard.
Since, due to different installation situations and hydraulic functions of the hydraulic cylinder or due to
the possibilities of the hydraulic system, a multitude of different situations are conceivable, we provide
here general instructions for filling and bleeding hydraulic cylinders.
If you are uncertain about how to fill and bleed your cylinder, please contact Bosch Rexroth,
Business Unit Service Automation or your local Rexroth Sales Organisation.
For filling and bleeding the cylinder, please proceed as follows (the starting point is a retracted hydraulic
cylinder in the horizontal position):
Have a clearly legible circuit diagram of the entire system at hand.
Filling and bleeding of the hydraulic cylinder may only be carried out by qualified and experienced em-
ployees.
Open the bleed screw on the rod side while the cylinder is depressurised.
If a minimess coupling is provided, you can bleed the cylinder by connecting a minimess hose to the
coupling (the minimess coupling is fitted with an internal check valve).
Adjust the hydraulic system so that the pressure in the hydraulic cylinder does not exceed approx. 5 bar.
Switch the hydraulic system on.
Actuate the control valves so that the hydraulic cylinder tends to retract at a very low velocity (pressure
on the piston rod side). Now the piston rod side of the hydraulic cylinder fills with oil and any existing air
will escape via the bleed connection or the minimess coupling.
After some time, foaming oil instead of air comes out. As soon as the oil does no longer contain air, that
is, does no longer foam, the hydraulic cylinder is sufficiently bled. Caution: This is only valid, if the bleed
point is located at the highest point.
Then switch the hydraulic system off and close the bleed screw.
Danger
Never remove hoses, couplings or components from a system or hydraulic cylinder that is
pressurised!
After having bled the hydraulic fluid on the rod side, proceed in the same way to bleed the cap side.
Open the bleed screw on the cap side of the depressurised hydraulic cylinder or connect a suitable
hose to the screw coupling, if available.
Switch the hydraulic system on.
Actuate the control valves so that the hydraulic cylinder tends to extend at a very low velocity (pressure
on the cap side). Now the cap side of the cylinder fills with oil and any existing air escapes via the bleed
connection or the screw coupling.
After some time, foaming oil instead of air comes out. As soon as the oil does no longer contain air, that
is, does no longer foam, the hydraulic cylinder is sufficiently bled. Caution: This is only valid, if the bleed
point is located at the highest point.
Then switch the hydraulic system off and close the bleed screw.
The hydraulic cylinder is now ready for operation.
Caution: Until the hydraulic system is bled completely, operate the hydraulic cylinder only at low pressures.
Observe the fluid level in the tank and top up oil, if required.
Danger
Use only approved hoses and couplings that are suitable for the maximum pressures that
can occur! Make sure that connections are sealed!
Once the cylinder is installed in the structure, the system filled with the correct hydraulic fluid and the
hydraulic cylinder properly bled, it can be commissioned.
94
Observe the product-related and system-specific operating instructions.
Problems during commissioning; due to machine-specific conditions (weights, velocities, friction,
electrical control, command value feedforward, etc.), identical hydraulic cylinders can have different
operating or fault characteristics after having been installed in a machine.
The matrix for Causes of faults and their effects in hydraulic systems (AB-01-01.02: 2003-02-24 sec-
tion 5.2.5) provides valuable assistance for systematic troubleshooting and the localisation of faults.
5.3 Hydraulic fluid
Use only the hydraulic fluids that are specified in the catalogue documentation.
Observe the product-related and system-specific operating instructions.
6 Maintenance
According to DIN 31051 maintenance includes the sum of all measures for maintaining and restoring and
for establishing and assessing the actual condition of technical systems.
The tasks are subdivided into three sub-sections:
Maintenance: Measures for maintaining the desired condition
Inspection: Measures for establishing and assessing the actual condition
Repair: Measures for restoring the desired condition.
In this way, the operability of the hydraulic system and the hydraulic cylinder can be safeguarded in an
optimum and efficient manner.
Rexroth hydraulic systems and hydraulic cylinders offer the design-inherent preconditions for excellent op-
erability (operational reliability, service life). They require only little maintenance. However, this is essential
for their operability.
According to experience, 70 % of faults and damage that occurs on hydraulic systems are caused indi-
rectly by the hydraulic fluid. The primary inspection and maintenance effort is therefore reduced to examina-
tions and measures for maintaining the usefulness (condition, cleanliness class) of the hydraulic fluid.
6.1 Maintenance and inspection
6.1.1 General notes
6.1.1.1 Qualification of personnel
Maintenance work and inspections may only be carried out by trained and instructed personnel (see 2.3
Qualification of personnel)
6.1.1.2 Safety
AB-01-01.02 : 2003-02-24 section 2.4.
For the scope and time intervals for maintenance and inspection, see operating instructions for hydraulic
systems AB-01-01.02 : 2003-02-24 section 5.1.8
The recommendations are based on the following: Central European climate, medium stress and operating
conditions as well as usual environmental stress that can be found in metalworking companies.
95
01
6.1.1.3 Inspection documentation
It is recommended that inspection results be documented in order that
a) inspection and maintenance intervals can be adjusted to the actual operating conditions taking into ac-
count operability and efficiency,
b) it is possible to detect faults at an early stage due to comparative assessments.
A gradual increase in temperature and/or shorter filter change intervals indicate possible wear of pumps,
control lands, seals and aging of the hydraulic fluid and should give reason for the inspection of all of the
relevant components.
A sudden, strong increase in temperature is a warning sign and requires immediate inspection of the
system.
A further aspect is simpler handling of possible warranty claims.
6.2 Regular inspection of hydraulic cylinders
Usually, a hydraulic cylinder hardly requires any maintenance after commissioning. After a new system
was commissioned, regular checks are necessary in order to establish whether the hydraulic cylinder
operates properly. During these checks, take particular note of the following points:
Oil escaping from oil ports
Check for running traces or damage to the piston rod running face. Running traces can indicate con-
tamination of the hydraulic system or transverse loads acting on the hydraulic cylinder.
Damage to coatings
Possible leakage at the cylinder head or cylinder cap
Extreme temperatures and contamination shorten the service life of the hydraulic system. Ensure proper
and regular maintenance of the entire hydraulic system. Notes on specific requirements of the hydraulic
cylinder with regard to temperature and oil cleanliness can be found in section 3.1 Technical data and
the relevant data sheet. Any supplementary requirements can be found in the installation and mainte-
nance instructions for the hydraulic systems and in the data sheets of the hydraulic fluid used.
6.3 Maintenance of the piston rod
To prevent corrosion on the piston rod, the piston rod should always be retracted during downtimes.
When using hydraulic fluids such as HFD-R (phosphate ester), HFA or HFC (water glycol) in hydraulic
cylinders, maintenance must include the following activities:
General
The piston rod must always be covered by a preservative oil film. Take note of the compatibility of media.
Work out a specific schedule so that the open end of the piston rod is always covered with a protective
oil film in accordance with the relevant situation.
The preservative oil film is required to ensure corrosion protection of the portion of the piston rod that
protrudes to the open air. To this end, carry out the following preventive maintenance.
Preventive maintenance of the piston rod
1. Preventive maintenance should be carried out in a dry environment whenever possible. Remove any
salt, sand and machining residues and other dirt from the piston rod with fresh water. Do not use steam
jet cleaners or high-pressure water jets.
2. Preventive maintenance can only be carried out on a clean and dry piston rod. If sufficient time is not
available for drying the piston rod completely, have it dry as long as possible before carrying out the
maintenance work. Repeat the maintenance work as soon as you have sufficient time.
3. Wet a clean cloth with preservative oil of low viscosity. Apply the preservative oil with the cloth on the
entire piston rod.
Immediate maintenance of hydraulic cylinders and piston rods after contact with chemicals.
After contact with chemicals, immediate maintenance must be carried out as soon as possible. Immediate
maintenance comprises the following activities:
1. Solve and remove all residues of chemicals using a suitable cleaning agent.
2. Carry out the working steps of preventive maintenance.
96
Frequency of maintenance
Preventive maintenance as described here should be carried out before first commissioning of the
hydraulic cylinder and then repeated on a monthly to weekly basis (under tropical conditions).
Preventive maintenance of hardly inflammable fluids (HFA, HFC, HFD).
The corrosion protecting properties of hardly inflammable fluids must permanently be within certain limit
values. It is therefore recommended that the fluid be analysed every three to four months. The manu-
facturer of the fluid should analyse fluid samples for their acidity, pH value, chlorine content, corrosion
products, content of bacteria and fungi, etc.
It is essential to make sure that the samples taken are representative for the entire fluid in the hydraulic
cylinder.
With regard to fluid maintenance follow the instructions of the relevant manufacturer.
6.4 Repair
6.4.1 General notes
6.4.1.1 Qualification of personnel
Repair work may only be carried out by trained and instructed personnel who has specific knowledge of
hydraulics (see 2.3 Qualification of personnel).
6.4.1.2 Safety
For safety reasons, line connections, ports and components must not be removed while the system is un-
der pressure. Loads must be lowered, pressure accumulators unloaded, pumps switched off and protected
against restarting. Observe the general safety regulations.
6.4.1.3 Cleanliness
When carrying out any work, observe strictest cleanliness. Before removing fittings and components,
clean the direct surroundings. Plug all openings with protective caps to prevent the ingress of dirt into the
system. Do not use waste cotton for cleaning.
6.4.2 Maintenance tasks
6.4.2.1 Troubleshooting
Detection of damage or preventive repair. Establishment and localisation of the (potential) source(s) of
faults.
Successful troubleshooting in a hydraulic system requires good knowledge of the structure and the
operating principle of the individual components. Especially the combination of hydraulics with electrics/
electronics usually makes troubleshooting a difficult task and necessitates the cooperation between electri-
cians and hydraulics specialists. The circuit diagram, parts list and, if possible, a function chart and other
documentation should be at hand.
A useful aid for systematic troubleshooting or identifying and localising faults is provided
by the matrix for Troubleshooting and its effects in hydraulic systems in the operating
instructions for hydraulic systems AB 01-01.02 : 2003-02-24 section 5.2.
97
01
6.4.2.2 Elimination of faults
is achieved primarily through the replacement of the defective component on site.
The components listed in the parts list (spare parts list) may only be replaced by new and tested
components of the same design and OEM quality.
Repairs of components are generally carried out by the manufacturer or his authorised workshop. If a repair
is provided in the component-specific operating instructions, the repair may also be carried out by the
operator, provided that the required specialised knowledge and equipment is available.
After rectification of the actual damage, the cause and consequential damage should in any case also
be eliminated. For example, after a failure of a component due to wear, the system should be flushed and
the oil cleaned or changed.
6.4.2.3 Function testing and acceptance
Depending on the scope of work, the commissioning steps should be carried out (see 4.).
As far as required, the documentation must be corrected/supplemented or notes be made in the service
manual in order to rule out/minimise these faults in the future through corresponding maintenance activi-
ties.
6.4.3 Removal of complete cylinders
Strictly observe the notes in the component-specific operating instructions, which accompany the spare
part.
Before starting work on the hydraulic cylinder, read the relevant chapters in the operating instructions.
In the case of tie rod cylinders, the tie rods assume the function of fixing screws and are not described
separately in the operating instructions.
The disassembly of hydraulic cylinders may only be carried out by qualified and experienced
personnel. In the case of queries or when in doubt, always contact Bosch Rexroth, Business
Unit Service Automation or your local Rexroth Sales Organisation.
General notes:
See also 5.2.1 Installation of hydraulic cylinders

Work on systems and hydraulic cylinders with accumulators is subject to a special duty of care, since
unprofessional behaviour results in severe accidents. Neither welding nor soldering work or any me-
chanical machining may be carried out on accumulator vessels.
Observe the notes in the operating instructions for the accumulator.
Before starting the disassembly of the accumulator, the latter must be depressurised on the oil
side.
Caution: Use only nitrogen as gas (purest nitrogen of class 4.0; N2 99.99 percent by volume)!
Warning
Work on systems that include accumulators is subject to a special duty of care, since
unprofessional behaviour can lead to severe accidents.
Neither welding nor soldering work or mechanical machining may be carried out on ac-
cumulator vessels.
See product-specific operating instructions for pressure accumulators.
98
6.5 Before starting work
Opening of the hydraulic cylinder during the warranty period results in the expiration of
warranty claims !

Take the following measures before starting to work on the cylinder:
Make sure that a clearly legible assembly drawing/spare parts list and a copy of these operating instruc-
tions are at hand.
Provide clean, professional tools and a clean workplace.
The hydraulic cylinder must be transported in the horizontal position and be supported on wooden
blocks or, if possible, in its original packaging.
Use soft lifting belts to prevent damage. The use of chains and carbine swivels is permitted only, if used
in conjunction with the lifting eyes provided for this purpose.
Due to tolerances, the weight that is to be lifted can be approx. 10 % higher than specified on the draw-
ing or in the catalogue documentation.
See section 3. Transport and storage
Caution
Observe the general safety regulations for transporting.
While the hydraulic cylinder is being removed from the system, no dirt may enter into the hydraulic
system. The connection points must be properly sealed with steel plugs, flange covers or special plastic
plugs that are suitable for this purpose.
Damage to the hydraulic cylinder and especially to the piston rod must be prevented at any time.
Use a rugged supporting structure for depositing the hydraulic cylinder and the removed parts.
6.6 Draining of hydraulic fluid
Before disassembling the hydraulic cylinder, drain the hydraulic fluid.
As a result of a rise in ambient temperatures or heating up of the hydraulic cylinder due to direct sunlight,
the hydraulic pressure in the hydraulic cylinder may have increased.
Drain the hydraulic fluid carefully. Use the existing minimess ports or bleed points for draining the hydraulic
fluid.
Danger
Pressure traps may be present in the cylinder!
6.7 Disassembly of the hydraulic cylinder
Before the disassembly of the hydraulic cylinder can be started, the general conditions according to sec-
tion 6.1 must be fulfilled. Make sure that the preparatory work is carried out properly.
In order that parts of the hydraulic cylinder can be replaced, the latter must be disassembled.
Proceed as follows for the disassembly:
Drain the hydraulic fluid from the hydraulic cylinder (see 6.6 Draining of hydraulic fluid).
Remove the cylinder head. Detach the head from the barrel and let the rest of the hydraulic fluid drain
from the cylinder barrel. Then pull the piston rod out of the hydraulic cylinder, if required, with the help of
lifting belts. Position the piston rod on stable blocks that were provided specifically for this purpose and
prevent the piston rod from rolling away (use blocks with soft, rotating support, free from any dirt).
Warning
Never use compressed air for extending the piston rod!
99
01
If required, remove the locking mechanism between the cylinder eye and the piston rod and position the
wrench or hook wrench in the bore or area provided for this purpose. Sling the belt around the cylinder
eye so that it cannot fall down when it is loosened from the cylinder rod. Now turn the piston rod with the
help of the wrench until the cylinder eye loosens from the piston rod.
If required, remove the protective envelope from the piston rod. Attach lifting belts at the cylinder head
and slowly shove it off the piston rod (if the cylinder head is difficult to slide over the piston rod, turn it
slowly).
Remove the seals and thoroughly clean the cylinder head (old Loctite, dust particles, etc.) using a
degreasing agent. Also clean the piston rod thoroughly, for each dirt particle can damage the seal also
during assembly. Do not forget to clean the piston rod, cylinder eyes and the protective envelope.
6.8 General assembly instructions
Warning
Make sure that the individual parts, the tools and the grease to be used are clean. Dirt
results in damage to seals and other components in the hydraulic system!
6.8.1 Fitting of bolts (also applicable to tie rods
on tie rod cylinders)
The fitting of bolts requires heavy tooling. Make sure that sensitive surfaces are sufficiently protected, for
example by means of thick rubber strips.
Caution
Bolts that fall down or impacts with heavy tools can cause damage!
Bolts must be visually inspected before being installed:
for damaged threads
for contamination in the form of chips or burrs on the thread or head of the screw (very important when
used in the interior of the hydraulic cylinder)
for cracks on the head of the screw or at the transition between the head and the barrel of the screw.
When fitting the bolts, grease the threads to prevent corrosion and to allow the application of a defined
tightening torque. Insert the screw, tighten it by hand by a few turns. A pneumatic screw driver may be
used for further tightening.
The specified tightening torque must be applied using a calibrated torque wrench.
Caution
Contamination impairs the proper operation of hydraulic cylinders and other components
in the hydraulic system!
Tighten the screws to the tightening torque specified in the catalogue or on the drawing and observe the
following order:
First, tighten the four screws that are arranged at 90-degree angles crosswise.
Then, the complete graduated circle (including the pre-tightened screws) can be tightened to the speci-
fied tightening torque.
When screws made of stainless steel are used, we recommend the application of a slip additive.
100
6.8.2 Securing using Loctite 243
Some of the screws and the piston in the interior of the hydraulic cylinder are secured by means of Loctite
243 in order to prevent loosening due to vibration. Loctite 243 is an anaerob single-package system that
cures when getting in contact with metal and deprives the connection from oxygen. After curing, the bond-
ing agent forms a stable connection between both surfaces.
Technical data of Loctite 243:
Thermal resistance up to 150 C
Average strength, that is, can be removed by means of normal tools (up to M36)
Cures to its full strength in 2 hours at room temperature
When fitting screws with Loctite, observe the following procedure:
Degrease the bores and screws using a brush and degreasing agent.
Blow the screws dry with oil-free compressed air.
Apply a sufficient amount of Loctite at the front in the bore. It is important that the thread is provided
with a Loctite film over the entire length when installed.
Insert the screws and tighten them to the specified tightening torque.
6.8.3 Mounting of guide strips
When mounting guide strips in the cylinder head and around the piston, observe strictest cleanliness of the
parts, the tools and the grease used. Any dirt residues get directly in the interior of the hydraulic cylinder,
where they can cause damage to dynamic seals or other components in the hydraulic cylinder.
When installing guide strips, observe the following:
Make sure that the recesses for the guide strips are dry.
Check the length and the form of the guide strips; there must always be a sufficient gap in order that
hydraulic pressure can reach the seals. Too small a gap can be a reason that the guide strip acts as
seal. The ends of the guide strip must always be cut at an angle of 60.
Apply a thin grease film to the recesses and then press the guide strips into the recesses.
The strip can now be carefully mounted; make sure that the guide strip is completely in contact with the
bottom of the groove.
6.8.4 Installation of piston rod seals
Piston rod seals are subjected to one-sided loads due to the pressure in the hydraulic cylinder; the pres-
sure applied on the inside is higher than on the outside. For this reason, piston rod seals are in most cases
of an asymmetric shape so that the correct installation position must be observed.
Warning
Observe the correct installation position of piston rod seals; seals that are installed the
wrong way round impair the proper function of the seal system and may result in leakage!
The correct position of the seals is indicated in the catalogue documentation.
The following overview shows the most common piston rod seals and the position, in which the seals must
be installed (piston/pressure side on the right-hand side).
Stepseal: Excluder: Chevron seal kit: Pressure

Before seals are installed, they should preferably be pre-heated to approx. 80 C in warm oil. This makes
stiff seals somewhat more flexible and easier to install.
101
01
For installing piston rod seals in an enclosed installation space, proceed as follows:
Place the O-ring into the recess.
Press the seal together to form a kidney shape without buckling it. See Figure a.
Insert the compressed seal into the installation space and press against the section of the seal that is
turned to the inside so that it reassumes its original shape. See Figure b.
Check that the seal is properly installed around its entire perimeter and not damaged.
Figure a Figure b

6.8.5 Installation of piston seals
Piston seals are subjected to alternating loads by the pressure in the hydraulic cylinder; depending on
the load, the piston-sided pressure has a higher or lower value than the pressure on the piston rod side.
For this reason, piston seals have a symmetric shape. However, this does not rule that seals could not be
installed the wrong way round.
Warning
Observe the correct installation position of the piston seal; installing the seal the wrong
way round impairs the function and may result in loss of the holding function!
The correct position of the seal is specified in the catalogue documentation.
The following overview shows the most common piston seals and the position, in which they must be
installed (piston / pressure side on the right-hand side).
Glyd-ring: Chevron seal kit (part): Pressure

It is recommend that seals that are to be installed in a groove be pre-heated to approx. 80 C in warm
oil. This makes stiff seals somewhat more flexible and easier to install. Chevron seal kits can be installed
directly.
102
6.8.6 Installation of piston seals using expanding and calibrating sleeves
To ensure the correct installation of
glyd-ring seals in the piston groove, we
recommend the use of expanding and
calibrating sleeves.
Widen the seal with the help of the
expanding sleeve and then calibrate
it to the required dimension using the
calibrating sleeve.
Expanding and calibrating sleeves are
catalogue items of known seal manufac-
turers.
6.9 Assembly of hydraulic cylinders
Before starting to assemble hydraulic cylinders, the conditions according to section 6.8 must be fulfilled.
Take care that the preparations were properly made.
Observe the following order for the assembly:
Wet the piston rod with oil so that the cylinder head easily slides over the piston rod. Place the cylinder
head in front of the piston rod and slowly shove it over the piston rod (if the cylinder head moves stiffly
over the piston rod, slowly turn the piston rod or the cylinder head). Take care not to jam or damage the
guide strips and seals.
Wet the cylinder head, the cylinder bore, the piston seal and the O-ring seal with oil.
Now raise the piston rod and shove the piston slowly into the cylinder barrel.
Shove the cylinder head into the cylinder barrel. Please note that the cylinder head may no longer be
turned as soon as it is in the cylinder barrel in order not to damage the O-ring seal. Now grease the
screws and screw them in the bores provided. Tighten all screws manually and then crosswise to the
specified tightening torque (see section 6.8.1).
6.10 Required tools / required auxiliary material
For changing parts or wear parts of a cylinder, the following tools and materials are required:
Tools: Auxiliary material:
Allan key
Pneumatic screw driver
Calibrated torque wrench of sufficient power
Blocks with soft, rotating (plastic) pads
Heating unit for warming up seals
Calibrating and expanding sleeves
Lifting belts (no chains)
Pressure gauge with minimess hose
Grease
Loctite 243/ 270
Polishing paper
Compressed air
Effects of mistakes
AB 01-01.02 : 2003-02-24 section 2.4.

103
01
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengiesser 1
Telephone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
by Bosch Rexroth AG, Industrial Hydraulics, 97813 Lohr am Main
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or stored,
processed, duplicated or circulated using electronic systems, in any form or
by means, without the prior written authorisation of Bosch Rexroth AG. In
the event of contravention of the above provisions, the contravening party is
obliged to pay compensation.
The data specified above only serves to describe the product. No state-
ments concerning a certian condition or suitability for a certain application
can be derived from our information. The details stated do not release you
from the responsibility for carrying out your own assessment and verifi-
cation. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural
process of wear and ageing.
28/28 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Betriebsanleitung fr Hydrozylinder
7 Decommissioning
Caution!
When decommissioning and (partially) disassembling the hydraulic system/hydraulic cylinder, please note
that:
1. Assembly/disassembly work may only be carried out by trained and instructed personnel with special-
ised knowledge of hydraulics (see 2.3 Qualification of personnel).
2. For safety reasons, no lines, ports and components may be disconnected as long as the system is
under pressure. Loads must have been lowered, pressure accumulators unloaded, pumps switched off
and protected against restarting. Observe the general safety regulations.
AB 01-01.02 : 2003-02-24 section 2.4.

7.1 Decommissioning, storage and re-commissioning
Take the required corrosion protection measures according to the storage conditions and period (see 3.2
Storage).
For re-commissioning, observe the notes on commissioning (see 4 Commissioning).
7.2 Decommissioning and disposal
The individual materials must be disposed of in accordance with environmental conditions. Particular atten-
tion must be paid to the disposal of components that contain residues of hydraulic fluid. Observe the notes
on the disposal given in the safety data sheet of the hydraulic fluid.
Listed Rexroth standards:
AB 01-01.02 Operating instructions for hydraulic systems
AB 01-02.11 Interior conservation
AB 01-02.15 Water protection
AB 01-03.05 Corrosion protection using coating materials
AB 01-02.35 Filter concept
AB 02-70.01 Transport devices, lifting equipment
Listed standards:
E DIN ISO 4413: 1999-10 Safety requirements for fluid power systems hydraulics
104
105
01
1/4 RE 07 900/12.02
2003
electronic systems, in any form or by any means, without the prior written authorisation of Bosch Rexroth AG.
This document was prepared with the greatest of care, and all statements have been examined for correctness.
This document is subject to alterations for reason of the continuing further developments of products.
No liability can be accepted for any incorrect or incomplete statements.
RE 07 900/12.02
Replaces: 05.01
Installation, commissioning and mainte-
nance of hydraulic systems
1. General
1.1 Long service life and functional reliability of hydraulic systems
and their components depend on correct handling.
Ensure trouble-free operation by observing the following points:
The specific installation and operating instructions for the rel-
evant components
Special instructions in individual cases
Technical data in the data sheet.
In addition, we would like to draw your attention to the follow-
ing regulations:
Commissioning and maintenance of oil-hydraulic systems (VDI
3027)
German standard Hydraulic systems DIN 24 346
2. Installation
2.1 Preparatory work for the installation
Ensure that the system is clean!
For the surroundings:
Keep power units, line connections and components clean
or clean them (e.g. pickling after, for example, processes have
been carried out that involve heat, i.e. welding, hot bend-
ing, etc.)!
For hydraulic fluids:
Take care of contamination and humidity; contamination from
the environment must not enter the tanks!
Fill oil tanks only through filters, preferably system filters or
portable filter stations with fine filters.
Internal protective coatings, if any, must be resistant to the
hydraulic fluid used!
For parts taken from stock:
The storage of parts that were not filled or treated with anti-
corrosion fluid can lead to the formation of resin. Solve the
resin using a grease solvent and renew the lubricating film.
Check to see that all of the parts required for the installation
are available!
Take note of any transport damage!
2.2 Carrying out the installation
Use lifting lugs and transport facilities!
Do not apply force to prevent transverse forces and tension on
pipes and components. The valve mounting surfaces must be
perfectly even. The fixing screws must be tightened evenly at
the specified torque.
Take care that pipes are adequately fixed!
When selecting pipes, hoses and fittings/flanges, observe the
correct pressure stage (wall thickness, material). Use only seam-
less precision steel pipes.
Do not use hemp or putty as sealing materials! This may cause
contamination and thus malfunction.
To prevent external leakage, observe the installation instruc-
tions of the pipe fittings manufacturer. We recommend the
use of fittings with elastic seals.
Make sure that hoses are properly laid! Rubbing and abutting of
the lines must be prevented.
Provide the correct hydraulic fluids.
Mineral oils: HLP hydraulic oils according to DIN 51 524 part 2
are generally suitable for standard systems and components.
Fast bio-degradable hydraulic fluids: VDMA 24 568.
For these fluids, the system and components must be matched.
Hardly inflammable hydraulic fluids: VDMA 24 317. For these
fluids, the system and components must be matched. (Before
filling in the special media, check, whether the system is com-
patible with the intended fluid.)
The following points must be observed in accordance with the rel-
evant requirements:
Viscosity of the hydraulic fluid
Operating temperature range
Type of seals used on the components fitted
3. Commissioning
When the installation has been carried out correctly, proceed
with commissioning and functional testing.
3.1 Preparations for trial run
Tank cleaned?
Lines cleaned and properly installed?
Fittings, flanges tightened?
Lines and components correctly connected in line with instal-
lation drawings and circuit diagram?
106
RE 07 900/12.02 2/4
Is the accumulator filled with nitrogen? Fill in nitrogen until
the pre-charge pressure p
0
as specified in the circuit diagram
is reached. (On the fluid side the system must be pressure-
less!). It is recommended that the gas pre-charge pressure is
marked on the accumulator itself (e.g. self-adhesive label) and
in the hydraulic circuit so that a comparative check is possible,
if required.
Caution! Use only nitrogen as pre-charge gas!
Accumulators must comply with the safety regulations valid at
the place of installation.
Are the drive motor and pump properly installed and aligned?
Is the drive motor correctly connected?
Are filters with the prescribed filter rating used?
Are filters fitted in the correct direction of flow?
Has the specified hydraulic fluid filled up to the upper mark-
ing?
As the hydraulic fluids often do not comply with the required
cleanliness, the fluids must be filled through a filter. The abso-
lute filter rating of the filling filter should be at least that of
the filters installed in the system.
3.2 Trial run
For safety reasons, only personnel of the machine manufac-
turer and, if required, maintenance and operating personnel
should be present.
All pressure relief valves, pressure reducing valves, pressure
controllers of pumps must be unloaded. An exemption to this
are TV-set valves.
Open isolator valves completely!
Switch the system on briefly and check whether the direction
of rotation of the drive motor matches the prescribed direc-
tion of rotation of the pump.
Check the position of the directional valves and, if necessary,
move the spool to the required position.
Set the control spool to by-pass.
Open suction valves of the pump. If required for design rea-
sons, fill pump housing with hydraulic fluids to prevent bear-
ings and parts of the rotary group from running dry.
If a pilot oil pump is provided, commission it
1)
.
Start up the pump, swivel it from its zero position and listen
for any noises.
Swivel the pump slightly out (ca. 5)
1)
.
Bleed the system
Carefully loosen fittings or bleed screws at high points in the
system. When the escaping fluid is free from bubbles, then the
filling process is completed. Re-tighten fittings.
Flush the system; if possible, short-circuit actuators. Flush the
system until the filters remain clean; check the filters!
With servo-systems, the servo-valves must be removed and
replaced by flushing plates or directional valves of the same
size. Short-circuit the actuators. During flushing, the hydraulic
fluid in the complete hydraulic system should reach tempera-
tures that are at least as high as later during operation. Change
the filter elements as required.
Flushing continues until the required minimum cleanliness is
reached. This can only be achieved by continuous monitoring
using a particle counter.
Check the system functions under no-load conditions, if pos-
sible, by hand; cold-test the electrohydraulic control.
When the operating temperature has been reached, test the
system under load; slowly increase the pressure.
Monitor control and instrumentation equipment!
Check the housing temperature of hydraulic pumps and hy-
draulic motors.
Listen for noises!
Check the hydraulic fluid level; if required, top up!
Check the setting of pressure relief valves by loading or brak-
ing the system.
Inspect the system for leaks.
Switch off the drive.
Retighten all fittings, even if there is no evidence of leakage.
Caution! Only tighten fittings when the system is de-
pressurised!
Is the pipe fixing adequate, even under changing pressure
loads?
Are the fixing points at the correct positions?
Are the hoses laid so that they do not chamfer, even under
pressure load?
Check the fluid level.
Test the system for all functions. Compare measured values
with the permissible or specified data (pressure, velocity. Ad-
just further control components).
Jerky movements indicate, amongst other things, the presence
of air in the system. By briefly swivelling the pump in one or
both directions with the actuator being loaded or braked, it is
possible to eliminate certain air pockets. The system is com-
pletely bled when all functions are performed jerk-free and
smoothly and the surface of the hydraulic fluid level is free
from foam. Experience has shown that foaming should have
ceased one hour after start-up at the latest.
Check the temperature.
Switch off the drive.
Remove filter elements (off-line and full-flow filters) and in-
spect them for residues. Clean filter elements or replace them,
if required. Paper or glass fibre elements cannot be cleaned.
If further contamination is found, additional flushing is re-
quired to prevent premature failure of the system components.
All the adjustments made are to be recorded in an acceptance
report.
3.3 Commissioning of fast running systems
Such system can often not be commissioning using the normal
measuring instruments (such as pressure gauges, thermometers,
electrical multimeters, etc.) and standard tools. Optimization is
also not possible.
These systems include, for example, forging presses, plastics
injection moulding machines, special machine tools, rolling tools,
crane controls, machines with electrohydraulic closed-loop con-
trol systems.
Commissioning and optimization of these systems often require
more comprehensive measuring equipment to allow several
measurements to be taken at a time (e.g. several pressures,
electrical signals, travel, velocities, flows, etc.).
107
01
3/4 RE 07 900/12.02
3.4 The most common faults occurring during commissioning
Apart from servicing, commissioning is very decisive for the serv-
ice life and functional reliability of a hydraulic system.
For this reason, faults during commissioning must be avoided
as far as possible.
The most common faults are:
The fluid tank is not inspected.
The hydraulic fluid is not filtered before being filled in.
The installation is not checked before commissioning (subse-
quent conversion with loss of fluid!).
System components are not bled.
Pressure relief valves are set only slightly higher than the op-
erating pressure (closing pressure differential is not observed).
Pressure controllers of hydraulic pumps are set higher or to
the same pressure as the pressure relief valve.
The flushing time of servo systems is not adhered to.
Abnormal pump noise is ignored (cavitation, leaking suction
lines, too much air in the hydraulic fluid).
Transversal loads on cylinder piston rods are not observed (in-
stallation error!).
Hydraulic cylinders are not bled (damage to seals!)
Limit switches are set too low.
The switching hysteresis of pressure switches is not taken into
account when settings are made.
Hydraulic pump and hydraulic motor housings are not filled
with hydraulic fluid prior to commissioning.
Settings are not documented.
Adjustment spindles are not secured or sealed.
Unnecessary personnel present during commissioning of the
system.
4. Maintenance
According to DIN 31 051 the term maintenance includes the
following fields of activity:
Inspection
Measures to recognise and assess the actual situation, i.e. rec-
ognise how and why the so-called wear reserve continues to
decrease.
Maintenance
Measures to preserve the nominal conditions, i.e. to take pre-
cautions in order that the reduction in the wear reserve dur-
ing the useful life is kept as low as possible.
Repair
Measures to restore the nominal condition, i.e. compensate
for reduction in performance and restore the wear reserve.
Maintenance measures must be planned and taken in accord-
ance with the operating time, the consequences of a failure and
the required availability.
4.1 Inspection
The individual points to be inspected should be summarised
for a specific system in so-called inspection lists in order that
the inspections can be carried out adequately by employees
with different qualification levels.
Important points of inspection are:
Checking the hydraulic fluid level in the tank.
Checking the heat exchanger (air, water) for effectiveness.
Checking the system for external leakage (visual inspection).
Checking the hydraulic fluid temperature during operation.
Checking pressures
Amount of leakage
Checking the cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid
Caution!
Visual inspections can only give an approximation (clouding
of the hydraulic fluid, darker appearance than at the time of
filling, sediments in the fluid tank).
If conventional particle counting is impossible, the following three
methods can be used for establishing the fluid cleanliness:
Particle counts using electronic counting and sorting equip-
ment.
Microscopic examination.
Gravimetric establishment of solids by means of finest filtration
of a certain fluid volume (e.g. 100 ml) and weighing of the
filter paper before and after the filtration process. This allows
the establishment of the amount of solid particles in mg/l.
Check the contamination of filters. A visual inspection of deep
filters, which are widely used today, is no longer possible.
Analyse the chemical properties of the hydraulic fluid.
Check the temperature at points where bearings are located.
Check the generation of noise.
Test performance and velocity.
Inspect pipes and hoses.
Caution!
Damaged pipes and hoses must be immediately replaced.
Inspect accumulator stations.
4.2 Maintenance
In practice, inspection, maintenance and repair work is not as
strictly separated as the definitions may suggest. Servicing is
often done in conjunction with inspections.
For safety reason, pipe fittings, connections and components
must not be loosened or removed as long as the system is
pressurised.
Important service work is:
Create a maintenance book
We recommend that a maintenance book is created to lay
down the parts to be inspected.
Check the hydraulic fluid level
continuously during commissioning
shortly after commissioning
later, at weekly intervals
Inspect filters
during commissioning every two to three hours and, if nec-
essary, replace them.
daily during the first week and replace them as required.
After one week, the filters should be cleaned as required.
Maintenance of suction filters:
Suction filters require particularly thorough servicing. After
the running-in period, they must be inspected at least once
a week and cleaned, if necessary.
108
RE 07 900/12.02 4/4
Bosch Rexroth AG
Telefon 0 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax 0 93 52 / 18-23 58 Telex 6 89 418-0
Cambs, PE19 2ES
Tel: 0 14 80/22 32 56
Fax: 0 14 80/21 90 52
E-mail: info@rexroth.co.uk
The data specified above only serve to describe the
product. No statements concerning a certain condition
or suitability for a certain application can be derived
from our information. The details stated do not release
you from the responsibility for carrying out your own
assessment and verification. It must be remembered that
our products are subject to a natural process of wear
and ageing.
Service the system fluid
Maintenance intervals depend on the following operating
factors:
- Hydraulic fluid condition (e.g. water in oil, strongly aged oil)
- Operating temperature and oil fill
We recommend that the fluid be changed in dependence
upon an oil analysis. With systems whose oil is not analysed
at regular intervals the fluid should be replaced every 2000
to 4000 operating hours at the latest.
Drain the system fluid at operating temperature and change it.
Severely aged or contaminated system fluid cannot be im-
proved by adding new fluid!
Only fill in oil via filters that have at least the same separa-
tion capacity as the filters installed in the system, or use a
system filter.
Take samples of the system fluid to have the type, size and
amount of particles analysed in the lab. Record the results.
Check the accumulator for its pre-charge pressure; for this,
the accumulator must be depressurised on the fluid side.
Caution!
Work on systems that include accumulators may only
be carried out after the fluid pressure was unloaded.
Welding or soldering work or any mechanical work on accu-
mulators is not permitted.
Improper repairs can lead to severe accidents. Repairs on hy-
draulic accumulator may therefore only be carried out by
Rexroth Service service personnel.
The operating temperature must be measured. An increase in
the operating temperature indicates increasing friction and
leakage.
Leakage in the pipework
Leakage, especially with underfloor piping, represents, apart
from loss of fluid, a risk for equipment and concrete floors.
For safety reasons, sealing work on the pipes may only be
carried out when the system is depressurised. Leakage at points
that are sealed with soft seals (O-rings, form seal rings, etc.)
cannot be eliminated by tightening as these sealing elements
are either destroyed or hardened. Sealing can only be achieved
by replacing the sealing elements.
Check main and pilot pressure
Check interval: One week
Document pressure corrections in the maintenance book.
Frequent pressure adjustments indicate, among other things,
wear of the pressure relief valve.
4.3 Repair
Locate and eliminate malfunction and damage.
Fault localisation
A precondition for system repairs is successful, i.e. systematic
fault search.
This requires in any case detailed knowledge of the structure
and the operating principle of the individual components as
well as of the entire system. The required documentation should
be available and easily accessible.
The most important measuring instruments (thermometer, elec-
trical multimeter, industrial stethoscope, stopwatch, rpm coun-
ter, etc.) should also be available in the vicinity of the system,
especially in the case of large systems.
Fault correction
When carrying out any work, observe strictest cleanliness.
Before loosening fittings, clean the surrounding area.
Generally, defective components should not be repaired on site,
since for the proper repair, the required tooling and the required
cleanliness are usually not given on site. On site, only complete
components should be changed whenever possible, in order
to keep the time for which the opened system is exposed to
ambient influences to a minimum,
to keep the fluid loss as low as possible,
to ensure the shortest possible downtime through the use of
overhauled and tested components.
After failed components are located, it is essential to check
whether the entire system or parts of the system have been
contaminated by broken parts or larger amounts of abraded
metal.
4.4 Repair and major overhaul of hydraulic components
Generally, it can be said that only the component manufacturer
can carry out major overhauls in the most efficiently and reliably
(same quality standard, trained personnel, test facilities, war-
ranty, etc.).
Hydraulic cylinders

Mill type cylinders
Hydraulic cylinders for potentially explosive atmospheres CDH2...X.,
CGH2...X.
1X 17334-X 111
Designation Type Series
Data
sheet no. Page
01
02
04
05
06
109
110
1/44
Hydraulic cylinders for
potentially explosive
atmospheres
Series CDH2...X. / CGH2...X.
Component series 1X
Nominal pressure 250 bar (25 MPa)
Overview of contents
Contents Page
ATEX-components for potentially explosive atmospheres 2
Technical data 2
Diameter, weights 2
Areas, forces, flows 3
Telerances 3
Mounting style overview 4
Ordering details 4
Plain clevis at base MP3 6
Self-aligning clevis at base MP5 8
Round flange at head MF3 10
Round flange at base MF4 12
Trunnions MT4 14
Foot mounting MS2 16
H4652_d
Features
Standards: DIN 24333, ISO 6022 and VW 39 D 921
6 mounting styles
Piston : 40 to 320 mm
Piston rod : 25 to 220 mm
Stroke lengths up to 6 m
Contents Page
Flange connections 18
Position measuring system 20
Name plate 24
Equipotential bonding 25
Screwed coupling 26
Self-aligning clevis 27
Fork clevis 28
Mounting block 29
Buckling 31
End position cushioning 34
Spare parts 37
Tightening torques 39
Seal kits 40
RE 17334-X/09.05
Replaces: 12.04
111
2/44 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics CDH2...X. / CGH2...X. RE 17334-X/09.05
Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Standards:
The installation dimensions of the cylinders and mounting styles
meet the requirements of DIN 24333 and ISO 6022.
Nominal pressure: 250 bar
Static proof pressure: 375 bar
Higher operating pressures on request.
The specified operating pressures are only valid for
applications with shock-free operation. If extreme loads occur,
e.g. as happens in high sequence cycles, the fixings and piston
rod thread connections need to be designed for durability
(fatigue strength).
Installation: Optional
Pressure fluid / pressure fluid temperature range:
HL, HLP, HFD-R: 20 C to +80 C
HFA: +5 C to +55 C
Water glycole HFC on request
Viscosity range: 2.8 to 380 mm
2
/s
ISO cleanliness class
Maximum permissible degree of pressure fluid contamination is to
ISO 4406 (c) class 20/18/15.
Stroke velocity: Up to 0.5 m/s (depending on the connection
ports), higher stroke velocities on request
Bleed screw as standard: Secured against unscrewing
Undercoat: The hydraulic cylinders are, as standard, painted
(colour tone gentian blue RAL 5010) with a max. thickness of
80 m. Other colour tones on request.
Acceptance: Each cylinder is tested to Bosch Rexroth standards.
Cylinders whose application data lies outside the stated values
can be offered as a special version.
Cylinders with piston > 320 mm are available on request as an
ABS (Application Based Standardisation) cylinder.
For assembly, commissioning and maintenance cylinders,
please take the operating guidelines stated in RE 07100-B into ac-
count!
Diameter, weights
1)
Weight without position measuring system
Piston Piston
rod
CD cylinder
at 0 mm stroke length
Per 100
mm stroke
length
CG cylinder
at 0 mm stroke length
Per 100
mm stroke
length
AL
mm
MM
mm
MP3
1)
MP5
1)
kg
MP3
2)
MP5
2)
kg
MF3
MF4
kg
MT4
kg
MS2
kg kg
MF3
kg
MT4
kg
MS2
kg kg
40 25/28 7 12 9 9 9 0,9/1,0 10 10 10 1,3/1,5
50 32/36 12 19,5 14 13 13/14 1,3/1,5 16 16 16 1,9/2,3
63 40/45 20 29,5 21 21 21 2,3/2,6 25 25 25 3,3/3,8
80 50/56 32 42,5 35 34 35/36 3,2/3,6 41 40 41/42 4,7/5,5
100 63/70 51 64,5 54/55 54 55/56 5,2/5,7 63/64 63/64 64/65 7,6/8,8
125 80/90 95/96 114/115 96/97 99/100 98/99 8,2/9,2 113/115 115/117 114/116 12,1/14,2
140 90/100 131/132 157/158 132/133 136/137 137/138 10,7/11,9 155/156 158/160 159/161 15,7/18,1
160 100/110 185/186 220/221 184/186 197/199 206/207 12,6/13,9 217/220 231/233 239/242 18,8/21,4
180 110/125 255/258 303/304 253/256 264/267 274/277 14,7/16,8 294/300 305/311 314/320 22,1/26,5
200 125/140 349/352 405/406 332/335 350/353 363/366 19,0/21,5 359/365 377/383 389/396 28,6/33,5
220 140/160 527 625 512 546 518 27,1/30,9 604 638 610 39,1/46,7
250 160/180 673 795 640 677 650 32,7/36,9 761 798 772 48,5/56,9
280 180/200 976 1192 966 1020 918 44,2/48,8 1130 1183 1081 64,2/73,4
320 200/220 1251 1512 1172 1223 1174 55,2/60,4 1354 1405 1356 79,8/90,2
2)
Weight with position measuring system
ATEX-components for potentially explosive atmospheres
Details regarding the explosion protection:
Cylinders without position measuring system
Identification to RL 94/9/EG II 2G EEx c T4X
Identification to RL 94/9/EG II 2D EEx c T135CX
Ambient temperature 20 C Ta +80 C
Cylinders with position measuring system
Identification to RL 94/9/EG II 3D EEx IP67 T135CX
Ambient temperature 20 C Ta +40 C
What you have to know about these operating instructions.
These operating instructions are valid for Bosch Rexroth
hydraulic cylinders in an explosion protected version and
comprises of the following three parts to Material No.
R901030440:
Hydraulic cylinder for potentially explosive atmospheres
Operating instructions RE 07100-X-B
Technical data sheet RE 17334-X
Hydraulic cylinder operating instructions RE 07100-B
Further information concerning the correct use of hydraulic
cylinders can be found in our publication General product
information for hydraulic products RE 07008.
112
F
1
F
3
q
V
3
A
3
A
1
q
V
1
F
2
A
2
q
V
2
Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 17334-X/09.05 CDH2...X. / CGH2...X. 3/44
Areas, forces, flows
Piston Piston Area Areas Force at 250 bar
1)
Flow at 0,1 m/s
2)
rod ratio Piston Rod Annulus Pressure Diff. Pulling Out Diff. In
AL
mm
MM
mm
A
1
/A
3
A
1
cm
2
A
2
cm
2
A
3
cm
2
F
1
kN
F
2
kN
F
3
kN
q
V1
L/min
q
V2
L/min
q
V3
L/min
40
25
28
1,64
1,96
12,56
4,90
6,16
7,65
6,40
31,40
12,25
15,40
19,12
16,00
7,5
2,9
3,7
4,6
3,8
50
32
36
1,69
2,08
19,63
8,04
10,18
11,59
9,45
49,10
20,12
25,45
28,98
23,65
11,8
4,8
6,1
7,0
5,7
63
40
45
1,67
2,04
31,17
12,56
15,90
18,61
15,27
77,90
31,38
39,75
46,52
38,15
18,7
7,5
9,5
11,2
9,2
80
50
56
1,66
1,96
50,26
19,63
24,63
30,63
25,63
125,65
49,07
61,55
76,58
64,10
30,2
11,8
14,8
18,4
15,4
100
63
70
1,66
1,96
78,54
31,16
38,48
47,38
40,06
196,35
77,93
96,20
118,42
100,15
47,1
18,7
23,1
28,4
24,0
125
80
90
1,69
2,08
122,72
50,24
63,62
72,48
59,10
306,75
125,62
159,05
181,13
147,70
73,6
30,14
38,2
43,46
35,4
140
90
100
1,70
2,04
153,94
63,62
78,54
90,32
75,40
384,75
159,05
196,35
225,70
188,40
92,4
38,2
47,1
54,2
45,3
160
100
110
1,64
1,90
201,06
78,54
95,06
122,50
106,00
502,50
196,35
237,65
306,15
264,85
120,6
47,1
57,0
73,5
63,6
180
110
125
1,60
1,93
254,47
95,06
122,72
159,43
131,75
636,17
237,65
306,80
398,52
329,37
152,7
57,0
73,6
95,7
79,1
200
125
140
1,64
1,96
314,16
122,72
153,96
191,44
160,20
785,25
306,80
384,90
478,45
400,35
188,5
73,6
92,4
114,9
96,1
220
140
160
1,68
2,12
380,1
153,96
201,0
226,2
179,1
950,3
384,9
502,6
565,5
447,7
228,1
92,4
120,7
135,7
107,4
250
160
180
1,69
2,08
490,8
201,0
254,4
289,8
236,4
1227,2
502,6
636,2
724,5
590,0
294,5
120,7
152,7
173,8
141,8
280
180
200
1,70
2,04
615,7
254,4
314,1
361,3
301,6
1539,4
636,2
785,4
903,2
753,9
369,4
152,7
188,5
216,7
180,9
320
200
220
1,64
1,90
804,2
314,1
380,1
490,1
424,2
2010,6
785,4
950,3
1225,2
1060,3
482,5
188,5
228,1
294,0
254,4
1)
Theoretical force
(efficiency not taken into account)
Tolerances to ISO 8135
Installation dimensions WC XC
2)
XO
2)
XS
1), 2)
XV
2)
ZP
2)
Stroke
tolerances
Mounting style MF3 MP3 MP5 MS2 MT4 MF4
Stroke length Tolerances
1250 2 1,5 1,5 2 2 1,5 + 2
> 1250 3150 4 3 3 4 4 3 + 5
> 3150 8000 8 5 5 8 8 5 + 8
1)
Not standardised
2)
Stroke velocity
2)
Including the stroke length
113
02
Ordering details
CDH2 MT4
See pages 14, 15
CGH2 MT4
See pages 14, 15
CDH2 MS2
See pages 16, 17
CGH2 MS2
See pages 16, 17
CDH2 MP5
See pages 8, 9
CDH2 MF3
See pages 10, 11
CGH2 MF3
See pages 10, 11
CDH2 MP3
See pages 6, 7
CDH2 MF4
See pages 12, 13
Mounting style overview
1)
= Only piston rod 25 to 110 mm
2)
= Only piston rod 25 to 140 mm
3)
= The trunnion can be located as required.
Dim. XV must always be stated in clear text
in mm in case of an order.
4)
= Only piston 40 to 200 mm
5)
= Only possible in conjuction with position
measuring system T
6)
7)
= Only MF3; MT4; MS2; not standardised
8)
= Seal versions A, B is not possible
Piston rod version H is not possible
End position damping possible from piston rod 45 mm

CG version is not possible
Piston rod 25 mm is not possible
Take the max. stroke lengths on page 21 into account
9)
10)
= Not possible for version MF4
11)
= Standard for seal versions M, T, S and piston 220 to
320 mm
Not possible for seal versions A, B
12)
= For the CG version only one self-aligning clevis is fitted
13)
= For the CG version only one one rod end
14)
= Not standardised
15)
= Take the permissible stroke lengths on pages 31 to 33
into account
16)
= On request for cylinders with poisiton measuring system
114
Ordering details
Differential
cylinder = CD
Double rod
cylinder
7)
= CG

Series = H2
Mounting styles
Plain clevis at base
16)
= MP3
Self-aligning clevis at base
16)
= MP5
Round flange at head = MF3
Round flange at base = MF4
Trunnions
3)
= MT4
Foot mounting
14)
= MS2
Piston (40 to 320 mm)
See page 2
Piston rod (25 to 220 mm)
See page 2
Stroke length in mm
15)
Protection type for the ATEX version
Design safety = XC
(for cylinders without position measuring system)
Increased safety = XE
(for cylinders with position measuring system)
Component series
10 to 19 unchanged installation and connection dimensions = 1X
Connection ports/version
Pipe thread to ISO 228/1
Metric ISO thread
Flange porting pattern to ISO 6162 Tab.1 (
^
=SAE 3000 PSI)
Flange porting pattern to ISO 6162 Tab.2 (
^
=SAE 6000 PSI)
Flange porting pattern to ISO 6164 Tab.1
Flange porting pattern to ISO 6164 Tab.2
6), 10)
9), 10)
4), 10)
10)
=
=
=
=
=
=
B
M
F
D
K
H
Connection port/position at head and base = 1
1
2
3
4 Viewed on the piston rod
= 2
= 3
= 4
Piston rod version
Hard chromium plated = C
Hardened and hard chromium plated
1)
= H
Nickel plated and hard chromium plated
2)
= N
Option 2
B = Flange grease
nipple
C =
5)
Analogue output
4-20 mA
F =
5), 16)
Ana-
logue output 0-10 V
Y =
13)
Enter piston rod
extention LY
in clear text
in mm
W = Without option
Option 1
A = Screwed coupling,
both sides
F =
11)
Guide rings
T =
8)
Position measuring
system (magnetostrictive)
without plug-in connector
Plug-in connector separate
order, see page 23
W = Without option
Seal version
Suitable for mineral oil
to DIN 51524
HL, HLP and HFA
M = Standard seal system
T = Servo quality/reduced friction
A = Chevron seal kits
Suitable for phosphate ester
HFD-R
S = Servo quality/reduced friction
B = Chevron seal kits
End position cushioning
U = Without
D =
4)
Both sides, self-aligning clevis
E = Both sides, adjustable
Piston rod end
H = Thread for self-aligning clevis CGKD
F =
12)
With mounted self-aligning clevis
CGKD
H2 1X
Ordering examples:
CDH2 MT4/63/45/350XC1X/B1CHDMWW, XV = 300 mm
CDH2 MP5/80/56/500XC1X/B1CHDMWW
CGH2 MF3/100/70/500XC1X/B1CHUMWW
115
02
5)
EE

D
A
K
K

M
M

D
WA
A XC + X*
PJ + X* Y
D4
2)
EE
NV
G

1
/
4
1
)
D4
2)

R
A
VE
X
1
X
1
M
R
10)
L
M1
"A"
"A"
L1

C
D
EW
"A-A"
12) 12)
12)

R
A
VE
12) 12)
Plain clevis at base MP3
CDH2 MP3
CDH2 MP3: for seal versions A, B and AL- 160-320 mm
116
Dimensions MP3 (nominal dimensions in mm)
AL
MM
KK A NV D DA D4
2)
EE
4)
EE
4)
Y PJ X1 WA XC
40
6)
25/28 M20x1,5 28 19/22 88 50 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 83 120 41 18 282
50 32/36 M27x2 36 27/30 102 60 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 98 120 48,5 18 305
63 40/45 M33x2 45 32/36 120 78 42 G3/4 M27x2 112 133 56,5 21 348
80 50/56 M42x2 56 41/46 145 95 42 G3/4 M27x2 120 155 69,5 24 395
100 63/70 M48x2 63 50/60 170 125 47 G1 M33x2 134 171 82 27 442
125 80/90 M64x3 85 65/75 206 150 47 G1 M33x2 153 205 100,5 31 520
140
6)
90/100 M72x3 90 75/85 226 170 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 166 219 109,5 31 580
160 100/110 M80x3 95 85/95 265 190 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 185 235 129,5 35 617
180
6)
110/125 M90x3 105 95/110 292 210 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 194 264 143,5 40 690
200 125/140 M100x3 112 110/120 306 235 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 220 278 150,5 40 756
220
6)
140/160 M125x4 125 120/140 355 270 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
244 326 174 42 890
250 160/180 M125x4 125 140/160 395 305 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
257 326 194 42 903
280
6)
180/200 M160x4 160 160/180 445 343 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
290 375 220,5 48 1072
320 200/220 M160x4 160 180/200 490 394 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
282 391 243 48 1080
AL = Piston
MM = Piston rod
X* = Stroke length
Stroke and overall length tolerances to ISO 8135
1)
= Bleeding: When viewed on the piston rod, the
orientation is always offset by 90 to the pipe
connection (in a clockwise direction)
2)
= D4 max. 0.5 mm deep
3)
= M50x2 available on request
4)
= For flange connections see separate table on
pages 18 and 19
AL
MM
L L1 MR M1 CD
H9
EW
h12
RA
7)
f8
VE
7)
RA
8)
VE
8)
40
6)
25/28 53 8 32 32 25 25 52 29 88
50 32/36 61 8 40 40 32 32 63 29 102
63 40/45 74 8 50 50 40 40 75 32 120
80 50/56 90 10 63 63 50 50 90 36 145
100 63/70 102 12 71 71 63 63 110 41 170
125 80/90 124 16 90 90 80 80 132 45 206
140
6)
90/100 149 16 100 100 90 90 145 45 226
160 100/110 150 16 112 112 100 100 160 50 200
9)
50
180
6)
110/125 180 20 129 129 110 110 185 55 220
9)
55
200 125/140 206 20 145 145 125 125 200 61 235
9)
61
220
6)
140/160 253 20 170 178 160 160 235 71 270 71
250 160/180 253 24 170 178 160 160 250 71 300
9)
71
280
6)
180/200 320 30 220 230 200 200 295 88 325 88
320 200/220 320 30 220 230 200 200 320 88 365
9)
88
5)
= Throttle valve only with end position damping "E"
(180 to the bleed point)
6)
= Piston not standardised
7)
= Dimensions for cylinder with seal versions M, T and S
8)
= Dimensions for cylinder with seal versions A and B
9)
= Tolerance: f8
10)
= Grease nipple; cone head form A to DIN 71412
11)
= Associated pin r6
12)
= For equipotential bonding, see page 25
117
02
5)
EE

D
A
K
K

M
M

D
WA
A XO + X*
PJ + X* Y
D4
2)
EE
NV
G

1
/
4
1
)
D4
2)

R
A
VE
X
1
X
1
M
S
10)
LT
M1
"A"
"A"
L1
EP
EX

C
X
1
1
)
Z
Z
"A-A"
12) 12)
12)

R
A
VE
12) 12)
CDH2 MP5
CDH2 MP5: for seal versions A, B and AL- 160-320 mm
Self-aligning at base MP5
118
Dimensions MP5 (nominal dimensions in mm)
AL = Piston
MM = Piston rod
X* = Stroke length
1)
orientation always offset by 90 to the pipe connection
(in a clockwise direction)
2)
3)
4)
pages 18 and 19
5)
= Throttle valve only with end position cushioning "E"
6)
7)
8)
9)
= Tolerance: f8
10)
11)
= Associated pin r6
12)
AL
MM
KK A NV D DA D4
2)
EE
4)
EE
4)
Y PJ X1 WA XO
40
6)
25/28 M20x1,5 28 19/22 88 50 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 83 120 41 18 282
50 32/36 M27x2 36 27/30 102 60 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 98 120 48,5 18 305
63 40/45 M33x2 45 32/36 120 78 42 G3/4 M27x2 112 133 56,5 21 348
80 50/56 M42x2 56 41/46 145 95 42 G3/4 M27x2 120 155 69,5 24 395
100 63/70 M48x2 63 50/60 170 125 47 G1 M33x2 134 171 82 27 442
125 80/90 M64x3 85 65/75 206 150 47 G1 M33x2 153 205 100,5 31 520
140
6)
90/100 M72x3 90 75/85 226 170 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 166 219 109,5 31 580
160 100/110 M80x3 95 85/95 265 190 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 185 235 129,5 35 617
180
6)
110/125 M90x3 105 95/110 292 210 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 194 264 143,5 40 690
200 125/140 M100x3 112 110/120 306 235 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 220 278 150,5 40 756
220
6)
140/160 M125x4 125 120/140 355 270 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
244 326 174 42 890
250 160/180 M125x4 125 140/160 395 305 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
257 326 194 42 903
280
6)
180/200 M160x4 160 160/180 445 343 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
290 375 220,5 48 1072
320 200/220 M160x4 160 180/200 490 394 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
282 391 243 48 1080
AL
MM LT L1 MS M1 CX
11)
H7
EP EX
h12
RA
7)
f8
VE
7)
RA
8)
VE
8)
Z
40
6)
25/28 53 8 32 32 25 22 25 52 29 88 2
50 32/36 61 8 40 40 32 27 32 63 29 102 4
63 40/45 74 8 50 50 40 32 40 75 32 120 4
80 50/56 90 10 63 63 50 40 50 90 36 145 4
100 63/70 102 12 71 71 63 52 63 110 41 170 4
125 80/90 124 16 90 90 80 66 80 132 45 206 4
140
6)
90/100 149 16 100 100 90 72 90 145 45 226 4
160 100/110 150 16 112 112 100 84 100 160 50 200
9)
50 4
180
6)
110/125 180 20 129 129 110 88 110 185 55 220
9)
55 4
200 125/140 206 20 145 145 125 102 125 200 61 235
9)
61 4
220
6)
140/160 253 20 170 178 160 130 160 235 71 270 71 4
250 160/180 253 24 170 178 160 130 160 250 71 300
9)
71 4
280
6)
) 180/200 320 30 220 230 200 138 200 295 88 325 88 4
320 200/220 320 30 220 230 200 162 200 320 88 365
9)
88 4
119
02
VE

R
A
11)
5)
EE

D
A
K
K

M
M

D
A
PJ + X* Y
D4
2)
EE
NV
G

1
/
4
1
)
D4
2)

R
D
X
1
X
1
FC
UC
F
B
ZB + X*
VD
WC NF
45
22,5 22,5 11) 11)
5)
EE

D
A
K
K

M
M

D
A
PK + X* Y
D4
2)
EE
G

1
/
4
1
)
D4
2)

R
D
X
1
X
1
FC
UC
F
B
ZM + 2 x X*
VD
WC NF
45
22,5 22,5
WA + X*
VE

R
A
NV
11) 11)
Round flange at head MF3
CDH2 MF3
CGH2 MF3
10)
: for seal versions A, B and AL- 160 - 320 mm
CGH2 MF3
10)
120
Dimensions MF3 (nominal dimensions in mm)
AL = Piston
MM = Piston rod
X* = Stroke length
1)
2)
3)
4)
pages 18 and 19
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
= Tolerance: f8
10)
= Double roded cylinders are not standardised
11)
AL
MM
KK A NV D DA D4
2)
EE
4)
EE
4)
Y PJ X1 WA
40
6)
25/28 M20x1,5 28 19/22 88 50 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 83 120 41 18
50 32/36 M27x2 36 27/30 102 60 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 98 120 48,5 18
63 40/45 M33x2 45 32/36 120 78 42 G3/4 M27x2 112 133 56,5 21
80 50/56 M42x2 56 41/46 145 95 42 G3/4 M27x2 120 155 69,5 24
100 63/70 M48x2 63 50/60 170 125 47 G1 M33x2 134 171 82 27
125 80/90 M64x3 85 65/75 206 150 47 G1 M33x2 153 205 100,5 31
140
6)
90/100 M72x3 90 75/85 226 170 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 166 219 109,5 31
160 100/110 M80x3 95 85/95 265 190 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 185 235 129,5 35
180
6)
110/125 M90x3 105 95/110 292 210 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 194 264 143,5 40
200 125/140 M100x3 112 110/120 306 235 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 220 278 150,5 40
220
6)
140/160 M125x4 125 120/140 355 270 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
244 326 174 42
250 160/180 M125x4 125 140/160 395 305 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
257 326 194 42
280
6)
180/200 M160x4 160 160/180 445 343 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
290 375 220,5 48
320 200/220 M160x4 160 180/200 490 394 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
282 391 243 48
AL
MM
RD
f8
WC VD NF
js13
PK ZB
max.
ZM FB
H13
FC
js13
UC
-1
RA
7)
f8
VE
7)
RA
8)
VE
8)
40
6)
25/28 52 22 4 25 120 230 286 11 115 138 52 29 88
50 32/36 63 22 4 25 120 244 316 13,5 132 155 63 29 102
63 40/45 75 25 4 28 133 274 357 13,5 150 175 75 32 120
80 50/56 90 28 4 32 155 305 395 17,5 180 210 90 36 145
100 63/70 110 32 5 36 171 340 439 22 212 250 110 41 170
125 80/90 132 36 5 40 205 396 511 22 250 290 132 45 206
140
6)
90/100 145 36 5 40 219 430 551 26 280 325 145 45 226
160 100/110 160 40 5 45 235 467 605 26 315 360 160 50 200
9)
50
180
6)
110/125 185 45 5 50 264 510 652 33 350 405 185 55 220
9)
55
200 125/140 200 45 5 56 278 550 718 33 385 440 200 61 235
9)
61
220
6)
140/160 235 50 8 63 326 637 814 39 435 500 235 71 270 71
250 160/180 250 50 8 63 326 650 840 39 475 540 250 71 300
9)
71
280
6)
180/200 295 56 8 80 375 752 955 45 555 630 295 88 325 88
320 200/220 320 56 8 80 391 760 955 45 600 675 320 88 365
9)
88
121
02

R
A
VE
10) 10)
EE

D
A
K
K

M
M

D
WA
A ZP + X*
PJ + X* Y
D4
2)
EE
D4
2)
R
A
VE
X
1
X
1
VA

B
A
NF
FC
UC
5)
G

1
/
4
1
)
F
B
45
22,5 22,5
NV
10) 10) 10)
Round flange at base MF4
CDH2 MF4
CDH2 MF4: for seal versions A, B and AL- 160 - 320 mm
122
Dimensions MF4 (nominal dimensions in mm)
AL = Piston
MM = Piston rod
X* = Stroke length
1)
2)
3)
4)
pages 18 and 19
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
= Tolerance: f8
10)
AL
MM
KK A NV D DA D4
2)
EE
4)
EE
4)
Y PJ X1 WA
40
6)
25/28 M20x1,5 28 19/22 88 50 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 83 120 41 18
50 32/36 M27x2 36 27/30 102 60 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 98 120 48,5 18
63 40/45 M33x2 45 32/36 120 78 42 G3/4 M27x2 112 133 56,5 21
80 50/56 M42x2 56 41/46 145 95 42 G3/4 M27x2 120 155 69,5 24
100 63/70 M48x2 63 50/60 170 125 47 G1 M33x2 134 171 82 27
125 80/90 M64x3 85 65/75 206 150 47 G1 M33x2 153 205 100,5 31
140
6)
90/100 M72x3 90 75/85 226 170 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 166 219 109,5 31
160 100/110 M80x3 95 85/95 265 190 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 185 235 129,5 35
180
6)
110/125 M90x3 105 95/110 292 210 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 194 264 143,5 40
200 125/140 M100x3 112 110/120 306 235 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 220 278 150,5 40
220
6)
140/160 M125x4 125 120/140 355 270 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
244 326 174 42
250 160/180 M125x4 125 140/160 395 305 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
257 326 194 42
280
6)
180/200 M160x4 160 160/180 445 343 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
290 375 220,5 48
320 200/220 M160x4 160 180/200 490 394 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
282 391 243 48
AL
MM
ZP NF
js13
VA BA
H8
FB
H13
FC
js13
UC
-1
RA
7)
f8
VE
7)
RA
8)
VE
8)
40
6)
25/28 250 25 5 52 11 115 138 52 29 88
50 32/36 265 25 4 63 13,5 132 155 63 29 102
63 40/45 298 28 4 75 13,5 150 175 75 32 120
80 50/56 332 32 5 90 17,5 180 210 90 36 145
100 63/70 371 36 5 110 22 212 250 110 41 170
125 80/90 430 40 6 132 22 250 290 132 45 206
140
6)
90/100 465 40 5 145 26 280 325 145 45 226
160 100/110 505 45 7 160 26 315 360 160 50 200
9)
50
180
6)
110/125 550 50 10 185 33 350 405 185 55 220
9)
55
200 125/140 596 56 10 200 33 385 440 200 61 235
9)
61
220
6)
140/160 690 63 10 235 39 435 500 235 71 270 71
250 160/180 703 63 10 250 39 475 540 250 71 300
9)
71
280
6)
180/200 822 80 10 295 45 555 630 295 88 325 88
320 200/220 830 80 10 320 45 600 675 320 88 365
9)
88
123
02
5)
EE

D
A
K
K

M
M

D
WA
A
PK + X*
10)
Y
D4
2)
EE
NV
G

1
/
4
1
)
D4
2)

R
A
VE
X
1
X
1
U
V
TL TM
r

T
D
TL
XV
12)
ZM + 2 x X*
10)
BD
WA + X*
VE

R
A
14)
14)
14)
5)
EE

D
A
K
K

M
M

D
WA
A
PJ + X*
10)
Y
D4
2)
EE
NV
G

1
/
4
1
)
D4
2)

R
A
VE
X
1
X
1
U
V
TL TM
r

T
D
TL
XV
12)
ZB + X*
10)
BD
14)
14)
14)

R
A
VE
14) 14)

R
A

R
A
VE VE
14) 14)
Trunnions MT4
CDH2 MT4
CGH2 MT4
11)
: for seal versions A, B and AL- 160-320 mm
CDH2 MT4: for seal versions A, B and AL- 160-320 mm
CGH2 MT4
11)
124
Dimensions MT4 (nominal dimensions in mm)
AL = Piston
MM = Piston rod
X* = Stroke length
1)
2)
3)
4)
pages 18 and 19
5)
= Throttle valve only with end position damping "E"
(180 to the bleed point
6)
7)
8)
9)
= Tolerance: f8
10)
= Take the minimum stroke length X*min. into account
11)
= Double roded cylinders are not standardised
12)
= The trunnions can be located as required.
Dim. XV must always be stated
in clear text, in the case of an order, in mm.
Take XVmin. and XVmax. into account.
13)
= XVmid. recommendation:
The trunnions are located in the middle of the cylinder
14)
AL
MM
KK A NV D DA D4
2)
EE
4)
EE
4)
Y PJ X1 WA
40
6)
25/28 M20x1,5 28 19/22 88 50 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 83 120 41 18
50 32/36 M27x2 36 27/30 102 60 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 98 120 48,5 18
63 40/45 M33x2 45 32/36 120 78 42 G3/4 M27x2 112 133 56,5 21
80 50/56 M42x2 56 41/46 145 95 42 G3/4 M27x2 120 155 69,5 24
100 63/70 M48x2 63 50/60 170 125 47 G1 M33x2 134 171 82 27
125 80/90 M64x3 85 65/75 206 150 47 G1 M33x2 153 205 100,5 31
140
6)
90/100 M72x3 90 75/85 226 170 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 166 219 109,5 31
160 100/110 M80x3 95 85/95 265 190 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 185 235 129,5 35
180
6)
110/125 M90x3 105 95/110 292 210 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 194 264 143,5 40
200 125/140 M100x3 112 110/120 306 235 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 220 278 150,5 40
220
6)
140/160 M125x4 125 120/140 355 273 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
244 326 174 42
250 160/180 M125x4 125 140/160 395 305 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
257 326 194 42
280
6)
180/200 M160x4 160 160/180 445 343 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
290 375 220,5 48
320 200/220 M160x4 160 180/200 490 394 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
282 391 243 48
AL
MM
PK ZB
max.
ZM X*
min.
XV
13)
mitt
XV
12)
min.
XV
12)
max.
BD UV TD
f8
TL
js16
TM
h13
r RA
7)
f8
VE
7)
RA
8)
VE
8)
40
6)
25/28 120 230 286 22 143+X*/2 154 140+X* 38 88 25 20 95 0,8 52 29 88
50 32/36 120 244 316 32 158+X*/2 174 151+X* 38 102 32 25 112 0,8 63 29 102
63 40/45 133 274 357 47 178,5+X*/2 202 167+X* 48 120 40 32 125 1 75 32 120
80 50/56 155 305 395 58 197,5+X*/2 226,5 180,5+X* 58 150 50 40 150 1 90 36 145
100 63/70 171 340 439 79 219,5+X*/2 259 195+X* 78 175 63 50 180 1,2 110 41 170
125 80/90 205 396 511 91 255,5+X*/2 301 225+X* 98 220 80 63 224 1,2 132 45 206
140
6)
90/100 219 430 551 121 275,5+X*/2 336 230+X* 118 240 90 70 265 1,5 145 45 226
160 100/110 235 467 605 142 302,5+X*/2 373,5 251,5+X* 128 270 100 80 280 1,5 160 50 200
9)
50
180
6)
110/125 264 510 652 158 326+X*/2 405 267+X* 138 310 110 90 320 1,5 185 55 220
9)
55
200 125/140 278 550 718 204 359+X*/2 461 277+X* 178 320 125 100 335 1,5 200 61 235
9)
61
220
6)
140/160 326 637 814 200 407+X*/2 507 307+X* 180 370 160 125 385 1,5 235 71 270 71
250 160/180 326 650 840 210 420+X*/2 525 315+X* 180 410 160 125 425 1,5 250 71 300
9)
71
280
6)
180/200 375 752 955 241 477,5+X*/2 598 357+X* 220 460 200 160 480 2 295 88 325 88
320 200/220 391 760 955 245 477,5+X*/2 600 355+X* 220 510 200 160 530 2 320 88 365
9)
88
125
02
5)
EE

D
A
K
K

M
M

D
WA
A
PJ + X*
10)
Y
D4
2)
EE
NV
G

1
/
4
1
)
D4
2)

R
A
VE
X
1
X
1
US
SB
L
H
L
1
TS
S
T
XS
ZB + X*
10)
SS + X*
10)
S1
S S
S1
12)
13)
13)
13)

R
A
VE
13) 13)
5)
EE

D
A
K
K

M
M

D
WA
A
PK + X*
10)
Y
D4
2)
EE
NV
G

1
/
4
1
)
D4
2)

R
A
VE
X
1
X
1
WA + X*
VE

R
A
US
SB
L
H
L
1
TS
S
T
XS
ZM + 2 x X*
10)
SS + X*
10)
S1
S S
S1
12)
13)
13)
13)

R
A

R
A
VE VE
13) 13)
Foot mounting MS2
CDH2 MS2
2)
CGH2 MS2
11)
CDH2 MS2: for seal versions A, B and AL- 160-320 mm
CGH2 MS2
11)
: for seal versions A, B and AL- 160-320 mm
126
Dimensions MS2 (nominal dimensions in mm)
AL = Piston
MM = Piston rod
X* = Stroke length
1)
2)
3)
4)
pages 18 and 19
5)
= Throttle valve only for end position cushioning "E"
6)
7)
8)
9)
= Tolerance: f8
10)
= Take the minimum stroke length X*min. into account
11)
= Not standardised
12)
= 2 mm deep counter bore for the DIN 912 S.H.C.S.
The screws must not be subjected to shear loads. The
forces have to be distributed by keys
13)
AL
MM
KK A NV D DA D4
2)
EE
7)
EE
7)
Y PJ X1 WA
40
6)
25/28 M20x1,5 28 19/22 88 50 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 83 120 41 18
50 32/36 M27x2 36 27/30 102 60 34 G1/2 M22x1,5 98 120 48,5 18
63 40/45 M33x2 45 32/36 120 78 42 G3/4 M27x2 112 133 56,5 21
80 50/56 M42x2 56 41/46 145 95 42 G3/4 M27x2 120 155 69,5 24
100 63/70 M48x2 63 50/60 170 125 47 G1 M33x2 134 171 82 27
125 80/90 M64x3 85 65/75 206 150 47 G1 M33x2 153 205 100,5 31
140
6)
90/100 M72x3 90 75/85 226 170 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 166 219 109,5 31
160 100/110 M80x3 95 85/95 265 190 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 185 235 129,5 35
180
6)
110/125 M90x3 105 95/110 292 210 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 194 264 143,5 40
200 125/140 M100x3 112 110/120 306 235 58 G1 1/4 M42x2 220 278 150,5 40
220
6)
140/160 M125x4 125 120/140 355 270 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
244 326 174 42
250 160/180 M125x4 125 140/160 395 305 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
257 326 194 42
280
6)
180/200 M160x4 160 160/180 445 343 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
290 375 220,5 48
320 200/220 M160x4 160 180/200 490 394 65 G1 1/2 M48x2
3)
282 391 243 48
AL
MM
PK XS ZB
max.
ZM SS X*
10)
min.
S S1 SB
H13
ST TS
js13
US
-1
LH L1 RA
7)

f8
VE
7)
RA
8)
VE
8)
40
6)
25/28 120 118 230 286 50 1 30 15 11 32 110 135 45 89 52 29 88
50 32/36 120 135,5 244 316 45 1 35 17,5 11 37 130 155 55 106 63 29 102
63 40/45 133 154 274 357 49 1 40 20 13,5 42 150 180 65 125 75 32 120
80 50/56 155 171,5 305 395 52 2 50 25 17,5 47 180 220 75 147,5 90 36 145
100 63/70 171 189 340 439 61 3 60 30 22 57 210 255 90 175 110 41 170
125 80/90 205 218 396 511 75 1 70 35 26 67 255 305 105 208 132 45 206
140
6)
90/100 219 240,5 430 551 70 19 85 42,5 30 72 290 350 115 228 145 45 226
160 100/110 235 270 467 605 65 44 105 52,5 33 77 330 400 135 267,5 160 50 200
9)
50
180
6)
110/125 264 291,5 510 652 69 50 115 57,5 40 92 360 440 150 296 185 55 220
9)
55
200 125/140 278 322,5 550 718 73 56 125 62,5 40 97 385 465 160 313 200 61 235
9)
61
220
6)
140/160 326 369,5 637 814 75 100 155 77,5 45 102 445 530 185 362,5 235 71 270 71
250 160/180 326 382,5 650 840 75 100 155 77,5 52 112 500 600 205 402,5 250 71 300
9)
71
280
6)
180/200 375 415,5 752 955 124 51 155 77,5 52 142 550 650 235 457,5 295 88 325 88
320 200/220 391 435 760 955 85 125 190 95 62 142 610 730 255 500 320 88 365
9)
88
127
02
PJ + X*
X
1
Y
X
1
X
1
X
1
Y PK + X*
w
c
d
3
d
1
w
w
d
3
d
1
Flange connections
CDH2
CGH2
Porting pattern for rectangular flanges to ISO 6162 table 1
(
^
= SAE 3000 PSI) and table 2 (
^
= SAE 6000 PSI)
Porting pattern for square flanges to ISO 6164
tables 1 and 2
128
Flange connections (nominal dimensions in mm)
For main dimensions see pages 6 to 17
AL = Piston
X* = Stroke length
1)
= Thread depth for seal versions M, T and S
2)
= Thread depth for seal versions A and B
3)
= Max. operating pressure for associated flanges in bar
4)
= Flange porting pattern to ISO 6162 Tab.1 relates to a
flange porting pattern to SAE 3000 PSI
5)
= Flange porting pattern to ISO 6162 Tab.2 relates to a
flange porting pattern to SAE 6000 PSl
AL Version F
ISO 6162 Tab.1 (200 - 350 bar) (
^
= SAE 3000 PSI)
Version K
ISO 6164 Tab.1 (250 bar)
Y PJ
PK
X1 d
3

d
3
4)
c
0,25
w
0,25
d
1
t
1
1)
t
1
2)
p
3)
Y PJ
PK
X1 d
3

w
0,25
d
1
t
1
1)
t
1
2)
p
3)
40 82 122 40,5 10 24,7 M6 12,5 10 250
50 97 122 48 10 24,7 M6 12,5 12,5 250
63 111 135 55 13 1/2 38,1 17,5 M8 16 16 350 111 135 57 13 29,7 M8 16 16 250
80 123,5 148 68 13 1/2 38,1 17,5 M8 16 16 350 123,5 148 69,5 13 29,7 M8 16 16 250
100 133 173 79 19 3/4 47,6 22,3 M10 20 20 350 133 173 81,5 19 35,4 M8 16 16 250
125 153 205 98 25 1 52,4 26,2 M10 20 20 350 157 197 100 19 35,4 M8 16 16 250
140 162 227 107 32 1 1/4 58,7 30,2 M10 20 20 250 162 227 109 25 43,8 M10 20 20 250
160 181,5 242 127 32 1 1/4 58,7 30,2 M10 20 20 250 181,5 242 128,5 25 43,8 M10 20 20 250
180 193 266 139 38 1 1/2 69,9 35,7 M12 24 24 200 194 264 142 32 51,6 M12 24 24 250
200 219 280 146,5 38 1 1/2 69,9 35,7 M12 24 24 200 220 278 148,5 32 51,6 M12 24 24 250
AL Version D
ISO 6162 Tab.2 (400 bar) (
^
= SAE 6000 PSI)
Version H
ISO 6164 Tab.2 (400 bar)
Y PJ
PK
X1 d
3

d
3
5)
c
0,25
w
0,25
d
1
t
1
1)
t
1
2)
p
3)
Y PJ
PK
X1 d
3

w
0,25
d
1
t
1
1)
t
1
2)
p
3)
40 82 122 40,5 10 24,7 M6 12,5 10 400
50 97 122 48 10 24,7 M6 12,5 12,5 400
63 111 135 57 13 29,7 M8 16 16 400
80 120 155 67 13 1/2 40,5 18,2 M8 16 14 400 123,5 148 69,5 13 29,7 M8 16 16 400
100 134 171 80,5 13 1/2 40,5 18,2 M8 16 16 400 133 173 81,5 19 35,4 M8 16 16 400
125 153 205 97 19 3/4 50,8 23,8 M10 20 20 400 157 197 100 19 35,4 M8 16 16 400
140 162 227 107 25 1 57,2 27,8 M12 24 24 400 162 227 109 25 43,8 M10 20 20 400
160 181,5 242 127 25 1 57,2 27,8 M12 24 24 400 181,5 242 128,5 25 43,8 M10 20 20 400
180 194 264 139,5 32 1 1/4 66,6 31,8 M14 26 26 400 194 264 142 32 51,6 M12 24 24 400
200 220 278 147 32 1 1/4 66,6 31,8 M14 26 26 400 220 278 148,5 32 51,6 M12 24 24 400
220 244 326 168 38 1 1/2 79,3 36,5 M16 30 30 400 244 326 171 38 60,1 M16 30 30 400
250 257 326 189 38 1 1/2 79,3 36,5 M16 30 30 400 257 326 192 38 60,1 M16 30 30 400
280 290 375 215 38 1 1/2 79,3 36,5 M16 30 30 400 290 375 218 38 60,1 M16 30 30 400
320 282 391 236 51 2 96,8 44,5 M20 36 36 400 282 391 240 51 69,3 M16 30 30 400
129
02
L5 ZB + X*
D
1
2)
D
2
L4
ZP + X*
NF
L6
D
2
L6
L4
D
1
D
1
L3 2) 2)
2)
L5 ZB + X*
D
1
2) 2)
L5 ZB + X*
D
1
2) 2)
XC / XO + X*
L2
H
2) 2)
MP3, MP5
MF3
MF4: AL- 40 - 80 mm MF4: AL- 100 - 320 mm
MT4
MS2
Position measuring system
130
For main dimensions see pages 6 to 17
AL = Piston
MM = Piston rod
X* = Stroke length
X*
max
= Max. stroke length
1)
= Centering ring BA cannot be used
2)
Position measuring system (nominal dimensions in mm)
AL
MM
X*
max
XC XO H ZB ZP NF
js13
L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 D1
max
D2
40

28
1400 447 447 115 239 262 28 124 3 166 166 80 18
50
32
36
1400 470 470 120 254 278 28 132 3 166 166 96 20
63
40
45
2000 526 526 130 299 313 28 150 0 166 166 96 0
80
50
56
2000 580 580 125 332,5 350 32 176,5 0 166 166 96 0
100
63
70
3000 617 617 135 362 390 36 192 8 0 166 138 96 0
125
80
90
3000 693 693 145 410 445 55 227 20 21,5 166 131 96 33
140
90
100
3000 755 755 155 440 485 60 262 15 25,5 166 121 96 40
160
100
110
3000 787 787 165 472,5 525 65 269,5 12,5 25,5 166 113,5 96 40
180
110
125
3000 855 855 175 510 570 70 307 10 32 166 106 96 48
200
125
140
3000 926 926 190 550 616 76 333 10 32 166 100 96 48
220
140
160
3000 1100 1100 205 637 715 88 418 10 38 166 88 96 57
250
160
180
3000 1115 1115 220 650 730 90 420 10 38 166 86 96 57
280
180
200
3000 1295 1295 280 752 857 115 510 10 44 166 61 96 66
320
200
220
3000 1300 1300 300 760 865 115 520 10 44 166 61 96 66
131
02
The contactless, absolute position measuring system is rated
up to 500 bar. Its function principle is based on the magneto-
strictive effect. In connection with this, a torsion impulse is
triggered off when two magnetic fields meet. This impulse is
directed from the point of measurement via the wave guide
inside the measuring scale to the sensor head. The
transmission time is constant and virtually independent of
temperature. It is proportional to the position of the magnet and
can therefore be used as a reference for the actual position
value and is converted into a direct analogue of digital output in
the sensor head.
Position measuring system to ATEX:
RL 94/9/EG Ex II 3 D EXIP67 T70C
Design tested to DIN EN 50281-1
Operating pressure bar 250
Analogue output V 0 to 10
Load resistance k 5
Resolution Infinite
Analogue output mA 4 to 20
Load resistance 0 to 500
Resolution Infinite
Linearity
(absolute accuracy)
Analogue %
mm
0,02 % (with reference to the measurement length)
min. 0,05
Repeatability %
mm
0,001 (with reference to the measurement length)
min. 0,0025
Hysteresis mm 0,004
Supply voltage V DC 24 ( 10 % with an anlogue output)
Current consumption mA 100
Residual ripple % s-s 1
Protection Tube and flange IP 67
Sensor electronics IP 65
Operating temperature Sensor electronics C 40 bis + 75
Temperature co-efficient Voltage ppm/C 70
Current ppm/C 90
132
2 1
3 6
4 5
1)
1)
MF3, MF4, MT4, MS2
1)
For analogue output:
6-pin Amphenol -
Plug-in connector Material No. R900072231
(plug-in connector is not included within the scope of supply, it must be ordered separately)
Position measuring system (analogue output)
Component plug (viewed on the pin side)
Mounting style
Connection allocation
Pin Cable Signal / current Signal / voltage
1 grey 4...20 mA 0 - 10 V
2 pink Gnd Gnd
3 yellow n. c. 10 - 0 V
4 green n. c. Gnd
5 brown +24 V DC (10%) +24 V DC (10%)
6 white Gnd Gnd
MP3, MP5
133
02
1
2
3
4
9
12
10
11
6
5
7
13
14
8
1 2
3
4
9
10
6
5
7
8
11
12
13
14
Name plate
1 Trade mark
2 Material No.
3 Material short text
4 Serial number
5 Area/factory number
6 Manufacturing date
7 Catalogue No.
8 Origin code
9 Customer or manufacturing order
10 Customer material number or additional details
11 CE identification
12 EX protection
13 EX identification 1
14 EX identification 2
15 Test stamp
1)
16 Assembly stamp
1)
1)
Items 15 and 16 must be applied to the component.
Name plate for piston 63 mm to 320 mm
Name plate for piston 40 mm and 50 mm Separate bondable lable for ATEX components
Piston 40 mm and 50 mm
134
KK1 KK1 KK1
KK1 KK1 KK1
KK1 KK1 KK1
KK1
VE

R
A
KK1
KK1
KK1 VE
WA

R
A
LA1
KK1

R
A
1
Equipotential bonding (nominal dimensions in mm)
Mounting ring for equipotential bonding on the piston rod
Piston 40-125 mm
Equipotential bonding on the piston rod
Piston 140-320 mm
Equipotential bonding on the cylinder
Piston 40-320 mm
CDH2
CGH2
Within the scope
of supply
Not within
the scope of
supply
AL = Piston in mm
MM = Piston rod in mm
AL- MM- RA1 LA1 KK1
40
25 48
12 M6
28 50
50
32 56
12 M6
36 60
63
40 68
12 M6
45 72
80
50 80
13 M6
56 85
100
63 95
18 M6
70 100
125
80 110
18 M6
90 120
140 - 320 M8
135
02
G1/4
3
8
20
M16x2
S
W
1
9
For pressure measurement or bleeding.
For installation in the bleed/measuring port. Coupling with
check valve function, i.e. it can also be connected when
pressure is present.
Scope of supply:
Coupling AB 20-11/K1 with NBR seal
Material No. R900009090
Coupling AB 20-11/K1 V with FKM seal
Screw coupling (nominal dimensions in mm)
A
/
F

1
9
136
EN
EU
C
H
L
F
1)
3)
KK
A
V
N
Z

C
N
Z
2)
E
F
M
A
Self-aligning clevis CGKD (nominal dimensions in mm)
ISO 6982
DIN 24338
ISO/DIS 8132
AL = Piston
1)
2)
= Associated pin r6
3)
= The self-aligning clevis must always be screwed
against the shoulder of the piston rod.
Then, the clamping screws must be tightened to the
specified tightening torque.
4)
= Weight of the self-aligning clevis
AL
MM
Type Material No. AV

min.
N
max.
CH
js13
EF
max.
CN
H7
EN
h12
EU
max.
KK LF
min.
Clamping screw
ISO 4762-10.9
M
A
3)
Nm
m
4)
kg
Z
40
25
28
CGKD25 R900323332 29 31 65 32 25 25 22 M20x1,5 25,5 M8x20 25 0,65 2
50
32
36
CGKD32 R900322049 37 38 80 40 32 32 28 M27x2 30 M10x25 49 1,15 4
63
40
45
CGKD40 R900322029 46 47 97 50 40 40 34 M33x2 39 M10x30 49 2,1 4
80
50
56
CGKD50 R900322719 57 58 120 63 50 50 42 M42x2 47 M12x35 86 4 4
100
63
70
CGKD63 R900322028 64 70 140 72,5 63 63 53,5 M48x2 58 M16x40 210 7,2 4
125
80
90
CGKD80 R900322700 86 91 180 92 80 80 68 M64x3 74 M20x50 410 15 4
140
90
100
CGKD90 R900325702 91 100 195 101 90 90 72 M72x3 85 M20x60 410 19 4
160
100
110
CGKD100 R900322030 96 110 210 114 100 100 85,5 M80x3 94 M24x60 710 25,5 4
180
110
125
CGKD110 R900308153 106 125 235 129 110 110 88 M90x3 105 M24x60 710 36,5 4
200
125
140
CGKD125 R900322026 113 135 260 160 125 125 105 M100x3 116 M24x70 710 52,5 4
220
140
160
CGKD160 R900300718 126 165 310 200 160 160 133 M125x4 145 M24x80 710 82,5 4
250
160
180
CGKD160 R900300718 126 165 310 200 160 160 133 M125x4 145 M24x80 710 82,5 4
280
180
200
CGKD200 R900324814 161 215 390 250 200 200 165 M160x4 190 M30x100 1500 168 4
320
200
220
CGKD200 R900324814 161 215 390 250 200 200 165 M160x4 190 M30x100 1500 168 4
Remarks:
The installation dimensions may slightly vary depending on the
manufacturer.
Standards ISO 6982 and DIN 24388 for self-aligning clevises
of series CGKD will be withdrawn upon the introduction of
the revised standard ISO/DIS 8132.
The revised standard ISO/DIS 8132 can result in dimensional
deviations, which could not yet be indicated at the time when
this data sheet was printed.
137
02
1)
CL2
CL1
CM
KK
L
E
C
E

C
K
3)
M
A
b
2)
E
R
Fork clevis CCKB (nominal dimensions in mm)
ISO 8132
AL = Piston
1)
2)
= Associated pin m6;
(the pin and pin retention are included
within the scope of supply)
3)
M
A
= Tightening torque
The plain clevis must always be screwed on up to the
piston rod thread stop. Subsequently, the clamping
screws have to be tightened to the specified torque.
4)
m = Weight of the fork clevis
AL
Type Material No. b

max.
CE
js12
CK
H9
CL1
h16
CL2 CM
A12
ER
max.
KK LE
min.
M
A
3)
Nm
m
4)
kg
40 CCKB 25 R900542845 50 65 25 56 66 25 32 M20x1,5 34 49 1,4
50 CCKB 32 R900542846 65 80 32 70 78 32 40 M27x2 42 57 2,7
63 CCKB 40 R900542847 80 97 40 90 98 40 50 M33x2 52 99 5,4
80 CCKB 50 R900542848 100 120 50 110 118 50 63 M42x2 64 99 9,5
100 CCKB 63 R900542849 125 140 63 140 150 63 71 M48x2 75 157 21,5
125 CCKB 80 R000542850 160 180 80 170 180 80 90 M64x3 94 240 38,2
138
3)
l
3

x

4
5
F
S
N
H
"A"
"A"
l1
CR
HB
K
C
CO
TH
UL
F
N
F
K
l
2
A 0,05
A
1)
Trunnion mounting block CLTB (nominal dimensions in mm)
ISO 8132
AL = Piston
1)
2)
m = Weight of the trunnion mounting block (weight per
pair)
3)
= Mounting surface of the trunnion (inside)
4)
= Mounting blocks are always supplied as a pair
AL
Type Material No. CR

H7
CO
N9
FK
js12
FN
max.
FS
js14
HB
H13
KC
+0,3
l1 l2 l3 NH
max.
TH
js14
UL
max.
m
2)
kg
40 CLTB 25 R900772610
4)
25 25 55 80 12 13,5 5,4 56 45 1,5 26 80 110 2,2
50 CLTB 32 R900772611
4)
32 25 65 100 15 17,5 5,4 70 52 2 33 110 150 4,7
63 CLTB 40 R900772612
4)
40 36 76 120 16 22 8,4 88 60 2,5 41 125 170 7,8
80 CLTB 50 R900772613
4)
50 36 95 140 20 26 8,4 105 75 2,5 51 160 210 14,1
100 CLTB 63 R900772614
4)
63 50 112 180 25 33 11,4 130 85 3 61 200 265 23,4
125 CLTB 80 R900772615
4)
80 50 140 220 31 39 11,4 170 112 3,5 81 250 325 53,1
139
02
2)
S
HB
CO FO
FG
K
C
RG
UX
M
R
1

C
K
SL
CL KL
CM
RF
UK
L
E
F
L
2)
SL
CL KL
CM
UD
RC
UH
TB
S
HB
M
R

C
K
F
L
L
E
1
Fork type mounting block CLCA / CLCD (nominal dimensions in mm)
CLCA to ISO 8132, form B
AL = Piston
1)
m = Weight of the fork type mounting block
AL
Type Material No. CK

H9
CL
h16
CM
A12
CO
N9
FG
js14
FL
js12
FO
js14
HB
H13
KC
+0,3
KL LE
min.
MR
max.
RF
js14
RG
js14
S SL UK
max.
UX
max.
m
1)
kg
40 CLCA 25 R900542864 25 56 25 25 10 55 10 13,5 5,4 10 37 25 90 85 20 69 120 115 3,0
50 CLCA 32 R900542865 32 70 32 25 14,5 65 6 17,5 5,4 13 43 32 110 110 26 86 145 145 5,0
63 CLCA 40 R900542866 40 90 40 36 17,5 76 6 22 8,4 16 52 40 140 125 33 109 185 170 9,6
80 CLCA 50 R900542867 50 110 50 36 25 95 0 26 8,4 19 65 50 165 150 40 132 215 200 15,5
100 CLCA 63 R900542868 63 140 63 50 33 112 0 33 11,4 20 75 63 210 170 48 165 270 230 27,5
125 CLCA 80 R900542869 80 170 80 50 45 140 0 39 11,4 26 95 80 250 210 57 200 320 280 47,0
AL
Type Material No. CK

H9
CL
h16
CM
A12
FL
js12
HB
H13
KL LE
min.
MR
max.
RC
js14
S SL TB
js14
UD
max.
UH
max.
m
1)
kg
40 CLCD 25 R900542882 25 56 25 55 13,5 10 37 25 40 20 59 85 70 113 1,9
50 CLCD 32 R900542883 32 70 32 65 17,5 13 43 32 50 26 86 110 85 143 3,0
63 CLCD 40 R900542884 40 90 40 76 22 16 52 40 65 33 109 130 108 170 5,5
80 CLCD 50 R900542885 50 110 50 95 26 19 65 50 80 40 132 170 130 220 10,6
100 CLCD 63 R900542886 63 140 63 112 33 20 75 63 100 48 165 210 160 270 17,0
125 CLCD 80 R900542887 80 170 80 140 39 26 95 80 125 57 200 250 210 320 32,0
CLCD to ISO 8132, form A
2)
= Associated pin m6 (the pin and pin retention are
included within the scope of supply)
140
1
)
1)
1
)
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
A
L
K
= 0,7 L
C B
L
K
= L L
K
= 2 L
Buckling
Permissible stroke lengths (nominal dimensions in mm)
AL MM Permissible stroke lengths at Max.
available
stroke lengths
Installation 100 bar 160 bar 250 bar
0 45 90 0 45 90 0 45 90
40
25
28
195
385
200
400
215
445
130
295
135
300
140
320
40
215
45
220
55
225
0
50
32
36
380
505
390
525
430
595
280
395
285
405
300
430
195
290
200
295
205
305
2000
63
40
45
480
640
500
660
550
750
365
505
370
515
385
550
255
380
260
385
265
395
80
50
56
590
765
615
800
690
930
455
615
465
630
495
685
330
470
335
475
345
495
100
63
70
750
940
780
985
910
1195
595
775
610
800
660
885
445
605
455
615
470
650
125
80
90
970
1235
1015
1300
1200
1610
780
1030
805
1070
880
1200
595
825
605
840
635
895
45
140
90
100
1075
1335
1130
1405
1360
1770
875
1120
905
1165
1000
1325
675
900
685
920
725
985
3000
160
100
110
1175
1430
1230
1500
1480
1875
955
1195
985
1240
1085
1400
735
955
750
975
785
1040
180
110
125
1250
1620
1310
1710
1570
2160
1010
1365
1045
1420
1150
1620
775
1100
790
1125
830
1205
200
125
140
1435
1795
1510
1900
1860
2450
1180
1525
1220
1590
1365
1840
915
1240
935
1270
990
1370
220
140
160
1620
2075
1710
2200
2180
3000
1360
1810
1415
1890
1630
2280
1090
1510
1120
1560
1200
1730
90
250
160
180
1805
2250
1910
2395
2490
3300
1520
1960
1590
2060
1850
2500
1220
1630
1250
1690
1360
1880
6000
280
180
200
2075
2510
2200
2670
2900
3700
1775
2200
1880
2310
2170
2820
1450
1850
1490
1920
1620
2140
320
200
220
2135
2550
2270
2720
3030
3820
1820
2230
1900
2340
2260
2880
1470
1860
1510
1930
1660
2170
1)
Perm. stroke
length
Mounting styles MP3, MP5
Explanation:
E = Modulus of elasticity in N/mm
2
= 2.1 x 10
5
for steel
l = Moment of inertia in mm
4
for a circular cross-

section area
= 3.5 (safety factor)
L
K
= Free buckling length in mm (dependent on the mounting
style, see sketches A, B, C)
d = Piston rod in mm
= Slenderness ratio
4 L
K
E
= g =
d 0.8 R
e
R
e
= Yield strength of the piston rod material
d
4

= = 0,0491 d
4
64
The permissible stroke length with a flexibly guided load and a
3.5 safety factor against buckling can be obtained from the
appropriate table. With a deviating cylinder installation, the
permissible stroke length has to be interpolated. Permissible
stroke lengths for non-guided loads are available on request.
The calculation for buckling are carried out as follows:
1. Calculation according to Euler
2. Calculation according to Tetmajer
d
2
(3350,62 )
F = if g
4
The influence of the mounting style on the buckling length:

2
E I
F = if > g
L
K
2
141
02
1
)
1)
1
)
1
)
1
)
1)
Mounting style: MF3
Mounting style: MF4
available
stroke lengths
0 45 90 0 45 90 0 45 90
40
25
28
895
1400
915
1415
980
1630
730
1180
735
1205
760
1275
440
970
450
980
510
1010
0
50
32
36
1440
1760
1490
1830
1670
2000
1210
1510
1230
1545
1300
1675
985
1255
995
1270
1025
1320
2000
63
40
45
1735
2000
1800
2000
2000
2000
1475
1830
1510
1880
1620
2080
1215
1540
1230
1560
1270
1640
80
50
56
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
1810
2000
1850
2000
1995
2000
1495
1870
1515
1900
1570
2000
100
63
70
2580
3000
2690
3000
3000
3000
2235
2690
2300
2780
2550
3000
1875
2300
1910
2350
2010
2520
125
80
90
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
2840
3000
2930
3000
3000
3000
2400
3000
2450
3000
2590
3000
45
140
90
100
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
2700
3000
2760
3000
2950
3000
3000
160
100
110
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
2920
3000
2980
3000
3000
3000
180
110
125
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
200
125
140
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
220
140
160
5400
6000
5680
6000
6000
6000
4800
5820
4980
6000
5780
6000
4120
5150
4220
5330
4560
6000
90
250
160
180
5850
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
5270
6000
5500
6000
6000
6000
4600
5650
4740
5850
5250
6000
6000
280
180
200
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
5270
6000
5420
6000
5970
6000
320
200
220
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
5950
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
1)
Perm. stroke
length
available
stroke lengths
0 45 90 0 45 90 0 45 90
40
25
28
325
565
340
590
370
695
245
465
250
475
260
520
105
365
110
370
140
385
0
50
32
36
600
755
625
790
715
950
485
630
495
650
530
715
370
505
375
515
390
540
2000
63
40
45
730
920
765
965
905
1190
600
780
615
805
675
905
470
630
480
645
500
685
80
50
56
910
1125
950
1185
1130
1470
750
960
775
990
845
1120
595
785
605
800
630
850
100
63
70
1120
1350
1175
1430
1460
1860
945
1175
980
1220
1105
1420
770
980
785
1000
835
1090
125
80
90
1430
1750
1510
1855
1910
2490
1225
1540
1270
1610
1450
1910
1000
1300
1025
1340
1100
1470
45
140
90
100
1585
1895
1675
2010
2170
2750
1370
1675
1425
1755
1650
2110
1135
1425
1165
1470
1260
1630
3000
160
100
110
1725
2030
1820
2150
2340
2900
1490
1785
1545
1870
1780
2230
1230
1510
1260
1560
1360
1720
180
110
125
1855
2300
1960
2440
2510
3350
1595
2040
1660
2130
1910
2580
1315
1735
1350
1790
1450
1990
200
125
140
2105
2535
2230
2700
2950
3000
1830
2260
1910
2370
2250
2920
1530
1940
1570
2010
1715
2255
220
140
160
2250
2800
2400
2990
3350
4500
1990
2530
2090
2680
2550
3480
1685
2220
1740
2310
1950
2700
90
250
160
180
2600
3130
2770
3350
3900
5050
2310
2840
2430
3000
3000
3910
1975
2500
2040
2600
2300
3040
6000
280
180
200
2850
3370
3050
3610
4400
5550
2550
3070
2680
3250
3370
4300
2190
2700
2270
2820
2600
3330
320
200
220
3070
3560
3270
3820
4750
5850
2750
3250
2890
3430
3650
4550
2150
2860
2460
2980
2810
3530
1)
Perm. stroke
length
142
1
)
1
)
1)
1)
1
)
1
)
1
)
Mounting style: MT4 (trunnion located in the middle of the cylinder)
Mounting style: MS2
available
stroke lengths
0 45 90 0 45 90 0 45 90
40
25
28
340
590
345
605
365
665
250
470
255
480
260
500
130
365
135
370
145
375
0
50
32
36
600
770
615
795
670
890
470
625
480
635
495
670
355
485
360
490
365
505
2000
63
40
45
740
940
765
975
845
1115
590
770
600
790
630
845
450
610
455
620
465
640
80
50
56
920
1155
950
1195
1055
1375
735
950
750
975
790
1045
570
755
575
765
590
790
100
63
70
1145
1400
1190
1460
1365
1740
940
1180
960
1210
1030
1330
740
955
750
970
775
1015
125
80
90
1470
1820
1530
1910
1780
2320
1220
1550
1250
1600
1350
1780
970
1275
985
1300
1020
1370
45
140
90
100
1640
1980
1710
2080
2020
2570
1370
1700
1410
1755
1540
1970
1100
1400
1120
1430
1170
1515
3000
160
100
110
1780
2110
1850
2210
2180
2710
1485
1800
1520
1860
1660
2080
1190
1480
1210
1510
1260
1595
180
110
125
1910
2405
1990
2530
2340
3000
1590
2065
1635
2130
1780
2400
1275
1710
1295
1740
1350
1850
200
125
140
2180
2660
2280
2800
2740
3000
1840
2300
1890
2380
2090
2720
1490
1915
1510
1960
1590
2100
220
140
160
2490
3000
2510
3170
3150
4230
2050
2640
2120
2750
2400
3260
1685
2240
1720
2310
1835
2530
90
250
160
180
2730
3320
2870
3520
3640
4720
2350
2940
2440
3060
2790
3650
1950
2500
1990
2570
2140
2830
6000
280
180
200
3040
3620
3210
3840
4140
5210
2640
3210
2750
3360
3170
4040
2210
2750
2260
2830
2440
3140
320
200
220
3250
3800
3430
4030
4455
5500
2820
3370
2930
3530
3410
4250
2360
2880
2420
2970
2620
3290
1)
Perm. stroke
length
available
stroke lengths
0 45 90 0 45 90 0 45 90
40
25
28
825
1305
840
1350
885
1535
645
1085
650
1110
665
1180
370
875
375
885
410
910
0
50
32
36
1330
1645
1375
1715
1560
2030
1095
1395
1120
1430
1190
1560
875
1140
885
1160
910
1210
2000
63
40
45
1610
1980
1670
2000
1950
2000
1345
1700
1380
1750
1490
1950
1085
1410
1100
1435
1145
1510
80
50
56
1980
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
1665
2000
1710
2000
1850
2000
1350
1730
1370
1760
1425
1860
100
63
70
2420
2880
2535
3000
3000
3000
2080
2530
2140
2630
2390
3000
1720
2140
1750
2190
1850
2360
125
80
90
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
2660
3000
2750
3000
3000
3000
2220
2810
2270
2890
2410
3000
45
140
90
100
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
2970
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
2490
3000
2550
3000
2740
3000
3000
160
100
110
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
2690
3000
2750
3000
2950
3000
180
110
125
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
2890
3000
2960
3000
3000
3000
200
125
140
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
220
140
160
5090
6000
5370
6000
6000
6000
4490
5510
4670
5800
5470
6000
3820
4850
3910
5020
4260
5750
90
250
160
180
5520
6000
5860
6000
6000
6000
4940
6000
5170
6000
6000
6000
4270
5320
4410
5520
4920
6000
6000
280
180
200
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
5700
6000
5960
6000
6000
6000
4930
6000
5070
6000
5630
6000
320
200
220
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
5890
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
4750
6000
5310
6000
6000
6000
1)
Perm. stroke
length
143
02
M
m
p
s
v
v
1
v
2
p
s s
d
v
1
v
2
p
s s
d
m
m

Formulas:
m = Moved mass in kg
v = Stroke velocity in m/s
kv = See table on page 35
Extending:
Retracing:
p
S
= System pressure in bar
A
1
= Piston area in cm
2
(see page 3)
A
3
= Annulus area in cm
2
(see page 3)
= Angle in degrees with reference to
the horizontal plain
End position cushioning:
The objective is to reduce the speed of a moving mass,
whose centre of gravity lies on the cylinder axis, to a level, at
which neither the cylinder nor the machine, into which the
cylinder is installed, can be damaged. For speeds over
20 mm/s we recommend the use of end position cushioning so
that the energy can be absorbed without the use of any
additional equipment. Checks must always be carried out
whether, also at lower speeds, with high masses end position
cushioning is required.
Cushioning capacity:
When braking masses via the end position cushioning, the
design constricted cushioning capacity must not be exceeded.
Cylinders with end position cushioning can only utilise their full
cushioning capacity when the entire stroke length is used.
With the adjustable end position cushioning E an additional
throttle valve is aded to the D version. The end position
cushioning E makes it possible to optimise the cycle times.
The maximum cushioning capacity can only be achieved when
the throttle valve is fully closed.
The calculation depends on the factors of weight, velocity,
system pressure and installation position. Therefore, the
variable D
m
is to be calculated from weight and speed, the
variable D
p
from system pressure and installation position.
These variables are then used to verify the permissible
cushioning performance in the cushioning capacity diagram.
The interception point of the variables D
m
and D
p
must always
be below the cushioning capacity curve of the selected
cylinder. The values in the diagram refer to an average oil
temperature of + 45 to +65 C and with a closed throttle valve.
For special applications with very short stroke times, high
speeds or masses, special cylinders with special end position
cushioning can be offered on request.
When fixed or adjustable end stops are used, then special
measures have to be taken!
m
D
m
= ;
10
K
K = kv (0,5v)
m 9,81 sin
D
p
= p
S

A
1
10
m 9,81 sin
D
p
= p
S
+
A
3
10
Damping length in mm
AL mm 40 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 220 250 280 320
Head side 21 20 23 25 25 25 33 33 37 37 76 81 86 90
Base side 21 20 23 25 25 25 33 33 37 37 76 81 86 90
144
1000000
100000
10000
1000
100
10
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
320
280
250
220
200
180
160
140
125
100
80
63
50
40
1
AL mm 40 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200 220 250 280 320
kv 1 2,85 2,97 2,56 2,82 3,51 3,02 2,53 2,65 2,91 2,76 2,85 2,95 3,11 3,13
kv 2 3,1 3,25 2,85 2,85 3,52 2,91 2,53 2,93 2,95 2,95 2,93 3,1 3,12 3,07
kv 3 2,95 3,1 2,73 3,1 3,51 2,95 2,51 2,91 2,95 2,91 2,93 2,93 3,15 3,25
AL = Piston
1)
If, for standard applications, the calculated interception point
from D
m
and D
p
is within the indicated area, then we
recommend that a cylinder is used without end position
cushioning.
Cushioning capacity: Extending
D
m

D
p

1)
145
02
10000000
1000000
100000
10000
1000
100
10
40 80 120 160 200 240 20 60 100 140 180 220
2
320/200
280/180
250/160
220/140
200/125
180/110
160/100
140/90
125/80
100/63
80/50
60/40
50/32
40/25
10000000
1000000
100000
10000
1000
100
10
40 80 120 160 200 240 20 60 100 140 180 220
3
125/90
100/70
80/56
63/45
50/36
40/28
320/220
280/200
250/180
220/160
200/140
180/125
160/110
140/100
1)
If, for standard applicaions, the calculated interception point
from D
m
and D
p
is within the indicated area, then we
recommend that a cylinder is used without end position
cushioning.
Cushioning capacity: Retracing
D
m

D
p

D
m

D
p

1)
1)
146
1 18 4 7 3 18 5 7 2
6 18 18 6 18
11
10 12
14
16
17 17
Spare parts
CDH2...X.
Piston rod Piston
"M"
"A / B"
"T / S "
"M / T / S "
"A / B"
1 Head
2 Base
3 Barrel
4 Piston rod
5 Piston
6 Cushioning bush
7 Flange
10 Base MP3
11 Base MP5
12 Round flange MF3
14 Round flange MF4
16 Trunnion MT4
17 Foot MS2
18 Seal kit:
Wiper
Rod seal
Piston seal
O-ring
Guide bush
Equipotential bonding
(must be connected)
147
02
1 18 4 7 3 18 5 7
6 18 18 6 18
18 1
12 16
17
17
Spare parts
CGH2...X.
Piston rod Piston
"M"
"A / B"
"T / S "
"M / T / S "
"A / B"
1 Head
3 Barrel
4 Piston rod
5 Piston
6 Cushioning bush
7 Flange
12 Round flange MF3
16 Trunnion MT4
17 Foot MS2
18 Seal kit:
Wiper
Rod seal
Piston seal
O-ring
Guide bush
Equipotential bonding
(must be connected)
148
Series Piston Piston rod Screw Quantity Grade Tightening torque
CDH2 / CGH2 160
100
M10 16 10.9 60 Nm
110
CDH2 / CGH2 180
110
M12 16 10.9 80 Nm
125
CDH2 / CGH2 200
125
M12 16 10.9 90 Nm
140
CDH2 / CGH2 220
140
M12
16
10.9 90 Nm
160 24
CDH2 / CGH2 250
160
M12 24 10.9 90 Nm
180
CDH2 / CGH2 280
180
M12 24 10.9 90 Nm
200
CDH2 / CGH2 320
200 M12 24
10.9
90 Nm
220 M16 16 230 Nm
Screws: Seal cover (Pos. 3)
3
Tightening torques
Series Piston Screw Quantity Grade Tightening torque
CDH2 / CGH2 40 M8 4 10.9 23 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 50 M8 8 10.9 20 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 63 M8 8 10.9 30 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 80 M10 8 10.9 55 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 100 M12 8 10.9 100 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 125 M16 8 10.9 200 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 140 M16 12 10.9 170 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 160 M16 12 10.9 220 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 180 M20 12 10.9 350 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 200 M20 12 10.9 410 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 220 M20 16 10.9 460 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 250 M24 16 10.9 700 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 280 M30 12 10.9 1700 Nm
CDH2 / CGH2 320 M30 16 10.9 1500 Nm
Screws: Head and base (Pos. 1 and 2)
1
2
Only for seal versions "A" and "B"
149
02
Seal kits
1)

CDH2...X Standard
AL = Piston in mm
1)
= Seal kits for position measuring system,
se pa ra te Material No.
AL MM Material No. for seal version
M T T S B
40
25 R901010141 R901010143 R901010145 R901010146 R901010147
28 R900851087 R900858841 R900859445 R900861001 R900859770
50
32 R900860274 R900860275 R900860929 R900861003 R900860939
36 R900849392 R900860277 R900851515 R900861004 R900860940
63
40 R900859509 R900860279 R900851637 R900861006 R900860941
45 R900847956 R900847855 R900851638 R900861007 R900859678
80
50 R900857129 R900860281 R900856092 R900861009 R900860943
56 R900850905 R900856180 R900854718 R900861010 R900851205
100
63 R900860283 R900860284 R900856093 R900861012 R900860945
70 R900853382 R900860285 R900856094 R900861013 R900860946
125
80 R900860287 R900860288 R900860931 R900861015 R900860950
90 R900857949 R900856102 R900856095 R900861016 R900855464
140
90 R900858281 R900860289 R900860932 R900861017 R900860951
100 R900853965 R900860290 R900856096 R900849080 R900860952
160
100 R900855683 R900860291 R900860468 R900861018 R900860953
110 R900851146 R900857536 R900860933 R900861019 R900860954
180
110 R900856497 R900852561 R900860934 R900861020 R900860955
125 R900848603 R900860292 R900860935 R900861021 R900860956
200
125 R900860294 R900860295 R900860936 R900861022 R900860957
140 R900856431 R900860293 R900860937 R900861023 R900860958
220
140 R900888100 R900888108 R900888116 R900888132 R900888140
160 R900888101 R900888109 R900888117 R900888133 R900888141
250
160 R900888102 R900888110 R900888118 R900888134 R900888142
180 R900888103 R900888111 R900888119 R900888135 R900888143
280
180 R900888104 R900888112 R900888120 R900888136 R900888144
200 R900888105 R900888113 R900888121 R900888137 R900888145
320
200 R900888106 R900888114 R900888122 R900888138 R900888146
220 R900888107 R900888115 R900888123 R900888139 R900888147
150
CGH2...X Standard
Seal kits
AL = Piston in mm
AL MM Material No. for seal version
M T A S B
40
25 R901010159 R901010161 R901010162 R901010169 R901010170
28 R900867252 R900868889 R900866747 R900868943 R900867133
50
32 R900867254 R900868891 R900866749 R900868945 R900857135
36 R900864930 R900868892 R900866750 R900868946 R900867136
63
40 R900867261 R900868894 R900866752 R900868948 R900867138
45 R900867262 R900868895 R900866753 R900868949 R900867139
80
50 R900867264 R900868897 R900866755 R900868951 R900867141
56 R900867265 R900868898 R900866756 R900868952 R900867142
100
63 R900867267 R900868900 R900866758 R900868954 R900867144
70 R900867268 R900868901 R900866759 R900868955 R900867146
125
80 R900860730 R900868903 R900866761 R900868956 R900867148
90 R900867270 R900868904 R900866762 R900868957 R900867149
140
90 R900867271 R900868905 R900866763 R900868958 R900867150
100 R900867272 R900868906 R900866764 R900868959 R900867151
160
100 R900867273 R900868907 R900866765 R900868960 R900867152
110 R900867274 R900868908 R900866766 R900868961 R900867153
180
110 R900867275 R900868909 R900866767 R900868962 R900867154
125 R900867276 R900868910 R900866768 R900868963 R900867155
200
125 R900867277 R900868911 R900866769 R900868964 R900867156
140 R900867278 R900868912 R900866770 R900868965 R900867157
220
140 R900888020 R900888028 R900888036 R900888052 R900888060
160 R900888021 R900888029 R900888037 R900888053 R900888061
250
160 R900888022 R900888030 R900888038 R900888054 R900888062
180 R900888023 R900888031 R900888039 R900888055 R900888063
280
180 R900888024 R900888032 R900888040 R900888056 R900888064
200 R900888025 R900888033 R900888041 R900888057 R900888065
320
200 R900888026 R900888034 R900888042 R900888058 R900888066
220 R900888027 R900888035 R900888043 R900888059 R900888067
151
02
CDH2...X Standard + Option F
CGH2...X Standard + Option F
Seal kits
AL = Piston in mm
AL MM Material No. for seal versions
M+F T+F S+F
40
25 R901010151 R901010154 R901010156
28 R900868999 R900869026 R900869093
50
32 R900869001 R900869028 R900869095
36 R900869002 R900869029 R900869096
63
40 R900869004 R900869031 R900869098
45 R900869005 R900869032 R900869099
80
50 R900869007 R900869034 R900869101
56 R900869008 R900869035 R900869102
100
63 R900869012 R900869037 R900869104
70 R900869013 R900869038 R900869105
125
80 R900869015 R900869040 R900869107
90 R900869016 R900869041 R900869108
140
90 R900869017 R900869042 R900869109
100 R900869018 R900869043 R900869110
160
100 R900869019 R900869044 R900869111
110 R900869020 R900869045 R900869112
180
110 R900869021 R900869046 R900869113
125 R900869022 R900869047 R900869114
200
125 R900869023 R900869048 R900869115
140 R900869024 R900869049 R900869116
AL MM Material No. for seal versions
M+F T+F S+F
40
25 R901010148 R901010149 R901010150
28 R900861025 R900861050 R900861100
50
32 R900861027 R900861052 R900861102
36 R900861028 R900861053 R900861103
63
40 R900861030 R900861055 R900861105
45 R900861031 R900861056 R900861106
80
50 R900861033 R900861058 R900861108
56 R900861034 R900861059 R900861109
100
63 R900861036 R900861061 R900861114
70 R900861037 R900861062 R900861115
125
80 R900861039 R900861064 R900861120
90 R900861040 R900861065 R900861122
140
90 R900861041 R900861066 R900861124
100 R900861042 R900861067 R900861126
160
100 R900861043 R900861068 R900861128
110 R900861044 R900861069 R900861130
180
110 R900861045 R900861070 R900861133
125 R900861046 R900861071 R900861135
200
125 R900861047 R900861072 R900861142
140 R900861048 R900861073 R900861143
152
Seal kits
Only for position measuring system
AL Material No. for seal versions
M / M+F T / T+F A S / S+F B
40 R900885935 R900885937
50 R900894958 R900894979
63 R900894959 R900894980
80 R900894960 R900894981
100 R900894961 R900894982
125 R900894962 R900894983
140 R900894963 R900894985
160 R900894964 R900894986
180 R900894973 R900894987
200 R900894974 R900894988
220 R900894975 R900894989
250 R900894976 R900894991
280 R900894977 R900894993
320 R900894978 R900894994
AL = Piston in mm
153
02
154
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informations
set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. Without their
consent it may not be reproduced or given to third parties.
The data specified above only serves to describe the product. No
statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
application can be derived from our information. The details stated do not
release you from the responsibility for carrying out your own assessment
and verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and ageing.
Bosch Rexroth Teknik AB
Varuvgen 7, lvsj
S-125 81 Stockholm
Telefon +46 (08) 72 79 20 0
Telefax +46 (08) 86 87 21
cyl.hyd@boschrexroth.se
www.boschrexroth.se
Bosch Rexroth SA
BP 37 - Z.I. Les Fourmis
F-74131 Bonneville Cedex
Telefon +33 (0) 4 50 25 35 45
Telefax +33 (0) 4 50 25 35 19
www.boschrexroth.fr
EC Declaration of conformaty
We declare that the product conforms to the directive 94/9/EG explosion protection.
Product description Hydraulic cylinder mill type
Cylinder series CDH2.....X../....
CGH2.....X../....
Applied harmonised standards EN 1127-1, EN 13 463-1, EN 13 463-5
Manufacturer: BOSCH REXROTH AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
97816 Lohr am Main
Deutschland
Lohr am Main, ______________ ____________________________
Bernd Balzer
Technical Manager
December. 2004
Switching valves

Directional poppet valves , direct operated
3/2- and 4/2-way poppet valves
with solenoid actuation M-.SE...XD 6 6X 420 22047-XD-B2 157
with solenoid actuation
E-.SE...XH,
W-.SE...XH 6 6X 420 22047-XH-B2 171
with solenoid actuation M-.SED...XE 6 1X 350 22049-XE-B2 187
with solenoid actuation M-.SED...XN 6 1X 350 22049-XN-B2 203
2/2, 3/2 and 4/2-way poppet valves
with solenoid actuation M-.SEW...XE 6 3X 420 22058-XE-B2 219
with solenoid actuation M-.SEW...XE 10 1X 420 22075-XE-B2 233
with solenoid actuation M-.SED...XN 10 1X 350 22045-XN-B2 245
Directional spool valves , direct operated
4/3, 4/2 and 3/2-way directional control valves
with wet pin DC solenoids WE...B...XH 6 5X 210 23177-XH-B2 261
4/3, 4/2 and 3/2 directional control valves
with wet pin DC or AC solenoids WE...E..XD 6 6X 315 23178-XD-B2 273
4/3, 4/2 and 3/2 directional control valves
with wet pin DC or AC solenoids WE...E..XE 6 6X 350 23178-XE-B2 289
4/3, 4/2 and 3/2-way directional control valves
with wet pin DC solenoids WE...E..XN 6 6X 350 23178-XN-B2 305
Directional spool valves , pilot operated
4/2 and 4/3 directional control valves,
pilot-operated
H-4WEH...XD 10...32 4X, 6X,
7X
350 24751-XD-B2 315
4/2 and 4/3 directional control valves,
pilot-operated
H-4WEH...XE 10...32 4X, 6X,
7X
350 24751-XE-B2 341
Designation Type Size Series
p
max

in bar
Data
sheet no. Page

01
03
03
05
06
155
156
1/14
Type M-.SE 6 ...XD
Nominal size 6
Series 6X
Maximum working pressure 420 bar
Maximum flow rate 12 l/min
RE 22047-XD-B2/03.04
H7140
Information on explosion protection:
Range of application in accordance with the Explosion
Protection Directive and type of protection
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG IM2; II2G
Type of protection of valve solenoid EEx dI; EEx dII CT4
nach DIN EN 50014/50018
ATEX units


These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Bosch Rexroth valves, and consist of
the following three parts:
Part II Technical Data Sheet RE 22047-XD-B2
Part III Product-specific Instructions RE 22047-XD-B3
You can find further information on the correct handling of Bosch Rexroth hydraulic products in our publication
General Product Information for Hydraulic Products, RE 07008.
Mat. No. R901032559
157
03
2/14 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type M-.SE 6XD RE 22047-XD-B2
Overview of Contents
Features
Direct solenoid-operated directional control poppet valve for
proper use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Mounting hole configuration to DIN 24340, Form A6,
without locating hole (standard), subplates must be ordered
separately
Closed port tight and free from leakage
Reliable switching even under longer operating periods
under pressure
Dry pin DC or AC solenoids
Electrical connection with single terminal and cable gland
With emergency override
Contents Page
Features 2
Ordering data and scope of delivery 3
Function, sectional diagram, symbols 4 to 6
Technical data 7
Technical data, information on explosion protection 8
Switching times 8
Electrical connection 9 to 10
Operating limits, characteristic curves 11
Unit dimensions 12 to 13
Installation conditions 14
158
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 22047-XD-B2 Type M-.SE 6XD 3/14
Mineral oil = M
3 service ports = 3
4 service ports = 4
Poppet valve
Nominal size 6 = 6
Series 60 to 69 = 6X
(60 to 69: installation and connection dimensions
unchanged)
Working pressure up to 420 bar = 420
Dry pin, high-power solenoid = L
Ordering data and scope of delivery
Included in scope of delivery:
Valve operating instructions
V = FKM seals
Note:
Take compatibility of seals
and pressure fluid into
account!
No code = without cartridge
check valve,
without cartridge throttle
P = with cartridge
check valve
B12 = throttle- 1.2 mm
Electrical connection
Z2 = solenoid with terminal box
and cable gland,
see section on electrical
connection for details
XD = valve in explosion-proof design,
see information on explosion protection,
page 8, for details
N = with emergency override (standard)
G24 = 24 V DC
W230R = 230 V AC
See page 10 for the ordering data of other
voltages and frequencies
M SE 6 6X 420 L N XD Z2 V
Service ports 3 4
Symbols
A
T P
a b

= U
A
T P
a
b

= C
a b
A
P T
B

= D
B A
T P
a
b

= Y
= available
159
03
Function, sectional diagram, symbols: 3/2-way poppet valve
Example: Type M-3SE 6 C6X/420L.NXDZ2/V
General:
The type M-.SE.. valve is a solenoid-operated directional con-
trol poppet valve. It controls the start, stop and direction of the
flow. It essentially consists of a housing (1), the solenoid (2),
the hardened valve system (3) and the balls (4.1 and 4.2) as
closing elements.
Basic method of operation:
In initial position, ball (4.1) is pressed against the seat by the
spring (7), in switched position ball (4.2) is pressed against
the seat by the solenoid (2). The force from the solenoid (2)
is exerted via the lever (17) and the ball (5) on the actuating
piston (6), which is sealed on two sides. The space between
the two seal elements is connected to port P. This provides the
valve system (3) with pressure compensation in the face of the
actuating forces (solenoid or return spring). This in turn permits
the valves to be used for pressures of up to 420 bar.
Notes
3/2-way poppet valves have a switching underlap. This
is why port T must always be connected. In this way, ports
P-A-T are connected to one another during the switching
process from the moment at which one valve seat begins to
open to the moment at which the other valve seat closes.
However, this process takes place in such a short time that it
is insignificant in almost all applications.
The emergency override (10) allows the valve to switch with-
out energizing the solenoid.
Care must be taken to ensure that the stated maximum flow
must not be exceeded. If necessary, use a cartridge throttle
to limit the flow (see page 6).
In order to ensure that the valve switches or remains in its
switched position reliably, the pressure must be P A T
(based on design).
Ports P, A and T (3/2-way poppet valve) are absolutely
fixed according to the tasks they perform. They must not be
swapped or sealed. The pressure fluid may only flow in the
direction of the arrow.
T P A
2
7 1 4.1 3 6 5 4.2
10 17
Symbol U C
A
T P
a b
A
T P
a
b
Initial position P and A connected,
T closed without
leakage
P closed without
leakage, A and T
connected
Switched
position
P closed without
leakage, A and T
connected
P and A connected,
T closed without
leakage
The arrangement of the seats permits the following possibilities:
160
Switched position:
P is connected to A. Since the pump pressure acts on the
large surface of the control piston (12) through A, the ball (13)
is pressed onto the seat (16). B is now connected to T and P
to A. The ball (13) in the Plus-1 plate has positive overlap.
The use of the Plus-1 plate and the arrangement of the seats
permits the following possibilities:
Symbol D:
a b
A
P T
B
Symbol Y:
B A
T P
a
b
The function of a 4/2-way poppet valve is achieved by means
of an intermediate plate - the Plus-1 plate - beneath the
3/2-way poppet valve.

How the Plus-1 plate functions:
Initial position:
The main valve is not actuated. The spring (7) holds the ball
(4.1) against the seat (11). Port P is closed and A is connected
to T. In addition, a pilot line leads from A to the large surface of
the control piston (12), so that it is relieved of pressure towards
the tank. The pressure occurring through P now pushes the
ball (13) onto the seat (14). P is now connected to B and
A to T.
Transitional position:
When the main valve is actuated, the piston (8) is pushed
against the spring (7) and ball (4.2) is pressed onto the seat
(15). This closes port T and causes P, A and B to be briefly
connected. In order to avoid changes in pressure when using diffe-
rential cylinders, the annular area of the cylinder must be
connected at A.
Example: Type M-4SE 6 Y6X/420L.NXDZ2/V
T B P A
7 11 4.1
16
14
13
12
15 8 4.2
161
03
Cartridge throttle
If, due to particular operating conditions during the switching
sequences, flows can occur which exceed the valves operat-
ing limit, it is necessary to fit a cartridge throttle.
Examples:
Accumulator operation
Use as pilot valve with internal removal of control fluid.
3/2-way poppet valve (see page 4)
The cartridge throttle is inserted in port P
of the poppet valve.
The cartridge throttle is inserted in
port P of the Plus-1 plate.
Cartridge check valve
The cartridge check valve allows a free flow of oil from P A
and closes the passage from A P without leakage.
The cartridge check valve is inserted in port P
The cartridge check valve is inserted
in port P of the Plus-1 plate.

P P
Function, sectional diagram: cartridge throttle, cartridge check valve
162
Technical data
General
Installation position Optional
Ambient temperature range C -20 +80
Storage temperature range C -20 +70
Permitted vibration
direction of valve axis 20 2000 Hz amplitude 0.032 g
2
/Hz (8 g RMS)
90 to valve axis 20 2000 Hz amplitude 0.05 g
2
/Hz (10 g RMS)
Weight 3/2-way poppet valve kg 5.4
4/2-way poppet valve kg 6.2
Surface protection Valve body Paint, layer thickness max. 100 m
Solenoid Galvanized and passivated olive-green (FeZn8D)
Hydraulic
Maximum surface temperature C See information on explosion protection, page 8
Maximum working pressure Ports A, B, P bar 420
Port T bar 40
Maximum flow rate l/min 12
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524. Rapidly biodegradable
pressure fluids to VDMA 24568 (also see RE 90221), HETG
(rapeseed oil), HEPG (polyglycols), HEES (synthetic ester),
other pressure fluids available on request
Ignition temperature > 180 C
Pressure fluid temperature range C -10 +80 (FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2.8 500
Purity class to ISO code Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure
fluid to ISO 4406 (C) Class 20/18/15
1)
1)
The purity classes stated for the components must be com-
plied with in hydraulic systems. Effective filtration prevents
problems and also extends the service life of components.
For a selection of filters, see catalog sections RE 50070,
RE 50076 and RE 50081.
2)
With correctly installed electrical connection
Electrical
Voltage type DC AC
Available voltages V 24 230
Voltages available on request V 48, 96, 110, 205, 220 100, 110, 120, 200
Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) % 10
Permitted residual ripple % < 5
Cyclic duration factor / duty type to VDE 0580 S1 (continuous operation)
Switching time to ISO 6403 see page 8
Switching frequency 1/h up to 15000 up to 7200
Nominal power at ambient temperature 20 C W 13
Maximum power at 1.1 x nominal voltage and ambient
temperature 20 C
W 15.8
Degree of protection to EN 60529
2)
IP 65
163
03
1)
As the solenoid coils may reach a high surface temperature,
European standards EN 563 and EN 982 on the prevention
of accidental contact must be observed.
Technical data
Switching times t in ms (installation position: solenoid horizontal)
Pressure
p in bar
Flow q
V

in l/min
DC solenoid
Symbols U, C, D, Y
t
on
without tank pressure t
off
U C D Y U C D Y
70 12 35 55 40 60 20 10 25 15
140 12 35 55 40 60 25 10 30 15
280 12 35 60 40 65 30 10 35 15
320 12 35 65 40 70 30 12 35 17
420 12 35 65 40 70 35 12 40 17
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG IM2; II 2 G
Type of protection of valve c (EN 13463-5)
Maximum surface
temperature
1)
C (temperature class) 130 (T4)
Type of protection of solenoid to
DIN EN 50018
EEx dI
EEx dII CT4
Type test certification of solenoid BVS03 ATEX E 300
Special conditions for safe use
Information on explosion protection
Pressure
p in bar
Flow q
V

in l/min
AC solenoid with integral rectifier
Symbols U, C, D, Y
t
on
without tank pressure t
off
U C D Y U C D Y
70 12 20 30 25 35 45 35 50 40
140 12 20 40 25 45 50 35 55 40
280 12 20 50 25 55 65 40 70 45
320 12 20 55 25 60 70 40 75 45
420 12 20 55 25 60 80 40 85 45
164
The type-tested actuating solenoid of the valve is equipped
with a terminal box and a type-tested cable entry.
Properties of terminals and fastening elements
Item Function Connectable conductor cross-section Tightening torque
1 Operating voltage connection Single wire 0.75 2.5 mm
2
Finely-stranded 0.75 1.5 mm
2
0.4 0.5 Nm
2 Connection for protective earth
conductor
Single wire 0.75 2.5 mm
2
2
1.2 2.4 Nm
3 Connection for equipotential bonding
conductor
Single wire 4 6 mm
2
Finely-stranded min. 4 mm
2
2.0 4.0 Nm
4 Cover screws 2.0 2.2 Nm
Note:
The electrical connection must
be equipped with a correctly
connected protective earth
conductor (PE )
Cable gland
Lead diameter mm 912
Seal Outer sheath seal
Connecting lead
Lead type Non-armored cables and leads (outer sheath seal)
Temperature range C -20 +110
1
3
4 2
The connection is insensitive to polarity.
Solenoids for connection to alternating voltage are fitted with
an integral rectifier.
165
03
Direct voltage insensitive to polarity Alternating voltage
+()
(+)
Overcurrent fuse and cut-off voltage peak

Note
A fuse appropriate for the solenoids nominal current
(max. 3 x I
nom
to DIN 41571 or IEC 60127) must be connected
to each valve solenoid on the line side, to protect against short
circuit. The breaking capacity of the fuse must be the same or
greater than the short-circuit current of the supply source.
When inductance is cut off this gives rise to voltage peaks,
which can lead to disturbances in the connected trigger
electronics. For this reason, the actuating solenoids contain
an interference protection circuit, which dampens this voltage
peak to the voltage value shown in the table.
Voltage data in
type code of valve
Nominal voltage of
solenoid coil
Nominal current of
solenoid coil
Recommended
back-up fuse,
medium time-lag to
DIN 41571
Max. voltage value
on cut-off
Interference sup-
pression circuit
G24 24 V DC 0.542 A DC 1 A 90 V
Bi-directional
suppressor diode
G48 48 V DC 0.271 A DC 630 mA 200 V
G96 96 V DC 0.135 A DC 250 mA 370 V
G110 110 V DC 0.118 A DC 250 mA 390 V
G205 205 V DC 0.083 A DC 160 mA 750 V
G220 220 V DC 0.059 A DC 160 mA 800 V
W100R 100 V AC 0.140 A AC 250 mA 3 V
Bridge rectifier and
suppressor diode
W110R 110 V AC 0.126 A AC 250 mA 3 V
W120R 120 V AC 0.116 A AC 250 mA 3 V
W200R 200 V AC 0.070 A AC 160 mA 3 V
W230R 230 V AC 0.059 A AC 160 mA 3 V
Circuit diagrams
Poppet valves are to be used in accordance with the symbols
and the designated working pressures and flows (see operat-
ing limits on page 11).
In order to ensure reliable function, attention to the
following points is essential:
3/2-way poppet valves have a switching underlap, i.e.
leakage oil arises during the switching process. However,
this process takes place in such a short time that it is
insignificant in almost all applications.
The stated maximum flow must not be exceeded
(if necessary, use a cartridge throttle to limit the flow).
Plus-1 plate:
When the Plus-1 plate (4/2-way function) is employed,
please note the minimum functional values below:
p
min
= 8 bar, q
V
> 3 l/min.
Ports P, A, B and T are absolutely fixed according to the
tasks they perform. They must not be swapped or sealed
at will.
Port T must always remain connected.
Pay attention to the level and distribution of pressure.
The pressure fluid may only flow in the direction of the arrow.
General information
166
Characteristic curves (measured with HLP46,
oil
= 40 C 5 C and p = 100bar)
Note:
The stated operating limits apply for two directions of flow (e.g.
from P A and simultaneous return flow from B T).
If only one direction of flow is used (e.g. from P A with port
B closed), the permitted operating limit may be considerably
lower due to the flow forces acting inside the valve.
(For applications of this kind, please consult us!)
The operating limit was measured with the solenoid at operat-
ing temperature, 10% under-voltage and without tank back
pressure.
Operating limits (measured with HLP46,
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
W
o
r
k
i
n
g

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

i
n

b
a
r

420
400
200
0
0 6 12
Flow rate in l/min
0 12 10 8 6 4 2
20
15
10
5
0
25
30
2
1
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
0 12 10 8 6 4 2
20
15
10
5
0
25
30
4
2
3
1
1 AT
2 PA
1 AT
2 PA
3 PB
4 BT
without Plus-1 plate (M-3SE..)
with Plus-1 plate (M-4SE..)
167
03
Unit dimensions: Type M-3SE 6.6X/420LG..NXDZ2/V (dimensions in mm)
1 Solenoid
2 Terminal box
3 Emergency override
4 Nameplate
5 Valve fastening bolts
In order to ensure a secure connection, use only the
following valve fastening bolts
4 x cheese-head bolts DIN 912 - M5 x 50 - 10.9;
coated to DIN EN ISO 10683 flZn - 240h -L
coefficient of friction 0.09 - 0.14 to VDA 235-102)
(included in scope of delivery)
6 Same seals for ports A, B and T
Sealing ring for port P
7 Mounting hole configuration to DIN 24340, Form A6,
without locating hole
Subplates (without locating hole)
Type Mat. No.
G 341/01 (G 1/4) R900424447
G 342/01 (G 3/8) R900424448
G 502/01 (G 1/2) R900455110
must be ordered separately.
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
Required surface quality
of mating component
196
146
1
1
6
8
0
1
5
1
3
2 1
57
2
3
4
4
,
5
5,3
10
4
2
4 5
1
4
5
8,4 40,5
63,5
2
3
1
,
7
5
3
1
7 6
0
,
7
5
P
B A
T
168
Unit dimensions: Type M-4SE 6.6X/420LG..NXDZ2/V (dimensions in mm)
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
1 Solenoid
2 Terminal box
4 Nameplate
coated to DIN EN ISO 10683 flZn - 240h -L
coefficient of friction 0.09 - 0.14 to VDA 235-102)
6 Plus-1 plate
8 Mounting hole configuration to DIN 24340, Form A6,
without locating hole
Subplates (without locating hole)
Type Mat. No.
G 341/01 (G 1/4) R900424447
G 342/01 (G 3/8) R900424448
G 502/01 (G 1/2) R900455110
57
196
146
1
1
6
8
0
2
3
4
4
,
5
1
5
1
5,3
10
4
2
8
,
5
4
4
,
5
7
2
6 5
4
8
3
1
1
9
5
,
5
1
4
5
8,4 40,5
63,5
2
3
1
,
7
5
3
1
0
,
7
5
P
B A
T
169
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
2004 by Bosch Rexroth AG, Industrial Hydraulics, 97813 Lohr am Main
by any means, without the prior written authorization of Bosch Rexroth AG.
In the event of contravention of the above provisions, the contravening party
is obliged to pay compensation.
process of wear and aging.
Installation conditions (dimensions in mm)
Single assembly Bank assembly
Subplate dimensions Minimum dimensions
Length 64, width 58, height 25
Minimum cross-section
Height 60, width 85
Thermal conductivity of subplate 38 W/mK (EN-GJS-500-7)
Minimum distance between valve
longitudinal axes
See block diagram below
Bank assembly
Block diagram
Single assembly
90 55

8
5
58 64

2
5
170
1/16
3/2 and 4/2-way poppet valves
Type E-.SE 6 ...XH
Type W-.SE 6 ...XH
Nominal size 6
Series 6X
Maximum ow rate 4 l/min
RE 22047-XH-B2/12.03
H7095
Range of application in accordance with the Explosion Protec-
tion Directive and type of protection
Type of protection of valve solenoid EEx ib II CT6 / EEx ib I
to DIN EN 50014/50020
ATEX units


These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Bosch Rexroth
valves, and consist of the following three parts:
Part I General Information RE 07 010-X-B1
Part II Technical Data Sheet RE 22 047-XH-B2
Part III Product-specic Instructions RE 22 047-XH-B3
You can nd further information on the correct handling of Bosch Rexroth hydraulic products in our publication
General Product Information for Hydraulic Products, RE 07 008.
Mat.-Nr. R901017876
171
03
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type E-.SE 6 ...XH, Type W-.SE 6 ...XH RE 22047-XH-B2
Contents Page
Features 2
Technical data 7 and 8
Information on explosion protection 8
Switching times 8
Electrical connection 9
Operating limits 10
Characteristic curves 10
Features
Mounting hole conguration to DIN 24 340, Form A6,
without locating pin hole (standard), subplates must be
ordered separately
Blocked port tight and free from leakage
under pressure
Wet pin DC solenoids
Electrical connection with:
Single terminal with cable gland
Plug
depending on the valve type
With emergency override
172
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 22047-XH-B2 Type E-.SE 6 ...XH, Type W-.SE 6 ...XH 3/16
Oil in water = E
emulsion
Water = W
3 service ports = 3
4 service ports = 4
Poppet valve
Nominal size 6 = 6
(60 to 69: installation and connection
dimensions unchanged)
Wet pin, = B
high-power solenoid (oil immersed)
V = FKM seals
Note:
Take compatibility of
seals and pressure
uid into account !
check valve,
P = with cartridge
check valve
B12 = Throttle- 1.2 mm
Z2 = Solenoid with terminal box
and cable gland
(for type E.SE 6.. only)
K20ZL = Solenoid with plug
facing valve housing
(for type W.SE 6.. only)
See Electrical connection
section for details
XH = Valve in explosion-proof
design,
see information on explosion protection,
page 8, for details
N = with emergency override (standard)
12 V DC
Nominal current consumption 120 mA = G12-12
(for type E.SE 6.. only)
(for type W.SE 6.. only)
SE 6 6X 420 B N XH
Service ports 3 4
Symbols
A
T P
a b
a b

= U
A
T P
a b
a b

= C
B A
T P
a b a b
= D
B A
T P
a b a b
= Y
= available
173
03
Example: Type E-3SE 6 C6X/420BG12-12NXHZ2/V
General:
The type .-SE.. valve is a solenoid-operated directional control
poppet valve. It controls the start, stop and direction of the
ow. It essentially consists of a housing (1), the solenoid (2),
the hardened valve system (3) and the balls (4.1 and 4.2) as
closing elements.
In initial position, ball (4.1) is pressed against the seat by the
spring (7), in switched position ball (4.2) is pressed against
the seat by the solenoid (2). The force from the solenoid (2)
is exerted via the ball (5) on the actuating piston (6), which is
sealed on two sides. The space between the two seal ele-
ments is connected to port P. This provides the valve system
(3) with pressure compensation in the face of the actuating
forces (solenoid or return spring), and permits the valves to be
used for pressures of up to 420 bar.
Notes:
3/2-way poppet valves have a switching underlap. This
is why port T must always be connected. In this way, ports
PAT are connected to one another during the switching
process from the moment at which one valve seat begins
to open to the moment at which the other valve seat closes.
However, this process takes place in such a short time that it
is insignicant in almost all applications.
The emergency override (10) allows the valve to switch
without energizing the solenoid.
The stated maximum ow must not be exceeded. If neces-
sary, use a cartridge throttle to limit the ow (see page 6).
In order to ensure that the valve switches safely and remains
in its switched position, the pressure must be P A T
(based on design).
Ports P, A and T (3/2-way poppet valve) are absolutely
xed according to the tasks they perform. They must not be
swapped or sealed. The pressure uid may only ow in the
direction of the arrow.
Symbol U C
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
Initial
position
P and A connected,
T blocked without
leakage
P blocked
without leakage,
A and T connected
Switched
position
P blocked
without leakage,
A and T connected
P and A connected,
T blocked without
leakage
2 7 1 4.1 3 6 5
P A T
4.2
10
174
Switched position:
P is connected to A. Since the pump pressure acts on the
large surface of the control piston (12) through A, the ball (13)
is pressed onto the seat (16). B is now connected to T and P
to A. The ball (13) in the plus-1 plate has positive overlap.
The use of the plus-1 plate and the arrangement of the seats
Symbol D:
B A
T P
a b a b
Symbol Y:
B A
T P
a b a b
The function of a 4/2-way poppet valve is achieved by means of
an intermediate plate - the plus-1 plate - beneath the 3/2-way
poppet valve.

How the plus-1 plate functions:
Initial position:
The main valve is not actuated. The spring (7) holds the ball
(4.1) against the seat (11). Port P is blocked and A is connected
to T. In addition, a pilot line leads from A to the large surface of
the control piston (12), so that it is relieved of pressure towards
the tank. The pressure occurring through P now pushes the ball
(13) onto the seat (14). P is now connected to B and A to T.
Transitional position:
When the main valve is actuated, the piston (8) is pushed
against the spring (7) and ball (4.2) is pressed onto the seat
(15). In this case, port T is blocked and P, A and B
are briey connected.
In order to avoid changes in pressure when using diffe-
rential cylinders, the annular area of the cylinder must be
connected at A.
Example: Type E-4SE 6 Y6X/420BG12-12NXHZ2/V
T B P A
16 14 13 12
4.1 7 11 15 8 4.2
175
03
Cartridge throttle
sequences, ows can occur which exceed the valves opera-
ting limit, it is necessary to t a cartridge throttle.
Examples:
Use as pilot valve with internal removal
of control uid.
of the plus-1 plate.
The cartridge check valve allows a free ow of oil from P A
and blocks the path from A P without leakage.
The cartridge check valve is inserted in
port P of the poppet valve.
port P of the plus-1 plate.

P P
Function, sectional diagram: cartridge throttle, cartridge check valve
176
Electrical
Nominal voltage V 12
Voltage type DC
Voltage tolerance % 10
Cyclic duration factor / duty type to VDE 0580 100 % / S1 (DB)
Reference to nominal current in type code G12-12 G12-19
Nominal current mA 120 190
Coil resistance at solenoid temperature of 20 C 91 58
Minimum current required to achieved hydraulic
switching performance
mA 88 143
Switching times to ISO 6403 ms see tables on page 8
Cut-off voltage peak of solenoid V max. -3
2)
IP 65
Technical data
General
Ambient temperature range C -20 ... +50
Storage temperature range C -20 ... +70
Permitted vibration 20 ... 2000 Hz amplitude 0.05 g
2
/Hz (10 g RMS)
Surface protection Valve body Valve type E Paint, layer thickness max. 100 m
Valve type W Stainless steel
Hydraulic
Maximum surface temperature C See information on explosion protection on page 8
Port T bar 40
Maximum ow rate l/min 4
Pressure uid Valve type E HFA, HFB, HFD (check compatibility with FKM seals)
Valve type W Water
Pressure uid temperature range C +5 ... +50 (FKM-seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 1 ... 380
uid to ISO 4406 (C) Class 20/18/15
1)
1)
plied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents
For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070,
RE 50076 and RE 50081.
2)
177
03
Information in type code G12-12 G12-19
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG IM2; II2G IM2
Type of protection of valve solenoid to DIN EN 50020 EEx ib I
EEx ib II CT6
EEx ib I
Maximum surface temperature
1)
C (temperature class) 70 (T6) 70
Type test certication of solenoid DMT 99 ATEX E 089
Maximum values for
solenoids for safety
reasons
Maximum voltage U
i
V(DC) 15
Maximum current intensity I
i
A 2
Effective inner inductance L
i
H Negligible
Effective inner capacitance C
i
F Negligible
1)
European standards EN563 and EN982 on protection against
electric shock must be observed.
Technical data
Pressure p in bar Flow q
V
in l/min With solenoid G12-12 With solenoid G12-19
t
on
t
off
t
on
t
off

without tank
pressure

without tank
pressure
C U C U C U C U
70 4 220 265 95 85 140 160 110 100
140 4 260 265 100 90 150 165 120 110
280 4 320 260 115 110 170 170 125 135
320 4 350 260 120 115 175 170 130 140
420 4 360 260 120 130 185 170 135 145
Type .-3SE 6 C 6X/ and Type .-3SE 6 U 6X/
178
Information on
electrical connec-
tion in type code
Description of type
of connection
Circuit diagram Availability for nominal
current (see informati-
on on nominal current in
type code)
Z2 Electrical connection via 2-way
terminal in terminal box
with cable gland
without status display
1
2
V

D
C
+(-)
-(+)
G12-12 (120 mA)
Cable gland
Threaded connection Pg 13.5
Thread length mm 5 ... 14
Temperature range C -20 ... +80
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP 65
Lead diameter mm 7 ... 13
Solenoid terminal
for conductor
cross-section
mm
2
0.75 ... 1.5
Tightening torque of
terminal screws
Nm 0.4 ... 0.5
cover screws
Nm 1.0 ... 1.1
K20ZL Electrical connection via plug,
3-way with pin contacts,
type 845-11-1125-001, FCI/Souriau
Plug faces valve housing
Status display by red LED
Matching plug-in connection,
type 845-11-8522-001, FCI/Souriau,
order separately.
1 2
3
+(-) (-)+
12 V DC
G12-19 (190 mA)
The type-tested actuating solenoid of the valve is equipped with an electrical connection as shown in the table below.
The connection of the solenoids is insensitive to polarity.
179
03
oil
= 40 C 5 C and p = 100bar)
Note:
The stated operating limits apply for two directions of ow (e.g.
from P A and simultaneous return ow from B T).
If only one direction of ow is used (e.g. from P A with port
B blocked), the permitted operating limit may be considerably
lower due to the ow forces acting inside the valve.
(For applications of this kind, please consult us!)
The operating limit was measured with the solenoid at opera-
ting temperature, 10% under-voltage and without tank back
pressure.
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
W
o
r
k
i
n
g

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
420
400
200
0
0 2 4
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

20
3 2 1 0
0
4
8
12
16
4
1
3
2
20
0
4
8
12
16
4 3 2 1 0
PA
AT
1 = A T
2 = P A
3 = B T, P B
180
Unit dimensions: Type E-3SE 6 BG12-12XHZ2/... (dimensions in mm)
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
125
8,4 40,5
63,5
5,3
10
57 ca. 137
6
4
,
5
2
3
4
5
3
2
,
5
2
4
5
9
0
4
4
,
5
4
2
1
6 5
4
3
5
3
1
A
T
B
P
3
2
1 Solenoid
3 Terminal box
4 Nameplate
6 Mounting hole conguration to DIN 24 340, Form A6,
without locating pin hole
Subplates (without locating pin hole)
Type Mat. No.
G 341/01 (G 1/4) R900424447
G 342/01 (G 3/8) R900424448
G 502/01 (G 1/2) R900455110
Valve fastening bolts
coated to DIN EN ISO 10683 Zn - 240h -L
(coefcient of friction 0.09 - 0.14 to VDA 235-102)
181
03
Unit dimensions: Type W-3SE 6 BG12-19XHK20ZL/...(dimensions in mm)
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
125
8,4 40,5
63,5
5,3
10
57
4
5
6
4
,
5
2
3
3
2
,
5
3
5
3
1
2
4
5
8
4
4
4
,
5
4
2
19 14,5
5 6
4
1 3
2
B A
P
T
1 Solenoid
3 Status display and plug
4 Nameplate
Type Mat. No.
G 578/01 (G 1/4) R900354070
G 580/01 (G 3/8) R900484065
182
Unit dimensions: Type E-4SE 6 BG12-12XHZ2/... (dimensions in mm)
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
8
,
5
125
8,4 40,5
63,5
5,3
10
57 ca. 137
6
4
,
5
2
3
4
5
3
2
,
5
2
4
5
9
0
4
4
,
5
4
4
,
5
4
2
1
5
8 7
6
3
5
3
1
A
T
B
P
3
2 4
1
3
4
,
5
1 Solenoid
3 Terminal box
4 Plus-1 plate
6 Nameplate
Type Mat. No.
G 341/01 (G 1/4) R900424447
G 342/01 (G 3/8) R900424448
G 502/01 (G 1/2) R900455110
183
03
Unit dimensions: Type W-4SE 6 BG12-19XHK20ZL/... (dimensions in mm)
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
8
,
5
125
8,4 40,5
63,5
5,3
10
57
4
5
6
4
,
5
2
3
3
2
,
5
3
5
3
1
2
4
5
8
4
4
4
,
5
4
4
,
5
4
2
19 14,5
7 8
6 5
1 3
2
B A
P
T
4
1
2
8
,
5
1 Solenoid
3 Status display and plug
4 Plus-1 plate
6 Nameplate
Type Mat. No.
G 578/01 (G 1/4) R900354070
G 580/01 (G 3/8) R900484065
184
Height 60, width 85
Minimum distance between the valve
longitudinal axes
55 mm
58 64

2
5
55
85

6
0
Block diagram
185
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
The data specied above only serves to describe the product. No state-
from the responsibility for carrying out your own assessment and veri-
Notes
186
Type M-.SED 6...XE 1/16 RE 22 049-XE-B2
2003
electronic systems, in any form or by any means, without the prior written authorization of Bosch Rexroth AG. In the
event of contravention of the above provisions, the contravening party is obliged to pay compensation.
RE 22 049-XE-B2/12.03
Type M-.SED 6...XE
Nominal size 6
Series 1X
H
A
D

6
9
9
8
/
0
2
Type M-3SED 6 ..1X/350CG24N9XEZ2
Range of application in accordance with the Explosion Protection
Directive and type of protection as per DIN EN 50014
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG II2G
Type of protection of valve solenoid EEx em IIT4 to
DIN EN 50019/50028
Special features of seawater-resistant valves
The external metal parts are galvanized or treated with anti-
corrosion agent
The limited seawater resistance is defined by SO321 in the
ordering data.
ATEX units
These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Bosch Rexroth valves, and consist of the
following three parts:
Part I General Information RE 07 010-X-B1
Part II Technical Data Sheet RE 22 049-XE-B2
Part III Product-specific Instructions RE 22 049-XE-B3
"General Product Information for Hydraulic Products", RE 07 008.
Mat. No. R901017375
187
03
RE 22 049-XE-B2 2/16 Type M-.SED 6...XE
Features
Mounting hole configuration to DIN 24 340, Form A6,
without locating pin hole (standard)
Subplates as per Technical Data Sheet RE 45 052
(order separately)
Blocked port tight and free from leakage
under pressure
Wet pin DC or AC solenoids
Solenoid coil can be rotated through 90
Electrical connection is a single terminal with cable gland
With concealed emergency override, optional
Contents Page
Features 2
Function, sectional diagram, symbols 4 and 5
Technical data 6
Switching times 7
Electrical connection 7 and 8
General information 8
Operating limits 9
Examples of use 15
188
3 service ports = 3
4 service ports = 4
Poppet valve
Nominal size 6 = 6
Service ports 3 4
= UK
= CK
= D
= Y
= available
(10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged)
Working pressure 350 bar = 350
Wet pin solenoid (oil immersed) = C
24 V Direct voltage = G24
230 V Alternating voltage 50/60 Hz = W230R
For the ordering data of other voltages
and frequencies see page 8
Surface protection
SO 321 = Galvanized
(limited
seawater
resistance)
No code = standard
No code = NBR seals
V = FKM seals
(other seals available on
request)
Note
Take compatibility
of seals and pressure
fluid into account!
check valve,
P = with cartridge check valve
B12 = Throttle - 1.2 mm
and cable entry
See Electrical connection section for details
XE = Valve in explosion-proof design
See information on explosion protection,
page 6, for details
N9 = with concealed emergency override
No code = without emergency override
M SED 6 1X 350 C XE Z2
a
b
A
P T
a b
B
a
b
A
P T
a b
a
b
A
P T
a b
a
b
A
P T
a b
B
Symbols
189
03
P
P
General:
The type M-.SED directional control valve is a direct solenoid-operated
directional control poppet valve. It controls the start, stop and direction
of the flow, and essentially consists of a housing (1), the solenoid (2),
the valve seats (7) and (11) and the locking element (4).
The optional emergency override (6) allows movement of the control
piston without energizing the solenoid.
The initial position of the valve (open without flow, "UK", or closed
without flow, "CK") is determined by the arrangement of the spring
(5). The chamber (3) behind the locking element (4) is connected to
port P and sealed off against port T. This provides the valve with
pressure compensation in the face of the actuating forces (solenoid
and spring).
The special locking element (4) means that the ports P, A and T can
be subjected to maximum working pressure (350 bar) and the flow
can be conveyed in both directions (see symbols)!
In initial position, the locking element (4) is pressed onto seat (11)
by the spring (5); in switched position, it is pressed against seat (7)
by the solenoid (2). The flow is blocked without leakage.
sequences, flows can occur which are larger than the valve
performance curves allow, then it is necessary to fit a cartridge
throttle.
Examples:
Use as pilot valve with internal removal of
control fluid.
3/2-way poppet valve
the P port of the poppet valve.
of the plus-1 plate.
The cartridge check valve allows a free flow
of oil from P to A and blocks the path
from A to P without leakage.
The cartridge check valve is inserted in port
P of the poppet valve.
port P of the plus-1 plate.
Cartridge throttle
M-3SED 6 UK1X/...XEZ2
Poppet valves can be used in accordance with these symbols and the
recommended working pressure and flow (see Operating limits on
page 9).
To ensure safe function, observing the following points is
essential:
Poppet valves have a switching underlap, i.e. there is leakage
during the switching process. However, this process takes place in
such a short time that it is insignificant in almost all applications.
The stated maximum flow must not be exceeded (if necessary,
use a cartridge throttle to limit the flow).
M-3SED 6 CK...
T A P
T A P
1
5
7 4 11 3 2
5
1
7
11
a
6
a
b
A
P T
a b
a
b
A
P T
a b
Symbol "UK": Symbol "CK":
190
A T B P
T P
A
5 7 4 11
12
9 10 8
T B P A
8 10 9
7
4
5
1
11 2
a
b
A
P T
a b
B
a
b
A
P T
a b
B
Symbol "D" Symbol "Y"
The function of a 4/2-way poppet valve is achieved by means of an
intermediate plate - the plus-1 plate - beneath the 3/2-way poppet
valve
How the plus-1 plate functions:
Initial position:
The main valve is not actuated. The spring (5) holds the locking
element (4) against the seat (11). Port P is blocked and A is connected
to T. In addition, a pilot line leads from A to the large surface of the
control piston (8), so that it is then relieved of pressure towards the
tank. The pressure occurring through P now pushes the ball (9) onto
the seat (10). P is now connected to B and A to T.
Transition position:
When the main valve is actuated, the locking element (4) is pushed
against the spring (5) and pressed onto the seat (7). In this case, port
T is blocked and P, A and B are briefly connected.
Function, sectional diagram, schematic diagram: 4/2-way poppet valve
Switched position:
P is connected to A. Since the pump pressure acts on the large surface
of the control piston (8) through A, the ball (9) is pressed onto the
seat (12). B is now connected to T and P to A. The ball (9) in the
plus-1 plate has "positive overlap".
In order to avoid changes in pressure when using differen-
tial cylinders, the annular area of the cylinder must be
connected at A.
The use of the plus-1 plate and the arrangement of the seats permits
the following possibilities:
M-4SED 10 Y1X/350CG24N9XEZ2
Schematic diagram: Initial position
191
03
Electrical
Voltage type Direct voltage Alternating voltage 50/60 Hz
Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) % 5 / +10
Cyclic duration factor / duty type to VDE 0580 S1 (DB) S1 (DB)
Switching times to ISO 6403 see table on page 7
Switching frequency cycles/h up to 15000 up to 7200
Nominal power at ambient temperature 20 C 17 W
Maximum power at 1.1 x nominal voltage and
ambient temperature 20 C 20.6 W
4)
IP 66
Hydraulic
Maximum working pressure bar See table on page 9
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524
1)
;
Rapidly biodegradable pressure fluids to
VDMA 24 568 (also see RE 90 221); HETG (rapeseed oil)
1)
;
HEPG (polyglycols)
2)
; HEES (synthetic ester)
2)
;
Pressure fluid temperature range C -20 ... +70 (NBR-seals)
-15 ... +80 (FKM-seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2.8 ... 500
Purity class to ISO code Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure fluid to
ISO 4406 (C) Klasse20/18/15
3)
Technical data
General
Storage temperature range C -20 ... +70
2
/Hz (10 g RMS)
Surface protection Valve body Standard Paint, layer thickness max. 100 m
SO321 Galvanized
Solenoid Zinc-coated and passivated olive-green (FeZn8D)
1)
2)
3)
The purity classes stated for the components must be complied
with in hydraulic systems. Effective filtration prevents problems
and also extends the service life of components. For a selection
of filters, see catalog sections RE 50 070, RE 50 076 and
RE 50 081.
4)
With correctly installed connecting lead
5)
European standards EN563 and EN982 on protection against
electric shock must be observed.
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG II 2 G
Type of protection of valve C c (EN 13463-5)
5)
C 135 C (T4)
Type of protection of solenoid EEx em II T4
Type test certification of solenoid KEMA 02 ATEX 2240
192
2
3
1 4
Switching t in ms (installation position: solenoid horizontal)
AC solenoid with integral rectifier
Symbols UK, CK, D, Y
t
on
t
off
without tank pressure
UK CK D Y UK CK D Y
DC solenoid
Symbols UK, CK, D, Y
t
on
t
off
without tank pressure UK D
UK CK D Y CK Y
Flow q
V
in l/min
Pressure p
in bar
70 25 50 45 55 50 10 10 50 65 55 70 50 45 55 50
140 25 65 45 70 50 10 15 55 65 60 70 50 50 55 55
210 25 75 55 80 60 10 15 65 65 70 70 50 55 55 60
280 25 90 55 95 60 15 20 80 65 85 70 50 65 55 70
315 25 95 55 100 60 15 20 95 65 100 70 50 65 55 70
350 25 100 55 105 60 20 25 110 65 115 70 50 65 55 70
The type-tested actuating solenoid of the valve is equipped with a terminal box and a type-tested cable entry.
Solenoids for connection to alternating voltage are fitted with an integral rectifier.
1 Operating voltage connection Single wire 0.75 ... 2.5 mm
2
0.4 0.5 Nm
Finely-stranded 0.75 ... 1.5 mm
2
2 Connection for safety earth conductor Single wire max. 2.5 mm
2
1.2 2.4 Nm
Finely-stranded max. 1.5 mm
2
3 Connection for equipotential bonding Single wire max. 6 mm
2
2.0 4.0 Nm
conductor Finely-stranded max. 4 mm
2
Cable gland
Type approval EEx e II / II2G
Threaded connection M20x1.5
Thread length mm 5 12
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP66, IP67 or IP68
Lead diameter mm 9 11
Connecting lead
Temperature range C -20 > 120
Note:
For the electrical connection, the safety
earth conductor (PE ) must be
connected properly.
193
03
General information
Note
A fuse appropriate for the solenoid's nominal current (max. 3 x I
Inom
to DIN 41 571 or IEC 127) must be connected to each valve solenoid
on the line side, to protect against short circuit. The breaking capacity
of the fuse must be the same or greater than the short-circuit current
of the supply source.
When inductance is cut off this gives rise to voltage peaks, which
can lead to disturbances in the connected trigger electronics. For this
reason, the actuating solenoids contain an interference protection
circuit, which dampens this voltage peak to the voltage value shown
in the table.
Voltage data Nominal voltage Nominal current Recommended Max. Interference
in type of solenoid coil of solenoid coil back-up fuse, voltage value suppression circuit
code of valve medium time-lag on
to cut-off
DIN 41571
G24 24 VDC 0.708 ADC 1.25 A 90 V
G48 48 VDC 0.354 ADC 630 mA 200 V
G96 96 VDC 0.177 ADC 315 mA 370 V Bi-directional
G110 110 VDC 0.155 ADC 315 mA 390 V
suppressor diode
G205 205 VDC 0.083 ADC 160 mA 750 V
G220 220 DC 0.077 ADC 160 mA 800 V
W100R 100 VAC 0.180 AAC 400 mA 3 V
W110R 110 VAC 0.163 AAC 315 mA 3 V
Bridge rectifier
W120R 120 VAC 0.150 AAC 315 mA 3 V and
W200R 200 VAC 0.090 AAC 200 mA 3 V
suppressor diode
W230R 230 VAC 0.078 AAC 160 mA 3 V
Poppet valves can be used in accordance with these symbols and the
recommended working pressure and flow (see Operating limits on
page 9).
essential:
during the switching process. However, this process takes place in
such a short time that it is insignificant in almost all applications.
Plus-1 plate:
When the plus-1 plate (4/2-way function) is employed, please
note the lower functional values below:
p
min
= 8 bar, q
V
> 3 l/min.
Ports P, A, B and T are fixed according to their particular function.
They must not be exchanged or concealed at will!
Note the pressure level and distribution!
The flow must be in the direction of the arrow!
+()
(+)
Circuit diagrams
Direct voltage Alternating voltage
Insensitive to polarity
194
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Note
The operating limits were measured with the solenoids at operating temperature, 10% under-voltage and without tank back pressure.
a
b
A
P T
a b
B
a
b
A
P T
a b
B
a
b
A
P T
a b
a
b
A
P T
a b
a
b
A
P T
a b
a
b
A
P T
a b
Working pressure in bar
Symbol Remarks P A B T
350 350 350 25
350 350 350 25
350 350 350 25
350 350 350 25
350 350 350 P/A/B 40 25
350 350 350 P/A/B 40 25
2
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
Flow rate
in l/min
3
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
4
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
(
f
l
o
w

o
n
l
y

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

i
n
d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

a
r
r
o
w
!
)
In the 2/2-way circuit, ports P
or T must be sealed by the
customer.
3/2-way valve (symbol "UK")
combined with plus-1 plate:
P A B T
3/2-way valve (symbol "CK")
combined with plus-1 plate:
P A B T
"UK"
"CK"
"UK"
"CK"
"D"
"Y"
195
03
1 M-4SED 6 , A to T
2 M-4SED 6 , P to A
3 M-4SED 6 , B to T, P to B
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
p-q
V
-curves
p-q
V
-curves
p-q
V
-curves
p-q
V
-curves
Cartridge throttle
D
Y
D
Y
D
Y
UK
CK
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 25
1
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 25
3
2
1
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min Flow rate in l/min

1 M-3SED 6 , P to A and A to T
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 4 8 12 10 20 24 25
350
300
200
250
150
100
50
0 4 8 12 16 20 2425
B22
B20
B18
B15 B12
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r


196
Unit dimensions: 3/2-way poppet valve - "UK" version (dimensions in mm)
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
A
T
P
B
3
1
,
7
5
4
4
,
5
40,5 13,8
62,7
3
1
59,3
10
5,3
3
2
3
4
6
0
,
5
6
9 8
2
4
2
0
,
7
5
9
5
,
5
a
4
5
3
1
4
5
7
136
210
of mating component
1 Solenoid
2 Concealed emergency override "N9"
3 Fastening nut with double edge A/F 32,
tightening torque M
A
= 45 Nm
4 Terminal box
5 Required space for removing the coil
7 Nameplate
8 Mounting hole configuration to DIN 24 340 Form A6,
Matching subplates
G 341/01 (G1/4)
G 342/01 (G3/8)
G 502/01 (G1/2)
as per Technical Data Sheet RE 45 052
Subplates for "SO 321"
(limited seawater resistance)
G 341/01 FE/ZN
G 342/01 FE/ZN
G 502/01 FE/ZN
9 Note
Port B is available as a dummy recess
To ensure a strong connection, use only the following valve
fastening bolts:
4 cylinder head bolts DIN 912 - M5 x 50 - 10.9;
coated to DIN EN ISO 10683 flZn - 240h - L
(coefficient of friction 0.09 - 0.14 to VDA 235-102)
197
03
Unit dimensions: 3/2-way poppet valve - "CK" version (dimensions in mm)
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
3
1
,
7
5
4
4
,
5
3
1
4
5 A
P
B
T
13,8 40,5
62,7
24,2
10
5,3
2
3
4
6
-
0
,
5
9
5
,
5
1
9 8
2
4
2
0
,
7
5
6
3
b
3
4 7
5
194
269
of mating component
1 Solenoid
tightening torque M
A
= 45 Nm
4 Terminal box
7 Nameplate
Matching subplates
G 341/01 (G1/4)
G 342/01 (G3/8)
G 502/01 (G1/2)
G 341/01 FE/ZN
G 342/01 FE/ZN
G 502/01 FE/ZN
9 Note
Port B is available as a dummy recess
To ensure a strong connection, use only the following valve
fastening bolts:
198
59,3
8
,
5
4
4
,
5
2
3
4
2
4
6
-
0
,
5
5,3
10
10 9 1
4
6
9
5
,
5
a
2
5
7
3
8
3
1
,
7
5
4
4
,
5
13,8 40,5
62,7
A
P
B
T
0
,
7
5
3
1 4
5
3
136
210
Unit dimensions: 4/2-way poppet valve - "D" version (dimensions in mm)
1 Solenoid
tightening torque M
A
= 45 Nm
4 Terminal box
7 Nameplate
Matching subplates
G 341/01 (G1/4)
G 342/01 (G3/8)
G 502/01 (G1/2)
G 341/01 FE/ZN
G 342/01 FE/ZN
G 502/01 FE/ZN
9 Plus-1 plate
To ensure a strong connection, use only the
following valve fastening bolts:
are included in scope of delivery.
199
03
24,2
8
,
5
4
4
,
5
4
6
-
0
,
5
4
2
2
3
10
5,3
6
10 9 1
4
9
5
,
5
7
2
3
194
62,7
8
P
A
T
B
3
1
4
4
,
5
13,8 40,5
3
1
,
7
5
4
5
0
,
7
5
3
b
269
5
Unit dimensions: 4/2-way poppet valve - "Y" version (dimensions in mm)
1 Solenoid
tightening torque M
A
= 45 Nm
4 Terminal box
7 Nameplate
Matching subplates
G 341/01 (G1/4)
G 342/01 (G3/8)
G 502/01 (G1/2)
G 341/01 FE/ZN
G 342/01 FE/ZN
G 502/01 FE/ZN
9 Plus-1 plate
To ensure a strong connection, use only the
are included in scope of delivery.
200
A
P
a b
a
b
A
P
a b
a
b
A
P
a b
a
b
A
P
a b
a
b
V1 V2
a
b
A
P T
a b
B
A
a
b
A
P T
a b
2 1
V1 V2
A
P
a b
a
b
A
P T
a b
a b
Examples of use
These examples are intended only to explain the possibilities of the poppet valve. They do not include the entire range of functions.
2/2-way circuit
Initial position:
Flow blocked, maximum pressure
permitted. The pressure in the load is
maintained at a constant level even
after the pump is switched off.
Switched position:
Free flow, maximum pressure permitted.
2/2-way circuit
Initial position: Lift
Held only through travel limitation and
pressure at port P.
Switched position: Blocked
3/2-way circuit
Initial position:
P blocked, pressure at A and T.
Cylinder 1 travels to the right, A relieved of pressure.
Cylinder 1 travels to the left.
Switched position:
T blocked, pressure to A and P.
Cylinder 2 travels to the left, A relieved of pressure.
Cylinder 2 travels to the right.
Symbol CK
4/2-way circuit with one 2/2 and one 3/2-way poppet valve
V1 and V2 in initial position: Piston locked against pushing from the
outside.
V1 and V2 in switched position: Piston travels to the left.
V1 in initial position and V2 in switched position: Cylinder travels to the
right, both ends of cylinder are connected to the pump.
Note
Please note the operating limit (doubled flow rate) and the maximum working
pressure (pressure change) of the valve when differential cylinders are used!
Symbol 2/2 + UK
2/2-way circuit with 2 valves
Initial position:
Hold cylinder.
Switched position:
Flow in both directions.
The direction of travel is determined by the actuation of V1 and V2.
3/2-way circuit
Initial position:
A-side kept closed by logics.
Switched position:
B-side kept closed by logics.
201
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Telefon 0 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax 0 93 52 / 18-23 58 Telex 6 89 418-0
can be derived from our information. The details
stated do not release you from the responsibility
for carrying out your own assessment and veri-
fication. It must be remembered that our pro-
ducts are subject to a natural process of wear
and aging.
Subplate Minimum dimensions Minimum cross-section
dimensions Length 64, width 58, height 25 Height 60, width 85
See pages 11 to 14
for possible subplates
Minimum distance between the 55 mm
valve longitudinal axes
Block diagram
58 64

2
5
55
85

6
0
202
1/16
Type M-.SED 6 XN
Nominal size 6
Series 1X
RE 22049-XN-B2/05.04
HAD7193
Range of application in accordance with the
Explosion Protection Directive and type of protection
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG II3G; II3D
Type of protection of valve solenoid
EEx nA II T140 C to DIN EN 50021 and
IP 65 T140 C to DIN EN 50281
ATEX units


These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Rexroth valves, and consist of the
Part II Technical Data Sheet RE 22049-XN-B2
Part III Product-specific Instructions RE 22049-XN-B3
You can find further information on the correct handling of Rexroth hydraulic products in our publication
Mat. No. R901029518
203
03
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type M-.SED 6 XN RE 22049-XN-B2
Features
Subplates as per Technical Data Sheet RE 45052
(order separately)
under pressure
Electrical connection is a single terminal with plug-in
connector
With optional concealed emergency override
Contents Page
Features 2
Technical data 6
Switching times 7
Operating limits 9

Examples of use 15
204
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 22049-XN-B2 Type M-.SED 6 XN 3/16
3 main ports = 3
4 main ports = 4
Poppet valve, electric,
directly operated
Nominal size 6 = 6
unchanged)
No code = NBR seals
V = FKM seals
Note
seals and pressure
fluid into account!
No code = without
cartridge check valve,
P = with
cartridge check valve
B12 = throttle 1.2 mm
Z4 = Solenoid with plug-in
connector
section for details
XN = Valve in explosion-proof design
See information
on explosion protection,
page 6, for details
G24 = 24 V DC
M SED 6 1X 350 C G24 XN Z4
Main ports 3 4
Symbols

= UK

= CK

= D

= Y
= available
205
03
General:
The type M-.SED directional control valve is a direct solenoid-
operated directional control poppet valve. It controls the start,
stop and direction of the flow, and essentially consists of a
housing (1), the solenoid (2), the valve seats (7) and (11) and
the locking element (4).
The optional emergency override (6) allows the valve to be
switched without energizing the solenoid.
The initial position of the valve (open without flow, UK, or
closed without flow, CK) is determined by the position of the
spring (5). The chamber (3) behind the locking element (4) is
connected to port P and sealed off against port T. This pro-
vides the valve with pressure compensation in the face of the
actuating forces (solenoid and spring).
T A P
T A P
5
1
7 11
7 4 11 3
1
5
2
6
The locking element (4) allows ports P, A and T to be subject-
ed to maximum working pressure (350 bar), and the flow to
be conveyed in both directions (see symbols).
In initial position, the spring (5) presses the locking element (4)
onto seat (11); in switched position, the solenoid (2) presses it
against seat (7). The flow is blocked without leakage.
Poppet valves can be used in accordance with these symbols
and the recommended working pressure and flow (see Opera-
ting limits on page 9).
Symbol UK
Symbol CK
Type M-3SED 6 UK1X/350CG24N9XNZ4
Type M-3SED 6 CK...
206
Type M-4SED 6 Y1X/350CG24N9XNZ4
an intermediate plate - the Plus-1 plate - beneath the 3/2-way
poppet valve

Initial position:
The main valve is not actuated. The spring (5) holds the lock-
ing element (4) against the seat (11). Port P is closed and A is
connected to T. In addition, a pilot line leads from A to the large
surface of the control piston (8), so that it is relieved of pres-
sure towards the tank. The pressure occurring through P now
pushes the ball (9) onto the seat (10). P is now connected to B
and A to T.
When the main valve is actuated, the locking element (4) is
pushed against the spring (5) and pressed onto the seat (7). In
this case, port T is closed and P, A and B are briefly connected.
Switched position:
P is connected to A. Since the pump pressure acts on the large
surface of the control piston (8) via A, the ball (9) is pressed
onto the seat (12). B is now connected to T and P to A. The ball
(9) in the Plus-1 plate has positive overlap.
tial cylinders, the annular surface of the cylinder must be
connected at A.
Symbol D Symbol Y
T B P A
8 10 9
7
4
5
1
11 2
12
A T B P
T P
A
5 7 4 11
12
9 10 8
207
03
Cartridge throttle
If, due to particular operating conditions during the
switching sequences, flows can occur which exceed the
valves operating limits, it is necessary to fit a cartridge
throttle.
Examples:
of control fluid.
The cartridge throttle is inserted in the P
port of the poppet valve.
The cartridge throttle is inserted in the P
port of the Plus-1 plate.
the P port of the poppet valvet.
the P port of the Plus-1 plate.

P P
Function, sectional diagram: Cartridge throttle, cartridge check valve
Technical data
General
Permitted vibration 20 2000 Hz, amplitude 0.05 g
2
/Hz (10 g RMS)
Solenoid Galvanized (Fe Zn 8A)
Hydraulic
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
1)
; Rapidly biodegradable
pressure fluids to VDMA 24568 (also see RE 90221);
HETG (rapeseed oil)
1)
; HEPG (polyglycols)
2)
;
HEES (synthetic ester)
2)
;
Pressure fluid temperature range C -20 +70 (for NBR seals)
-15 +80 (for FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2.8 500
fluid to ISO 4406 (c) Class 20/18/15
3)
1)
2)
3)
The purity classes stated for the components must be
complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective filtration
prevents problems and also extends the service life of
components. For a selection of filters, see catalog sections
RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
208
Electrical
Voltage type DC
Cyclic duration factor / duty type to VDE 0580 100 % / S1 (continuous operation)
Switching times to ISO 6403 ms see table below
Switching frequency 1/h up to 15000
ambient temperature 20 C
W 28.8
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP 65 with correctly installed electrical connection
Technical data
1)
of accidental contact must be observed
Switching times (installation position: solenoid horizontal)
Pressure p
in bar
Flow rate q
V

in l/min
Switching times t in ms
Symbols UK, CK, D and Y
t
on
t
off

without tank pressure UK D
UK CK D Y CK Y
70 25 40 45 45 50 10 10
140 25 45 45 50 50 10 15
210 25 50 45 55 50 15 20
280 25 55 50 60 55 20 20
315 25 60 50 65 55 20 20
350 25 70 50 75 55 20 25
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG II3G II3D
Type of protection of valve solenoid EEx nA II T140 C IP 65 T140 C
1)
C 140 140
Type test certification of solenoid BVS 03 E 294 X
209
03
The valves are equipped with a male connector to
DIN EN 175301-803A (Form A). The matching plug-in
connector, which satisfies the special requirements of
ATEX Category 3, is included with delivery. The plug-in
connector is illustrated in the Unit dimensions section.
Plug-in connector
Version DIN EN 175301-803A
Degree of protection to DIN 60529 IP 65 when correctly fitted and locked
Connectable conductor cross-section mm
2
0.5 1.0
Type of terminal of conductors Screw terminals
Connecting lead
+()
(+)
1
2
Circuit diagram
Connection insensitive to polarity
Note
A fuse appropriate for the solenoids nominal current (max.
3 x I
nom
to each valve solenoid on the line side, to protect against
short circuit. The breaking capacity of the fuse must match
the possible short-circuit current of the supply source.
which can lead to faults or damages in the connected trigger
electronics.
The user must provide an external interference protection
circuit, to dampen this voltage peak.
Voltage data in
type code of valve
Nominal voltage of
solenoid coil
Nominal current of
solenoid coil
Recommended back-up
fuse, medium time-lag
to DIN 41571
G24 24 V DC 0.95 A DC 2 A
210
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Symbol Remarks Working pressure in bar Flow rate
in l/min
P A B T
2
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
UK
In the 2/2-way circuit,
ports P or T must be
sealed by the customer!
350 350 350 25
CK
350 350 350 25
3
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
UK
350 350 350 25
CK
350 350 350 25
4
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
(
f
l
o
w

o
n
l
y

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

i
n

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

a
r
r
o
w
)
D
3/2-way valve (symbol
UK) combined with
Plus-1 plate:
p
P
p
A
p
B
p
T
350 350 350
P/A/B
40
25
Y
3/2-way valve (symbol
CK) combined with
Plus-1 plate:
p
P
p
A
p
B
p
T
350 350 350
P/A/B
40
25
Note
The operating limits were measured with the solenoids at operating temperature, 10% under-voltage and without tank back
pressure.
General information
and the recommended working pressure and flow (see Operat-
ing limits below).
essential:
during the switching process. However, this process takes
place in such a short time that it is insignificant in almost all
applications.
The stated maximum flow must not be exceeded
(if necessary, use a cartridge throttle to limit the flow).
Plus-1 plate:
please note the lower functional values below:
p
min
= 8 bar, q
V
> 3 l/min.
Ports P, A, B and T are fixed according to their particular
function. They must not be exchanged or sealed at will!
Oil must only flow in the direction of the arrow!
211
03
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 25
1
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 25
3
2
1
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 4 8 12 10 20 24 25
350
300
200
250
150
100
50
0 4 8 12 16 20 2425
B22
B20
B18
B15 B12
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r


Flow rate in l/min
p - q
V
- curves
p - q
V
- curves
p - q
V
- curves
p - q
V
- curves
Cartridge throttle
1 M-4SED 6 D(Y), A T
2 M-4SED 6 D(Y), P A
3 M-4SED 6 D(Y), B T, P B
1 M-3SED 6 UK(CK), P A and A T
212
Unit dimensions: 3/2-way poppet valve - UK version (in mm)
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
Required surface quality of
mating component
103
3
1
,
7
5
2
3
4
4
,
5
0
,
7
5
40,5 13,8
62,7
59,3
4
2
5,3
10
P
A
T
B
6
8
4 7
2 1
9
8
5
3
1
4
5
a
3
1
5
10
160
5
4
6

0
,
5
1 Solenoid coil
2 Concealed emergency override N9
tightening torque M
A
= 4 + 1 Nm
4 Plug-in connector
5 Required space for removing solenoid coil
7 Nameplate
8 Mounting hole configuration to DIN 24340 Form A6,
9 Port B takes the form of a dummy recess
10 Required space for removing plug-in connector
Subplates
Type Mat. No.
G 341/01 (G 1/4) R900424447
G 342/01 (G 3/8) R900424448
G 502/01 (G 1/2) R900455110
as per Technical Data Sheet RE 45052 must be ordered
separately.
following fastening bolts:
4 cheese-head bolts
ISO 4762 - M5 x 50 - 10.9 - flZn - 240h -L
(must be ordered separately)
213
03
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
mating component
Unit dimensions: 3/2-way poppet valve - CK version (in mm)
1 Solenoid coil
tightening torque M
A
= 4 + 1 Nm
4 Plug-in connector
7 Nameplate
9 Port B takes the form of a dummy recess
Subplates
Type Mat. No.
G 341/01 (G 1/4) R900424447
G 342/01 (G 3/8) R900424448
G 502/01 (G 1/2) R900455110
separately.
4 cheese-head bolts
ISO 4762 - M5 x 50 - 10.9 - flZn - 240h -L
137
8
5
3
1
4
5
4
6

0
,
5
2
3
4
4
,
5
0
,
7
5
40,5 13,8
62,7
24,2
5,3
10
P
A
T
B
6
8
4 7
2 1
9
3
1
5
10
195
5
3
1
,
7
5
4
2
214
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
Unit dimensions: 4/2-way poppet valve - D version (in mm)
59,3
8
,
5
4
4
,
5
2
3
4
2
5,3
10
11 9 1
4
6
8
5
a
2
7
8
3
1
,
7
5
4
4
,
5
13,8 40,5
62,7
A
P
B
T
0
,
7
5
4
5
103
3
1
3
1
5
10
160
5
4
6

0
,
5
1 Solenoid coil
tightening torque M
A
= 4 + 1 Nm
4 Plug-in connector
7 Nameplate
9 Plus-1 plate
4 cheese-head bolts DIN 912 - M5 x 95 - 10.9;
Coated to DIN EN ISO 10683 flZn - 240h -L
Subplates
Type Mat. No.
G 341/01 (G 1/4) R900424447
G 342/01 (G 3/8) R900424448
G 502/01 (G 1/2) R900455110
separately.
215
03
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
Unit dimensions: 4/2-way poppet valve - Y version (in mm)
24,2
8
,
5
4
4
,
5
4
2
2
3
10
5,3
6 11 9 1
4
8
4
,
5
7
2
3
137
62,7
8
P
A
T
B
3
1
4
4
,
5
13,8 40,5
4
5
0
,
7
5
b
3
1
,
7
5
1
5
10
195
5
4
6

0
,
5
1 Solenoid coil
tightening torque M
A
= 4 + 1 Nm
4 Plug-in connector
7 Nameplate
9 Plus-1 plate
Coated to DIN EN ISO 10683 flZn - 240h -L
Subplates
Type Mat. No.
G 341/01 (G 1/4) R900424447
G 342/01 (G 3/8) R900424448
G 502/01 (G 1/2) R900455110
separately.
216
Examples of use
These examples are intended only to explain the possibilities of the poppet valve.
They do not include the entire range of functions.
A
P
a b
2/2-way circuit
(also see page 9)
Initial position:
permitted. The pressure in the load
is maintained at a constant level
even after the pump is switched off.
Switched position:
Free flow, maximum pressure
permitted.
A
P
a b
2/2-way circuit
(also see page 9)
Held only by travel limitation and
pressure at port P.
Switched position: Closed
A
P
a b
A
P
a b
V1 V2
2/2-way circuit with 2 valves
Initial position:
Hold cylinder.
Switched position:
a
b
A
P T
B
A
3/2-way circuit
Initial position:
Switched position:
B-side kept closed by logics.
Symbol CK 3/2-way circuit
Initial position:
P closed, pressure at A and T.
Switched position:
T closed, pressure to A and P.
a
b
A
P T
2 1
Symbol 2/2 + UK 4/2-way circuit with one 2/2 and one 3/2-way poppet valve
outside.
Note
Please note the operating limit (doubled flow rate) and the maximum
working pressure (pressure change) of the valve when differential cylinders
are used!
V1 V2
A
P
a
b
A
P T
a b
217
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
by any means, without the prior written authorization of Bosch Rexroth AG,
Industrial Hydraulics. In the event of contravention of the above provisions,
the contravening party is obliged to pay compensation.
from the responsibility for carrying out your own assessment and verifica-
tion. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural
Height 60, width 85
longitudinal axes
55 mm
58 64

2
5
85

6
0 55
Block diagram
218
219
03
Type M-.SEW 6...XE 1/14 RE 22058-XE-B2
2003
electronic systems, in any form or by any means, without the prior written authorization of Bosch Rexroth AG.
These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Bosch Rexroth valves, and consist of the
Part II Technical Data Sheet RE 22058-XE-B2
Part III Product-specific Instructions RE 22058-XE-B3
"General Product Information for Hydraulic Products", RE 07008.
RE 22058-XE-B2/12.03
2/2, 3/2 and 4/2-way poppet valves
Type M-.SEW 6...XE
Nominal size 6
Series 3X
Maximum flow rate 25 l/min Type M-.SEW 6 .3X/420MG24N9XEZ2
H
7
0
0
3
DIN EN 50019/50028
ATEX units
Mat. No. R901017395
RE 22058-XE-B2 2/14 Type M-.SEW 6...XE
No code = NBR seals
V = FKM seals
Note
seals and pressure fluid
into account!
No code = without
cartridge check valve, without
cartridge throttle
and cable entry
XE = valve in explosion-proof design
page 5, for details
G24 = 24 V DC
W230R = 230 V AC 50/60 Hz
For the ordering data of other voltages and frequencies see
page 7
M SEW 6 3X 420 M XE Z2
Ordering data
2 service ports = 2
3 service ports = 3
4 service ports = 4
Poppet valve
Nominal size 6 = 6
Service ports 2 3 4
= P
= N
= U
= C
= D
= Y
= available
Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39: = 3X
installation and connection dimensions unchanged)
Solenoid (dry pin) = M
T
P
a
a b b
T
P
a
b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
B A
T P
a b a b
B A
T P
a b a b
Symbols
Overview of Contents Features
Mounting hole configuration to DIN 24340, Form A6, without
locating pin hole
(order separately)
Reliable switching even under longer operating periods under
pressure
Dry pin DC and AC solenoids
Contents Page
Features 2
Technical data 5
Switching times 6
Operating limits 8
Unit dimensions 10 and 11
Examples of use 12
220
10
2
6
7
3
9
1
T
A
P
8
6
7
9
1
T P
4
8
Function, sectional diagram, symbols: 2/2 and 3/2-way poppet valve
Type M-3SEW 6 UXE
General:
The type M-.SEW...XE directional control valve is a direct solenoid-
operated poppet valve. It controls the start, stop and direction of the
flow, and essentially consists of a housing (1), the solenoid (2), the
hardened valve system (3) and the locking element (8).
In initial position, the locking element (8) is pressed onto the seat by
the spring (9), in switched position by the solenoid (2). The force
from the solenoid (2) is exerted via the angle lever (6) and the ball
(7) on the locking element (8), which is sealed on two sides. The
space between the two seal elements is connected to port P.
This provides the valve system (3) with pressure compensation in the
face of the actuating forces (solenoid or return spring).
Note:
3/2-way poppet valves have a "switching underlap". This is why
port T must always be connected. In this way, ports P-A-T are
connected to one another during the switching process from the
moment at which one valve seat begins to open to the moment
at which the other valve seat closes. However, this process takes
applications.
The optional emergency override (10) allows the valve to switch
Please note that the stated maximum flow must not be exceeded.
If necessary, use a cartridge throttle to limit the flow (see page 4).
Type M-2SEW 6 NXE
T
P
a
a b b
A
T P
a b
a b
T
P
a
b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
2/2-way poppet valve 3/2-way poppet valve
Symbol "P" "U"
Initial position P and T connected P and A connected,
T closed without leakage
Switched position P closed without P closed without leakage,
leakage A and T connected
Symbol "N" "C"
Initial position P closed without P closed without leakage,
leakage A and T connected
Switched position P and T connected P and A connected,
T closed without leakage
221
03
8
15
4
9
11
T
A
P
B
A
T B P
P
T
8 15 11 4
12 14 13
9
16
P
P
Type M-4SEW 6 YXE
Function, sectional diagram, schematic diagram: 4/2-way poppet valve
sequences, flows can occur which are larger than the valves
operating limit allows, then it is necessary to fit a cartridge
throttle.
Examples:
of control fluid.
The cartridge check valve allows a free flow of oil from P to A and
blocks the path from A to P without leakage.
See page 12 for examples of this.
Cartridge throttle Cartridge check valve
The function of a 4/2-way poppet valve is achieved by means of an inter-
mediate plate - the Plus-1 plate - beneath the 3/2-way poppet valve.
Initial position:
The main valve is not actuated. The spring (9) holds the ball (4) against
the seat (11). Port P is closed and A is connected to T. In addition, a
pilot line leads from A to the large surface of the control piston (12),
so that it is relieved of pressure towards the tank. The pressure
occurring through P now pushes the ball (13) onto the seat (14).
P is now connected to B and A to T.
against the spring (9) and pressed onto the seat (15). In this case,
port T is closed and P, A and B are briefly connected.
Switched position:
Plus-1 plate has "positive overlap". In order to avoid changes in
pressure when using differential cylinders, the annular area of the
cylinder must be connected at A.
connected at A.
Plus-1-plate
3/2-way poppet
valve
B A
T P
a b a b
B A
T P
a b a b
The use of the Plus-1 plate and the arrangement of the seats permits
Symbol "D":
Symbol "Y":
222
Hydraulic
1)
;
Rapidly biodegradable pressure fluids to VDMA 24568
(also see RE 90221), HETG (rapeseed oil)
1)
;
HEPG (polyglycols)
2)
2)
;
Pressure fluid temperature range C -20 +70 (NBR seals)
-15 +80 (FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2.8 500
ISO 4406 (C) Class Klasse 20/18/15
3)
1)
2)
3)
of filters, see Technical Data Sheets RE 50070, RE 50076 and
RE 50081.
4)
Technical data
5)
130 C (T4)
Electrical
Voltage type DC AC 50/60 Hz
Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) % 5 / +10
Switching times to ISO 6403 see table on page 7
Maximum power at 1.1 x nominal voltage
and ambient temperature 20 C 20.6 W
4)
IP 66
General
Permitted vibration 20 2000 Hz amplitude 0.05 g
2
/Hz (10 g RMS)
Weight 2/2 and 3/2-way poppet valve kg 2.3
5)
European standards EN 563 and EN 982 on the prevention of
accidental contact must be observed.
223
03
2
3
1 4
2
0.4 0.5 Nm
2
2
1.2 2.4 Nm
2
3 Connection for equipotential Single wire max. 6 mm
2
2.0 4.0 Nm
bonding conductor Finely-stranded max. 4 mm
2
Cable gland
Threaded connection M20 x 1.5
Connecting lead
Temperature range C -20 > 120
AC solenoid
Symbols U, C, D, Y
t
on
t
off
U C D Y U C D Y
DC solenoid
Symbols U, C, D, Y
t
on
t
off
without tank pressure U D
U C D Y C Y
Switching time t in ms (installation position: solenoid horizontal)
Flow rate
q
V
in l/min
Pressure
p in bar
70 25 30 40 30 40 15 15 25 40 25 40 45 65 45 65
140 25 30 50 30 50 15 15 25 40 25 40 65 65 65 65
280 25 35 60 35 60 15 15 25 45 25 45 75 65 75 65
320 25 40 70 40 70 15 15 25 45 25 45 80 65 80 65
420 25 45 70 45 70 15 15 30 45 30 45 100 65 100 65
Note:
For the electrical connection, the safety
earth conductor (PE ) must be
connected properly.
224
+()
(+)
Circuit diagrams
Voltage data Nominal voltage Nominal current Recommended Max. voltage Interference
in type code of solenoid coil of solenoid coil back-up fuse, value on suppression
of valve medium time-lag cut-off circuit
to DIN 41571
I
nom
G24 24 VDC 0.708 ADC 1.25 A -90 V
G48 48 VDC 0.354 ADC 630 mA -200 V
G96 96 VDC 0.177 ADC 315 mA -370 V Bi-directional
G110 110 VDC 0.155 ADC 315 mA -390 V
suppressor diode
G205 205 VDC 0.083 ADC 160 mA -750 V
G220 220 VDC 0.077 ADC 160 mA -800 V
W100R 100 VAC 0.180 AAC 400 mA -3 V
W110R 110 VAC 0.163 AAC 315 mA -3 V
Bridge rectifier
W120R 120 VAC 0.150 AAC 315 mA -3 V and
W200R 200 VAC 0.090 AAC 200 mA -3 V
suppressor diode
W230R 230 VAC 0.078 AAC 160 mA -3 V
General information
In order to ensure that the valve switches safely and remains in
its switched position, the pressure must be P A T (based on
design).
Ports P, A and T (3/2-way poppet valve) and P, A, B and T
(4/2-way poppet valve) are fixed according to their particular
function. They must not be exchanged or sealed at will. The pressure
fluid may only flow in the direction of the arrow.
When the Plus-1 plate (4/2-way function) is employed, please
note the minimum functional values below:
p
min
= 8 bar; q
V
> 3 l/min.
Note
nom
to DIN 41571 or IEC 127) must be connected to each valve solenoid
in the table.
225
03
T
P
a
a b b
T
P
a
b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
B A
T P
a b a b
B A
T P
a b a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
2
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
Flow rate
in l/min
3
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
2
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
(
s
o
l
e
l
y

f
o
r

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
r
e
l
i
e
f

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
)
Pressure at P T
Pressure must be available at
port A before the valve switches
from initial to switched
position. Pressure at A T
Pressure at A T
Note
Pressure at P A T
4
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
(
f
l
o
w

o
n
l
y

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

i
n
d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

a
r
r
o
w
!
)
Valve (symbol "U") combined
with Plus-1 plate:
P > A B > T
Valve (symbol "C") combined
with Plus-1 plate:
P > A B > T
"P"
"N"
"U"
"C"
"U"
"C"
"D"
"Y"
Operating limits (measured with HLP 46,
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
420 100 25
420 100 25
420 420 100 25
420 420 100 25
420 100 25
420 100 25
420 420 420 100 25
420 420 420 100 25
226
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 4 8 12 16 20 2425
2
1
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 4 8 12 16 20 2425
2
1
3
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 4 8 12 16 20 2425
2 1
3
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 25
630
600
500
400
300
200
100
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 25
B12
B15
B18
B20
B22
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

p-q
V
-curves
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r


P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

1 M-2SEW 6 N , P to T
2 M-2SEW 6 P , P to T
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

p-q
V
-curves
p-q
V
-curves
p-q
V
-curves
Cartridge throttle
Flow rate in l/min
p-q
V
-curves
1 M-3SEW 6 , A to T
2 M-3SEW 6 U, P to A
3 M-3SEW 6 C, P to A
U
C
1 M-4SEW 6 , A to T
2 M-4SEW 6 , P to A
3 M-4SEW 6 , P to B, B to T
D
Y
D
Y
D
Y
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
227
03
3
1
40,5
54,3
64
127
59 20
SW22
8
,
5
3
6
,
5
1
8
1
2 3 1 4
6
8 7
10
9
3
2
,
5
4
5
A
T
B
P
T
B
P
A
7
5
5
71
Unit dimensions: 2/2 and 3/2-way poppet valve (dimensions in mm)
1 Solenoid
tightening torque M
A
= 4...5 Nm
4 Terminal box
6 Same seals for ports A, B and T,
sealing ring for port P
7 Nameplate
In order to ensure a secure connection,
use only the following valve fastening
bolts:
4 cheese-head bolts
DIN 912 - M5 x 45 - 10.9;
coated to
DIN EN ISO 10683 flZn - 240h - L
(coefficient of friction 0.09 - 0.14
to VDA 235-102)
9 Note
In 3/2-way poppet valves, port B takes
the form of a dummy recess.
In 2/2-way poppet valves, ports A and
B take the form of dummy recesses.
10 Mounting hole configuration to
DIN 24340, Form A6
Subplates
G 341/01 (G1/4)
G 342/01 (G3/8)
G 502/01 (G1/2)
as per
Technical Data Sheet RE 45052
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
228
1
8
1
4
4
,
5
8
1
9
127
59
SW22
3 2 1 4
7
6
9
8
3
1
40,5
54,3
64
T
B
P
10
7
5
5
34
A
16,7
71
4
5
Unit dimensions: 4/2-way poppet valve (dimensions in mm)
1 Solenoid
3 Fastening nut with double edge
A/F 32, tightening torque
M
A
= 4...5 Nm
4 Terminal box
6 Same seals for ports A, B and T,
7 Plus-1-Platte
8 Nameplate
In order to ensure a secure
connection, use only the following
valve fastening bolts:
4 cheese-head bolts
DIN 912 - M5 x 90 - 10.9;
coated to
to VDA 235-102)
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
DIN 24340, Form A6
Subplates
G 341/01 (G1/4)
G 342/01 (G3/8)
G 502/01 (G1/2)
as per
Technical Data Sheet RE 45052
229
03
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
V1 V2
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
V1 V2
Examples of use
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
C
"
3/2-way circuit with valve
(symbol "U")
pressure at port P.
Switched position: Lower
2/2-way circuit with valve (symbol "U") and
check valve at port A
The check valve must be installed in the pipeline.
Initial position: Free flow, maximum pressure
permitted. The check valve in port A enables the pressure
in the load to be maintained even when the pump is
switched off.
Switched position: Flow blocked, maximum pressure
permitted. Remove leakage at port T. The only leakage
occurring is that overflowing to T during the switching
process.
(symbol "C") and cartridge check
valve in port P
The check valve is installed in port P of the
Initial position: Lower
Switched position: Lift
The load can be held in any position, with
the pump switched off and the solenoid
energized.
3/2-way circuit with valve (symbol "C")
Held only through travel limitation and pressure at port P.
(symbol "U") and cartridge check
valve in port P
energized
2/2-way circuit with valve (symbol "C") and
check valve at port A
Initial position: Flow blocked, maximum pressure
switched off.
Switched position: Free flow, maximum pressure per-
mitted. Remove leakage at port T. The only leakage occurring
is that overflowing to T during the switching process.
4/3 (4/4)-way circuit with 2 valves (symbol "C")
V1 and V2 in initial position: Both ends of cylinder are connected to the tank.
V2 in switched position: Piston travels to the left
V1 in switched position: Piston travels to the right
V1 and V2 in switched position: Both ends of cylinder are connected to the pump.
This means that rapid traverse is possible, if a differential cylinder with surface area ratio 2 : 1
is employed.
Note: Please bear in mind the operating limit (doubled flow rate) and the maximum
working pressure (pressure change) of the valve when differential cylinders are used.
4/3 (4/4)-way circuit with 2 valves (symbol "U") and cartridge check valves
in port P of the 3/2-way poppet valve
V1 and V2 in initial position: Piston locked against pushing from the outside.
Note: Please note the operating limit (doubled flow rate) and the maximum working
pressure (pressure change) of the valve when differential cylinders are used.
Symbol "U"
Symbol "C"
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
U
"
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
U
"
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
C
"
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
C
"
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
U
"
230
64
55

6
0

2
5
58
85
Installation conditionsn (dimensions in mm)
Subplate dimensions Minimum dimensions Minimum cross-section
Length 64, width 58, height 25 Height 60, width 85
See pages 10 and 11
Minimum distance between 55 mm
Block diagram
231
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Telefon 0 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax 0 93 52 / 18-23 58 Telex 6 89 418-0
for carrying out your own assessment and
verification. It must be remembered that our
wear and aging.
Notes
232
2003
electronic systems, in any form or by any means, without the prior written authorization of Bosch Rexroth AG.
Type M-3SEW 10 C1X/420MG24N9XEZ2
H
7
0
9
6
RE 22075-XE-B2/12.03
Type M-.SEW 10...XE
Nominal size 10
Series 1X
DIN EN 50019/50028
ATEX units
These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Bosch Rexroth valves,
and consist of the following three parts:
"General Product Information for Hydraulic Products", RE 07008.
Mat.-Nr. R901017396
233
03
B A
T P
a b a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
B A
T P
a b a b
No code = NBR seals
V = FKM seals
Note
and pressure fluid
into account!
check valve,
and cable entry
See electrical connection section for details
XE = valve in explosion-proof design
page 5, for details
G24 = 24 V DC
W230 R = 230 V AC 50/60 Hz
For the ordering data of other voltages and
frequencies see page 7
3 service ports = 3
4 service ports = 4
Poppet valve
Nominal size 10 = 10
Service ports 3 4
= U
= C
= D
= Y
= available
Solenoid (dry pin) with detachable coil = M
Contents Page
Features 2
Technical data 5
Switching times 6
Operating limits 8
Examples of use 11
Features
ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP 121 H
(order separately)
under pressure
Dry pin DC and AC solenoids with detachable coil
M SEW 10 1X 420 M XE Z2
Ordering data
Symbols
234
P P
10
2
6
7
3
9
1
T
A
P
8
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
General:
The Type M-.SEW...XE directional control valve is a direct solenoid-
operated poppet valve. It controls the start, stop and direction of the
flow, and essentially consists of a housing (1), the solenoid (2), the
hardened valve system (3) and the locking element (8).
In initial position, the locking element (8) is pressed onto the seat by
the spring (9), in switched position by the solenoid (2). The force
from the solenoid (2) is exerted via the angle lever (6) and the ball
(7) on the locking element (8), which is sealed on two sides. The
space between the two seal elements is connected to port P.
This provides the valve system (3) with pressure compensation in the
face of the actuating forces (solenoid or return spring).
Note:
3/2-way poppet valves have a "switching underlap". This is why
port T must always be connected. In this way, ports P-A-T are
connected to one another during the switching process from the
moment at which one valve seat begins to open to the moment
at which the other valve seat closes. However, this process takes
applications.
The optional emergency override (10) allows the valve to switch
Please note that the stated maximum flow must not be exceeded.
If necessary, use a cartridge throttle to limit the flow (see below).
Symbol "U":
Symbol "C":
Type M-3SEW 10 UXE
sequences, flows can occur which are larger than the valves
operating limit allows, then it is necessary to fit a cartridge throttle.
Examples:
The cartridge check valve allows a free flow of oil from P to A and
blocks the path from A to P without leakage.
See page 11 for examples of this.
The cartridge check valve is inserted in port P
Cartridge throttle Cartridge check valve
235
03
A
T B P
P
T
8 15 11 4
12 14 13
9
16
8
15
4
9
11
T
A
P
B
B A
T P
a b a b
B A
T P
a b a b
The use of the Plus-1 plate and the arrangement of the seats permits
Symbol "D":
Symbol "Y":
The function of a 4/2-way poppet valve is achieved by means of an
intermediate plate - the Plus-1 plate - beneath the 3/2-way poppet
valve.
Initial position:
The main valve is not actuated. The spring (9) holds the ball (4) against
the seat (11). Port P is closed and A is connected to T. In addition, a
pilot line leads from A to the large surface of the control piston (12),
so that it is relieved of pressure towards the tank. The pressure
occurring through P now pushes the ball (13) onto the seat (14).
P is now connected to B and A to T.
against the spring (9) and pressed onto the seat (15). In this case,
port T is closed and P, A and B are briefly connected.
Switched position:
Plus-1 plate has "positive overlap".
connected at A.
Plus-1 plate
3/2-way
poppet valve
Type M-4SEW 10 YXE
236
General
2
/Hz (10 g RMS)
1)
2)
3)
of filters, see Technical Data Sheets RE 50070, RE 50076 and
RE 50081.
4)
5)
Technical data
Hydraulic
1)
;
Rapidly biodegradable pressure fluids to VDMA 24568
(also see RE 90221), HETG (rapeseed oil)
1)
2)
;
2)
;
-15 +80 (FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2.8 500
ISO 4406 (C) Class 20/18/15
3)
Electrical
Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) % -5 / +10
Switching times to ISO 6403 ms see table on page 6
ambient temperature 20 C 20.6 W
4)
IP 66
5)
130 C (T4)
237
03
2
3
1 4
AC solenoid
Symbols U, C, D, Y
t
on
t
off
U C D Y U C D Y
DC solenoid
Symbols U, C, D, Y
t
on
t
off
without tank pressure U D
U C D Y C Y
Flow rate q
V
in l/min
Pressure p
in bar
140 40 25 50 25 50 12 17 25 50 25 50 50 45 55 50
280 40 25 55 25 55 15 20 25 70 25 70 70 45 75 50
320 40 25 55 25 55 15 20 25 75 25 75 75 45 80 50
420 40 30 60 30 60 20 25 30 75 30 75 75 45 80 50
2
0.4 0.5 Nm
2
2
1.2 2.4 Nm
2
3 Connection for equipotential Single wire max. 6 mm
2
2.0 4.0 Nm
2
Cable gland
Connecting lead
Temperature range C -20 >120
Note:
For the electrical connection, the safety earth
conductor (PE ) must be connected properly.
238
+()
(+)
General information
In order to ensure that the valve switches safely and remains in its
switched position, the pressure must be P AT (based on design).
Ports P, A and T (3/2-way poppet valve) and P, A, B and T (4/2-way
poppet valve) are fixed according to their particular function. They
must not be exchanged or sealed at will. The pressure fluid may
only flow in the direction of the arrow.
When the Plus-1 plate (4/2-way function) is employed, please note
the minimum functional values below: p
min
= 8 bar; q
V
> 3 L/min.
Circuit diagrams
Note
Voltage data Nominal voltage Nominal current Recommended Max. voltage Interference
in type code of solenoid coil of solenoid coil back-up fuse, value on suppression circuit
of valve medium time-lag cut-off
to DIN 41571
G24 24 VDC 0.708 ADC 1.25 A 90 V
G48 48 VDC 0.354 ADC 630 mA 200 V
G96 96 VDC 0.177 ADC 315 mA 370 V Bi-directional
G110 110 VDC 0.155 ADC 315 mA 390 V
suppressor diode
G205 205 VDC 0.083 ADC 160 mA 750 V
G220 220 DC 0.077 ADC 160 mA 800 V
W100R 100 VAC 0.180 AAC 400 mA 3 V
W110R 110 VAC 0.163 AAC 315 mA 3 V
Bridge rectifier
W120R 120 VAC 0.150 AAC 315 mA 3 V and
W200R 200 VAC 0.090 AAC 200 mA 3 V
supressor diode
W230R 230 VAC 0.078 AAC 160 mA 3 V
nom
to DIN 41571 or IEC 127) must be connected to each valve solenoid
in the table.
239
03
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
B A
T P
a b a b
B A
T P
a b a b
Flow rate
in l/min
3
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
2
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
(
s
o
l
e
l
y

f
o
r

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
r
e
l
i
e
f

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
)
Pressure must be available at
port A before valve switches
from initial to switched
position. Pressure at A T
Pressure at A T
Operating limits (measured with HLP 46,
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Pressure at P A T
4
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
(
f
l
o
w

o
n
l
y

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

i
n
d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

a
r
r
o
w
!
)
Valve (symbol "U") combined
with Plus-1 plate:
P >A B > T
Valve (symbol "C") combined
with Plus-1 plate:
P > A B > T
"U"
"C"
"U"
"C"
"D"
"Y"
Note
Characteristic curves (measured with HLP 46,
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

p-q
V
-curves 4/2-way poppet valve
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r


P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

p-q
V
-curves 3/2-way poppet valve
Flow rate in l/min
p-q
V
-curves cartridge check valve p-q
V
-curves cartridge throttle
1 M-3SEW 10 C, P to A
2 M-3SEW 10 C, A to T
3 M-3SEW 10 U, P to A
4 M-3SEW 10 U, A to T
1 M-4SEW 10 , A to T
2 M-4SEW 10 , P to A
D
Y
D
Y
D
Y
D
Y
3 M-4SEW 10 , P to B
4 M-4SEW 10 , B to T
Flow rate in l/min
30
25
20
15
10
5
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1
3
4
2
30
25
20
15
10
5
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1
3
4
2
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42
600
500
400
300
200
100
0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42
B12 B15
B18
B20
B22
420 420 100 40
420 420 100 40
420 100 40
420 100 40
420 420 420 100 40
420 420 420 100 40
240
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
3
0

1
9
4
28 68
127
3
0
69
54
6
3
4
6
2 3 1 4
6
9 10
8
7
4
7
,
5
61,5
B
A
TA TB
P
7
5
5
26,5
77
1 Solenoid
tightening torque M
A
= 4 ... 5 Nm
4 Terminal box
6 Same seals for ports A, B, TA and TB,
7 Nameplate
connection, use only the
4 x cheese-head bolts
DIN 912 - M6 x 40 - 10.9;
coated to
to VDA 235-102)
(order separately)
of mating component
DIN 24340 Form A10 ISO 4401
and CETOP-RP 121 H
Subplates
G 66/01 (G3/8)
G 67/01 (G1/2)
as per Technical Data Sheet
RE 45054
10 Note
In 3/2-way poppet valves, ports B and
TB take the form of dummy recesses.
241
03
1
9
4
4
8
7
8
1
2
80
95,6
127
69
61,5
54
4
6
6
3
2 3 1 4
7
6
11
10
9 8
P
B
A
TA TB
7
5
5
26,5
77
1 Solenoid
tightening torque M
A
= 4 ... 5 Nm
4 Terminal box
6 Same seals for ports A, B, TA and TB,
7 Plus-1 plate
8 Nameplate
connection, use only the
DIN 912 - M6 x 90 - 10.9;
coated to
to VDA 235-102)
DIN 24340 Form A10 ISO 4401 and
CETOP-RP 121 H
Subplates
G 66/01 (G3/8)
G 67/01 (G1/2)
as per Technical Data Sheet RE 45054
11 Note
In 4/2-way poppet valves, port TB
takes the form of a dummy recess.
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
242
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
V1 V2
A
T P
a b
a b
A
T P
a b
a b
V1 V2
A
T P
a b
a b
Examples of use
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
C
"
(symbol "U")
pressure at port P.
2/2-way circuit with valve (symbol "U")
and check valve at port A
Initial position: Free flow, maximum pressure
switched off.
Switched position: Flow blocked, maximum pressure
process.
(symbol "C") and cartridge
check valve in port P
energized.
Held only through travel limitation and pressure
at port P.
(symbol "U") and cartridge
check valve in port P
energized.
and check valve at port A
Initial position: Flow blocked, maximum pressure
switched off.
Switched position: Free flow, maximum pressure
process.
4/3 (4/4)-way circuit with 2 valves (symbol "C")
V1 and V2 in initial position: Both ends of cylinder are connected to the tank.
This means that rapid traverse is possible, if a differential cylinder with surface area
ratio 2 : 1 is employed.
Note: Please bear in mind the operating limit (doubled flow rate) and the maximum
working pressure (pressure change) of the valve when differential cylinders are used.
4/3 (4/4)-way circuit with 2 valves (symbol "U") and cartridge
check valves in port P of the 3/2-way poppet valve
V1 and V2 in initial position: Piston locked against pushing from the outside.
Note: Please note the operating limit (doubled flow rate) and the maximum working
pressure (pressure change) of the valve when differential cylinders are used.
Symbol "U"
Symbol "C"
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
U
"
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
U
"
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
C
"
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
C
"
S
y
m
b
o
l
"
U
"
243
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Telefon 0 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax 0 93 52 / 18-23 58 Telex 6 89 418-0
for carrying out your own assessment and
verification. It must be remembered that our
wear and aging.
70 100

3
2
73
85

6
0
Subplate Minimum dimensions Minimum cross-section
dimensions Length 100, width 70, height 32 Height 60, width 85
See pages 9 and 10
Minimum distance between 73 mm
Block diagram
244
1/16
Type M-.SED 10 ...XN
Nominal size 10
Unit series 1X
RE 22045-XN-B2/12.04
H7195
Directive and type of protection
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG
II3G: Type of protection EEx nA II T140 C to EN 50021
II3D: IP 65 T140 C to EN 50281
ATEX units


These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Rexroth valves, and consist of
Mat. No. R901029541
245
03
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type M-.SED 10 ...XN RE 22045-XN-B2
Features
(order separately)
under pressure
Electrical connection is a single terminal with plug-in
connector
Contents Page
Features 2
Function, sectional diagram, symbols 4 6
Technical data 6
Switching times 7
Operating limits 9
Unit dimensions 11 14
Examples of use 15
246
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 22045-XN-B2 Type M-.SED 10 ...XN 3/16
3 main ports = 3
4 main ports = 4
Poppet valve, electric,
directly operated
Unit series 10 to 19 = 1X
No code =
NBR seals
V = FKM seals
Note:
seals and pressure
fluid into account!
No code = without
cartridge check valve,
P = with cartridge
check valve
Z4 = Solenoid with plug-in
connector
section for details
page 6, for details
G24 = 24 V DC
M SED 10 1X 350 C G24 XN Z4
Main ports 3 4
Symbols

= UK

= CK

= D

= Y
= available
247
03
6
T A P
1
5
7 4 11 3 2
5
1
7 11
T A P
General:
The type M-.SED directional control valve is a direct solenoid-
operated directional control poppet valve. It controls the start,
stop and direction of the flow, and essentially consists of a
housing (1), the solenoid (2), the valve seats (7) and (11) and
the locking element (4).
The optional emergency override (6) allows the valve to be
switched without energizing the solenoid.
The initial position of the valve (open without flow, UK, or
closed without flow, CK) is determined by the position of the
spring (5). The chamber (3) behind the locking element (4) is
connected to port P and sealed off against port T.
This provides the valve with pressure compensation in the face
of the actuating forces (solenoid and spring).
The locking element (4) allows ports P, A and T to be subjec-
ted to maximum working pressure (350 bar), and the flow to be
conveyed in both directions (see symbols).
In initial position, the spring (5) presses the locking element (4)
onto seat (11); in switched position, the solenoid (2) presses it
against seat (7). The flow is blocked without leakage.
and the recommended working pressure and flow (see Opera-
ting limits on page 9).
Symbol UK
Symbol CK
Type M-3SED 10 UK1X/350CG24N9XNZ4
Type M-3SED 10 CK...
248
11
1
5
7
4
2
T B P A
8 10 9 12
Type M-4SED 10 Y1X/350CG24N9XNZ4
an intermediate plate - the Plus-1 plate - beneath the 3/2-way
poppet valve.

Initial position:
The main valve is not actuated. The spring (5) holds the locking
element (4) against the seat (11). Port P is closed and A is
connected to T. In addition, a pilot line leads from A to the
large surface of the control piston (8), so that it is relieved of
pressure towards the tank. The pressure occurring through P
now pushes the ball (9) onto the seat (10). P is now connected
to B and A to T.
When the main valve is actuated, the locking element (4) is
pushed against the spring (5) and pressed onto the seat (7). In
this case, port T is closed and P, A and B are briefly connected.
Switched position:
P is connected to A. Since the pump pressure acts on the large
surface of the control piston (8) via A, the ball (9) is pressed
onto the seat (12). B is now connected to T and P to A. The ball
(9) in the Plus-1 plate has positive overlap.
tial cylinders, the annular surface of the cylinder must be
connected at A.
Symbol D Symbol Y
A T B P
T P
A
5 7 4 11
12
9 10 8
249
03
Cartridge throttle
sequences, flows can occur which exceed the valves opera-
ting limits, it is necessary to fit a cartridge throttle.
Examples:
4/2-way poppet valve (see page 5) Die
of the Plus-1 plate.
P P
Function, sectional diagram: Cartridge throttle, cartridge check valve
Technical data
General
2
/Hz (10 g RMS)
Solenoid Galvanized (Fe Zn 8A)
Hydraulic
1)
HETG (rapeseed oil)
1)
2)
;
2)
;
Pressure fluid temperature range C -20 +70 (for NBR seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2.8 500
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure
fluid to ISO 4406 (c)

Class 20/18/15
3)
1)
2)
3)
components. For a selection of filters, see Technical Data
Sheets RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
250
Electrical
Voltage type DC
Switching times to ISO 6403 On ms 40 80
Off ms 10 25
temperature 20 C
W 28.8
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP 65 with correctly installed electrical connection
Technical data
1)
of accidental contact must be observed!
1)
C 140 140
251
03
EN 175301-803A (Form A). The matching plug-in connector,
which satisfies the special requirements of ATEX Category 3,
is included with delivery. The plug-in connector is described in
the Unit dimensions section.
Plug-in connector
Version EN 175301-803A
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP 65 when correctly fitted and locked
Connectable conductor cross-section mm
2
0.5 1.0
Conductor connection type Screw-type connection
Connecting lead
Temperature range C -20 + 100
+()
(+)
1
2
Circuit diagram
Note:
(max. 3 x I
nom
which can lead to faults or damages in the connected trigger
electronics.
Voltage data in
type code of valve
Nominal voltage of
solenoid coil
Nominal current of
solenoid coil
Recommended back-up
fuse, medium time-lag to
DIN 41571
G24 24 V DC 0.95 A DC 2 A
252
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Symbol Remarks Working pressure in bar Flow rate
in l/min
P A B T
2
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
UK
In the 2/2-way circuit,
ports P or T must be
sealed by the customer.
350 350 350 40
CK
350 350 350 40
3
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
UK
350 350 350 40
CK
350 350 350 40
4
-
w
a
y

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
(
f
l
o
w

o
n
l
y

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e

i
n

d
i
r
e
c
-
t
i
o
n

o
f

a
r
r
o
w
)
D 3/2-way valve
(symbol UK)
combined with
Plus-1 plate:
p
P
p
A
p
B
p
T
350 350 350
P/A/B
40
40
Y 3/2-way valve
(symbol CK)
combined with
Plus-1 plate:
p
P
p
A
p
B
p
T
350 350 350
P/A/B
40
40
Note
The operating limits were measured with the solenoids at operating temperature, 10% under-voltage and without tank
back pressure.
General information
and the recommended working pressure and flow (see Ope-
rating limits below).
essential:
Poppet valves have a switching underlap, i.e. there is lea-
kage during the switching process. However, this process
takes place in such a short time that it is insignificant in
almost all applications.
The stated maximum flow must not be exceeded (if necessa-
ry, use a cartridge throttle to limit the flow)!
Plus-1 plate:
please note the lower functional values below:
p
min
= 8 bar, q
V
> 3 l/min.
Ports P, A, B and T are fixed according to their particular
function. They must not be exchanged or sealed at will!
Oil must only flow in the direction of the arrow!
253
03
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r


Flow rate in l/min
p - q
V
curves
p - q
V
curves
p - q
V
curve
p - q
V
curves
Cartridge throttle
1 M-4SED 10 D/Y..., A T
2 M-4SED 10 D/Y..., P A
3 M-4SED 10 D/Y..., P B
4 M-4SED 10 D/Y..., B T
1 M-3SED 10 CK..., P A
2 M-3SED 10 CK..., A T
3 M-3SED 10 UK..., P A
4 M-3SED 10 UK..., A T
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42
600
500
400
300
200
100
0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42
B12 B15 B18
B20
B22
30
25
20
15
10
5
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1 3 4
2
30
25
20
15
10
5
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1
3
4
2
254
Unit dimensions: 3/2-way poppet valve - UK version (Nominal dimensions in mm)
0,01/100mm
Rzmax 4
mating component
1 Solenoid coil
3 Fastening nut with double edge SW32,
tightening torque M
A
= 4 + 1 Nm
4 Plug-in connector
6 Same sealing rings for ports A, B and T
7 Nameplate
9 Note
Ports B and TB take the form of a dummy recess in the
Subplates
Type Mat. No.
G 66/01 (G3/8) R900424457
G 67/01 (G1/2) R900424460
separately.
4 cheese-head bolts
ISO 4762-M6x40-10.9-flZn-240h-L
96
4
2 1
9
3
a
3
1
5
10
135
5
4
5
4
6
6
4
7,5 54
69
A
P
B
TA TB
8 9
74
6
11
6,4
3
0
3
2
,
5
6
5
7
255
03
0,01/100mm
Rzmax 4
mating component
Unit dimensions: 3/2-way poppet valve - CK version (Nominal dimensions in mm)
1 Solenoid coil
tightening torque M
A
= 4 + 1 Nm
4 Plug-in connector
7 Nameplate
9 Note
Ports B and TB take the form of a dummy recess in the
Subplates
Type Mat. No.
G 66/01 (G3/8) R900424457
G 67/01 (G1/2) R900424460
separately.
4 cheese-head bolts
ISO 4762-M6x40-10.9-flZn-240h-L
8 9
A
P
TA TB
B
6
6
4
4
6
7,5 54
69
20 150
6
5
3
2
,
5
3
0
6,4
11
4
5
9
3
4
1
5
10
190
5 1 3 2
7
256
0,01/100mm
Rzmax 4
of mating component
Unit dimensions: 4/2-way poppet valve - D version (Nominal dimensions in mm)
1 Solenoid coil
tightening torque M
A
= 4 + 1 Nm
4 Plug-in connector
7 Nameplate
9 Note
Port TB takes the form of a dummy recess in the 4/2-
way poppet valve
10 Plus-1 plate
4 cheese-head bolts
DIN 912-M6x90-10.9
Coated to EN ISO 10683 flZn-240h-L
Subplates
Type Mat. No.
G 66/01 (G3/8) R900424457
G 67/01 (G1/2) R900424460
separately.
4
5
8
6 12
69
54 7,5
4
6
6
4
P
A
TA TB
B
80
74
1
2
4
8
11
6,4
3
0
3
2
,
5
6
5
96
4
2 1
9
3
a
3
1
5
11
135
5
7
10
9
257
03
0,01/100mm
Rzmax 4
of mating component
Unit dimensions: 4/2-way poppet valve - Y version (Nominal dimensions in mm)
1 Solenoid coil
tightening torque M
A
= 4 + 1 Nm
4 Plug-in connector
7 Nameplate
9 Note
Port TB takes the form of a dummy recess in the
10 Plus-1 plate
4 cheese-head bolts
DIN 912-M6x90-10.9
Subplates
Type Mat. No.
G 66/01 (G3/8) R900424457
G 67/01 (G1/2) R900424460
separately.
4
5
8
6 12
7
P
B A
TA TB
10
6
4
4
6
7,5 54
69
20 150
1
2
4
8
80
3
0
11
6,4
6
5
3
2
,
5
9
3
4
1
5
11
190
5 1 3 2
b
9
258
Examples of use
These examples are intended only to explain the possibilities of the poppet valve.
They do not include the entire range of functions.
A
P
a b
2/2-way circuit (also see page 9)
Initial position:
permitted. The pressure in the load
is maintained at a constant level
even after the pump is switched off.
Switched position:
Free flow, maximum pressure
permitted.
A
P
a b
2/2-way circuit (also see page 9)
Held only by travel limitation and
pressure at port P.
Switched position: Closed
A
P
a b
A
P
a b
V1 V2
2/2- way circuit with 2 valves
Initial position:
Hold cylinder.
Switched position:
a
b
A
P T
B
A
3/2- way circuit
Initial position:
Switched position:
B-side kept closed by logics
Symbol CK 3/2-way circuit
Initial position:
P closed, pressure at A and T.
Switched position:
T closed, pressure at A and P.
a
b
A
P T
2 1
Symbol 2/2 + UK 4/2-way circuit with one 2/2 and one 3/2-way poppet valve
outside.
Note
Please note the operating limit (doubled flow rate) and the maximum
working pressure (pressure change) of the valve when differential cylinders
are used!
V1 V2
A
P
a
b
A
P T
a b
259
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
Bosch Rexroth AG reserves all rights, including industrial property rights.
We reserve all rights of disposal, such as copying and passing on to third
parties.
The data specified above serves only to describe the product. No state-
Installation conditions (Nominal dimensions in mm)
Height 60, width 85
longitudinal axes
73 mm
70 100

3
2
85

6
0
73
Block diagram
260
1/12
4/3, 4/2 and 3/2-way
directional control valves
with wet pin DC solenoids
Type WE 6 ../.B..XH...
Nominal size 6
Unit series 5X
Maximum ow rate 20 l/min
RE 23177-XH-B2/08.05
Replaces: 07.04
H7093
Type of protection of valve solenoid EEx ib II CT6 / EEx ib I
to EN 50014/50020
ATEX units


Part II Technical Data Sheet RE 23177-XH-B2
Part III Product-specic Instructions RE 23177-XH-B3
You can nd further information on the correct handling of Rexroth hydraulic products in our publication
Mat.-Nr. R901012878
261
03
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics WE 6 ../.B..XH.. RE 23177-XH-B2
Features
Direct solenoid-operated directional control spool valve for
Mounting hole conguration to DIN 24340-A6,
Mounting hole conguration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94,
with locating pin hole
(order code .../60)
For subplates see Technical Data Sheet RE 45052
(order separately)
Electrical connection with choice of the following:
Single terminal with cable gland
2 m connecting lead
Plug
With auxiliary actuating device
Contents Page
Features 3

Piston symbols 3
Function, sectional diagram 4
Technical data 5
Operating limits 8
262
Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 23177-XH-B2 WE 6 ../.B..XH.. 3/12
Piston symbols
3 main ports = 3
4 main ports = 4

Nominal size 6 = 6
Piston symbol e.g. C, E, EA, EB etc.
see below for possible version
Spring return = no code
Without spring return = O
Wet pin, high-power = B
solenoid (oil immersed)
12 V DC
depending on electrical connection, see page 7
No code = without
locating pin hole
/60
1)
= with
locating pin hole
V = FKM seals
Note:
and pressure uid into account!
check valve
B08 = throttle- 0,8 mm
Use if ow rate > valves operating
limit, effective in P-duct.
CKL = solenoid with 2 m connecting lead
Z2 = solenoid with terminal box and
cable gland
K20L = solenoid with plug
See electrical connection
section for details
XH = valve in explosion-proof design,
see information on explosion protection for details
N = with auxiliary actuating device (standard)
WE 6 5X B N XH V
1)
Locating pin 3x8 to EN ISO 8752,
Material No. R900005694 (order separately)
2)
Example: Piston E with switched position a is order code ..EA..
a b
P T
A B
a b
P T
A B
b
= Y
= B
/O..
a b
a b
P T
A B
a b
a b
P T
A B
P T P T
= E
2)
= .A
2)
= U
= L
= J
= H
= M
a b
P T
A B
0
P T
A B
0 a b
a b
P T
A B
0 a
P T
A B
0 a
a
A B
0 b
A B
0 b
b
= .B
= C
= D
= A
a b
P T
A B
P T
A B
a b
a
= X7
= B1
263
03
Function, sectional diagram
Type WE directional control valves are solenoid-operated,
spool-type directional control valves. They control the start,
stop and direction of a ow of uid.
The directional control valves essentially consist of the housing
(1), one or two solenoids (2), the control piston (3) and one or
two return springs (4).
When not actuated, the control piston (3) is held in the central
or initial position by the return springs (4) (with the exception of
the pulse-type spool valve). The control piston (3) is actuated
by wet pin solenoids (2).
For perfect function, ensure that the pressure chamber of
the solenoid is lled with oil.
The force from the solenoid (2) is exerted via the plunger (5) on
the control piston (3), pushing the latter out of its rest position
into the desired end position. This enables uid to ow in the
necessary direction, P A and B T or P B und A T.
When the solenoid (2) is no longer energized, the return
springs (4) move the control piston (3) back into its rest
position.
An auxiliary actuating device (6) allows the control piston (3) to
be moved without energizing the solenoid.
Typ 4WE 6.. 5X/O...XH (only possible with symbols A, C and D)
This version consists of directional control valves with two
switched positions and two solenoids without detent. There is
no dened switched position in de-energized status.
Note:
The tank line must not be allowed to run dry. If the installa-
tion conditions are such that there is a risk, install a pres-
sure sequence valve (precharge pressure approx. 2 bar).
Cartridge throttle (valve type 4WE 6..5X/XH../B.. )
sequences, ows can occur which exceed the valves operat-
ing limit, it is necessary to t a cartridge throttle.
This is inserted in the P-duct of the directional control valve.
2 4 3 1 2
5 6
A
T
B (P)
a b
Example: Type 4WE 6 E5X/.B.XHK20L/..
P
Sealing ring
264
Technical data
General
Ambient temperature range C 20 ... +50
Storage temperature range C 20 ... +70
2
/Hz (10 g RMS)
Weight kg 2.6 (with 1 solenoid); 4.2 (with 2 solenoid)
Hydraulic
Port T bar 100 With symbol A and B, port T must be used as a
leakage drain if the working pressure lies above the
permitted tank pressure.
Maximum ow rate l/min 20
Pressure uid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Rapidly biodegradable pressure uids to VDMA 24568 (also
see RE 90221), HETG (rapeseed oil), HEPG (polyglycols),
HEES (synthetic ester),
other pressure uids available on request
Pressure uid temperature range C 20 ... +50 (FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2.8 ... 500
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of
pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c)
Class 20/18/15
1)
1)
plied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents
For a selection of lters, see Technical Data Sheets
RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
265
03
Information in type code G12-12 G12-13 G12-19
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG IM2; II2G IM2; II2G IM2
Type of protection of valve solenoid to EN 50020 EEx ib I
EEx ib II CT6
EEx ib I
2)
C 70 70
Temperature class T6
Type test certication of solenoid DMT 99 ATEX E 089
Ambient temperature range C 20 ... +50
Maximum values for
solenoids for safety
reasons
Maximum voltage U
i
V (DC) 15
Maximum current intensity I
i
A 2
Effective inner inductance L
i
H Negligible
Effective inner capacitance C
i
F Negligible
2)
Electrical
Voltage type DC
Cyclic duration factor / duty type to VDE 0580 100 % / S1 (DB)
Reference to nominal current in type code G12-12 G12-13 G12-19
Nominal current mA 120 130 190
Coil resistance at solenoid temperature of 20 C 91 58
Minimum current required to achieved hydraulic
switching performance
mA 88 96 143
Switching times to ISO 6403 on ms 145 105
off ms 80 100
Cut-off voltage peak of solenoid V max. 3
1)
IP 65
Technical data
1)
266
Information on
electrical connec-
tion in type code
Description of type of connection Circuit diagram Availability for nominal
current (see information
on nominal current in
type code)
CKL Electrical connection via non-exchan-
geable, blue, two-wire connecting lead
2
x
0
,
7
5
1
2
V

D
C
+(-)
-(+)
G12-13 (130 mA)
G12-19 (190 mA)
Two-wire connecting lead
Conductor cross-section mm
2
0.75, nely stranded
Lead diameter mm 6
Length m 2
Z2 Electrical connection via 2-way
terminal in terminal box
with cable gland
without status display
1
2
V

D
C
+(-)
-(+)
G12-12 (120 mA)
Cable gland
Thread length mm 5 ... 14
Temperature range C 20 ... +80
Degree of protection to
EN 60529
IP 65
Lead diameter mm 7 ... 13
Solenoid terminal
for conductor cross-section mm
2
0.75 ... 1.5
terminal screws
Nm 0.4 ... 0.5
cover screws
Nm 1.0 ... 1.1
K20L Electrical connection via plug,
3-way with pin contacts,
Type 845-11-1125-001, FCI/Souriau
Matching plug-in connection,
Type 845-11-8522-001, FCI/Souriau,
order separately.
1 2
3
+(-) (-)+
12 V DC
G12-19 (190 mA)
The type-tested actuating solenoid of the valve is equipped with an electrical connection as shown in the table below.
The connection of the solenoids is insensitive to polarity.
267
03
oil
= 40 C 5 C and p = 100bar)
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Note:
The stated operating limits apply for two directions of ow
(e.g. from P A and simultaneous return ow from B T).
If only one direction of ow is used (e.g. from P A with port
B closed), the permitted operating limit may be considerably
lower due to the ow forces acting inside the valve.
(For applications of this kind, please consult us.)
The operating limit was measured with the solenoid at opera-
ting temperature, 10% under-voltage and without tank back
pressure.
W
o
r
k
i
n
g

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
210
200
100
0
0 10 20
20
0
2
4
6
8
10
14
12
16
18
15 10 5 0 20
4
5
6
7
20
0
2
4
6
8
10
14
12
16
18
15 10 5 0 20
1
2
3
Curve selection
Piston
symbols
Characteristic curves for
direction of ow
PA PB AT BT
D,Y 1 1 2 2
A, B, C,
E, H, J, L,
M, U
3
B1 5 4
X7 7 6
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

268
0,01/100mm
Rmax 4
Unit dimensions (Nominal size in mm)
Type WE 6../.B.XHK20L/...
of mating component
2
163,5
24 62,4
4 x 9,4
+0,1
5,6
3 4 4 3
64
40,5
A B
T
3
2
,
5
12,5
P
6
5 1
"a"
121,5
8
5
6
5
"b"
3
7 7
148 106
4
2
4
5
3
3
1
Subplates
(without locating pin hole) G 341/01 (G1/4)
G 342/01 (G3/8)
G 502/01 (G1/2)
(with locating pin hole) G 341/60 (G1/4)
G 342/60 (G3/8)
G 502/60 (G1/2)
ISO 4762-M5x50-10.9-Zn-240h-L
1 Nameplate
2 Same seals for ports A, B, P and T
3 Cover for valves with one solenoid
4 Solenoid
5 Mounting hole conguration to DIN 24340-A6,
6 Mounting hole conguration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94,
7 LED, red, for displaying operating status
269
03
Type WE 6../.B.XHCKL/... (preassembled with 2 x 2 m connecting lead)
76
ca. 58 ca. 2000
"b" "a"
4
5
3
3
7
Type WE 6../.B.XHZ2/... (with terminal box and cable gland)
2
3
6
9
9
1
"a" "b"
4
5
3
3
See page 9 for diagram key
270
Installation conditions (Nominal size in mm)
Height 60, width 85
longitudinal axes
55 mm
58 64

2
5
55
85

6
0
Block diagram
271
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
This document, as well as the data, specications and other information
The data specied above only serve to describe the product. No state-
can be derived from our information. The information given does not release
the user from the obligation of own judgment and verication. It must be
remembered that our products are subject to a natural process of wear and
aging.
Notes
272
1/16
4/3, 4/2 and 3/2 directional
control poppet valves with wet
pin DC or AC solenoids
Type WE 6 ../.B..XD
Nominal size 6
Unit series 6X
RE 23178-XD-B2/07.05
Replaces: 03.04
to DIN EN 50014/50018
The external metal parts are galvanized or treated with
anti-corrosion agent
The limited seawater resistance is defined by SO329
in the ordering data.
ATEX units


Mat. No. R901015839
H7120
273
03
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics WE 6 ../.B..XD RE 23178-XD-B2
Features
Direct solenoid-operated directional spool valve for proper
use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Mounting hole configuration to DIN 24340-A6,
Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94,
(state .../60 in ordering data)
(order separately)
Electrical connection with single terminal and cable gland
With auxiliary actuating device, optional
Contents Page
Features 2
Piston symbols 4
Technical data 6 to 7
Electrical connection 8 to 9
Operating limits, 10 to 11
274
Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 23178-XD-B2 WE 6 ../.B..XD 3/16
3 main ports = 3
4 main ports = 4

Nominal size 6 = 6
Piston symbol e.g. C, E, EA, EB, etc.
For possible versions see page 4
Without spring return, with detent = OF
High power solenoid oil immersed = B
24 V DC = G24
230 V AC = W230R
See page 9 for the ordering data of other voltages
and frequencies
Without auxiliary actuating device = no code
With auxiliary actuating device (standard) = N
With mushroom button auxiliary actuating device, lockable = N4
Surface protection
SO329 = limited
degree of seawater
resistance, galvanized
No code = standard
No code = without
locating hole
/60
1)
= with
locating hole
V = FKM seals
Note
and pressure fluid into account!
No code = without cartridge throttle
Used where flow rate > than operating
limit of valve, active in P-duct
Z2 = Solenoid with terminal box and
cable gland
For details see Electrical connection chapter
XD = Valve in explosion-proof design
page 7, for details
WE 6 6X B XD Z2 V
1)
Locating pin DIN EN ISO 8752,
275
03
= R
= T
= U
= V
= W
A B
P T
a 0 a 0
A B
P T
b b
a b
A B
P T
a 0 a 0
A B
P T
a
A B
P T
0 0
A B
P T
b b
b
= .A
1)
= .B
A B
P T
a b
A B
P T
a b
A B
P T
a b
a b
A B
P T
= /O.. a b
A B
P T
= /OF.. a b
A B
P T
a b
a b
a b
a b
A B
P T
a b
A B
P T
a b
= B
= Y
= D
= C
= B9
= B9 SO9
= A
= E
1)
= E1-
2)
= L
= M
= F
= G
= H
= H19
= J
= P
= Q
= J19
= Y2
Piston symbols
1)
Example: Piston E with switched position a ordering code: ..EA.
2)
Symbol E1-: P A/B pre-opening, caution: take pressure intensification into account with differential cylinders!
276
"b"
A
T
B
(P)
2 4 3 1 2
6 5
"a"
P
Funktion, Schnitt
Type 4WE 6 E6X/.B..NXDZ2/V
Sealing ring
WE type directional control valves are solenoid-operated direc-
tional spool valves. They control the start, stop and direction of
a flow of fluid.
Essentially, the directional control valves consist of the housing
In the de-energized condition, the control piston (3) is held in
the mid or initial position by the return springs (4) (except in
impulse spools). The control piston (3) is operated by wet pin
solenoids (2).
To guarantee satisfactory operation, take care to ensure
that the pressure chamber of the solenoid is filled with oil.
The force of the solenoid (2) acts on the control piston (3) by
means of the plunger (5), and pushes it from its neutral position
into the required end position. This opens the required direction
for the flow, P A and B T or P B and A T.
When the solenoid (2) is de-energized, the return spring (4)
moves the control piston (3) back to its neutral position.
An auxiliary actuating device (6), optional, enables the
control piston (3) to be displaced without solenoid control.
Type 4WE 6.. 6X/O...XD
(only possible for symbols A, C and D)
This version comprises directional control valves with two
switched positions and two solenoids without detent.
There is no definable switched position when the solenoids
are de-energized.
Type 4WE 6.. 6X/OF... XD (impulse spool, only possible with
symbols A, C and D)
This version comprises directional control valves with two swit-
ched positions, two solenoids and a detent. This means that
both switched positions are fixed alternately, and there is no
need to continually energize the solenoid.
Note:
Pressure peaks in the tank line to two or more valves may
provoke unwanted piston movements in valves with detent.
It is therefore recommended that you lay separate return
lines or install a check valve in the tank line.
The tank line must not be allowed to run empty. When
installation conditions allow, install a pressure sequence
valve (precharge pressure approx. 2 bar).
Cartridge throttle (type 4WE 6 ..6X/...XD../B..)
throttle.
This is inserted in the P-duct of the directional control valve.
277
03
Technical data
General
Installation position beliebig
Ambient temperature range C 20 +80
Storage temperature range C 20 +70
2
/Hz (10 g RMS
Weight kg 4,95 (mit 1 Magnet); 9,0 (mit 2 Magneten)
Surface protection Valve body Standard Lackierung, Schichtstrke max. 100 m
SO329 Paint, max. layer thickness 100 m
Hydraulic
Port T bar 210 With symbols A and B, port T must be used as a drain
port if the working pressure is above the permitted
tank pressure.
Flow cross-section
(switched position 0)
for Symbol Q Approx. 6 % of nominal cross-section
for Symbol W Approx. 3 % of nominal cross-section
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524. Rapidly biodegradable
pressure fluids to VDMA 24568 (also see RE 90221), HETG
(rapeseed oil), HEPG (polyglycols), HEES (synthetic ester),
Pressure fluid temperature range C 15 +80 (FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2.8 500
pressure fluid to ISO 4406 (c) Class 20/18/15
1)
1)
For a selection of filters, see catalogue sections RE 50070,
RE 50076 and RE 50081.
278
1)
2)
European standards EN 563 and EN 982 on protection
against electric shock must be observed.
Technical data
Electrical
Switching time to ISO 6403 ON ms 30 70 45 80
OFF ms 20 30 70 90
W 15.8
1)
IP 65
2)
Temperature class
C 130
T4
Type of protection of solenoid to DIN EN 50018 EEx dI
EEx dII CT4
Note
AC solenoids are supplied as DC solenoids
with integral rectifier
279
03
1
3
4 2
2
0.4 0.5 Nm
2
2 Connection for protective earth Single wire 0.75 2.5 mm
2
1.2 2.4 Nm
conductor Finely-stranded 0.75 1.5 mm
2
3 Connection for equipotential bonding Single wire 4 6 mm
2
2.0 4.0 Nm
conductor Finely-stranded min. 4 mm
2
4 Screws for lid 2.0 2.2 Nm
Note
conductor (PE ).
Cable gland
Connecting lead
Temperature range C 20 +110
280
+()
(+)

Note
3 x I
nom
to DIN 41571 or IEC 60127) must be connected to
each valve solenoid on the line side, to protect against short
circuit. The breaking capacity of the fuse must match or ex-
ceed the possible short-circuit current of the supply source.
Voltage data in
type code of valve
Nominal voltage of
solenoid coil
Nominal current of
solenoid coil
Recommended
back-up fuse,
medium time-lag to
DIN 41571
Max. voltage value
on cut-off
Interference
suppression circuit
G24 24 V DC 0.542 A DC 1 A 90 V
Bi-directional
suppressor diode
G48 48 V DC 0.271 A DC 630 mA 200 V
G96 96 V DC 0.135 A DC 250 mA 370 V
G110 110 V DC 0.118 A DC 250 mA 390 V
G205 205 V DC 0.083 A DC 160 mA 750 V
G220 220 V DC 0.059 A DC 160 mA 800 V
W100R 100 V AC 0.140 A AC 250 mA 3 V
suppressor diode
W110R 110 V AC 0.126 A AC 250 mA 3 V
W120R 120 V AC 0.116 A AC 250 mA 3 V
W200R 200 V AC 0.070 A AC 160 mA 3 V
W230R 230 V AC 0.059 A AC 160 mA 3 V
Circuit diagrams
281
03
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
315
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
15
19
18 17
15
16
70
20
20
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
315
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1
13; 14 12 11 10 9 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Due to the flow forces active within the valves, the permissi-
ble operating limit may be significantly less if there is only one
direction of flow (e.g. from P A with port B shut off).
(Please consult us for applications of this kind.)
The operating limit was measured with the solenoids at
operating temperature, 10% under-voltage and without
tank back pressure.
Note
The operating limits defined here are for applications with two
flow directions (e.g. from P A and simultaneous return flow
from B T).
Char.
curve
Piston symbol
1 A, B
2 J, L, U
3 V
4 F, P
5 A/O, A/OF
6 G
7 T
8 R
2)
9 E
10 Q, W
11 D, C, Y, Y2
12 H
13 M
14 E1
1)
, D/OF,
C/OF, D/O,
C/O
15 B9
16 B9 SO9
17 H19
18 J19, P-A
19 J19, A-T
20 J19, B-T
1)
PA/B pre-opening
2)
Return flow from consumer to tank
Flow rate in l/min
W
o
r
k
i
n
g

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
W
o
r
k
i
n
g

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

b
a
r

Valve capacity limits with DC-voltage solenoids

282
315
1
11; 12 10 7 8 6
9
5
4
3
2
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Char.
curve
Piston symbol
1 A, B
2 D, C, Y, Y2
3 J, L, U, Q, W
4 E
5 V
6 F, P, T
7 A/O, A/OF
8 R
2)
9 G
10 H
11 D/OF, C/OF,
M, D/O, C/O
12 E1
1)
W
o
r
k
i
n
g

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Valve capacity limits with AC-voltage solenoids
1)
PA/B pre-opening
2)
283
03
oil
= 40 C 5 C and p = 100bar)
p-q
V
-curves
11
10
8
6
4
2
0
20 40 30 10 50 60
7 8 10 6
5
3
9
1
2
4
0
11
10
8
6
4
2
0
20 40 30 10 50 60
11 12 15 14
13
0
16

Curve selection
Piston
symbol
Direction of flow
P A P B A T B T B A P T
A, B 3 3
C 1 1 3 1
D, Y, Y2 5 5 3 3
E 3 3 1 1
F 1 3 1 1
T 10 10 9 9 8
H 2 4 2 2 9
J, Q 1 1 2 1
L 3 3 4 9
M 2 4 3 3
P 3 1 1 1
R 5 5 4 7
V 1 2 1 1
W 1 1 2 2
U 3 3 9 4
G 6 6 9 9 8
B9 11 11
B9 SO9 12 11
H19 14 14 13 13 15
J19 14 16 13
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
284
168,5 210,5
2
3
1
1
4
,
5
5,6
9,5
4
13,5 40,5
69
A B
P
8 7
22,1
64,1
5
6
"b" "a"
0
,
7
5
T
8
0
1
1
3
1
,
7
5
4
2
3
1
1
2
3
0,01/100mm
Rmax 4
1 Solenoid
2 Terminal box
3 Auxiliary actuating device N
5 Screw plug for valves with one solenoid
6 Nameplate
7 Mounting hole configuration to DIN 24340-A6,
8 Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94,
Subplates
(without locating hole) G 341/01 (G1/4)
G 342/01 (G3/8)
G 502/01 (G1/2)
(with locating hole) G 341/60 (G1/4)
G 342/60 (G3/8)
G 502/60 (G1/2)
ISO 4762-M5x50-10.9-flZn-240h-L
mating component
Valve with auxiliary actuating device N
285
03
"a" "b"
A B
P
T
5,6
9,5
4
2
168,5 210,5
2
3
1
1
4
,
5
13,5 40,5
69
22,1
64,1
0
,
7
5
8
0
3
1
,
7
5
1
1
3
1
4
8 7
5
6
1
2
3
0,01/100mm
Rmax 4
mating component
1 Solenoid
2 Terminal box
3 Auxiliary actuating device N4
6 Nameplate
Subplates
(without locating hole) G 341/01 (G1/4)
G 342/01 (G3/8)
G 502/01 (G1/2)
(with locating hole) G 341/60 (G1/4)
G 342/60 (G3/8)
G 502/60 (G1/2)
ISO 4762-M5x50-10.9-flZn-240h-L
Valve with auxiliary actuating device N4
286
90 55

8
5
Hhe 60
58 64

2
5
Height 60, width 85
longitudinal axes
See block diagram below
Bank assembly
Single assembly
Block diagram
287
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It must be
aging.
Notes
288
1/16
control valves with wet pin
DC or AC solenoids
Type WE 6 ../.E..XE
Nominal size 6
Unit series 6X
RE 23178-XE-B2/06.05
Replaces: 11.04
EN 50019/50028
The external metal parts are galvanized or treated with
anti-corrosion agent
The limited seawater resistance is defined by SO329 in
the ordering data.
ATEX units


Mat. No. R901017120
H7001
289
03
2/16 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics WE 6 ../.E..XE RE 23178-XE-B2
Features
Direct solenoid-operated directional spool valve for proper
use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Mounting hole configuration to DIN 24340-A6,
Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94,
(state .../60 in ordering data)
(order separately)
With auxiliary actuating device, optional
Contents Page
Features 2
Piston symbols 4
Technical data 6
Operating limits 10 and 11
Characteristic curves 12 and 13
Unit dimensions 14
290
Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 23178-XE-B2 WE 6 ../.E..XE 3/16
3 main ports = 3
4 main ports = 4

Nominal size 6 = 6
Piston symbol e.g. C, E, EA, EB, etc.
For possible versions see page 4
High power solenoid, = E
wet pin with removable coil
24 V DC = G24
230 V AC 50/60 Hz = W230R
For the ordering data of other voltages
and frequencies see page 9
With auxiliary actuating device (standard) = N
Without auxiliary actuating device = no code
Surface protection
SO329 = Limited
degree of seawater
resistance Galvanized
no code = standard
no code = without
locating pin hole
/60
1)
= with
locating pin hole
no code = NBR seals
V = FKM seals
Note
Take compatibility
of seals and pressure fluid
into account!
no code = without cartridge throttle
Used where the flow > than
operating limit of valve, active in P line
and screwed cable connection,
For details see Electrical connection chapter
page 7, for details
WE 6 6X E XE Z2
1)
Locating pin 3 x 8 EN ISO 8752,
291
03
= R
= T
= U
= V
= W
A B
P T
a 0 a 0
A B
P T
b b
a b
A B
P T
a 0 a 0
A B
P T
a
A B
P T
0 0
A B
P T
b b
b
= .A
1)
= .B
A B
P T
a b
A B
P T
a b
A B
P T
a b
a b
A B
P T
= /O.. a b
A B
P T
= /OF.. a b
A B
P T
a b
a b
a b
a b
A B
P T
a b
A B
P T
a b
= B
= B73
= Y
= D19
= D
= D46
3)
= C
= C46
3 )
= B9
= A
= A9
= X7
= E
1)
= E1-
2)
= E67
= L
= M
= F
= G
= G73
= H
= J
= J73
= P
= Q
= J19A
= J32A
= X46
Piston symbols
1)
Example: Piston E with switched position a ordering
code: ..EA..
2)
Symbol E1: PA/B pre-opening, caution: take pressure
intensification with differential cylinders into account!
3)
Only C46/OF and D46/OF are authorized for use with
valves with AC solenoids and detent.
292
P
a b
2 4 3 1 2
5 6
A
T
B (P)
Type 4WE 6 E6X/.E..NXE...
Seal
WE type directional control valves are solenoid operated direc-
tional spool valves. They control the start, stop and direction of
a flow of fluid.
solenoids (2), which switch in oil.
into the required end position. This opens the required direction
for the flow, P A and B T or P B and A T. When the
solenoid (2) is de-energized, the return spring (4) moves the
control piston (3) back to its neutral position.
An auxiliary actuating device (6), optional, enables the
control piston (3) to be displaced without solenoid control.
Typ 4WE 6.. 6X/O...XE (only possible for symbols A, C and D)
switched positions and two solenoids without detent. There
is no definable switched position when the solenoids are
de-energized.
Typ 4WE 6.. 6X/OF... XE
(impulse spool, only possible with symbols A, C and D)
switched positions, two solenoids and a detent. This means
that both switched positions are fixed alternately, and there
is no need to continually energize the solenoid.
Note:
Pressure peaks in the tank line to two or more valves may
provoke unwanted piston movements in valves with detent.
It is therefore recommended that you lay separate return
lines or install a check valve in the tank line.
Cartridge throttle (type 4WE 6..6X/XE../B.. )
throttle.
This is inserted in the P line of the directional control valve.
293
03
General
Storage temperature range C 20 +70
Permitted vibration 20 2000 Hz amplitude 0,05 g
2
/Hz (10 g RMS)
Weight kg 2.32 (1 solenoid); 3.71 (2 solenoids)
Surface protection Valve body Standard Paint, Layer thickness max. 100 m
SO329 Galvanized
Solenoid Zinc-coated and passivated olive-green (FeZn8D)
Hydraulic
Ports T bar 210 With symbols A and B, port T must be used as a drain
tank pressure.
Flow cross-section
for symbol Q Approx. 6 % of the nominal cross-section
for symbol W Approx. 3 % of the nominal cross-section
1)
;
Rapidly biodegradable pressure fluids to
VDMA 24568 (also see RD 90221); HETG (rapeseed oil)
1)
;
HEPG (polyglycols)
2)
2)

Pressure fluid temperature range C 30 +80 (NBR seals)
15 +80 (v)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2,8 500
pressure fluid to ISO 4406 (c) Class 20/18/15
3)
1)
2)
Only suitable for FKM seals
3)
complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective filtration prevents
RE 50076 and RE 50081.
Technical data
294
1)
mit korrekt installiertem elektrischen Anschluss
2)
Aufgrund der auftretenden Oberflchentemperaturen der
Ma gnet spu len, sind die europischen Normen EN 563 und
EN 982 zu beachten! (Berhrungsschutz)
Technical data
Electrical
Switching time to ISO 6403 ON ms 30 55 40 80
OFF ms 10 15 40 50
Switching frequency 1/h to 15000 to 7200
W 20.6
1)
IP 66
Note:
AC solenoids are supplied as DC solenoids with
integral rectifier
Maximum surface
temperature
2)
C (temperature class) 135 C (T4)
Type of protection of solenoid EEx em IIT4
295
03
2
3
1 4
2
0.4 0.5 Nm
2
2
1.2 2.4 Nm
2
3 Connection for equipotential Single wire 4 6 mm
2
2.0 4.0 Nm
2
4 Screws for lid 1.0 1.1 Nm
Note
For the electrical connection, the
safety earth conductor (PE )
must be properly connected.
Cable gland
Threaded connection M20 x 1,5
Thread length mm 512
Connecting lead
296
+()
(+)

Note
3 x I
nom
circuit. The breaking capacity of the fuse must match or exceed
Voltage data
in type code
of valve
Nominal voltage
of solenoid coil
Nominal current
of solenoid coil
Recommended
back-up fuse,
medium time-lag
to DIN 41571
Max. voltage
value on cut-off
Interference
suppression
circuit
G24 24 V DC 0.708 A DC 1.25 A 90 V
Bi-directional
suppressor diode
G48 48 V DC 0.354 A DC 630 mA 200 V
G96 96 V DC 0.177 A DC 315 mA 370 V
G110 110 V DC 0.155 A DC 315 mA 390 V
G205 205 V DC 0.083 A DC 160 mA 750 V
G220 220 V DC 0.077 A DC 160 mA 800 V
W100R 100 V AC 0.180 A AC 400 mA 3 V
suppressor diode
W110R 110 V AC 0.163 A AC 315 mA 3 V
W120R 120 V AC 0.150 A AC 315 mA 3 V
W200R 200 V AC 0.090 A AC 200 mA 3 V
W230R 230 V AC 0.078 A AC 160 mA 3 V
Circuit diagrams
297
03
300
250
200
100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
150
50
350
16
17
13
15
19
21
0
20
18
13 16
14
300
250
200
100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
150
50
350
5
3
2
1
8
7
4
6
9 10 11 12
6
5
4
2
7
0
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Due to the flow forces active within the valves, the permissib-
le operating limit may be significantly less if there is only one
direction of flow (e.g. from P A with port B shut off)!
tank back pressure.
Note
from B T).
Char.
curve
Piston symbol
1 A, B
2 J, L, U
3 V
4 D, C, Y
5 Q, W
6 E
7 A/O, A/OF
8 F, P
9 T
10 G
11 H, D/O
12 E1
1)
,

R
2)
,

M
13 A9 / B9
14 E67
15 J19A, B-T
16 B73
17 X46
18 J73
19 J19A, A-T
20 G73
21 X7
W
o
r
k
i
n
g

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
W
o
r
k
i
n
g

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
Valve capacity limits with DC-voltage solenoids
1)
PA/B pre-opening
2)
298
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
14
15
17
16
21 20 18 19
18
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 12
13
6 3
9
7
6
2
2
4 3
Char.
curve
Piston symbol
1 A, B
2 J, L, U, Q, W
3 V
4 D, C, Y
5 C46/OF, D46/OF
6 E
7 A/O
8 F, P, T
9 R
2)
10 G
11 H
12 M,

D/O,

C/O

13 E1
1)
14 B9
15 J32A, B-T
16 J19A, B-T
17 D19
18 J19A, A-T
19 X7
20 G73
21 J32A, A-T
W
o
r
k
i
n
g

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
1)
PA/B pre-opening
2)
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
W
o
r
k
i
n
g

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
Valve capacity limits with AC-voltage solenoids
299
03
oil
= 40 C 5 C and p = 100bar)
p-q
V
-curves
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
11
10
8
6
4
2
0 20 40 30 10 50 60 70
7 8 10 6 5 3
9
1
2
4
Curve selection
Piston
symbol
Direction of flow
A, B 3 3
C46, C 1 1 3 1
D46, D, Y 5 5 3 3
E 3 3 1 1
F 1 3 1 1
T 10 10 9 9 8
H 2 4 2 2 9
J, Q 1 1 2 1
L 3 3 4 9
M 2 4 3 3
P 3 1 1 1
R 5 5 4 7
V 1 2 1 1
W 1 1 2 2
U 3 3 9 4
G 6 6 9 9 8
G73 20 20 19 19 16
E67 14 13 11 12
B9 17 15
B73 18 21
11
10
8
6
4
2
0 20 40 30 10 50 60 70
2019 18
17
16
15
14 13 12
11
21
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
300
11
10
8
6
4
2
0 20 40 30 10 50 60 70
27 25 24 23 22
26
29
28
11
10
8
6
4
2
0 20 40 30 10 50 60 70
33
31
30
32
34
35
11
10
8
6
4
2
0 20 40 30 10 50 60 70
38
37
36
oil
= 40 C 5 C and p = 100bar)
p-q
V
-curves (Continuation)
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
Curve selection
Piston
symbol
Direction of flow
J73 24 25 23 22
J19A 27 26
X7 29 28
X46 32 33 31 30
J32A 35 34
D19 36 38 37
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
301
03
2
9
5
,
5
2
3
135* 177*
4
2
22,1 64,1
4 x 9,4
+0,1
5,3
3 4 4 3
a b
4
5
3
3
1
69,2
40,5
A B
T
3
2
,
5
3
13,6
P
6
5 1
0,01/100mm
Rmax 4
1 Nameplate
4 Fastening nut with double edge SW 32
tightening torque M
A
= 4 +1 Nm
Subplates
(without locating pin hole) G 341/01 (G1/4)
G 342/01 (G3/8)
G 502/01 (G1/2)
G 342/60 (G3/8)
G 502/60 (G1/2)
of mating component
* plus 78mm for pulling off the coil
ISO 4762-M5x50-10.9-flZn-240h-L
302
58 64

2
5
55
85

6
0
Subplate
dimensions
Minimum dimensions
Height 60, width 85
longitudinal axes
55 mm
Block diagram
303
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
aging.
Notes
304
1/10
control valves with wet pin
DC solenoids
Type WE 6 ../.E..XN
Nominal size 6
Series 6X
RE 23178-XN-B2/05.04
HAD7194
Type of protection of valve solenoid
EEx nA II T140 C to DIN EN 50021 and
IP 65 T140 C to DIN EN 50281
ATEX units


These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Rexroth valves,
Mat. No. R901017263
305
03
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type WE 6 ../.E..XN RE 23178-XN-B2
Features
Direct solenoid-operated directional control spool valve for
Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401 - 03 - 02 ,
with locating pin hole (state .../60 in ordering data)
(order separately)
Electrical connection as single terminal with plug-in
connector
Contents Page
Features 2


Symbols, piston symbols 3
Operating limits 8
Characteristic curve 8
Unit dimensions 9

306
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 23178-XN-B2 Type WE 6 ../.E..XN 3/10
Symbols, piston symbols
3 main ports
4 main ports

Directional control spool
valve = WE
Nominal size = 6
Piston e.g. C, E, EA, EB etc.
For possible versions see below
High power solenoid,
wet pin with removable coil = E
24 V DC = G24
With concealed emergency override (standard) = N9
Without emergency override = no code
no code = without
locating pin hole
/60
1)
= with
locating pin hole
no code = NBR seals
V = FKM seals
Note
and pressure fluid into account!
no code = without cartridge throttle
B08 = Throttle 0.8 mm
Used where flow > than operating limit
of valve, active in P line
Z4 = Solenoid with plug-in connector
page 6, for details
WE 6 6X E G24 XN Z4
1)
Locating pin 3 x 8 to DIN EN ISO 8752,
2)
Example: Piston E with switched position a ordering code: ..EA..
3)
Symbol E1- : P A/B pre-opening, caution: take pressure intensification with differential cylinders into account!
a b
P T
A B
a b
P T
A B
a b
P T
A B
a b
P T
A B
P T
A B
a b
a b
= Y
= B
= C
= D
= A
a b
a b
P T
A B
/OF..
/O..
a b
a b
P T
A B
a b
a b
P T
A B
a b
P T
A B
0
P T
A B
0 a b
a b
P T
A B
0 a
P T
A B
0 a
a
P T
A B
0 b
P T
A B
0 b
b
= L
= J
= H
= G
= F
= E1-
3)
= E
2)
= .A
2)
= .B
= W
= V
= U
= T
= R
= Q
= P
= M
307
03
WE type directional control valves are solenoid operated
directional spool valves. They control the start, stop and
direction of a flow of fluid.
solenoids (2).

into the required end position. This opens the required direc-
tion for the flow, P A and B T or P B and A T.
When the solenoid (2) is de-energized, the return spring (4)
moves the control piston (3) back to its neutral position.
An optional emergency override (6) allows movement of the
control piston (3) without energizing the solenoid.
Type 4WE 6 ..6X/O...XN (only possible for pistons A, C and D)
switched positions and two solenoids without detent. There
is no definable switched position when the solenoids are
de-energized.
Type 4WE 6 ..6X/OF... XN
(impulse spool, only possible with pistons A, C and D)
switched positions, two solenoids and a detent. This means
that both switched positions are fixed alternately, and there is
no need to continually energize the solenoid.
Note:
Pressure peaks in the tank line to two or more valves
may provoke unwanted piston movements in valves with
detent. It is therefore recommended that you lay separate
return lines or install a check valve in the tank line.
Cartridge throttle (type 4WE 6 ..6X/XN../B.. )
throttle.
This is inserted in the P line of the directional control valve.
Type 4WE 6 E6X/...E..XN..
P
Seal
a b
5
1 3 4 2 2
A
T
B (P)
6
308
Technical data
General
2
/Hz (10 g RMS)
Weight With 1 solenoid kg 1.5
With 2 solenoids kg 2.1
Surface protection Valve body Paint, max. layer thickness 100 m
Solenoid Galvanized (FeZn8A)
Hydraulic
Port T bar 210 With symbols A and B, port T must be used as a drain
tank pressure.
Flow cross-section
Piston Q Approx. 6 % of the nominal cross-section
Piston W Approx. 3 % of the nominal cross-section
1)
HETG (rapeseed oil)
1)
2
);
2)
;
-15 +80 (FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2.8 500
3)
1)
2)
Only suitable for FKM seals
3)
components.
RE 50076 and RE 50081.
309
03
Electrical
Voltage type (DC)
Switching times ISO 6403 on ms 25 45
off ms 10 25
W 28.8
1)
IP 65
Technical data
1)
2)
2)
C 140 140
310
DIN EN 175301-803A (Form A). The matching plug-in
connector, which satisfies the special requirements of
ATEX Category 3, is included with delivery. The plug-in
connector is illustrated in the Unit dimensions section.
Plug-in connector
Version DIN EN 175301-803A
Degree of protection to DIN 60529 IP 65 when correctly fitted and electrically connected
Connecting lead
+()
(+)
1
2
Circuit diagram
Note
(max. 3 x I
nom
electronics.
Voltage data in
type code of valve
Nominal voltage of
solenoid coil
Nominal current of
solenoid coil
Recommended back-up
fuse, medium time-lag to
DIN 41571
G24 24 V DC 0.95 A DC 2 A
311
03
Characteristic curve (measured with HLP46,
oil
= 40 C 5 C )
Note:
from B T).
Due to the flow forces active within the valves, the permissible
operating limit may be significantly less if there is only one
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r


tank back pressure.
W
o
r
k
i
n
g

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
100
150
200
250
300
350
0
50
1
9 8 7 6 5 4
3
2
12 11 10 13
Piston Characteristic
curve
A,B 1
J,L,U 2
V 3
D,C,Y 4
Q,W 5
A/0, A/0F 6
F,P 7
T 8
G 9
H 10
D/0F, C/0F 11
M, D/0, C/0 12
E1, R, E 13
11
10
8
6
4
2
0 20 40 30 10 50 60 70
7 8 10 6 5 3
9
1
2
4
Curve selection
Piston
Direction of flow
A, B 3 3
C46, C 1 1 3 1
D46, D, Y 5 5 3 3
E 3 3 1 1
F 1 3 1 1
T 10 10 9 9 8
H 2 4 2 2 9
J, Q 1 1 2 1
L 3 3 4 9
M 2 4 3 3
P 3 1 1 1
R 5 5 4 7
V 1 2 1 1
W 1 1 2 2
U 3 3 9 4
G 6 6 9 9 8
p
- q
V
- curves
312
Unit dimensions (in mm)
1 Nameplate
4 Fastening nut with double edge A/F 32
Tightening torque M
A
= 4 + 1 Nm
6 Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401 - 03 - 02,
Subplates
(without locating pin hole) G 341/01 (G 1/4)
G 342/01 (G 3/8)
G 502/01 (G 1/2)
G 342/60 (G 3/8)
G 502/60 (G 1/2)
as per Technical Data Sheet RE 45052,
ISO 4762 - M5 x 50 - 10.9 - flZn - 240h - L
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
123,5 * 81,5 *
4
2
64
2
3
22
8
5
9,4
5,6
69,2
4
5
3
1
,
7
5
40,5
3
1
4
5
4 3 2 3
1
A B
T
P
6
0
,
7
5
13,6
1
5
* plus 50.5 mm for removing the solenoid coil
313
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
Height 60, width 85
longitudinal axes
55 mm
Block diagram
58 64

2
5
85

6
0 55
314
1/26
4/2 and 4/3 directional
control valves, pilot-operated
Type H-4WEHXD
Nominal size 10, 16, 25, 32
Unit series 4X; 6X; 7X
RE 24751-XD-B2/07.04
HAD7266
to EN 50014/50018
ATEX units


Mat. No. R901015533
315
03
2/26 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type H-4WEHXD RE 24751-XD-B2
Features
Valve for controlling the start, stop and direction of a flow of
fluid, for proper use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Electrohydraulic actuation (WEH)
For subplate mounting,
mounting hole configuration to DIN 24340, Form A and
ISO 4401, subplates as per Technical Data Sheets
RE 45054 to RE 45060 (order separately),
see pages 21 to 24
Spring centering, sprung end position or hydraulic end
position
Wet pin DC or AC solenoids, with removable coil
Emergency override, optional
Electrical connection as single terminal with cable gland
(see page 14)
Switching time adjustment, optional
Pressure sequence valve in P-duct of main valve, optional
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbols 69
Control oil supply 9
Technical data 1013
Characteristic curves, operating limits 1619
Switching time adjustment, pressure reducing
valve, pressure sequence valve 20
Unit dimensions 2125
316
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 24751-XD-B2 Type H-4WEHXD 3/26
Directional control valve type H-4WEH
This valve is an electrohydraulically actuated directional control
spool valve. It controls the start, stop and direction of a flow of
fluid.
Essentially, the directional control valve consists of the housing
(1), the main control piston (2), one or two return springs (3.1)
and (3.2), and the pilot valve (4) with one or two solenoids a
(5.1) and/or b (5.2).
The main control piston (2) in the main valve is held in neutral
or initial position by the springs or by the application of pres-
sure. In initial position, the two spring chambers (6) and (8) are
connected to the tank without pressure via the pilot valve (4).
The pilot valve is supplied with control oil via the pilot line (7).
This supply may be internal or external (via port X if external).
When the pilot valve is actuated, e.g. by solenoid a, the pilot
piston (10) is pushed to the left, which causes the spring cham-
ber (8) to be subjected to control pressure. Spring chamber
(6) remains free from pressure.
The control pressure acts on the left side of the main control
piston (2) and pushes it against the spring (3.1). This connects
ports P to B and A to T in the main valve.
When the solenoid is de-energized, the pilot piston returns to
initial position (except in the case of impulse spools). Spring
chamber (8) is relieved of pressure towards the tank.
The control oil from the spring chamber is forced into duct Y
via the pilot valve.
The supply and return of control oil takes place internally or
externally (via port Y if external).
An optional emergency override (9) allows the pilot piston (10)
to be moved without the solenoid being energized.
5.2 10 4 5.1
9
T
7
6
3.1
1
2
3.2
8
A P B X Y
"a" "b"
Type H-4WEH 16XD
317
03
up to 350 bar = H
4-way version = 4
Type of actuation
Electrohydraulic = WEH
Nominal size
NG10 = 10
NG16 = 16
NG25 = 25
NG32 = 32
Piston return
By springs = no code
Hydraulic
1)
= H
For symbols see page 6
Unit series 40 to 49 - NG10 = 4X
Unit series 60 to 69 - NG25 (4W.H 25.) and NG32 = 6X
Unit series 70 to 79 - NG16 = 7X
Piston return in pilot valve with 2 switched positions and 2 solenoids
Only possible with pistons C, D, K, Z and hydraulic piston return in main valve:
Pilot valve with wet pin solenoid
High power valve (RE 23178-XD-B2) = 6B
24 V DC = G24
230 V AC 50/60 Hz = W230R
See page 15 for other voltages and frequencies
With emergency override (standard) = N
With lockable mushroom knob actuation = N4
Valve in explosion-proof design = XD
See information on explosion protection, page 11, for details
External control oil supply, external control oil return

= no code
Internal control oil supply, external control oil return
2)
= E
Internal control oil supply, internal control oil return
2)
= ET
External control oil supply, internal control oil return = T
H 4 WEH 6B XD
See page 5 for explanation of footnotes
318
Z2
No code = NBR seals
V = FKM seals
(other seals available on request)

Note
Take compatibility of seals and pressure fluid into account!
No code = without pressure reducing valve
D3 = with pressure reducing valve
Pressure sequence valve (not for NG10)
No code = without pressure sequence valve
P4.5 = with pressure reducing valve (p
= 4.5 bar)
Cartridge throttle
Z2 = Solenoid with terminal box and cable entry,
see Electrical connection section for details
No code = without switching time adjustment
S = switching time adjustment as inlet control
S2 = switching time adjustment as outlet control
1)
2 switched positions (hydraulic end position): pistons C, D, K, Z and Y only
2)
With internal control oil supply:
Minimum control pressure: please take note of page 10!
In order to avoid pressure peaks in excess of permitted limits, please order a valve with cartridge throttle (B10)
in port P of the pilot valve (see page 9) and a pressure reducing valve D3.
319
03
Symbols
A B
P T
a b
a b
../..
A B
P T
a b
a b
..H../..
A B
P T
a b
a b
..H../O
A B
P T
a b
a b
..H../OF
= C
= D
= K
= Z
A B
P T
a b
a b
../..
= Y
A B
P T
a b
a b
..H../..
A B
P T
a 0
a b
b
A B
P T
a 0
a
.A
1)
A B
P T
0
b
b .B
= E
1)
= G
= F
= J
= M
= P
= T
= S
2)
= U
= V
= Q
= W
= H
= L
= R
2 switched positions 3 switched positions
1)
Example: Piston E with switched position a

Ordering example:
H-4WEH 16 EA7X/6EG24N9XDETSZ2B10..V..
2)
Piston S for NG16 only
320
Symbols for valves with 2 switched positions
Valves with sprung
end position
Valves with hydraulic end position
X

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

Type H-4WEH.../... Type H-4WEH..H.../... Type H-4WEH..H.../O... Type H-4WEH..H.../OF...
A B
a b
a b
P T X Y
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X Y
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X Y
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X Y
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
X

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

Type H-4WEH.../...E... Type H-4WEH..H.../...E... Type H-4WEH..H.../O...E... Type H-4WEH..H.../OF...E...
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T Y
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T Y
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T Y
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T Y
Continued on next page
321
03
Valves with sprung
end position
Valves with hydraulic end position
X

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../...ET... Type H-4WEH..H.../...ET... Type H-4WEH..H.../O...ET... Type H-4WEH..H.../OF...ET...
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T
X

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../...T... Type H-4WEH..H.../...T... Type H-4WEH..H.../O...T... Type H-4WEH..H.../OF...T...
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X
Continued from previous page
322
Valves with spring-centered neutral
X

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../...
X

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

Type H-4WEH.../...ET...
A B
a 0
a, X b, Y
b
A B
a 0
a b
b
P T X Y P T X Y
a b
A B
a 0
a, X b, Y
b
A B
a 0
a b
b
P T
P T X Y
a b
X

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../...E...
X

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

Type H-4WEH.../...T...
A B
a 0
a, X b, Y
b
A B
a 0
a b
b
P T Y
P T X Y
a b
A B
a 0
a, X b, Y
b
A B
a 0
a b
b
P T X Y
P T X Y
a b
Type H-4WEH
The control oil is supplied externally from a separate circuit via
duct X.
The control oil is returned externally to the tank via duct Y.
Type H-4WEHE
The control oil is supplied internally from duct P of the main
valve.
The control oil is returned externally to the tank via duct Y. In
the subplate, port X is sealed.
Type H-4WEHET
valve.
The control oil is returned internally to the tank via duct T. In
the subplate, ports X and Y are sealed.
Type H-4WEHT
The control oil is supplied externally from a separate circuit via
duct X.
The control oil is returned internally to the tank via duct T. In
the subplate, port Y is sealed.
Control oil supply
Cartridge throttle
A valve with cartridge throttle must be ordered when there is a
need to limit the supply of control oil in the P-duct of the pilot
valve.
The cartridge throttle is inserted in the P-duct of the pilot valve.
P
Sealing ring
323
03
Hydraulic
Nominal sizes NG 10 16 25 32
Maximum working pressure
Ports P, A, B bar 315 350 350 350
Port T with external control oil
return Y
bar 250 250 250 250
with internal control oil
return Y
bar 210
Port Y with external control oil
return
bar 210
Flow rate of main valve l/min up to 160 up to 300 up to 650 up to 1100
Maximum control
pressure
bar 250 (a pressure reducing valve must be used for higher
control pressure)
Minimum control pressure
With external or internal control oil supply X
(piston D, K, E, J, L, M, Q, R, U, W)
3-position valve, spring-centered bar 10 14 13 8.5
2-position valve, sprung end position bar 10 14 13 10
2-position valve, hydraulic end position bar 7 14 8 5
With internal control oil supply
(piston C, F, H, P, T, V, Z, S
1)
)
bar 6.5
2)
4.5
3)
4.5
3)
4.5
3)
Control volume for switching process
3-position valve, spring-centered cm
3
2.04 5.72 14.2 29.4
2-position valve cm
3
4.08 11.45 28.4 58.8
Control volume for shortest switching time l/min approx. 35 approx. 35 approx. 35 approx. 45
4)
. Rapidly biodegradable
HETG (rapeseed oil)
4)
5)
; HEES
(synthetic ester)
5)
; other pressure fluids available on request
Pressure fluid temperature range C -30 +80 (NBR-seals)
C -15 +80 (FKM-seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2.8 500
Maximum degree of contamination of pressure fluid
Purity class to ISO 4406(c) Class 20/18/15
6)
For footnotes, see page 11
Technical data
General
Installation position Optional; horizontal for valves with hydraulic piston return
H and piston C, D, K, Z or Y
Weight Valve with one solenoid kg 9.9 12.0 21.1 44.0
Valve with two solenoids,
spring-centered
kg 10.8 13.3 22.4 45.4
Switching time adjustment kg 0.8
Pressure reducing valve kg 0.4
Surface protection Valve body Standard Paint, max. layer thickness 100 m
324
Electrical
Voltage type DC AC
Switching time to ISO 6403 see pages 12 and 13
temperature 20 C
W 15.8
7)
IP 65
Technical data
1)
Piston S for NG16 only
2)
In the case of pistons C, F, G, H, P, T, V, Z, an internal
control oil supply without the use of a pressure sequence
valve is only possible if the flow from P T in mid position
(in the 3-position valve) or when mid position is passed (in
the 2-position valve) is so great that the pressure differential
from P T reaches at least 6.5 bar.
3)
For pistons C, F, G, H, P, T, V, Z, S
1)
by means of
pressure sequence valve (not NG10) or correspondingly
high flow rate
4)
Suitable for both NBR and FKM seals
5)
6)
complied with in hydraulic systems.
Effective filtration prevents problems and also extends the
service life of components.

For a selection of filters, see Technical Data Sheets
RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
7)
8)
Maximum surface
temperature
8)
C (temperature class) 130 (T4)
Type of protection of solenoid to EN 50018 EEx dI
EEx dII CT4
325
03
Switching times - nominal size 10
Control pressure bar 70 140 210 250
Solenoid voltage type
1)
~ = ~ = ~ = ~ =
Switching time
on: neutral switched position
3-position valve ms 90 90 85 85 80 80 75 75
off: switched position neutral
1)
~ = ~ = ~ = ~ =
Switching time
3-position valve, spring-centered ms 90 90 90 85 90 70 85 85
3-position valve, spring-centered ms 85...100 60 85...100 60 80...95 55 80...95 50
2-position valve ms 85...100 60 85...100 60 80...95 55 80...95 50
1)
~ = ~ = ~ = ~ =
Switching time
1)
~ means AC supply (DC solenoid with integral rectifier), code W in ordering data

= means DC supply, code G in ordering data
Technical data
Switching times to ISO 6403
Switching time
on
Time interval from switch-on of electric actuation of solenoid to a pressure
change of 5% in main valve
Switching time
off
Time interval from switch-off of electric actuation of solenoid to a pressure
change of 5% in main valve
326
Control pressure bar 70 140 210
1)
~ = ~ = ~ =
Switching time
3-position valve, spring-centered ms 125 105 110 115 95 130
2-position valve ms 160 155 135 125 120 140
3-position valve, spring-centered ms 110...125 65 110...125 65 110...125 65
2-position valve ms 165...185 105 135...150 85 115...130 80
Technical data
Free flow cross-sections in neutral with pistons Q, V and W
Piston Q A T, B T mm
2
13 32 78 83 78
Piston V A T, B T mm
2
13 32 73 83 73
P A, P B mm
2
13 32 84 83 84
Piston W A T, B T mm
2
2.4 6 10 14 20
1)

327
03
with a terminal box and a type-tested cable gland.
2
0.4 0.5 Nm
2
conductor
Single wire 0.75 2.5 mm
2
2
1.2 2.4 Nm
conductor
Single wire 4 6 mm
2
Finely-stranded min. 4 mm
2
2.0 4.0 Nm
Note
conductor (PE ).
Cable gland
Connecting lead
1
3
4 2
328
Note
(max. 3 x I
nom
circuit. The breaking capacity of the fuse must at least match
the short-circuit current of the supply source.
Voltage data in
type code of valve
Nominal voltage of
solenoid coil
Nominal current of
solenoid coil
Recommended
back-up fuse,
medium time-lag to
DIN 41571
Max. voltage value
on cut-off
Interference
suppression circuit
G24 24 V DC 0.542 A DC 1 A 90 V
Bi-directional
suppressor diode
G48 48 V DC 0.271 A DC 630 mA 200 V
G96 96 V DC 0.135 A DC 250 mA 370 V
G110 110 V DC 0.118 A DC 250 mA 390 V
G205 205 V DC 0.083 A DC 160 mA 750 V
G220 220 V DC 0.059 A DC 160 mA 800 V
W100R 100 V AC 0.140 A AC 250 mA 3 V
suppressor diode
W110R 110 V AC 0.126 A AC 250 mA 3 V
W120R 120 V AC 0.116 A AC 250 mA 3 V
W200R 200 V AC 0.070 A AC 160 mA 3 V
W230R 230 V AC 0.059 A AC 160 mA 3 V
+()
(+)
Circuit diagrams
329
03
Characteristic curves: Type H-4WEH 10 (measured with HLP46,
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Piston Switched position Piston Neutral
P A P B A T B T A T B T P T
E, Y, D 2 2 4 5
F 1 4 1 4 F 3 6
G, T 4 2 2 6 G, T 7
H, C 4 4 1 4 H 1 3 5
J, K 1 2 1 3
L 2 3 1 4 L 3
M 4 4 3 4
P 4 1 3 4 P 7 5
Q, V, W, Z 2 2 3 5
R 2 2 3
U 3 3 3 4 U 4
Operating limits: Type H-4WEH 10 (measured with HLP46,
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Note
from B T).
tank back pressure.
2 and 3-position valves
Maximum flow rate q
V
in l/min
Piston Working pressure p
max
in bar
200 250 315
E, J, L, M, Q, R, U,
V, W, C, D, K, Z, Y
160 160 160
H 160 150 120
G, T 160 160 140
F, P 160 140 120
p - q
V
curves
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

1
2
3
4
5 6 7
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
330
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Piston Switched position
P A P B A T B T P T
E, Y, D 1 1 3 4
F 1 1 5 4
G, T 4 1 5 5 7
H, C, Q, V, Z 1 1 5 6
J, K, L 1 1 5 6
P A P B A T B T P T
M, W 1 1 3 4
R 1 1 3
U 2 2 3 5
S 3 3 3 8
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
2-position valve
Maximum flow rates q
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
X external, sprung end position in main valve
(with p
St min
=12 bar)
C, D, K, Y, Z 300 300 300 300 300
1)
C 300 300 300 300 300
D, Y 300 270 260 250 230
K 300 250 240 230 210
Z 300 260 190 180 160
X external, hydraulic end position in main valve
HC, HD, HK,
HZ, HY
300 300 300 300 300
3-position valve
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
X external, spring centering in main valve
E, H, J, L, M,
Q, U, W, R
300 300 300 300 300
F, P 300 250 180 170 150
G, T 300 300 240 210 190
S 300 300 300 250 220
V 300 250 210 200 180
Note
1)
If the stated flow rate values are exceeded, the function of
the return springs can no longer be guaranteed if the control
pressure fails!
If the supply of control oil is X internal, a pressure sequence
valve must always be employed due to the underlap of pis-
tons F, G, H, P, T, S, C and HC.

The pilot valve is not required for flow rates > 180 l/min in
the case of pistons V, Z and HZ.
Note
Also see Note on page 16
p - q
V
curves
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
331
03
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
p - q
V
curves
1
2
3
4
5 6
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 100 200 300 400
12
14
500
7 8
600 650
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

7 Piston G
Mid position P T
8 Piston T
Mid position P T
P A P B A T B T
E 1 1 1 3
F 1 4 3 3
G 3 1 2 4
H 4 4 3 4
J, Q 2 2 3 5
P A P B A T B T
U 4 1 1 6
V 2 4 3 6
W 1 1 1 3
T 3 1 2 4
P A P B A T B T
L 2 2 3 3
M 4 4 1 4
P 4 1 1 5
R 2 1 1
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
2-position valve
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
(with p
St min
=13 bar)
C, D, K, Y, Z 700 700 700 700 650
1)
C 700 700 700 700 650
D, Y 700 650 400 350 300
K 700 650 420 370 320
Z 700 700 650 480 400
HC, HD, HK,
HZ, HY
700 700 700 700 700
HC../O..
HD../O..
HK../O..
HZ../O..
700 700 700 700 700
HC../OF..
HD../OF..
HK../OF..
HZ../OF..
700 700 700 700 700
3-position valve
Maximum flow rate q
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
E, L, M,
Q, U, W,
700 700 700 700 650
G, T 400 400 400 400 400
F 650 550 430 330 300
H 700 650 550 400 360
J 700 700 650 600 520
P 650 550 430 330 300
V 650 550 400 350 310
R 700 700 700 650 580
Note
1)
pressure fails!
valve must be employed for flow rates < 180 l/min due to the
underlap of pistons Z, HZ and V.
tons C, HC, F, G, H, P and T.
Note
B -A
Piston R
332
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
p - q
V
curves pistons E, R and W
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

12
10
14
8
6
4
2
0
0 120 360 480 600 240 720
A T
B A
1)
16
18
840 960 1080
B T
2)
P A
P B
12
10
14
8
6
4
2
0
0 120 360 480 600 240 720
P B
16
18
840 960 1080
P A
A T
B T
P T
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

p - q
V
curves pistons G and T
12
10
14
8
6
4
2
0
0 120 360 480 600 240 720
16
18
840 960 1080
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

p - q
V
curves all other pistons
1)
Only with piston R
2)
Not with piston R
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
2-position valve
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
(with p
St min
=10 bar)
C, D, K, Y, Z 1100 1040 860 750 680
1)
C 1100 1040 860 800 700
D, Y 1100 1040 540 480 420
K 1100 1040 860 500 450
Z 1100 1040 860 700 650
HC, HD, HK,
HZ, HY
1100 1040 860 750 680
3-position valve
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
E, J, L, M,
Q, U, W, R
1100 1040 860 750 680
G, T, H, F, P 900 900 800 650 450
V 1100 1000 680 500 450
Note
1)
pressure fails!
tons C, HC, F, G, H, P and T.
Note
333
03
Switching time adjustment, pressure reducing valve, pressure sequence valve
3
1
2
Switching time adjustment S/S2
The switching time of the main valve (1) is influenced by the use
of a twin throttle check valve (2), type Z2FS 6.
Type H-4WEH 10 ..4X/S or S2
Pressure reducing valve D3
At a control pressure of over 250 bar, the valve must be
ordered with pressure reducing valve (3), type ZDR6PO, and a
cartridge throttle B10.
Order code: B10..D3
Type H-4WEH 10 ..4X//..D3
Pressure sequence valve P4.5 (not for NG10)
In the case of valves with pressureless circulation and an inter-
nal supply of control oil, a pressure sequence valve is required
in the P-duct of the main valve in order to build up the minimum
control pressure.
Order code: P4.5
The pressure differential of the pressure sequence valve must
be added to the pressure differential of the main valve (see
characteristic curves) to make up a total value.
The opening pressure is approx. 4.5 bar.
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min

pq
V
curve (measured with HLP46,
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
1 2 3
1 = NG16 2 = NG25 3 = NG32
334
Unit dimensions: Type H-4WEH 10 (in mm)
Subplates
without ports X, Y G 534/01 (G3/4)
with ports X, Y G 535/01 (G3/4)
G 536/01 (G1)
See page 25 for key to drawing
Coated to EN ISO 10683 flZn - 240h - L
8
0
4
6
2
3
A B
1
9
167
3
5
54
11
6,6 6
379
8
7
2
0
4
0
1
1
4
,
5
2.3 2.2 13
15
3.2
4
8
3.1
15
13 2.1 7
5
P
"a" "b"
110,5 56,5
"b"
A B
P
T
16
F1 F2
P
B A
T1 T
F3 F4
108
27
7
3
1
3
,
5
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
mating component
335
03
A B Y
27
55 155
9
6
1
8
9
10
12
11
63
163
155
55
379
4
0
1
1
4
,
5
2
0
2.3 2.2 13
15
3.2
4
5
13 2.1 7
3.1
15
14
34,1
11
6,6
18
11
X P
B Y A
50
101,6
9
2
,
4
1
,
6
3
5
6
9
,
9
1
,
6
A B
P
T
6
"a" "b"
F1
F2
P
B A
X
T
F3 F4
Y
F5
F6 G2
G1
142
21
9
4
1
2
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
mating component
Subplates
G 172/01 (G3/4)
G 172/02 (M27 x 2)
G 174/01 (G1)
G 174/02 (M33 x 2)
G 174/08 (flange)
(coefficient of friction 0,09 - 0,14 to VDA 235-102)
336
B
A X
B
T P Y
9
2
1
1
7
130
77
53
20
14
19
225
252,5
225
1
2
6
1
8
9
10
11 12
4
0
1
1
4
,
5
2
0
379
2.1 7 2.3 2.2 13
15
3.2
4
5
15
3.1
13
14
72
72
99,5
A
P
T
"a" "b"
6
F1
F2
P
B A
X
T
F3 F4
Y
F5
F6 G2
G1
195
21
1
2
0
1
4
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
Subplates
G 151/01 (G1)
G 154/01 (G1 1/4)
G 154/08 (flange)
G 156/01 (G1 1/2)
In order to ensure a secure connection, use only the following
valve fastening bolts:
mating component
337
03
Subplates
G 157/01 (G1 1/2)
G 157/02 (M48 x 2)
G 158/10 (flange)
76
T
1
9
33
22
P Y
A B
114,5
190,5
1
5
9
7
9
,
5
1
9
7
286,5 21,5
1
5
2
8
9
10
11
12
1
1
1
4
,
5
2
0
4
0
379
2.1 7 2.3 2.2
3.1
5
13
15
4
13
15
3.2
286,5 75,5
286,5 104,5
75,5 315,5
14
"a"
"b"
A B
P
T
6
F1 F2
P
B A
X
T
F3 F4
Y
F5
F6
G2
G1
257
23
2
0
0
2
0
,
5
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
mating component
338
Unit dimensions: Legend to item drawing nos.
Key to drawings for unit dimensions,
pages 21 to 24
1 Main valve
2 Pilot valve type 4WE 6...XD as per Technical Data
Sheet RE 23178-XD-B2
2.1 Pilot valve type 4WE 6 D (1 solenoid a)
for main valves with piston C, D, K, Z
piston HC, HD, HK, HZ
Pilot valve type 4WE 6 JA (1 solenoid a)
for main valves with piston EA, FA etc.,
spring return
2.2 Pilot valve type 4WE 6 Y (1 solenoid b)
for main valves with piston Y
piston HY
Pilot valve type 4WE 6 JB (1 solenoid b)
for main valves with piston EB, FB etc.,,
spring return
2.3 Pilot valve type 4WE 6 J (2 solenoids)
for main valves with 3 switched positions,
spring-centered
3.1 Solenoid a
3.2 Solenoid b
4 Switching time adjustment, optional
5 Pressure reducing valve, optional
6 Machined valve bearing surface, position of ports
7 Nameplate for pilot valve
8 Nameplate for valve as a whole
9 R-rings/O-rings
10 2-position valves with sprung end position in main
valve (C, D, K, Z)
11 2-position valves with sprung end position in main
valve (Y)
12 3-position valves, spring-centered
2-position valves with hydraulic end position in main
valve
13 Terminal box
14 Centering pin
15 Emergency override N, optional
16 Emergency override N4, optional
(possible with all sizes)
339
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
Notes
340
1/26
4/2 and 4/3 directional control
valves, pilot-operated
Type H-4WEHXE
Series 4X; 6X; 7X
RE 24751-XE-B2/02.04
H7097
DIN EN 50019/50028
ATEX units


These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Bosch Rexroth valves, and consist
Mat. No. R901017261
341
03
2/26 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type H-4WEHXE RE 24751-XE-B2
Features
Valve for controlling the start, stop and direction of a flow of
fluid, for proper use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Electrohydraulic actuation (WEH)
mounting hole configuration to DIN 24340,
Form A and ISO 4401,
subplates as per Technical Data Sheets
RE 45054 to RE 45060 (order separately),
see pages 21 to 24
Spring centering, spring end position or hydraulic
end position
Wet pin DC or AC solenoids, with removable coil
Emergency override, optional
Electrical connection as single terminal with cable gland
(see page 14)
Switching time adjustment, optional
Pressure sequence valve in P-duct of main valve, optional
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbols 69
Technical data 1013
Characteristic curves, operating limits 1619
Switching time adjustment, pressure reducing valve,
pressure sequence valve 20
Unit dimensions 2125
342
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 24751-XE-B2 Type H-4WEHXE 3/26
Directional control valves Type H-4WEH
The type H-4WEH valve is an electrohydraulically actuated
directional control spool valve. It controls the start, stop and
direction of a flow of fluid.
Essentially, the directional control valve consists of the housing
(1), the main control piston (2), one or two return springs (3.1)
and (3.2), and the pilot valve (4) with one or two solenoids a
(5.1) and/or b (5.2).
The main control piston (2) in the main valve is held in neutral
or initial position by the springs or by the application of pres-
sure. In initial position, the two spring chambers (6) and (8) are
connected to the tank without pressure via the pilot valve (4).
The pilot valve is supplied with control oil via the pilot line (7).
This supply may be internal or external (via port X if external).
When the pilot valve is actuated, e.g. by solenoid a, the pilot
piston (10) is pushed to the left, which causes the spring cham-
ber (8) to be subjected to control pressure. Spring chamber
(6) remains free from pressure.
The control pressure acts on the left side of the main control
piston (2) and pushes it against the spring (3.1). This connects
ports P to B and A to T in the main valve.
When the solenoid is de-energized, the pilot piston returns to
initial position (except in the case of impulse spools). Spring
chamber (8) is relieved of pressure towards the tank.
The control oil from the spring chamber is forced into duct Y
via the pilot valve.
The supply and return of control oil takes place internally or
externally (via port Y if external).
An optional emergency override (9) allows movement of the
pilot piston (10) without energizing the solenoid.
5.2 10 4 5.1
9
T
b a
7
6
3.1
1
2
3.2
8
A P B X Y
Type H-4WEH 16XE
343
03
up to 350 bar = H
4-way version = 4
Type of actuation
Electrohydraulic = WEH
Nominal size
NG 10 = 10
NG 16 = 16
NG 25 = 25
NG 32 = 32
Piston return
By springs = no code
Hydraulic
1)
= H
For symbols see page 6
Series 40 to 49 NG 10 = 4X
Series 60 to 69 NG 25 (4W.H 25.) and NG 32 = 6X
Series 70 to 79 NG 16 = 7X
Piston return in pilot valve with 2 switched positions and 2 solenoids
only possible with pistons C, D, K, Z and hydraulic piston return in main valve:
without spring return = O
without spring return, with detent = OF
Pilot valve with wet pin solenoid
High power valve (RE 23178-XE-B2) = 6E
24 V DC = G24
230 V AC 50/60 Hz = W230R
See page 15 for other voltages and frequencies
With emergency override (standard) = N
Valve in explosion-proof design = XE
External control oil supply, external control oil return

= no code
Internal control oil supply, external control oil return
2)
= E
Internal control oil supply, internal control oil return
2)
= ET
External control oil supply, internal control oil return = T
H 4 WEH 6E XE
See page 5 for explanation of footnotes
344
Z2
No code = NBR seals
V = FKM seals

Note
Take compatibility of seals and pressure fluid into account!
No code = without pressure reducing valve
D3 = with pressure reducing valve
Pressure sequence valve (not for NG 10)
No code = without pressure sequence valve
P4.5 = with pressure reducing valve (p
= 4.5 bar)
Cartridge throttle
Z2 = Solenoid with terminal box and cable entry,
see Electrical connection section for details
No code = without switching time adjustment
S = switching time adjustment as inlet control
S2 = switching time adjustment as outlet control
1)
2 switched positions (hydraulic end position): pistons C, D, K, Z, Y only
2)
With internal control oil supply:
Minimum control pressure: please take note of page 10!

In order to avoid pressure peaks in excess of permitted limits, a valve with cartridge throttle (B10) for port P of the pilot valve
(see page 9) and a pressure reducing valve D3 should be ordered.
345
03
Symbols
A B
P T
a b
a b
../..
A B
P T
a b
a b
..H../..
A B
P T
a b
a b
..H../O
A B
P T
a b
a b
..H../OF
= C
= D
= K
= Z
A B
P T
a b
a b
../..
= Y
A B
P T
a b
a b
..H../..
A B
P T
a 0
a b
b
A B
P T
a 0
a
.A
1)
A B
P T
0
b
b .B
= E
1)
= G
= F
= J
= M
= P
= T
= S
2)
= U
= V
= Q
= W
= H
= L
= R
1)
Example: Piston E with switched position a

Ordering example:
H-4WEH 16 EA7X/6EG24N9XEETSZ2B10..V..
2)
Piston S for NG 16 only
2 switched positions 3 switched positions
346
Valves with spring end position Valves with hydraulic end position
X

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../... Type H-4WEH..H.../... Type H-4WEH..H.../O... Type H-4WEH..H.../OF...
A B
a b
a b
P T X Y
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X Y
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X Y
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X Y
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
X

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../...E... Type H-4WEH..H.../...E... Type H-4WEH..H.../O...E... Type H-4WEH..H.../OF...E...
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T Y
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T Y
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T Y
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T Y
Continued on next page
347
03
Valves with spring end position Valves with hydraulic end position
X

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../...ET... Type H-4WEH..H.../...ET... Type H-4WEH..H.../O...ET... Type H-4WEH..H.../OF...ET...
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T
A B
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
a b
a b
P T
X

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../...T... Type H-4WEH..H.../...T... Type H-4WEH..H.../O...T... Type H-4WEH..H.../OF...T...
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X
A B
P T
a b
a, X b, Y
a b
P T Y X
A B
a b
a b
P T X
Continued from previous page
348
Valves with spring-centered neutral
X

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../...
X

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../...ET...
A B
a 0
a, X b, Y
b
A B
a 0
a b
b
P T X Y P T X Y
a b
A B
a 0
a, X b, Y
b
A B
a 0
a b
b
P T
P T X Y
a b
X

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../...E...
X

=

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

Y

=

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l
Type H-4WEH.../...T...
A B
a 0
a, X b, Y
b
A B
a 0
a b
b
P T Y
P T X Y
a b
A B
a 0
a, X b, Y
b
A B
a 0
a b
b
P T X Y
P T X Y
a b
Type H-4WEH
The control oil is supplied externally from a separate circuit
via duct X.
Type H-4WEHE
valve.
In the subplate, port X is sealed.
Type H-4WEHET
valve.
The control oil is returned internally to the tank via duct T.
In the subplate, ports X and Y are sealed.
Type H-4WEHT
The control oil is supplied externally from a separate circuit
via duct X.
The control oil is returned internally to the tank via duct T.
In the subplate, port Y is sealed.
Control oil supply
Cartridge throttle
A valve with cartridge throttle must be ordered when there is a
need to limit the supply of control oil in the P-duct of the pilot
valve.
The cartridge throttle is inserted in the P-duct of the pilot valve.
P
Sealing ring
349
03
Technical data
General
Installation position Optional; horizontal for valves with hydraulic piston return H
and piston C, D, K, Z or Y
Weight Valve with one solenoid kg 7.3 9.4 18.5 41.4
Valve with two solenoids, spring-centered kg 8.2 10.7 19.8 42.8
Switching time adjustment kg 0.8
Pressure reducing valve kg 0.4
Hydraulic
Ports P, A, B bar 315 350 350 350
Port T with external control oil
return Y
bar 250 250 250 250
with internal control oil
return Y
bar 210
Port Y with external control oil
return
bar 210
Maximum control
pressure
bar 250 (a pressure reducing valve must be used in the case of
higher control pressure)
Minimum control pressure
with external or internal control oil supply X
(piston D, K, E, J, L, M, Q, R, U, W)
3-position valve, spring-centered bar 10 14 13 8,5
2-position valve, spring end position bar 10 14 13 10
2-position valve, hydraulic end position bar 7 14 8 5
with internal control oil supply
(piston C, F, H, P, T, V, Z, S
1)
)
bar 6.5
2)
4.5
3)
4.5
3)
4.5
3)
Control volume for switching process
3-position valve, spring-centered cm
3
2.04 5.72 14.2 29.4
2-position valve cm
3
4.08 11.45 28.4 58.8
Control volume for shortest switching time l/min approx. 35 approx. 35 approx. 35 approx. 45
4)
HETG (rapeseed oil)
4)
5)
;
5)
;
C -15 +80 (FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 2.8 500
6)
For footnotes, see page 11
350
Technical data
Electrical
Voltage type DC AC
Switching time to ISO 6403 see pages 12 and 13
temperature 20 C
W 20.6
7)
IP 66
8)
125C (T4)
1)
Piston S for NG 16 only
2)
In the case of pistons C, F, G, H, P, T, V and Z, an internal
control oil supply without the use of a pressure sequence
valve is only possible if the flow from P T in mid position
(in the 3-position valve) or when mid position is passed (in
the 2-position valve) is so great that the pressure differential
from P T reaches 6.5 bar minimum.
3)
For pistons C, F, G, H, P, T, V, Z and S
1)
- by means of
pressure sequence valve (not NG 10) or correspondingly
high flow rate
4)
Suitable for both NBR and FKM seals
5)
6)
components.
RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
7)
With correctly installed connection cable
8)
351
03
1)

Technical data
1)
~ = ~ = ~ = ~ =
Switching time
1)
~ = ~ = ~ = ~ =
Switching time
1)
~ = ~ = ~ = ~ =
Switching time
Switching times to ISO 6403
Switching time
on
Time interval from switch-on of electric actuation of solenoid
to a pressure change of 5% in main valve
Switching time
off
Time interval from switch-off of electric actuation of solenoid
to a pressure change of 5% in main valve
352
Technical data
Control pressure bar 70 140 210
1)
~ = ~ = ~ =
Switching time
3-position valve, spring-centered ms 125 90 110 100 95 115
2-position valve ms 160 140 135 110 120 125
off: : switched position neutral
3-position valve, spring-centered ms 70...85 50 70...85 50 70...85 50
2-position valve ms 125...140 90 95...110 70 75...90 65
Free flow cross-sections in neutral with pistons Q, V and W
Piston Q A T, B T mm
2
13 32 78 83 78
Piston V A T, B T mm
2
13 32 73 83 73
P A, P B mm
2
13 32 84 83 84
Piston W A T, B T mm
2
2,4 6 10 14 20
1)

353
03
2
3
1 4
2
0.4 0.5 Nm
2
2 Connection for protective
earth conductor
Single wire max. 2.5 mm
2
1.2 2.4 Nm
3 Connection for equipotential
bonding conductor
Single wire max. 6 mm
2
Finely-stranded max. 4 mm
2
2.0 4.0 Nm
Note
The electrical connection
must be equipped with a
correctly connected protective
earth conductor (PE ).
Cable gland
Thread length mm 512
Temperature range C -20 120
Connecting lead
Temperature range C -20120
354
Note
3 x I
nom
circuit. The breaking capacity of the fuse must match the
possible short-circuit current of the supply source.
Voltage data in
type code of valve
Nominal voltage of
solenoid coil
Nominal current of
solenoid coil
Recommended
back-up fuse,
medium time-lag to
DIN 41571
Max. voltage value
on cut-off
Interference
suppression circuit
G24 24 V DC 0.708 A DC 1,25 A 90 V
Bi-directional
suppressor diode
G48 48 V DC 0.354 A DC 630 mA 200 V
G96 96 V DC 0.177 A DC 315 mA 370 V
G110 110 V DC 0.155 A DC 315 mA 390 V
G205 205 V DC 0.083 A DC 160 mA 750 V
G220 220 V DC 0.077 A DC 160 mA 800 V
W100R 100 V AC 0.180 A AC 400 mA 3 V
suppressor diode
W110R 110 V AC 0.163 A AC 315 mA 3 V
W120R 120 V AC 0.150 A AC 315 mA 3 V
W200R 200 V AC 0.090 A AC 200 mA 3 V
W230R 230 V AC 0.078 A AC 160 mA 3 V
+()
(+)
Circuit diagrams
355
03
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
p - q
V
-curves
Flow rate l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Piston Switched position Piston Neutral

P A P B A T B T A T B T P T
E, Y, D 2 2 4 5
F 1 4 1 4 F 3 6
G, T 4 2 2 6 G, T 7
H, C 4 4 1 4 H 1 3 5
J, K 1 2 1 3
L 2 3 1 4 L 3
M 4 4 3 4
P 4 1 3 4 P 7 5
Q, V, W, Z 2 2 3 5
R 2 2 3
U 3 3 3 4 U 4
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Note
from B T).
tank back pressure.
2 and 3-position valves
Maximum flow rate q
V
in l/min
max
in bar
200 250 315
E, J, L, M, Q, R, U,
V, W, C, D, K, Z, Y
160 160 160
H 160 150 120
G, T 160 160 140
F, P 160 140 120
1
2
3
4
5 6 7
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
356
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
p - q
V
-curves
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r


P A P B A T B T P T
E, Y, D 1 1 3 4
F 1 1 5 4
G, T 4 1 5 5 7
H, C, Q, V, Z 1 1 5 6
J, K, L 1 1 5 6
Piston Neutral
P A P B A T B T P T
M, W 1 1 3 4
R 1 1 3
U 2 2 3 5
S 3 3 3 8
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
2-position valve
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
X external, spring end position in main valve
(with p
St min
=12 bar)
C, D, K, Y, Z 300 300 300 300 300
1)
C 300 300 300 300 300
D, Y 300 270 260 250 230
K 300 250 240 230 210
Z 300 260 190 180 160
HC, HD, HK,
HZ, HY
300 300 300 300 300
3-position valve
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
E, H, J, L, M,
Q, U, W, R
300 300 300 300 300
F, P 300 250 180 170 150
G, T 300 300 240 210 190
S 300 300 300 250 220
V 300 250 210 200 180
Note
1)
the return springs can no longer be guaranteed in the event
of failure of the control pressure!
valve must always be employed due to the underlap of
pistons F, G, H, P, T, C and HC.

A pressure sequence valve is not required for flow rates
> 180 l/min in the case of pistons V, Z, HZ and S.
Note
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
357
03
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
p - q
V
-curves
1
2
3
4
5 6
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 100 200 300 400
12
14
500
7 8
600 650
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

7 Piston G
Mid-position P T
8 Piston T
Mid-position P T
2-position valve
Maximum flow rate q
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
(with p
St min
=13 bar)
C, D, K, Y, Z 700 700 700 700 650
1)
C 700 700 700 700 650
D, Y 700 650 400 350 300
K 700 650 420 370 320
Z 700 700 650 480 400
HC, HD, HK,
HZ, HY
700 700 700 700 700
HC../O..
HD../O..
HK../O..
HZ../O..
700 700 700 700 700
HC../OF..
HD../OF..
HK../OF..
HZ../OF..
700 700 700 700 700
3-position valve
Maximum flow rate q
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
E, L, M,
Q, U, W,
700 700 700 700 650
G, T 400 400 400 400 400
F 650 550 430 330 300
H 700 650 550 400 360
J 700 700 650 600 520
P 650 550 430 330 300
V 650 550 400 350 310
R 700 700 700 650 580
P A P B A T B T
E 1 1 1 3
F 1 4 3 3
G 3 1 2 4
H 4 4 3 4
J, Q 2 2 3 5
P A P B A T B T
U 4 1 1 6
V 2 4 3 6
W 1 1 1 3
T 3 1 2 4
P A P B A T B T
L 2 2 3 3
M 4 4 1 4
P 4 1 1 5
R 2 1 1
Note
1)
valve must always be employed due to the underlap of
pistons C, HC, F, G, H, P and T.
Note
B -A
Piston R
358
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
p - q
V
-curves pistons E, R and W
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

12
10
14
8
6
4
2
0
0 120 360 480 600 240 720
A T
B A
1)
16
18
840 960 1080
B T
2)
P A
P B
12
10
14
8
6
4
2
0
0 120 360 480 600 240 720
P B
16
18
840 960 1080
P A
A T
B T
P T
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

p - q
V
-curves pistons G and T
12
10
14
8
6
4
2
0
0 120 360 480 600 240 720
16
18
840 960 1080
Flow rate in l/min
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

p - q
V
-curves all other pistons
1)
Only with piston R
2)
Not with piston R
2-position valve
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
(with p
St min
=10 bar)
C, D, K, Y, Z 1100 1040 860 750 680
1)
C 1100 1040 860 800 700
D, Y 1100 1040 540 480 420
K 1100 1040 860 500 450
Z 1100 1040 860 700 650
HC, HD, HK,
HZ, HY
1100 1040 860 750 680
3-position valve
V
in l/min
max
in bar
70 140 210 280 350
E, J, L, M,
Q, U, W, R
1100 1040 860 750 680
G, T, H, F, P 900 900 800 650 450
V 1100 1000 680 500 450
Note
1)
Note
359
03
Switching time adjustment, pressure reducing valve, pressure sequence valve
1
2
3
Switching time adjustment S/S2
The switching time of the main valve (1) is influenced by the use
of a twin throttle check valve (2), type Z2FS 6.
Type H-4WEH 10 ..4X/S or S2
Pressure reducing valve D3
At a control pressure of over 250 bar, the valve must be orde-
red with a pressure reducing valve (3), type ZDR6PO, and a
cartridge throttle B10.
Order code: B10..D3
Type H-4WEH 10 ..4X//..D3
Pressure sequence P4.5 (not for NG 10)
In the case of valves with pressure-less circulation and an
internal supply of control oil, a pressure sequence valve is
required in the P-duct of the main valve in order to build up
the minimum control pressure.
Order code: P4.5
The pressure differential of the pressure sequence valve must
be added to the pressure differential of the main valve (see
characteristic curves) to make up a total value.
The opening pressure is approx. 4.5 bar.
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

i
n

b
a
r

Flow rate in l/min

pq
V
curve (measured with HLP46,
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
1 2 3
1 = NG 16 2 = NG 25 3 = NG 32
Fastening bolts for pilot valve
In order to ensure a secure connection, use only the following
fastening bolts:
Pilot only 4 cheese-head bolts DIN 912 - M5 x 50 - 10.9
S/S2 4 cheese-head bolts DIN 912 - M5 x 90 - 10.9
D3 4 cheese-head bolts DIN 912 - M5 x 70 - 10.9
S/S2+D3 4 cheese-head bolts DIN 912 - M5 x 110 - 10.9
Coated to DIN EN ISO 10683 flZn - 240h - L
360
7
0
4
6
2
3
A T B T
Y
A T B T
1
9
b a
X
167
3
5
54 56,5
11
6,6 25,5
25,5
7
3
27
1
3
,
5
108
P
A B
T
X Y
T
6
312 *
8
6
2
0
4
0
9
5
,
5
2.3 2.2 13
15
3.2
4
8
3.1
15
13 2.1 7
5
P
P
P
A B
T
* plus 2 x 78 mm for removal of coils
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
Subplates
without ports X, Y G 534/01 (G 3/4)
with ports X, Y G 535/01 (G 3/4)
G 536/01 (G 1)
See page 25 for legend to drawing item numbers
361
03
A B Y
27
55 155
9
6
1
8
9
10
12
11
63
163
155
55
1
2
21
142
B
A
T
P
X
L
Y
6
312*
4
0
9
5
,
5
2
0
2.3 2.2 13
15
3.2
4
5
13 2.1 7
3.1
15
14
b a
34,1
11
6,6
18
11
X P
B Y A
50
101,6
9
1
1
,
6
3
5
6
9
,
9
1
,
6
P
T
B A
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
Subplates
G 172/01 (G 3/4)
G 172/02 (M27 x 2)
G 174/01 (G 1)
G 174/02 (M33 x 2)
G 174/08 (flange)
362
B A
X
T
P Y
A X
B
T P Y
1
4
21
195
9
2
1
1
7
130
77
53
20
14
19
225
252,5
225
1
2
6
1
6
8
9
10
11 12
1
2
0
b a
4
0
9
5
,
5
2
0
312*
2.1 7 2.3 2.2 13
15
3.2
4
5
15
3.1
13
14
P
T
B A
72
72
99,5
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
Subplates
G 151/01 (G 1)
G 154/01 (G 1 1/4)
G 154/08 (flange)
G 156/01 (G 1 1/2)
363
03
76
T
X
1
9
33
22
P Y
X A B
114,5
190,5
1
5
9
7
9
,
5
1
9
7
2
0
,
5
23
257
2
0
0
A
B
T
P
Y
286,5 21,5
1
5
2
8
9
10
11
12
1
6
b a
9
5
,
5
2
0
4
0
312*
2.1 7 2.3 2.2
3.1
5
13
15
4
13
15
3.2
P
T
B A
286,5 75,5
286,5 104,5
75,5 315,5
14
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
Subplates
G 157/01 (G 1 1/2)
G 157/02 (M48 x 2)
G 158/10 (flange)
364
Unit dimensions: Legend to item drawing nos.
Legend to drawing item nos. in respect of unit
dimensions, pages 21 to 24
1 Main valve
2 Pilot valve type 4WE 6XE as per Technical Data
Sheet RE 23178-XE-B2
2.1 Pilot valve type 4WE 6 D...(1 solenoid a)
for main valves with piston C, D, K, Z
piston HC, HD, HK, HZ
Pilot valve type 4WE 6 JA (1 solenoid a))
for main valves with piston EA, FA etc.,
spring return
2.2 Pilot valve type 4WE 6 Y...( 1 solenoid b)
for main valves with piston Y
piston HY
Pilot valve type 4WE 6 JB... (1 solenoid b)
for main valves with piston EB, FB etc.,
spring return
2.3 Pilot valve type 4WE 6 J...(2 solenoids)
for main valves with 3 switched positions,
spring-centered
3.1 Solenoid a
3.2 Solenoid b
4 Switching time adjustment, optional
5 Pressure reducing valve, optional
6 Machined valve bearing surface, position of ports
8 Nameplate for overall valve
9 R-rings/O-rings
10 2-position valves with spring end position in main
valve (C, D, K, Z)
11 2-position valves with spring end position in main
valve (Y)
12 3-position valves, spring-centered
2-position valves with hydraulic end position in main
valve
13 Terminal box
14 Centering pin
15 Emergency override, optional
365
03
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
Notes
366
Proportional and servo valves

Proportional directional valves, direct operated
4/2- and 4/3-way proportional directional valves,
direct actuated, without electrical position feed-
back 4WRA...XEJ 6 2X 315 29055-XE-B2 369
Proportional directional valves, direct operated
4/2 and 4/3 proportional directional control val-
ves, pilot operated, without electrical position
feedback 4WRZ...XE 1032 7X 350 29115-XE-B2 379
Proportional pressure-reducing valves, pilot operated
Proportional pressure-reducing valve
in 3-way version 3DREP...XE 6 2X 100 29184-XE-B2 397
Servo directional valves
4/3 servo directional control valve
with mechanical position feedback 4WS2EM..XN...-100 6 2X 315 29564-XN-100-B2 407
with mechanical position feedback 4WS2EM..XN...-102 6 2X 315 29564-XN-102-B2 417
Servo directional control valve of 4-way design 4WS2EM..XN 6 2X 315 29564-XN-B2 427
with mechanical position feedback 4WS2EM...XH...-104 10 5X 315 29583-XH-104-B2 437
Servo directional control valve of 4-way design 4WS2EM...XH 10 5X 315 29583-XH-B2 451
with mechanical position feedback 4WS2EM...XN...-100 10 5X 315 29583-XN-100-B2 465
Servo directional control valve of 4-way design 4WS2EM...XN 10 5X 315 29583-XN-B2 501
Designation Type Size Series
p
max

in bar
Data
sheet no. Page

01
03
04
04
06
367
368
1/10
4/2 and 4/3 proportional directional
control valve, directly operated,
without electrical position feedback
Type 4WRA 6 ../..XEJ
Nominal size 6
Unit series 2X
RE 29055-XE-B2/07.04
Replace: RD 29052
RD 29052-M
H7098
Type of protection of valve solenoid EEx em IIT4X to
EN 50019/50028
The external metal parts are galvanized and chromated
olive-green.
This seawater resistance is defined by stating J in the
ordering data.
ATEX units


Mat. No. R901024014
369
04
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type 4WRA 6 ../..XEJ RE 29055-XE-B2
Features
Direct solenoid-operated proportional valve for controlling
the direction and size of a flow, for proper use in potentially
Resistant to seawater
Operated by proportional solenoids with central thread and
removable coil
Spring-centered control piston
For subplate mounting:
Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94
(order separately)
Wet-pin DC solenoids
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbols 3
Technical data 5
Characteristic curves 7 ... 8
Unit dimensions 9
370
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 29055-XE-B2 Type 4WRA 6 ../..XEJ 3/10
Proportional directional control valve for
external trigger electronics
Nominal size 6 = 6
Symbols
P T
a 0 b
A B
a b
a 0
a b
A B
P T
= E
E1-
= W
W1-
= EA
= WA
For symbols E1- and W1-, please note:
P A: q
V max
and

B T: q
V/2
P B: q
V/2
and A T: q
V max
With pistons W and WA, in zero position there is a
connection from A T and B T with approx. 3 %
of the respective nominal cross-section
V = FKM seals
Note
Take compatibility of seals and
pressure fluid into account!
J = Surface protection
Galvanized and chromated olive-green
to provide seawater resistance
page 6, for details
Supply voltage of trigger electronics
G24 = 24 V DC
2X = Unit series 20 to 29 (20 to 29: installation and
connection dimensions unchanged)
Nominal flow
07 = 6 l/min
15 = 10 l/min
30 = 18 l/min
See page 7 for characteristic curves
4WRA 6 2X G24 XE J V
Symbols
A B
P T
a 0
a b
P T
A B
a 0 b
a b
Type 4WRA 6 ...XE Type 4WRA 6 ...A...XE
371
04 04
Type 4WRA 6 ...-2X/G24.XEJ/V
"a" "b"
A T
(P)
B
5 3 1 2 4 7 6
4/2 and 4/3 proportional directional control valve are designed
as directly operated units for subplate mounting. They are actu-
ated by proportional solenoids with central thread and remov-
able coil for potentially explosive atmospheres. The solenoids
are actuated by external trigger electronics.
Construction:
The valve basically comprises:
Housing (1) with mounting surface
Control piston (2) with compression springs (3 and 4)

Solenoids (5 and 6) with central thread

Function:
When the solenoids (5 or 6) are not actuated, the control
piston (2) is held in center position by the compression
springs (3 and 4)
The control piston (2) is directly operated when a proportio-
nal solenoid is energized e.g. solenoid b (6) actuated
Control piston (2) is moved to the left proportionately to
the electrical input signal
P A and B T are connected by orifice-type cross-
sections with a progressive flow characteristic
Solenoid (6) de-energized
Control piston (2) is moved back to center position by
the compression spring (3)
Note:
Only one solenoid may be actuated at one time in
4/3-way valves.
Valve with 2 switching positions (type 4WRA 6 .AXE):
This type of valve basically functions like a valve with 3 swit-
ching positions. However, valves with 2 switching positions are
only equipped with solenoid a (5). A screw plug (7) takes the
place of the 2nd proportional solenoid.
Note:
The tank line must not be allowed to run empty. If installation
conditions might incur this, install a pressure sequence valve
(precharge pressure approx. 2 bar).
372
Technical data
General
Installation position Optional; preferably horizontal
Weight kg 3.5
Hydraulic
Working pressure range Ports P, A, B bar up to 315
Port T bar up to 210
Nominal flow rates q
v nom
at
p
= 10 bar l/min 6
l/min 10
l/min 18
Other pressure fluids available on request!
Pressure fluid temperature range C -20 +80
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 15 380
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure
fluid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Class 17/15/12
1)
Hysteresis % 5
Range of inversion % 1
Sensitivity % 0.5
Electrical
Voltage type DC; PWM signal 100 500 Hz
Signal type Analog
Maximum current I per solenoid A 1.03
Resistance of
solenoid coil
Cold value at 20 C 9
Maximum hot value 12.9
Cyclic duration factor % 100
Coil temperature C up to 125
Electrical
connection
Lead diameter mm 9 13.5
Thermal resistance C -20 +120
EN 60529
IP 66, mounted
Seal material FKM
Degree of protection to EN 50019 II 2G c T4X
1)

RE 50076 and RE 50081.
373
04
1)
125 C (T4)
Trigger electronics
Amplifier in modular design
2)
On request
1)
2)
Note:
The power supply to the proportional solenoid coil must con-
form to Directive 94/9/EG (devices and protective systems
for proper use in potentially explosive atmospheres).
Note:
3 x I
nom
2
3
1 4
1 Operating voltage connection Single wire 0.75...2.5 mm
2
Finely-stranded 0.75...1.5 mm
2
0.4 0.5 Nm
2 Connection for protective
earth conductor
2
2
1.2 2.4 Nm
3 Connection for equipotential
bonding conductor
2
2
2.0 4.0 Nm
3)
Recommended back-up fuse
Medium time-lag characteristic to DIN 41571; 1.25 A
+()
(+)
3)
PE
DC/
PWM
Suppressor diode
47 V, 1.5 kW
Technical data, information on explosion protection
374
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

Current in mA
Ordering code 07: 6 l/min at 10 bar valve pressure differential
1
p
= 10 bar constant
2
p
= 20 bar constant
3
p
= 30 bar constant
4
p
= 50 bar constant
5
p
= 100 bar constant
p
= valve pressure differential to
DIN 24311 (inlet pressure minus load
pressure and minus return pressure)
300 900 800 700 600 500 400 1000
8
6
4
0
2
12
10
5
1
2
3
4
300 900 800 700 600 500 400 1000
8
6
4
0
2
12
10
5
1
2
3
4
14
16
300 900 800 700 600 500 400 1000
8
6
4
0
2
12
10
14
16
24
22
20
18
1
5
3/4
2
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

Current in mA
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

Current in mA
1
p
= 10 bar constant
2
p
= 20 bar constant
3
p
= 30 bar constant
4
p
= 50 bar constant
5
p
= 100 bar constant
p
1
p
= 10 bar constant
2
p
= 20 bar constant
3
p
= 30 bar constant
4
p
= 50 bar constant
5
p
= 100 bar constant
p
375
04
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Operating limit
6 l/min nominal flow
Operating limit
0 250 200 150 100 50
8
6
4
0
2
12
10
0 250 200 150 100 50
8
6
4
0
2
12
10
14
0 250 200 150 100 50
15
10
0
5
20
25
Operating limit
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

Pressure differential in bar

F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n


0
50
25
75
100
60 40 20 80 100 0 120 60 40 20 80 100 120
4
3
2
1
0
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n


Step response to abrupt electrical input signals
S
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms Time in ms
Input signal change [%]
1 0 25 0
2 0 50 0
3 0 75 0
4 0 100 0
Measured with control pressure
p
ST
= 10 bar
376
1 Valve housing
2 Proportional solenoid a
3 Proportional solenoid b
4 Terminal box
5 Nameplate
6 Same seals for ports P, A, B and T
7 Screw plug for valve with one solenoid
(2 switching positions, version EA or WA)
8 Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94
Differs from the standard:
No locating pin
Ports P, A, B and T have 8 mm
Subplates
(without locating pin hole)
G 341/01 (G1/4)
G 342/01 (G3/8)
G 502/01 (G1/2)
must be ordered separately
4 cheese-head bolts
ISO 4762-M5 x 50-10.9-flZn-240h-L
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
13,5
4
2
90,5 55,5
154,5
223
309
"a" "b"
A B
P
2 4 5 1 3
6 7
9
5
,
5
7
3
,
5
0
,
7
5
3
1
,
7
5
15 40,5
8
3
1
T
2
3
45
4
5
F1
F3 F4
F2
G
T
P
B A
72
15
4
7
8
8
377
04
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
Height 60, width 85
longitudinal axes
55 mm
58 64

2
5
55
85

6
0
Block diagram
378
1/18

Mat. No. R901024888
4/2 and 4/3 proportional directional
control valves, pilot operated,
without electrical position feedback
Type 4WRZXE
Unit series 7X
RE 29115-XE-B2/09.04
H7138
EN 50019/50028
olive-green.
ordering data.
ATEX units

379
04
2/18 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type 4WRZXE RE 29115-XE-B2
Features
Pilot operated 2-stage proportional directional control valves
for controlling the direction and size of a flow
Operated by a pilot valve (3-way pressure reducing valve)
Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401 - (depending on
stated nominal size)
Subplates (order separately) as per Technical Data Sheet
RE 45054 to RE 45060, also see pages 13 to 16
Spring-centered control piston
Symbols (simplified)
With electrohydraulic actuation
Type 4WRZ-7X./ Control oil supply Type 4WRZA.-7X./
A B
P T
a 0 b
X Y
a b
X = external
Y = external
A B
P T
a 0
X
a
Y
b
Type 4WRZ-7X./ET Type 4WRZA.-7X./ET
A B
T
a 0 b
a b
P
X = internal
Y = internal
A B
P T
a 0
a b
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbols 2
Function, sectional diagram 4, 5
Technical data 6, 7
Characteristic curves 9 12
Unit dimensions 13 16
380
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 29115-XE-B2 Type 4WRZXE 3/18
Electrohydraulic = Z
actuation
Symbols
T P
a 0 b a 0 b
A B
a 0 a 0
A B
T P
= E
E1-
= E3
= W6-
W8-

= W9-

= EA
= W6A
For symbols E1- and W8-:
P A: q
V

max
B T: q
V
/2
P B: q
V
/2 A T: q
V

max
For symbols E3- and W9-:
P A: q
V

max
B T: closed
P B: q
V
/2 A T: q
V

max
(Differential circuit, base of piston at port A)
Note: With pistons W6-, W8-, W9- and
W6A, in 0 position there is a connection
from A T and B T with less than 2% of
the respective nominal cross-section.
M =
1)
NBR seals
V = FKM seals
D3 = With pressure reducing
valve
(with fixed settings)
Control oil supply and drain
No code = External control oil supply,
external control oil drain
E = Internal control oil supply,
external control oil drain
ET = Internal control oil supply,
internal control oil drain
T = External control oil supply,
internal control oil drain
See page 18 for details
Surface protection
J = Galvanized and chromated
olive-green to provide seawater resistance
page 7, for details
G24 = 24 V DC
6E = Proportional solenoid with removable coil
7X = Unit series 70 to 79
Nominal flow

25 = 26 l/min (NG10)
50 = 49 l/min (NG10)
85 = 87 l/min (NG10)
100 = 110 l/min (NG16)
150 = 161 l/min (NG16)
220 = 192 l/min (NG25)
325 = 295 l/min (NG25)
360 = 360 l/min (NG32)
520 = 525 l/min (NG32)
See pages 9 12 for characteristic curves
4WRZ 7X 6E G24 XE J D3
1)
Suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
381
04
6
2 4 5 1
7
3
P
B T A
"a" "b"
Type 3DREP 6..2X/..XE..
Pilot valve type 3DREP 6
The pilot valve is a proportionally solenoid operated 3-way
pressure reducing valve. It is employed for converting an
electrical input signal into a proportional pressure output
signal, and is used in all valves of the type 4WRZ .
The proportional solenoids are wet-pin DC solenoids with
central thread and removable coil, and can be controlled in a
closed loop. They are actuated by external trigger electronics.
Construction:
Control piston (2) with pressure-measuring pistons (3 and 4)


Description of function:
piston (2) is held in center position by compression springs
nal solenoid is energized e.g. solenoid b (5) actuated

Pressure-measuring piston (3) and control piston (2)
are moved to the left proportionately to the electrical
input signal

P A and B T are connected by orifice-type
cross-sections with a progressive flow characteristic

Control piston (2) is moved back to center position by
the compression spring
Ports A and B are open to T in center position, i.e. pressure
fluid can flow unhindered to the tank.
Note:
In valves type 3DREP 6 C, only one solenoid can be energized
at a time.
Valve with two switching positions
(type 3DREP 6A)
This type of valve basically functions like a valve with three
switching positions. However, valves with two switching
positions are only equipped with solenoid b (5). A screw
plug (7) takes the place of the 2nd proportional solenoid.
Note:
The tank line must not be allowed to run empty. If installation
conditions might incur this, install a pressure sequence valve
(precharge pressure approx. 2 bar).
382
Pilot operated proportional directional control valves
Type 4WRZ-7X/..XE
Type 4WRZ valves are pilot operated 4-way directional
control valves actuated by proportional solenoids. They control
the direction and size of a flow.
Construction:
Pilot valve (9) with proportional solenoids (5 and 6)
Main valve (10) with main piston (11) and centering
springs (12)
Description of function:
When the solenoids (5 or 6) are not actuated, the main
piston (11) is held in center position by the centering
springs (12)
The main piston (11) is operated by the pilot valve (9) the
main piston is moved proportionately e.g. solenoid b is
actuated (6)
Control piston (2) is moved to the right, control oil
flows through the pilot valve (9) into the pressure
chamber (13), where it moves the main piston (11) to
the left pro portionately to the electrical input signal
P A and B T are connected by orifice-type
cross-sections with a progressive flow characteristic
Control oil is supplied to the pilot valve internally via port P
or externally via port X

Control piston (2) and main piston (11) are moved back
to center position
Flow from P A and B T or P B and A T.
T A P Y X
A B
10
13
B
12
11
6
2 5 9
"a" "b"
Type 4WRZ-7X/..XE..
383
04
Technical data
General
Weight, maximum NG10 kg 10
NG16 kg 16
NG25 kg 21
NG32 kg 45
Hydraulic
Nominal size 10 16 25 32
Working pressure
range
Pilot valve External or internal
control oil supply
bar 30 315 30 350 30 350 30 350
Main valve bar up to 315 up to 350 up to 350 up to 350
Return pressure Port T
(external control oil drain)
bar up to 315 up to 250 up to 250 up to 150
Port T
(internal control oil drain)
bar up to 30 up to 30 up to 30 up to 30
Port Y bar up to 30 up to 30 up to 30 up to 30
Control oil volume
for switching process 0 100%
cm
3
1.7 4.6 10 26.5
Control oil flow rate at ports X and Y
on abrupt input signal 0 100%
l/min 3.5 5.5 7 15.9
Other pressure fluids available on request!
C -15 +80 (FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 20 380 (preferably 30 46)
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure fluid
Purity class to
ISO 4406 (c)
Pilot valve Class 17/15/12
1)
Main valve Class 18/16/13
1)
Hysteresis % 6
1)
components.
RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
384
Electrical
Voltage type DC or pulse-width-modulated signal 100 ... 500 Hz
Signal type Analog
Maximum current / per solenoid A 1.03
Resistance of
solenoid coil
Cold value at 20 C 8.7
Electrical
connection
EN 60529
IP 66, mounted
Seal material FKM
Degree of protection to EN 50019 II2G c T4X
Technical data
1)
125 C (T4)
Type of protection of solenoid EEx em IIT4X
Trigger electronics
2)
On request
1)
2)
Note:
The power supply to the proportional solenoid coil must
conform to Directive 94/9/EG (devices and protective
systems for proper use in potentially explosive atmospheres).
Technical data (coil), information on explosion protection
385
04
Note:
(max. 3 x I
nom
circuit. The breaking capacity of the fuse must at least match
2
3
1 4
2
0.4 0.5 Nm
2
conductor
2
2
1.2 2.4 Nm
conductor
2
2
2.0 4.0 Nm
3)
+()
(+)
3)
PE
DC/
PWM
Suppressor diode
47 V, 1.5 kW
386
Characteristic curves NG10
(measured with pistons E, W6-, EA and W6A and with HLP46,
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
100
0
200
50
1000 900 800 700 600 500 470
150
250
P A/B T
P B/A T
5
1
4
3
2
100
0
25
50
75
1000 900 800 700 600 500 470
150
125
P A/B T
P B/A T
5
4
3
2
1
0
20
40
1000 900 800 700 600 500 470
80
60
P A/B T
P B/A T
5
4
3
2
1
1 p = 10 bar constant
p = valve pressure differential to DIN 24311 (inlet pressure p
P
minus load pressure p
L
and minus return pressure p
T
)
Current in mA
Current in mA
Current in mA
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

1
2
3
4
100
75
25
0
50
0 20 40 60 80 100 0 20 40 60 80 100
S
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

1 0 25 0
2 0 50 0
3 0 75 0
4 0 100 0
Measured with
control pressure p
ST
= 50 bar
387
04
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
P
L
T
)
1
2
3
4 100
75
25
0
50
0 40 80 120 160 200 0 40 60 120 160 200
160
0
40
80
120
1000 900 800 700 600 500 470
240
200
320
280
P A/B T
P B/A T
5
4
3
2
1
Current in mA
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

S
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

240
0
80
160
440
1000 900 800 700 600 500 470
400
320
P A/B T
P B/A T
5
4
3
2
1
Current in mA
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n


1 0 25 0
2 0 50 0
3 0 75 0
4 0 100 0
Measured with
control pressure p
ST
= 50 bar
388
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
400
0
100
200
300
500
1000 900 800 700 600 500 470
P A/B T
P B/A T
5
4
3
2
1
800
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
1000 900 800
700
600 500 470
P A/B T
P B/A T
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 100
75
25
0
50
0 50 100 150 200 250 0 50 100 150 200 250
P
L
T
)
Current in mA
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

S
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Current in mA
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n


1 0 25 0
2 0 50 0
3 0 75 0
4 0 100 0
Measured with
control pressure p
ST
= 50 bar
389
04
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
800
0
200
400
600
1000 900 800 700 600 500 470
5
4
3
2
1
1300
1200
1000
P A/B T
P B/A T
1600
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1000 900 800 700 600 500 470
P A/B T
P B/A T
5
4
3
2
1
1800
1
2
3
4
100
75
25
0
50
0 80 160 240 320 400 0 80 160 240 320 400
P
L
T
)
1 0 25 0
2 0 50 0
3 0 75 0
4 0 100 0
Current in mA
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

S
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Current in mA
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

Measured with
control pressure p
ST
= 50 bar
390
Unit dimensions NG10 (in mm)
1 Main valve
2 Pilot valve
5 Terminal box
8 Nameplate for main valve
9 Pressure reducing valve (always supplied)
11 Same seals for X and Y
12 Machined valve bearing surface, position of ports to
ISO 4401 - 05 - 05 - 0 - 94 (X and Y as required)
Different from the standard:
No locating pin
Subplates
G 534/01 (G3/4) without ports X and Y
G 535/01 (G3/4) with ports X and Y
G 536/01 (G1) with ports X and Y
separately.
7
10 11
B P A T
8
6
3
5
31 105 81
9
8
1
3 2 6 4
9
6
310
288,4
45
48
2
0
70
2
0
2
54 25,5
6,6
11
5
"a" "b"
5
108
27
7
3
1
3
,
5
F1 F2
P
B A
R T
F3 F4
12
X Y 0,01/100mm
R
max
4
mating component
391
04
1 Main valve
2 Pilot valve
5 Terminal box
Ports P, A, B and T with 20 mm
13 Locating pin
Subplates
G 172/01 (G3/4) G 172/02 (M27 x 2)
G 174/01 (G1)
G 174/02 (M33 x 2) G 174/08 (flange)
separately.
7
9
3 2 6 4
9
6
5
310
2
0
A B Y
27
100,5 154 37
9
6
1
8
11 10
291,5
3
3
13
45
48
2
1
2
70
4
3
11
18
"b" "a"
5
158
29
9
4
1
2
F1
F2
P
B A
X
T
F3 F4
Y
F5
F6 G2
G1
12
0,01/100mm
R
max
4
mating component
392
1 Main valve
2 Pilot valve
5 Terminal box
13 Locating pin
Subplates
G 151/01 (G1)
G 154/01 (G1 1/4) G 154/08 (flange)
G 156/01 (G1 1/2)
separately.
11 10
19
122
366
191 53
1
1
2
6
7
9
3 2 6 4 5
310
77
130
4
1
4
"b" "a"
8
20
14
6
13
2
4
2
5
48
45
9
6
2
0
195
21
1
2
0
1
4
F1
F2
P
B A
X
T
F3 F4
Y
F5
F6 G2
G1
12
0,01/100mm
R
max
4
mating component
393
04
1 Main valve
2 Pilot valve
5 Terminal box
Ports P, A, B and T with mit 38 mm
13 Locating pin
Subplates
G 157/01 (G1 1/2)
G 157/02 (M48 x 2)
G 158/10 (flange)
separately.
6 cheese-head bolts DIN 912 M20 x 80 - 10.9;
254
21,5
70 176
500
1
5
2
11 10
1
7
9
3 2 6 4
9
6
5
310
2
0
19
8
197
4
9
4
33
22
6
13
45
48
2
6
8
5
"a" "b"
257
23
2
0
0
2
0
,
5
F1 F2
P
B A
X
T
F3 F4
Y
F5
F6
G2
G1
12
0,01/100mm
R
max
4
mating component
394
Type 4WRZ-/
External control oil supply
External control oil drain
In this version, the control oil is supplied from a separate
control circuit (external).
The control oil is not drained via the T-duct of the main valve,
but is routed separately to the tank via port Y (external).
Type 4WRZ-/E
Internal control oil supply
External control oil drain
In this version, the control oil is supplied from the P-duct of the
main valve (internal).
The control oil is not drained via the T-duct of the main valve,
but is routed separately to the tank via port Y (external).
In the subplate, port X must be sealed.
Type 4WRZ-/ET
Internal control oil supply
Internal control oil drain
In this version, the control oil is supplied from the P-duct of the
main valve (internal).
The control oil is drained directly via the T-duct of the main
valve (internal).
In the subplate, ports X and Y must be sealed.
Type 4WRZ-/T
External control oil supply
Internal control oil drain
In this version, the control oil is supplied from a separate
control circuit (external).
The control oil is drained directly via the T-duct of the main
valve (internal).
In the subplate, port Y must be sealed.
Control oil supply
395
04
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
Notes
396
397
04
1/10
Proportional pressure-reducing
valve in 3-way version
Type 3DREP 6 ../..XE
Nominal size 6
Series 2X
RE 29184-XE-B2/12.03
H7098
DIN EN 50019/50028
olive-green
ordering data.
ATEX units


These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Bosch Rexroth valves, and consist
Mat. No. R901017700
398
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type 3DREP 6 ../..XE RE 29184-XE-B2
Features
Direct solenoid-operated proportional pressure-reducing
valve for proper use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03
(order separately)
Wet-pin DC solenoids
Contents Page
Features 2

Symbols 3


Technical data 5


Unit dimensions 8
399
04
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 29184-XE-B2 Type 3DREP 6 ../..XE 3/10
Nominal size 6 = 6
Symbols (simplified)
= A
= B
= C
Pressure stage 16 bar = 16
V = FKM seals
Note
Take compatibility of seals and
pressure fluid into account!
J = Surface protection
Galvanized and chromated olive-green
to provide seawater resistance
page 6, for details
G24 = 24 V DC
E = Proportional solenoid with removable coil
3DREP 6 2X E G24 XE J V
P T
A
b
P T
B
a
P T
A
b
P T
B
a
Symbols
Type 3DREP.. 6 A 2X/... (complete) Type 3DREP.. 6 C 2X/... (complete)
T A
b
P B T A
b
P B
a
Type 3DREP.. 6 B 2X/... (complete)
T A P B
a
Valve with 2 switching positions:
This type of valve basically functions like a valve with 3 swit-
ching positions. However, valves with 2 switching positions
are only equipped with solenoid a (5) or solenoid b (6).
A screw plug (7) takes the place of the 2nd proportional
solenoid.
Note:
The tank line must not be allowed to run empty.
When installation conditions allow, install a pressure sequence
The type 3DREP 6.., 3-way pressure-reducing valve is directly
operated by proportional solenoids. It is employed to convert
an electrical input signal into a proportional pressure output
signal.
The proportional solenoids are wet-pin DC solenoids with cen-
tral thread and can be controlled in a closed loop.
The solenoids are actuated by external trigger electronics.
Construction:
Control piston (2) with pressure-measuring pistons (3 and 4)

Function:
piston (2) is held in center position by compression springs
nal solenoid is energized

e.g. solenoid a (5) actuated

Pressure-measuring piston (3) and control piston (2) are
moved to the right proportionately to the electrical input
signal

P B and A T are connected by orifice-type cross-
sections with a progressive flow characteristic


Control piston (2) is moved back to center position by the
compression spring
Ports A and B T are open in center position, i.e. pressure
fluid can flow unhindered to the tank.
Note:
In valves type 3DREP 6 C, only one solenoid can be energized
at a time.
Type 3DREP 6../..XE
"a" "b"
7
5 2 4 6 1 3
P
B T A
7
400
Technical data
General
Weight Type 3DREP 6 C... kg 3.7
Hydraulic
Working pressure range Port P bar 20 100 for pressure stage 16
bar 30 100 for pressure stage 25
bar 50 100 for pressure stage 45
Port T bar 0 30
Maximum flow rate P A or P B l/min 15 (p = 50 bar) see characteristic curves on page 7
Other pressure fluids available on request
Pressure fluid temperature range C -15 +80 (preferably +40 +50)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 20 380 (preferably 30 46)
fluid to ISO 4406 (C) Class 17/15/12
1)
Hysteresis % 5
Repetitive accuracy % 2
Sensitivity % 1
Range of inversion % 2
Electrical
Voltage type DC; PWM signal 100 ... 500 Hz
Signal type Analog
Maximum current / per solenoid A 1.03
Resistance of
solenoid coil
Cold value at 20 C 8.7
Electrical
connection
Threaded connection M 20 x 1.5
DIN EN 60529
IP 66, mounted
Seal material FKM
Degree of protection to DIN EN 50019 II 2G c T4X
1)

RE 50076 and RE 50081.
401
04
1)
125C (T4)
Trigger electronics
2)
On request
1)
2)
Note
The power supply to the proportional solenoid coil must con-
form to Directive 94/9/EG (devices and protective systems
for proper use in potentially explosive atmospheres).
Note
3 x I
nom
2
3
1 4
2
2
0.4 0.5 Nm
conductor
2
2
1.2 2.4 Nm
conductor
2
2
2.0 4.0 Nm
3)
+()
(+)
3)
PE
DC/
PWM
Suppressor diode
47 V, 1.5 kW
Technical data, information on explosion protection
402
oil
= 40 C 5 C and p = 100 bar)
20
100
80
60
40
120
5 10 15 20 25 10 15 5 0
140
A(B)T PA(B)
I = 1,0 A I = 0,8 A
I = 0,6 A I = 0,4 A
0
Flow rate Q in l/min
O
u
t
l
e
t

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

i
n

%

Interdependency of pressure and flow rate

100
50
0
0 50 100
P A
P B
16; 25; 45 bar
A T
B T
16; 25; 45 bar
F
l
o
w

r
a
t
e

Q

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

Pressure stages 16, 25 and 45 bar

Pressure stages 16, 25 and 45 bar
N
o
m
i
n
a
l

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

i
n

%

Flow / in mA
100
50
0
1000 500
0
403
04
1 Valve housing
4 Terminal box
5 Nameplate
7 Screw plug for valve with one solenoid
(2 switching positions, version A or B)
13,5
4
2
90,5 55,5
154,5
223
309
"a" "b"
A B
P
2 4 5 1 3
6 7
9
5
,
5
7
3
,
5
0
,
7
5
3
1
,
7
5
15 40,5
8
3
1
T
4
5
2
3
8 Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03
Subplates
(without locating pin hole)

G 341/01 (G 1/4)
G 342/01 (G 3/8)
G 502/01 (G 1/2)
B
8
4
7
72
A
T
P
8
15
40,5
3
1
3
1
,
7
5
0
,
7
5
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
404
Height 60, width 85
longitudinal axes
55 mm
58 64

2
5
55
85

6
0
Block diagram
405
04
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
Notes
406
1/10
with mechanical position feedback
Type 4WS2EM 6XN-100
Nominal size 6
Unit series 2X
Maximum working pressure 210/315 bar
Maximum flow 48 l/min
RE 29564-XN-100-B2/10.04
H5994
Protection Directive and type of protection to EN 50014
II3G: Type of protection EEx nA II T5 to EN 50021
II3D: Degree of protection IP 65, T100 C to EN 50281
ATEX units


Part II Technical Data Sheet RE 29564-XN-100-B2
Part III Product-specific Instructions RE 29564-XN-100-B3
Mat. No. R901035197
407
04
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type 4WS2EM 6XN-100 RE 29564-XN-100-B2
Features
Servo directional control valve for proper use in potentially
explosive atmospheres of Zones 2 and 22
Valve for closed-loop position, draft, pressure and velocity
control
2-stage servo valve with mechanical return
1st stage in the form of a jet/flapper plate amplifier
For subplate mounting
Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401 - 03 - 02 - 0 - 94
(order separately)
Dry servo motor, no contamination of solenoid gaps by
pressure fluid
Non-wearing piston return element
Actuation:
External trigger electronics in Eurocard format or in modular
form (order separately), see page 6
Valve is calibrated and tested
Pressure chambers in the control bush have gap seals,
no O-ring wear
Filter for 1st stage freely accessible from the outside
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbols 3
Technical data 5, 6
External trigger electronics 6
Plug-in connector 6
Characteristic curves 7, 8
Unit dimensions 9
Flushing plate 10
408
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 29564-XN-100-B2 Type 4WS2EM 6XN-100 3/10
Electrically operated
2-stage servo valve of
4/3-way design with
mechanical return for
Nominal size 6 = 6
Nominal flow
1)

2 l/min = 2
5 l/min = 5
10 l/min = 10
15 l/min = 15
20 l/min = 20
25 l/min = 25
See characteristic curves on page 7
(note tolerance zone of flow signal function)
Valve for external trigger electronics = 11
Coil No. 11 (30 mA/85 per coil)
2)
Symbol
1)
Nominal flow rate

The nominal flow rate is based on a 100 % setpoint signal at
a valve pressure differential of 70 bar (35 bar per metering
notch). The valve pressure differential should be regarded as
a guide. The flow rate can be affected by other values.
A possible nominal flow tolerance of 10 % (see flow signal
function on page 7) must be taken into consideration.
2)
External trigger electronics

The control signal must be generated by a current regulated
output stage. For trigger electronics (servo amplifiers), see
page 6.
3)
Control oil

This valve is supplied only with an internal control oil supply
and drain.
4)
Inlet pressure range

The system pressure should be kept as constant as possible.
With regard to the dynamics, please bear in mind the fre-
quency relationship within the permissible pressure range of
10 to 210 bar or 10 to 315 bar.
5)
Piston overlap

The piston overlap in % is based on the nominal stroke of
the control piston.
6)
Non-standard version number 100

Ducts P B and A T are 10% open when not
actuated (de-energized).
4WS2EM 6 2X B 11 XN ET K17 V 100
100 = Non-standard
version number
6)

Seal material
V = FKM seals
suitable for mineral oil
(HL, HLP)
to DIN 51524
Piston overlap
5)
E = 0 0,5 % negative
D = 0 0,5 % positive
C = 3 5 % positive
K17 = Electrical connection
using connector
Order plug-in connector separately,
see page 6
Supply pressure range
4)
210 = 10 to 210 bar
315 = 10 to 315 bar
ET = Internal control oil supply and drain
3)
For details, see information on explosion protection,
page 6
A B
T P
a, b
409
04
4WS2EM 6-2X/...XN...-100
Valves of this type are electrically operated, 2-stage servo
directional control valves with a mounting hole configuration
to ISO 4401 03 02 0 94. They are predominantly
employed for closed-loop position, draft, pressure and velocity
control.
These valves consist of an electro-mechanical governor (torque
motor) (1), a hydraulic amplifier (flapper jet principle) (2) and a
control piston (3) in a sleeve (2nd stage), which is connected
to the torque motor via a mechanical return.
An electric input signal at the coils (4) of the torque motor
causes a permanent magnet to generate a force that acts on
the armature (5) and, acting by means of a torque tube (6), this
force generates a torque. This torque then moves the flapper
plate (7) which is connected to the torque tube (6) by a rod
out of its center position between the two control orifices (8),
resulting in a pressure differential at the end faces of the con-
trol piston (3). This pressure differential causes the position of
the piston to change, so that the pressure port is connected to
one consumer port and, at the same time, the other consumer
port is connected to the return port.
The control piston is connected to the flapper plate or the
torque motor by a torsion spring (mechanical return) (9). The
position of the piston continues to change until the return
torque through the torsion spring and the electro-magnetic
torque of the torque motor reach a state of equilibrium, and the
pressure differential at the flapper jet system becomes zero.
In this way, the stroke of the control piston and thus the flow of
the servo valve is closed loop controlled proportionately to the
electrical input signal. At the same time, it should be noted that
the flow is dependent on the drop in valve pressure.
External trigger electronics (order separately)
The valve is actuated by external trigger electronics (a servo
amplifier), which amplifies an analog input signal (setpoint) so
that the controlled current output signal is capable of driving
the servo valve.
Type 4WS2EM 6-2X/...XN...-100
A B (T)
P
6
3
2
4
5
1
9
8
7
410
Technical data
General
Mounting hole configuration ISO 4401 - 03 - 02 - 0 - 94
Installation position Optional (provided that the pilot control is certain to receive
sufficient pressure ( 10 bar) when starting up the
system!)
Surface protection Valve body, cover, filter screw Nitrocarburized
Cap Anodized
Weight kg 1.1
Hydraulic (measured with HLP 32,
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Working pressure Ports P, A, B bar 10 210 or 10 315
Return pressure Port T bar Pressure peaks < 100, static <10
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524, further pressure fluids
available on request, ignition temperature > 150 C
Pressure fluid temperature range C -15 +80, preferably + 40 + 50
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 15 380, preferably 30 45
pressure fluid Purity class to 4406 (c) Class 18/16/13
1)
Zero flow q
V,L

2)

with piston overlap E
measured without dither signal
l/min
p
P
/ 70 bar (0.4 l/min + 0.02 q
V nom
)
3); 4)
Nominal flows q
v nom
,

Tolerance 10%
at valve pressure differential
p
= 70 bar
l/min 2; 5; 10; 15; 20; 25
Max. possible control piston stroke based
on mechanical end position (in case of fault)
referred to nominal stroke
% 120 170
Return system Mechanical
Hysteresis (dither optimized) % 1.5 at p
P
= 210 bar
4)
Range of inversion (dither optimized) % 0.2 at p
P
= 210 bar
4)
Response sensitivity (dither optimized) % 0.2 at p
P
= 210 bar
4)
Pressure gain with 1 % piston stroke variation
(starting from hydraulic zero)
% of p
P
4)
50
Zero adjustment flow over entire working
pressure range
% 3, long-term 5
Zero offset on variation of:
Pressure fluid temperature % / 20 C 1
Ambient temperature % / 20 C 1
Working pressure 80 120 % of p
P
4)
% / 100 bar 2
Return pressure 0 10 % of p
P
4)
% / bar 1
1)

RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
2)
q
V,L
= zero flow in l/min
3)
q
v nom
= nominal flow in l/min
4)
p
P
= working pressure in bar
411
04
Electrical
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP 65 with correctly mounted and locked plug-in connector
Type of signal Analog
Nominal current per coil mA 30
Resistance per coil 85
Inductivity at 60 Hz
and 100% nominal current:
Series connection H 1.0
Parallel connection H 0.25
Recommended superimposed dither signal: f = 400 Hz
Amplitude depending on hydraulic system:
max. 5 % of nominal current
Technical data
Plug-in connector
Order separately under Material No. R901043330
A
C
B
D
E
F
The electrical connections can be made either in series or in parallel. For reasons of
operating safety and the resulting low coil inductivity, we recommend the parallel
connection.
The bridge E-F can be used for electrically recognizing that the plug is correctly
connected or for detecting open circuits.
Connection in parallel: In the plug-in connector, connect contact A to B and C to D.
Connection in series: In the plug-in connector, connect contact B to C.
Electrical actuation from A (+) to D () results in a flow direction of P A and B T.
Reversing electrical actuation produces a flow direction of P B and A T.
Coil A
Coil B
Range of application to Directive RL 94/9/EG II 3 G; II 3 D
Type of protection to EN 50014 / 50021 EEx nA IIT5
Type of protection and temperature to EN 50281 IP 65, T100 C
Max. permitted operating voltage of servo amplifier V 32
Servo amplifier
(order separately)
Eurocard format Analog Type VT-SR2-1X/.60 as per Technical Data Sheet RE 29980
Modular design Analog Type VT 1102 as per Technical Data Sheet RE 29743
WARNING risk of explosion
The external servo amplifier must be operated outside the potentially explosive atmosphere!
2
1
,
6
58
4
,
5
.
.
.

7
,
0
Secured with: set screw M3, M
A
= 0.3 Nm
Connection:
Soldered contacts with conductor cross-section
for wires 0.4 0.75 mm
2
412
100
60
80
20
40
20
60
40
100
80
-20 -40 -60 -80
40 20 60 80
110
-100
100
110
10
P A; B T
P B; A T
Flow rate in %
Setpoint in %
Typical flow
curve
Tolerance zone
20 30 40 50 80 100 200 300
50
40
30
20
15
10
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
60
1
2
3
4
5
70
6
25
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Valve pressure differential in bar
F
l
o
w

r
a
t
e

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

p
= valve pressure differential
(inlet pressure p
P

L
and
minus return pressure p
T
)
Flow load function (tolerance 10 %) with 100 % setpoint signal
Note:
Observe flow values in the max. setpoint range
(see tolerance zone of flow signal function)
Tolerance zone of flow signal function
with constant valve pressure differential
p
Order
code
Nominal flow Curve
2 2 l/min 1
5 5 l/min 2
10 10 l/min 3
15 15 l/min 4
20 20 l/min 5
25 25 l/min 6
413
04
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Transient function with 315 bar pressure stage, step response without flow
Frequency response with 315 bar pressure stage, stroke frequency response without flow
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
Relationship of frequency f at 90 to working pressure p and input amplitude
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

1)

100
80
60
40
20
0
2 4 6
8 10 12
40 bar
70 bar
140 bar
210 bar
315 bar
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

100 150 200 250 300 350

0
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
40 bar
70 bar
140 bar
210 bar
315 bar
1)
Correction factors at q
V nom:
25 l/min 1.00
20 l/min 1.00
15 l/min 0.95
10 l/min 0.90
5 l/min 0.85
2 l/min 0.80
The output signal cor-
responds to the piston
stroke with flow, without
load pressure
Measured at control pressure
p
ST
= 315 bar
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
100 1000
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200 30 300
5%
25%
100%
414
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
F1
F3
F4
F2
G
T
P
B A
80
19
4
7
8
10
1 Required space for removing plug-in
connector, allowing for bending radi-
us of connecting lead
2 Cap
In order to ensure a secure connec-
tion, use only the following valve
fastening bolts:
4 cheese-head bolts
ISO 4762-M5 x 50-10.9-flZn-240h-L
(coefficient of friction 0.08 - 0.14 to
VDA 235-102)
5 Nameplate
6 Plug-in connector
(order separately, see page 6)
7 Connecting lead, see page 6 for
further information
8 Filter
9 Screw plug
10 Machined valve contact surface
Position of ports to
ISO 4401 - 03 - 02 - 0 - 94
Different from standard:
No locating pin (G)
Subplates
G341/01 (G1/4)
G342/01 (G3/8)
G502/01 (G1/2)
B
52,5
64
M5
5
8
4
5
A
B
P
T
80
66
40,5 7 14
131
0
,
7
5
4
6
2
3
5
8
0
8
3
1
4
,
5
7
,
0
15
2
1
4
A
P(T)
6
3
7
3
1
,
7
5
5 8 9
415
04
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
parties.
Flushing plate with mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 (dimensions in mm)
3
0
,
5
3
5
,
5
9
,
5
A B P T
Symbol
Ordering data and further information
Material No.: R900936049
Weight: 0.6 kg
Same FKM sealing rings for ports P, A, B and T
Fastening bolts
Note
Before assembly, please read the notes in the Product-specific
Instructions RE 29564-XN-100-B3, section 3.2.
416
1/10
Type 4WS2EM 6XN-102
Nominal size 6
Unit series 2X
RE 29564-XN-102-B2/10.04
H5994
ATEX units


Mat. No. R901035209
417
04
Features
control
(order separately)
pressure fluid
Actuation:
no O-ring wear
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbols 3
Technical data 5, 6
Plug-in connector 6
Unit dimensions 9
Flushing plate 10
418
4/3-way design with
Nominal size 6 = 6
Nominal flow
1)

2 l/min = 2
5 l/min = 5
10 l/min = 10
15 l/min = 15
20 l/min = 20
25 l/min = 25
2)
Symbol
1)
Nominal flow rate

2)

page 6.
3)
Control oil

and drain.
4)

10 to 210 bar or 10 to 315 bar.
5)
Piston overlap

the control piston.
6)

Ducts P A and B T are 10% open when not
4WS2EM 6 2X B 11 XN ET K17 V 102
102 = Non-standard
version number
6)

Seal material
V = FKM seals
(HL, HLP)
to DIN 51524
Piston overlap
5)
C = 3 5 % positive
using connector
see page 6
4)
210 = 10 to 210 bar
315 = 10 to 315 bar
3)
page 6
A B
T P
a, b
419
04
4WS2EM 6-2X/...XN...-102
control.
the servo valve.
Type 4WS2EM 6-2X/...XN...-102
A B (T)
P
6
3
2
4
5
1
9
8
7
420
Technical data
General
system!)
Cap Anodized
Weight kg 1.1
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Viscosity range mm
2
1)
Zero flow q
V,L

2)

l/min
p
P
/ 70 bar (0.4 l/min + 0.02 q
V nom
)
3); 4)
Nominal flows q
v nom
,

Tolerance 10%
p
= 70 bar
l/min 2; 5; 10; 15; 20; 25
% 120 170
P
= 210 bar
4)
P
= 210 bar
4)
P
= 210 bar
4)
% of p
P
4)
50
pressure range
% 3, long-term 5
P
4)
% / 100 bar 2
P
4)
% / bar 1
1)

RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
2)
q
V,L
3)
q
v nom
4)
p
P
421
04
Electrical
Technical data
Plug-in connector
A
C
B
D
E
F
connection.
Coil A
Coil B
Servo amplifier
(order separately)
Eurocard format Analog Type VT-SR2-1X/.60 as per Technical Data Sheet RE 29980
2
1
,
6
58
4
,
5
.
.
.

7
,
0
Secured with: set screw M3, M
A
= 0.3 Nm
Connection:
Soldered contacts with conductor cross-section
2
422
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
F
l
o
w

r
a
t
e

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

p
(inlet pressure p
P

L
and
T
)
Note:
Observe flow values in the max. setpoint range (see tolerance zone of
flow signal function)
p
Order
code
Nominal flow Curve
2 2 l/min 1
5 5 l/min 2
10 10 l/min 3
15 15 l/min 4
20 20 l/min 5
25 25 l/min 6
20 30 40 50 80 100 200 300
50
40
30
20
15
10
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
60
1
2
3
4
5
70
6
25
100
60
80
20
40
20
60
40
100
80
-20 -40 -60 -80
40 20 60 80
110
-100
100
110
-10
P A; B T
P B; A T
Flow rate in %
Setpoint in %
Typical flow
curve
Tolerance zone
423
04
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


1)

100
80
60
40
20
0
2 4 6
8 10 12
40 bar
70 bar
140 bar
210 bar
315 bar
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

100 150 200 250 300 350

0
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
40 bar
70 bar
140 bar
210 bar
315 bar
1)
V nom:
25 l/min 1.00
20 l/min 1.00
15 l/min 0.95
10 l/min 0.90
5 l/min 0.85
2 l/min 0.80
load pressure
p
ST
= 315 bar
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
100 1000
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200 30 300
5%
25%
100%
424
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
F1
F3
F4
F2
G
T
P
B A
80
19
4
7
8
10
2 Cap
fastening bolts:
4 cheese-head bolts
ISO 4762-M5 x 50-10.9-flZn-240h-L
VDA 235-102)
5 Nameplate
6 Plug-in connector
further information
8 Filter
9 Screw plug
ISO 4401 - 03 - 02 - 0 - 94
No locating pin (G)
Subplates
G341/01 (G1/4)
G342/01 (G3/8)
G502/01 (G1/2)
B
52,5
64
M5
5
8
4
5
A
B
P
T
80
66
40,5 7 14
131
0
,
7
5
4
6
2
3
5
8
0
8
3
1
4
,
5
7
,
0
15
2
1
4
A
P(T)
6
3
7
3
1
,
7
5
5 8 9
425
04
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
parties.
3
0
,
5
3
5
,
5
9
,
5
A B P T
Symbol
Weight: 0.6 kg
Fastening bolts
Note
426
1/10
Servo directional control valve
of 4-way design
Type 4WS2EM 6XN
Nominal size 6
Unit series 2X
RE 29564-XN-B2/07.04
H5994
ATEX units


Mat. No. R901036876
427
04
2/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type 4WS2EM 6XN RE 29564-XN-B2
Features
control
(order separately)
pressure fluid
May also be utilized as a 3-way version
Actuation:
no O-ring wear
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbols 3
Technical data 5, 6
Plug-in connector 6
Unit dimensions 9
Flushing plate with mounting hole
configuration to ISO 4401 - 03 - 02 - 0 - 94 10
428
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 29564-XN-B2 Type 4WS2EM 6XN 3/10
4-way design with
Nominal size 6 = 6
Nominal flow
1)

2 l/min = 2
5 l/min = 5
10 l/min = 10
15 l/min = 15
20 l/min = 20
25 l/min = 25
2)
Seal material
6)
M = NBR seals
V = FKM seals
Piston overlap
5)
E = 0 0.5 % negative
D = 0 0.5 % positive
using connector
see page 6
4)
210 = 10 to 210 bar
315 = 10 to 315 bar
3)
page 6
4WS2EM 6 2X B 11 XN ET K17
Symbol
1)
Nominal flow rate

2)

page 6.
3)
Control oil

and drain.
4)

10 to 210 bar or 10 to 315 bar.
5)
Piston overlap

0.5 mm of the control piston.
6)
Seal materials

See Technical Data on page 5 for further details.
A B
T P
a, b
429
04
A B (T)
P
6
3
2
4
5
1
9
8
7
4WS2EM 6-2X/...XN
control.
the servo valve.
Type 4WS2EM 6-2X/...XN
430
Technical data
General
system!)
Cap Anodized
Weight kg 1.1
Hydraulic
Pressure fluid temperature range C -20 +80, preferably + 40 + 50 (NBR seals)
-15 +80, preferably + 40 + 50 (FKM seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
1)
Zero flow q
V,L

2)

l/min
p
P
/ 70 bar (0.4 l/min + 0.02 q
V nom
)
3); 4)
Nominal flows q
v nom
10%
p
= 70 bar
l/min 2; 5; 10; 15; 20; 25
Control piston stroke mm 0.5
% 120 170
P
= 210 bar
4)
P
= 210 bar
4)
P
= 210 bar
4)
% of p
P
4)
50
pressure range
% 3, long-term 5
P
4)
% / 100 bar 2
P
4)
% / bar 1
1)

RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
2)
q
V,L
3)
q
v nom
4)
p
P
431
04
Electrical
Technical data
Plug-in connector
2
1
,
6
58
Retaining screw
Connecting lead:
4 or 6-core, 0.75 mm
2
, shielded, with litz wires to
DIN VDE 0812
(e.g. lead type LIYCY 4 or 6 x 0.75 mm
2
)
Outside diameter 5 8 mm
A
C
B
D
E
F
connection.
Coil A
Coil B
Servo amplifier
(order separately)
Eurocard format Analog Type VT-SR2-1X/... as per Technical Data Sheet RE 29980
Note: The external servo amplifier must be operated outside the potentially explosive atmosphere!
432
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
20 30 40 50 80 100 200 300
50
40
30
20
15
10
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
60
1
2
3
4
5
70
6
F
l
o
w

r
a
t
e

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

p
(inlet pressure p
P

L
and
T
)
Order
code
Nominal flow Curve
2 2 l/min 1
5 5 l/min 2
10 10 l/min 3
15 15 l/min 4
20 20 l/min 5
25 25 l/min 6
100
90
60
80
20
40
20
60
40
100
90
80
-20 -40 -60 -80
40 20 60 80
-5
5
110
-100
100
110
P A; B T
P B; A T
Flow rate in %
Setpoint in %
Typical flow
curve
Tolerance zone
433
04
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


1)

100
80
60
40
20
0
2 4 6
8 10 12
40 bar
70 bar
140 bar
210 bar
315 bar
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
100 1000
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200 30 300
5%
25%
100%
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

100 150 200 250 300 350

0
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
40 bar
70 bar
140 bar
210 bar
315 bar
1)
V nom:
25 l/min 1.00
20 l/min 1.00
15 l/min 0.95
10 l/min 0.90
5 l/min 0.85
2 l/min 0.80
load pressure
p
ST
= 315 bar
434
B
52,5
64
M5
5
8
4
5
A
B
P
T
80
66
40,5 7 14
131
0
,
7
5
4
6
2
3
5
8
0
8
3
1
5
,
0
8
,
5
15
2
1
4
A
P(T)
6
3
7
3
1
,
7
5
5 8 9
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
F1
F3
F4
F2
G
T
P
B A
80
19
4
7
8
10
2 Cap
fastening bolts:
4 cheese-head bolts
ISO 4762-M5 x 50-10.9-flZn-240h-L
VDA 235-102)
5 Nameplate
6 Plug-in connector
further information
8 Filter
9 Screw plug
ISO 4401 - 03 - 02 - 0 - 94
No locating pin
Subplates
G341/01 (G1/4)
G342/01 (G3/8)
G502/01 (G1/2)
435
04
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
3
0
,
5
3
5
,
5
9
,
5
A B P T
Symbol
Weight: 0.6 kg
Fastening bolts
Note
In order to ensure that the servo valves function perfectly, it
is essential to flush the system before commissioning it into
service.
For procedure see Product-specific Instructions
RE 29564-XN-B3
436
1/14
Type 4WS2EM 10...XH...-104
Nominal size 10
Unit series 5X
RE 29583-XH-104-B2/06.05
H5893_d
Field of application according to Explosion Protection Directive
RL94/9/EG
II1G: Type of protection EEx ia IIC T4 in accordance with
EN 50014 and EN 50020
Ambient temperature range 20 C T
a
+60 C
ATEX units


These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Rexroth valves, and consist
Part II Technical Data Sheet RE 29583-XH-104-B2
Part III Product-specific Instructions RE 29583-XH-104-B3
Mat.-No. R901038909
437
04
2/14 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics 4WS2EM 10...XH...-104 RE 29583-XH-104-B2
Features
explosive atmospheres of Zone 0
control
2-Stage servo valve in 3-way version with mechanical return
1st stage in the form of nozzle-baffle plate amplifier
Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-05-05-0-94
with ports X and Y.
Subplates as per Technical Data Sheet
RE 45054 (order separately)
pressure fluid
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbol 3
Plug-in connector 7
Characteristic curves 8 to 11
Unit dimensions 12
Flushing plate 13
Actuation:
External trigger electronics in modular form, additional safety
barriers (order separately), see Page 6
Internal/external control oil supply and return individually
orderable
Piston with flow force compensation
Control sleeve permanently centered, therefore reducing
sensitivity to temperature and pressure
Pressure chambers in the control bush have gap seals, so
there is no O-ring wear
438
Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 29583-XH-104-B2 4WS2EM 10...XH...-104 3/14
Symbol
1)
Volumetric flow index

The nominal flow rate refers to a 100 % setpoint signal at
35 bar valve pressure difference per control helix. Other
values induce a change in the volumetric flow. One should
note the possible nominal volumetric flow tolerance (see
Volumetric flow signal function, page 8).
2)
Electrical triggering data

page 6.
3)
Control oil

The pilot pressure should be kept as constant as possible.
Therefore, external pilot control via port X can be advanta-
geous. The valve may be operated with higher pressure at X
than at P, to increase the dynamics.
Note:
The X and Y connections also have pressure applied to them
with internal control oil supply.
4)

Pilot pressure range: 10 to 210 bar or 10 to 315 bar.
With regard to the dynamics, the dependence on the
frequency response must be taken into account within the
permitted pressure range.
5)
Piston overlap

the control piston.
6)
Special number 104

At 0 setpoint actuation channel B is set to half the operating
pressure. Channel A is always blocked in the control range.
A B
T P
a, b
2-stage servo valve,
3/3-way version
for external = 4WS2E
trigger electronics
Mechanical return = M
Size 10 = 10
Volumetric flow index
For control helix pressure difference p = 35 bar
1)

5 l/min = 5
10 l/min = 10
20 l/min = 20
30 l/min = 30
45 l/min = 45
60 l/min = 60
75 l/min = 75
90 l/min = 90
Valves for external trigger electronics:
2)
= 11
104 = Special
numbers
6)
V = FKM seals
6)

(HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Piston overlap
5)
C = 3 5 % positive
K31 = with plug
to EN175201-804
Line connector order separately
see Page 7
Supply pressure range to 1st stage
4)
210 = 10 210 bar
315 = 10 315 bar
Control oil supply and discharge
3)
= External supply, external return
E = Internal supply, external return
T = External supply, internal return
ET = Internals supply, internal return
(ET = Standard version)
XH = Valve in explosion-proof design
Page 6
4WS2E M 10 5X B 11 XH K31 V 104
Valve fastening screws
439
04
T
A
P
B
T1
6
3
2
4
5
1
9
7
8
4WS2EM 10...XH...-104
directional control valves with a mounting hole configuration to
ISO 4401-05-05-0-94. They are predominantly employed for
closed-loop position, draft, pressure and velocity control.
These valves consist of an electromechanical converter
(torquemotor)(1), a hydraulic amplifier (of the nozzle - baffle
plate type) (2) and a control piston (3) in a sleeve (2nd stage),
which is connected to the torquemotor via a mechanical return.
An electric input signal to the coils (4) of the torquemotor
the armature (5) and, acting by means of a torsion tube (6),
this force produces a torque. This torque then moves the baffle
plate (7) - which is connected to the torsion tube (6) by a pin
- out of its center position between the two control nozzles (8),
resulting in a pressure difference at the end faces of the con-
trol piston. The pressure differential causes the position of the
piston to change, so that the pressure port (P) is connected
to consumer port (B), or consumer port (B) is connected to
return port (T).
In this special version 104, consumer port A is closed.
The control piston is connected to the baffle plate or the
torquemotor by a torsion spring (mechanical return) (9). The
torque through the torsion spring and the electromagnetic
torque of the torquemotor reach a state of equilibrium, and
the pressure difference at the nozzle-baffle plate system drops
to zero.
In this way, the stroke of the control piston and thus the flow
rate of the servo valve is regulated proportionately to the elec-
tric input signal. At the same time, it should be noted that the
flow rate is dependent on the pressure drop at the valve.
amplifier), which amplifies an analog input signal (setpoint) to
such an extent that the output signal actuates the servo valve
with flow control.
Type 4WS2EM 10...XH...-104
440
Technical data
General
Mounting hole configuration ISO 4401-05-05-0-94
Installation position Optional (ensure that pilot control is certain to receive
sufficient pressure (10 bar) when starting
up the system!)
Surface protection Valve body, cover and filter screw Nitrocarburized
Cap Anodized
Weight kg 3.56
Hydraulic
Working Control oil supply pilot stage bar 10 210 bzw. 10 315
pressure: Main valve, ports P, A, B bar up to 315
Return pressure: Port T
Internal control oil return bar Pressure peaks < 100 permitted
External control oil return bar up to 315
Port Y bar Pressure peaks < 100 permitted, static < 10
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524,
ignition temperature > 150 C
Pressure fluid temperature range C -15 +60, preferably +40 +50
Viscosity range mm
2
pressure fluid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Class 18/16/13
1)
Zero flow q
V,L

2)
measured without dither signal l/min
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0.6
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0.7
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0.9
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1.1
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1.3
Nominal flow q
v nom
10%
3)
at valve pressure difference
p
= 35 bar per notch l/min 5 10 20 30 45 60 75 90
Max. possible control piston stroke based on
mechanical end position (in case of fault) referred
to nominal stroke % 120 170 120 150
Return system mechanically
Hysteresis (optimized to reduce dither) % 1.5
Range of inversion (optimized to reduce dither) % 0.3
Response sensitivity (optimized to reduce dither) % 0.2
Pressure gain with 1 % piston stroke
variation (starting from hydr. zero) % von p
P
30
Zero adjustment flow
over entire working pressure range % 3, long-term 5
Pressure fluid temperature % / 20 K 1
Ambient temperature % / 20 K 1
P
% / 100 bar 2
P
4)
% / bar 1
1)
RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
2)
q
V,L
3)
q
v nom
4)
p
P
441
04
Electrical
Degree of protection of valve to EN 60529 IP 65 with correctly mounted and secured plug-in connector
Type of signal analog
Inductance at 60 Hz and
100% nominal current: Connection in parallel H 0.25
Recommended superimposed dither signal: f = 400 Hz Amplitude depending on hydraulic system:
Max. 5 % of nominal current
Technical data
Type test certification PTB 03 ATEX 2119 X
Range of application to Directive RL 94/9/EG II 1 G
Type of protection to EN 50020 EEx ia IIC T4
Valve is only supplied with power from
certified, intrinsically safe circuits
with the following maximum values
U
max
V 9.3
I
max
mA 390
P
max
mW 907
Conditions for use in Zone 0 The valve cap consists of cast aluminium.
When the valve is to be used as a Category 1 device in Zone 0,
the valve cap must be protected in such a manner that no ignit-
able sparks from friction, impact or grinding can be produced,
even in the event of rarely occurring malfunctions.
Note:
The hydraulic fluid used must have an ignition temperature of
at least 150C.
Required free space for burst protection The specified free space for burst protection (see Page 12)
must remain free, in order that excess pressure occurring in
the event of a fault can be dissipated through the plug in the
valve cap.
Servo amplifier
1)
in modular design Analog Typ VT 11021 as per Technical Data Sheet RE 29743
Recommended safety barriers
1)
Single-
channel
Messrs. Stahl, Type 9001/02-093-390-101
Note:
The servo amplifier and safety barriers must be operated outside the potentially explosive atmosphere!
1)
Order separately
442
A D B C
/ /
A
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
B
C
D
E
F
PE
A
B
C
D
E
F
1
3
,
5
85
Plug-in connector
Plug-in connector to EN 175201-804
Metal version
The electrical connection may only be connected in parallel.
The electrical actuation with positive (+) to A and B and negative () to C and D produces a volumetric flow direction of
B to T. Inverse electrical actuation produces a volumetric flow direction of P to B.
Pins E , F and PE on the plug are not connected.
Note
Only approved cables and leads may be used for intrinsically
safe circuits.
Servo amplifier Safety barriers Valve: Coil A Coil B
PA PA
Non-potentially Potentially
explosive explosive
atmosphere atmosphere

443
04
5
10
20
30
40
70
100
50
200
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15 10 5 35 25 20 100 150 50
1
2
8
15
45
60
75
90
30
100
90
60
80
20
40
20
60
40
100
90
80
-20 -40 -60 -80
40 20 60 80
-5
5
110
-100
100
110
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
F
l
o
w

r
a
t
e

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

p
= valve pressure difference
(supply pressure p
P

L

and minus return
pressure p
T
)
Tolerance zone of flow - setpoint function
with constant valve pressure difference
p
B T
P B
Flow rate in %
Setpoint in %
Typical flow curve
Tolerance zone
Order
code
Nominal flow Curve
5 5 l/min 1
10 10 l/min 2
20 20 l/min 3
30 30 l/min 4
45 45 l/min 5
60 60 l/min 6
75 75 l/min 7
90 90 l/min 8
Flow - load function (tolerance 10 %) with 100 % setpoint signal
Note:
Observe flow values in the max. setpoint range (see tolerance zone of flow signal function)
Metering edge pressure differential in bar for P B or B T
444
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
0 10
40
60
80
100
5
20
15
30
50
70
10
90
0 10
40
60
80
100
5
20
15 20
30
50
70
10
90
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Unit step response with pressure stage 315 bar, without flow
Frequency response with pressure stage 315 bar, stroke frequency response without flow
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
Dependence of frequency f at 90 on working pressure p and input amplitude
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

Nominal flow 5, 10, 20 l/min Nominal flow 30 l/min

40 bar 70 bar 140 bar 210 bar 315 bar
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
Nominal flow 5, 10, 20 l/min
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


Nominal flow 30 l/min
445
04
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
1 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
2 1 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
2
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300325
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

Nominal flow 45 l/min Nominal flow 60 l/min

P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
446
0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
50 40 0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
60 40 50
1 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
300 2 2 1 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300325
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

447
04
95 15 68
9,5
M6
8
0
6
0
6
4
3
2
9
6
1
0
3 1
54 24
102
127
12,5
4
6
6
5
3
,
7
9
,
5
P
A B
T1 T
Y X
5 7 8 10
1
,
5
6
2
4
m
i
n
.

6
12
11
F1 F2
P
B A
T
F3 F4
105
25,5
6
8
1
1
T1
9
50,80,2
3
2
,
5
0
,
2
Unit dimensions (Nominal dimensions in mm)
1 Cap
2 Line connector
(order separately, see Page 7)
3 Required space for removing plug-in connector, note
additional bending radius of connecting cable
4 Replaceable filter element
Material No.: R900306843 with FKM seal
SW22, M
A
= 30 Nm
5 Formed gasket for filter screw M16 x 1.5
Material No.: R900012503 (FKM seal)
6 Nameplate
7 Same seals for ports P, A, B, T and T1
8 Same seals for ports X and Y
Ports X and Y are also subjected to pressure when
control oil is internal.
Position of connections in accordance with
ISO 4401-05-05-0-94,
T1 connection also available
0,01/100mm
Rmax 4
of mating component
10 Valve fastening screws
For strength reasons only the following
valve fastening screws may be used:
4 fillister-head screws
ISO 4762-M6 x 70-10.9-flZn-240h-L
(Friction coefficient 0.08 - 0.14 in accordance with
VDA 235-102)
(Included in delivery specification)
11 Burst protection
12 Free space for burst protection
Subplates as per Technical Data Sheet RE 45054 must be
ordered separately.
G 66/01 (G3/8)
G 67/01 (G1/2)
with ports X and Y:
G 535/01 (G3/4)
G 535/02 (M27 x 2)
G 536/01 (G1)
G 536/02 (M33 x 2)
448
9
,
5
4
0
,
5
4
6
,
5
T P X A B Y T1
Flushing plate with mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-05-05-0-94 (Nominal dimensions in mm)
Symbol

weight: 2 kg
Same seals for ports P, A, B, T and T1
Same seals for X, Y
Valve fastening screws
For strength reasons only the following
valve fastening screws may be used:
4 fillister-head screws
ISO 4762-M6 x 50-10.9-flZn-240h-L
(Friction coefficient 0.08 - 0.14 in accordance with
VDA 235-102)
(Included in delivery specification)
Note
In order to ensure that the servo valves function perfectly,
it is essential to flush the system before commissioning it
into service.
RE 29583-XH-104-B3
449
04
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
aging.
Notes
450
1/14

These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Rexroth valves, and consist
Part II Technical Data Sheet RE 29583-XH-B2
Part III Product-specific Instructions RE 29583-XH-B3
Mat.-No. R901017686

of 4-way design
Type 4WS2EM 10XH
Nominal size 10
Unit series 5X
RE 29583-XH-B2/06.04
Replaces: 09.03
H4682
Type of protection EEx ia IIC T4 to EN 50020
Ambient temperature range 20C T
a
+60C
ATEX units

451
04
2/14 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type 4WS2EM 10XH RE 29583-XH-B2
Features
explosive atmospheres of Zone 0
control
1st stage in the form of nozzle-baffle plate amplifier
with ports X and Y, Subplates as per Technical Data Sheet
RE 45054 (order separately)
pressure fluid

Contents Page
Features 2
Symbol 3
Plug-in connector 7
Unit dimensions 12
Flushing plate 13
Actuation:
External trigger electronics in modular form, additional safety
barriers (order separately), see Page 6
Change between internal/external supply and discharge of
control oil without dismantling the valve
Control sleeve permanently centered, therefore reducing
Pressure chambers in the control bush have gap seals, so
there is no O-ring wear
452
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 29583-XH-B2 Type 4WS2EM 10XH 3/14
2-stage servo valve,
4-way version
trigger electronics
Size 10 = 10
Flow code
with valve pressure difference at p = 70 bar
1)
5 l/min = 5
10 l/min = 10
20 l/min = 20
30 l/min = 30
45 l/min = 45
60 l/min = 60
75 l/min = 75
90 l/min = 90
2)
= 11
V = FKM seals
6)

(HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
E = Piston overlap
5)
0 0,5 % negative
K31 = with plug
to EN175201-804
Line connector order separately
see Page 7
Supply pressure range to 1st stage
4)
210 = 10 210 bar
315 = 10 315 bar
Control oil supply and discharge
3)
= external supply, external discharge
E = internal supply, external discharge
T = external supply, internal discharge
ET = internal supply, internal discharge
(standard)
XH = Valve in explosion-proof design
Page 6
4WS2E M 10 5X B 11 XH K31 E V
Symbol
Included in scope of delivery
1)
Flow code

a valve pressure difference of 70 bar (35 bar per metering
notch). The valve pressure difference should be regarded as
Please note that there is a possible tolerance in the flow rate
of 10 % (see flow rate signal function, Page 8).
2)

page 6.
3)
Control oil

Therefore, external pilot control via port X can be advanta-
geous. The valve may be operated with higher pressure at X
than at P, to increase the dynamics. Ports X and Y are also
subjected to pressure when control oil is internal.
4)

Pilot pressure range: 10 to 210 bar or 10 to 315 bar.
With regard to the dynamics, the dependence on the
frequency response must be taken into account within the
permitted pressure range.
5)
Piston overlap

The piston overlap in % is based on the control pistons
nominal stroke of 0.5 mm.
6)
Seal material

Please ask if you require different seal material.
A B
T P
a, b
453
04
T
A
P
B
T1
6
3
2
4
5
1
9
7
8
4WS2EM 10XH
ISO 4401 - 05 - 05 - 0 - 94. They are predominantly employed
for closed-loop position, draft, pressure and velocity control.
These valves consist of an electromechanical converter
(torquemotor)(1), a hydraulic amplifier (of the nozzle - baffle
plate type) (2) and a control piston (3) in a sleeve (2nd stage),
which is connected to the torquemotor via a mechanical return.
An electric input signal to the coils (4) of the torquemotor
the armature (5) and, acting by means of a torsion tube (6),
this force produces a torque. This torque then moves the baffle
plate (7) - which is connected to the torsion tube (6) by a pin
- out of its center position between the two control nozzles
(8), resulting in a pressure difference at the end faces of the
control piston. This pressure difference causes the position of
The control piston is connected to the baffle plate or the
torquemotor by a torsion spring (mechanical return) (9). The
torque through the torsion spring and the electromagnetic
torque of the torquemotor reach a state of equilibrium, and
the pressure difference at the nozzle-baffle plate system drops
to zero.
rate of the servo valve is regulated proportionately to the elec-
tric input signal. At the same time, it should be noted that the
flow rate is dependent on the pressure drop at the valve.
amplifier), which amplifies an analog input signal (setpoint) to
such an extent that the output signal actuates the servo valve
with flow control.
Type 4WS2EM 10XH
454
General
sufficient pressure (10 bar) when starting
up the system!)
Surface protection Valve body, cover and filter screw Nitrocarburized
Cap Anodized
Weight kg 3.56
Hydraulic
Working
pressure:
Control oil supply pilot stage bar 10 210 or 10 315
Main valve, ports P, A, B bar up to 315
Return pressure: Port T
internal control oil discharge bar Pressure peaks < 100 permitted
External control oil discharge bar up to 315
Viscosity range mm
2
Purity class to ISO code Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure fluid
to ISO 4406 (c) Class 18/16/13
1)
Zero flow q
V,L

2)

measured without jitter signal
l/min
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0.7
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0.9
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1.2
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1.5
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1.7
Nominal flow q
v nom
10%
3)
at valve pressure difference
p
= 70 bar (35 bar per notch) l/min 5 10 20 30 45 60 75 90
Control piston stroke mm 0.29 0.43 0.74 0.99 1.1
mechanical end position (in case of fault) referred
Return system mechanically
Hysteresis (optimized to reduce jitter) % 1.5
Range of inversion (optimized to reduce jitter) % 0.3
Response sensitivity (optimized to reduce jitter) % 0.2
variation (starting from hydr. zero) % of p
P
30
Zero adjustment flow
over entire working pressure range % 3, long-term 5
P
% / 100 bar 2
P
4)
% / bar 1
1)
RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
2)
q
V,L
3)
q
v nom
4)
p
P
Technical data
455
04
Electrical
Degree of protection of valve to EN 60529 IP 65 with correctly mounted and secured plug-in connector
Type of signal analog
Inductance at 60 Hz
and 100% nominal
current:

Connection in parallel H 0.25
Recommended superimposed
jitter signal: f = 400 Hz
Technical data
Type test certification PTB 03 ATEX 2119 X
Range of application to Directive RL 94/9/EG II 1 G
Type of protection to EN 50020 EEx ia IIC T4
Valve is only supplied with power from
certified, intrinsically safe circuits
with the following maximum values
U
max
V 9.3
I
max
mA 390
P
max
mW 907
Conditions for use in Zone 0 The valve cap consists of cast aluminium.
When the valve is to be used as a Category 1 device in Zone
0, the valve cap must be protected in such a manner that
no ignitable sparks from friction, impact or grinding can be
produced, even in the event of rarely occurring malfunctions.
The hydraulic fluid used must have an ignition temperature of
at least 150C.
Required free space for burst protection The specified free space for burst protection (see Page 12)
must remain free, in order that excess pressure occurring in
the event of a fault can be dissipated through the plug in the
valve cap.
Servo amplifier
1)
in modular design Analog Type VT 11021 as per Technical Data Sheet RE 29743
Recommended safety barriers
1)
Single-
channel
Messrs. Stahl, Type 9001/02-093-390-101
Note:
The servo amplifier and safety barriers must be operated outside the potentially explosive atmosphere!
1)
Order separately
456
A D B C
/ /
A
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
B
C
D
E
F
PE
A
B
C
D
E
F
1
3
,
5
85
Plug-in connector
Plug-in connector to EN 175201-804
Metal version
The electrical connection may only be effected in parallel.
Electrical actuation with positive (+) to A and B and negative () to C and D results in a flow direction of
P A and B T.
Inverse electrical actuation produces a flow direction of P to B and A to T.
Pins E , F and PE on the plug are not connected.
Note
Only approved cables and leads may be used for intrinsically
safe circuits.
Servo amplifier Safety barriers Valve: Coil A Coil B
PA PA
Non-potentially Potentially
explosive explosive
atmosphere atmosphere

457
04 04
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
5
10
20
30
40
70
100
50
200
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
30 20 10 70 50 40 200 300 100
1
2
8
15
45
60
75
90
60
100
90
60
80
20
40
20
60
40
100
90
80
-20 -40 -60 -80
40 20 60 80
-5
5
110
-100
100
110
Valve pressure difference in bar
F
l
o
w

r
a
t
e

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

p
= valve pressure difference
(supply pressure p
P

L

and minus return
pressure p
T
)
with constant valve pressure difference
P A; B T
P B; A T
Flow code Curve
5 l/min 1
10 l/min 2
20 l/min 3
30 l/min 4
45 l/min 5
60 l/min 6
75 l/min 7
90 l/min 8
Flow rate in %
Setpoint in %
Typical flow curve
Tolerance zone
458
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
0 10
40
60
80
100
5
20
15
30
50
70
10
90
0 10
40
60
80
100
5
20
15 20
30
50
70
10
90
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


459
04
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
1 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
2 1 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
2
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300325
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
460
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
50 40 0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
60 40 50
1 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
300 2 2 1 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300325 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


G
a
i
n

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

461
04
95 15 68
9,5
M6
8
0
6
0
6
4
3
2
9
6
1
0
3 1
54 24
102
127
12,5
4
6
6
5
3
,
7
9
,
5
P
A B
T1 T
Y X
5 7 8 10
1
,
5
6
2
4
m
i
n
.

6
12
11
F1 F2
P
B A
T
F3 F4
105
25,5
6
8
1
1
T1
9
1 Cap
2 Line connector
(order separately, see Page 7)
3 Required space for removing plug-in connector, note
additional bending radius of connecting cable
4 Replaceable filter element
SW22, M
A
= 30 Nm
6 Nameplate
Ports X and Y are also subjected to pressure when
9 Machined valve contact surface, position of ports as per
ISO 4401 - 05 - 05 - 0 - 94
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
4 x cheese-head bolts DIN 912-M6 x 70-10.9;
11 Burst protection
12 Free space for burst protection
ordered separately.
G 66/01 (G3/8)
G 67/01 (G1/2)
with ports X and Y:
G 535/01 (G3/4)
G 535/02 ( M27 x 2)
G 536/01 (G1)
G 536/02 (M33 x 2)

462
9
,
5
4
0
,
5
4
6
,
5
T P X A B Y T1
Symbol

weight: 2 kg
Same seals for X, Y
Fastening bolts
4 x cheese-head bolts DIN 912-M6x50-10.9;
Note
In order to ensure that the servo valves function perfectly, it is
essential to flush the system before commissioning it into service.

For procedure see Product-specific Instructions RE 29583-XH-B3
463
04 04
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
Notes
464
1/12
Type 4WS2EM 10...XN...-100
Nominal size10
Unit series 5X
RE 29583-XN-100-B2/10.04
H5893
a
+70 C
ATEX units


Mat.-No. R901034584
465
04
2/12 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type 4WS2EM 10...XN...-100 RE 29583-XN-100-B2
Features
control
Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-05-05-0-94 with
ports X and Y
(order separately)
pressure fluid
Actuation:
Internal/external supply and drain of control oil can be
selected
Control sleeve permanently centered, therefore reduced
Pressure chambers in the control sleeve have gap seals,
so there is no O-ring wear
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbols 3
Plug-in connector 6
Unit dimensions, subplates 11
Flushing plate 12
466
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 29583-XN-100-B2 Type 4WS2EM 10...XN...-100 3/12
2-stage servo valve
of 4/3-way design
trigger electronics
Nominal flow
1)

5 l/min = 5
10 l/min = 10
20 l/min = 20
30 l/min = 30
45 l/min = 45
60 l/min = 60
75 l/min = 75
90 l/min = 90
2)
= 11
4WS2E M 10 5X B 11 XN K31 V 100
100 = Non-standard
version number
6)
V = FKM seals
suitable for
mineral oil (HL, HLP)
to DIN 51524
Piston overlap
5)
C = 3 5 % positive
K31 = with component plug
to EN 175201-804
see page 6
Inlet pressure range to 1st stage
4)
210 = 10 to 210 bar
315 = 10 to 315 bar
3)
= external supply, external drain
E = internal supply, external drain
T = external supply, internal drain
ET = internal supply, internal drain (standard)
page 6
Symbols
1)
Nominal flow rate

The nominal flow is based on a 100 % setpoint signal at a
valve pressure differential of 70 bar (35 bar per metering
a guide. The flow can be affected by other values.
2)

The control signal must be generated by a current-regulated
page 6.
3)
Control oil

Therefore, external pilot control via port X can often be
advantageous. The valve may be operated with higher
pressure at X than at P, to positively influence the dynamics.
Ports X and Y are also pressurized when control oil is
internal.
Note:
Ports X and Y are also subject to pressure when the
supply and drain of control oil is internal.
4)

Pilot pressure range: 10 to 210 bar or 10 to 315 bar
With regard to the dynamics, the frequency relationship
within the permissible pressure range must be taken into
account.
5)
Piston overlap

the control piston.
6)

Ducts P B and A T are 10% open when not
A B
T P
a, b
467
04
T
A
P
B
T1
6
3
2
4
5
1
9
7
8
4WS2EM 10-5X/...XN...-100
An electrical input signal at the coils (4) of the torque motor
plate (7) - which is connected to the torque tube (6) by a rod
- out of its central position between the two control orifices
(8), resulting in a pressure differential at the end faces of the
control piston. This pressure differential causes the position of
of the servo valve are closed-loop-controlled proportionately to
the electrical input signal. At the same time, it should be noted
that the flow is dependent on the valve pressure differential.
that the controlled-current output signal is capable of driving
the servo valve.
Type 4WS2EM 10...XN...-100
468
Technical data
General
Installation position Optional (ensure that pilot control is certain to receive sufficient
pressure ( 10 bar) when starting up the system!)
Cap Anodized
Weight kg 3.56
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Working pressure Control oil supply pilot stage bar 10 210 or 10 315
Internal control oil drain bar Pressure peaks < 100 permitted
External control oil drain bar up to 315
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524, other pressure fluids
Viscosity range mm
2
1)
Zero flow q
V,L

2)
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0,7
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0,9
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1,2
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1,5
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1,7
Nominal flow q
v nom
3)
, Tolerance 10%
p
= 70 bar
(35 bar per notch) l/min 5 10 20 30 45 60 75 90
mechanicalend position (in case of fault) referred
Hysteresis (dither optimized) % 1.5
Range of inversion (dither optimized) % 0.3
Response sensitivity (dither optimized) % 0.2
P
30
Zero adjustment flow over
entire working pressure range % 3, long-term 5
P
% / 100 bar 2
P
4)
% / bar 1
1)
2)
q
V,L
3)
q
v nom
4)
p
P
469
04
A
B
C
D
E
F
85
1
3
,
5
Technical data
Plug-in connector
Lock: setscrew M3, M
A
= 0.3 Nm
EN 175201-804
Metal version
Order separately under
Connection:
Soldered contacts with
conductor cross-section
2
A
C
B
D
E
F
P
E
The electrical connections can be made either in series or in parallel. For reasons
of operating safety and the resulting low coil inductivity, we recommend the parallel
connection.
Parallel connection: In the plug-in connector, connect contact A to B and C to D.
Series connection: In the plug-in connector, connect contact B to C.
Electrical actuation from A (+) to D (-) results in a flow direction of
P A and B T. Reversing electrical actuation produces a flow direction of P B
and A T.
Coil A
Coil B
Servo amplifier
(order separately)
Eurocard format Analog Typ VT-SR2-1X/.60 as per Technical Data Sheet RE 29980
Modular design Analog Typ VT 11021 as per Technical Data Sheet RE 29743
Type of protection to EN 50021 EEx nA IIT5
Max. permitted operating voltage of
servo amplifier U
max
V 32
Electrical
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP 65 with correctly mounted and secured plug-in connector
and 100% nominal current
470
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Note:
p
P A; B T
P B; A T
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

p
(inlet pressure p
P
minus
load pressure p
L
and
T
)
5
10
20
30
40
70
100
50
200
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
30 20 10 70 50 40 200 300 100
1
2
8
15
45
60
75
90
60
Order
code
Nominal flow Curve
5 5 l/min 1
10 10 l/min 2
20 20 l/min 3
30 30 l/min 4
45 45 l/min 5
60 60 l/min 6
75 75 l/min 7
90 90 l/min 8
100
60
80
20
40
20
60
40
100
80
-20 -40 -60 -80
40 20 60 80
110
-100
100
110
Flow in %
Setpoint in % Typical flow
curve
Tolerance
zone
471
04
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Transient functions with 315 bar pressure stage, step response without flow
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
Relationship of frequency f at -90 to working pressure p and input amplitude
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


472
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200 2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
473
04
0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
40 0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
40
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200 2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
474
95 15 68
9,5
M6
8
0
6
06
4
3
2
9
6
1
0
3 1
54 24
102
127
12,5
4
6
6
5
3
,
7
9
,
5
P
A B
T1 T
Y X
5 7 8 10
1
,
5
6
2
4
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
1 Cap
2 Plug-in connector
3 Space required for removing plug-in connector,
note additional bending radius of connecting cable
4 Exchangeable filter element
5 Formed gasket
6 Nameplate
9 Machined valve contact surface, position of
ports as per ISO 4401-05-05-0-94
F1 F2
P
B A
T
F3 F4
105
25,5
6
8
1
1
T1
9
4 x cheese-head bolts DIN 912-M6x70-10.9
ordered separately.
G 66/01 (G3/8)
G 67/01 (G1/2)
with ports X and Y:
G 535/01 (G3/4)
G 535/02 (M27 x 2)
G 536/01 (G1)
G 536/02 (M33 x 2)
475
04
9
,
5
4
0
,
5
4
6
,
5
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
parties.
T P X A B Y T1
Symbol
weight: 2 kg
Same seals for X, Y
Fastening bolts
Note
476
1/12
Type 4WS2EM 10...XN...-102
Nominal size10
Unit series 5X
RE 29583-XN-102-B2/10.04
H5893
a
+70 C
ATEX units


Mat.-No. R901034605
477
04
Features
control
ports X and Y
(order separately)
pressure fluid
Actuation:
selected
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbols 3
Plug-in connector 6
Flushing plate 12
478
2-stage servo valve
of 4/3-way design
trigger electronics
Nominal flow
1)

5 l/min = 5
10 l/min = 10
20 l/min = 20
30 l/min = 30
45 l/min = 45
60 l/min = 60
75 l/min = 75
90 l/min = 90
2)
= 11
4WS2E M 10 5X B 11 XN K31 V 102
102 = Non-standard
version numbe
6)
V = FKM seals
suitable for
to DIN 51524
Piston overlap
5)
C = 3 5 % positive
to EN 175201-804
see page 6
4)
210 = 10 to 210 bar
315 = 10 to 315 bar
3)
page 6
Symbols
1)
Nominal flow rate

2)

page 6.
3)
Control oil

internal.
Note:
4)

account.
5)
Piston overlap

the control piston.
6)

Ducts P A and B T are 10% open when not
A B
T P
a, b
479
04
T
A
P
B
T1
6
3
2
4
5
1
9
7
8
4WS2EM 10-5X/...XN...-102
the servo valve.
Type 4WS2EM 10...XN...-102
480
Technical data
General
Cap Anodized
Weight kg 3.56
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Viscosity range mm
2
1)
Zero flow q
V,L

2)
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0,7
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0,9
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1,2
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1,5
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1,7
Nominal flow q
v nom
3)
, Tolerance 10%
p
= 70 bar
P
30
P
% / 100 bar 2
P
4)
% / bar 1
1)
2)
q
V,L
3)
q
v nom
4)
p
P
481
04
A
B
C
D
E
F
85
1
3
,
5
Technical data
Plug-in connector
A
= 0.3 Nm
EN 175201-804
Metal version
Connection:
2
A
C
B
D
E
F
P
E
connection.
and A T.
Coil A
Coil B
Servo amplifier
(order separately)
Max. permitted operating voltage of
servo amplifier U
max
V 32
Electrical
482
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Note:
p
P A; B T
P B; A T
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

p
(inlet pressure p
P
minus
load pressure p
L
and
T
)
5
10
20
30
40
70
100
50
200
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
30 20 10 70 50 40 200 300 100
1
2
8
15
45
60
75
90
60
Order
code
Nominal flow Curve
5 5 l/min 1
10 10 l/min 2
20 20 l/min 3
30 30 l/min 4
45 45 l/min 5
60 60 l/min 6
75 75 l/min 7
90 90 l/min 8
100
60
80
20
40
20
60
40
100
80
-20 -40 -60 -80
40 20 60 80
110
-100
100
110
-10
Flow in %
Setpoint in %
Typical flow
curve
Tolerance
zone
483
04
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


484
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200 2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
485
04
0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
40 0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
40
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200 2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
486
95 15 68
9,5
M6
8
0
6
06
4
3
2
9
6
1
0
3 1
54 24
102
127
12,5
4
6
6
5
3
,
7
9
,
5
P
A B
T1 T
Y X
5 7 8 10
1
,
5
6
2
4
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
1 Cap
2 Plug-in connector
5 Formed gasket
6 Nameplate
F1 F2
P
B A
T
F3 F4
105
25,5
6
8
1
1
T1
9
ordered separately.
G 66/01 (G3/8)
G 67/01 (G1/2)
with ports X and Y:
G 535/01 (G3/4)
G 535/02 (M27 x 2)
G 536/01 (G1)
G 536/02 (M33 x 2)
487
04
9
,
5
4
0
,
5
4
6
,
5
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
parties.
T P X A B Y T1
Symbol
weight: 2 kg
Same seals for X, Y
Fastening bolts
Note
488
1/12
Type 4WS2EM 10...XN...-114
Nominal size10
Unit series 5X
RE 29583-XN-114-B2/10.04
H5893
a
+70 C
ATEX units


Mat.-No. R901034629
489
04
Features
control
ports X and Y
(order separately)
pressure fluid
Actuation:
selected
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbols 3
Plug-in connector 6
Flushing plate 12
490
2-stage servo valve
of 3/3-way design
trigger electronics
Unit Series 50 to 59 = 5X
Nominal flow
1)

5 l/min = 5
10 l/min = 10
20 l/min = 20
30 l/min = 30
45 l/min = 45
60 l/min = 60
75 l/min = 75
90 l/min = 90
2)
= 11
4WS2E M 10 5X B 11 XN K31 V 114
114 = Non-standard
version number
6)
V = FKM seals
suitable for
to DIN 51524
Piston overlap
5)
C = 3 5 % positive
to EN 175201-804
see page 6
4)
210 = 10 to 210 bar
315 = 10 to 315 bar
3)
page 6
Symbols
1)
Nominal flow

The nominal flow is based on a setpoint signal of 100 %
at a pressure differential of 35 bar per notch. Different values
cause the flow rate to change. Please note a possible
flow rate tolerance (see flow signal function on page 7).
2)

page 6.
3)
Control oil

internal.
Note:
4)

account.
5)
Piston overlap

the control piston.
6)

Duct B T is 10% open when not actuated (de-energized).
Port A is always closed in the control range.
A B
T P
a, b
491
04
4WS2EM 10-5X/...XN...-114
control piston.
The pressure differential causes the position of the piston
to change, so that the pressure port (P) is connected to
consumer port (B), or consumer port (B) is connected to
return port (T).
In this special version 114, consumer port A is closed.
In this way, the stroke of the control piston and thus the
flow of the servo valve are controlled proportionately to the
electrical input signal. At the same time, please note that the
flow is dependent on the drop in pressure at the metering
edge.
the servo valve.
Type 4WS2EM 10...XN...-114
T
A
P
B
T1
6
3
2
4
5
1
9
7
8
492
Technical data
General
Cap Anodized
Weight kg 3.56
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Viscosity range mm
2
1)
Zero flow q
V,L

2)
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0,6
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0,7
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0,9
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1,1
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1,3
Nominal flow q
v nom
3)
, Tolerance 10%
p
= 35 bar per notch
l/min 5 10 20 30 45 60 75 90
P
30
P
% / 100 bar 2
P
4)
% / bar 1
1)
2)
q
V,L
3)
q
v nom
4)
p
P
493
04
Technical data
A
B
C
D
E
F
85
1
3
,
5
Plug-in connector
A
= 0.3 Nm
EN 175201-804
Metal version
Connection:
2
A
C
B
D
E
F
P
E
connection.
Electrical actuation from A (+) to D (-) results in a flow direction of B T. Reversing
electrical actuation produces a flow direction of P B.
Coil A
Coil B
Servo amplifier
(order separately)
Max. permitted operating voltage of servo amplifier U
max
V 32
Electrical
494
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
Note:
at a constant metering edge pressure differential
Metering edge pressure differential in bar for P B or B T
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

Order
code
Nominal flow Curve
5 5 l/min 1
10 10 l/min 2
20 20 l/min 3
30 30 l/min 4
45 45 l/min 5
60 60 l/min 6
75 75 l/min 7
90 90 l/min 8
100
60
80
20
40
20
60
40
100
80
-20 -40 -60 -80
40 20 60 80
110
-100
100
110
-10
B T
P B
Flow in %
Setpoint in %
Typical flow
curve
Tolerance
zone
5
10
20
30
40
70
100
50
200
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15 10 5 35 25 20 100 150 50
1
2
8
15
45
60
75
90
30
495
04
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


496
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200 2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
497
04
0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
40 0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
40
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200 2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200
5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
498
95 15 68
9,5
M6
8
0
6
06
4
3
2
9
6
1
0
3 1
54 24
102
127
12,5
4
6
6
5
3
,
7
9
,
5
P
A B
T1 T
Y X
5 7 8 10
1
,
5
6
2
4
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
1 Cap
2 Plug-in connector
5 Formed gasket
6 Nameplate
F1 F2
P
B A
T
F3 F4
105
25,5
6
8
1
1
T1
9
ordered separately.
G 66/01 (G3/8)
G 67/01 (G1/2)
with ports X and Y:
G 535/01 (G3/4)
G 535/02 (M27 x 2)
G 536/01 (G1)
G 536/02 (M33 x 2)
499
04
9
,
5
4
0
,
5
4
6
,
5
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
parties.
T P X A B Y T1
Symbol
weight: 2 kg
Same seals for X, Y
Fastening bolts
500
1/12
of 4-way design
Type 4WS2EM 10XN
Nominal size10
Series 5X
RE 29583-XN-B2/05.04
Replaces: 06.03
H5893
Type of protection EEx nA II T5 to EN 50021
and IP 65, T100 C to EN 50281
a
+70 C
ATEX units


Mat.-No. R901017788
501
04
Features
control
Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401 - 05 - 05 with
ports X and Y.
(order separately)
pressure fluid
Actuation:
Change between internal/external supply and drain of control
oil without dismantling the valve
Contents Page
Features 2
Symbols 3
Plug-in connector 6
Flushing plate 12
502
Symbols
2-stage servo valve
of 4-way design
trigger electronics
Flow code
with valve pressure differential a p = 70 bar
1)

5 l/min = 5
10 l/min = 10
20 l/min = 20
30 l/min = 30
45 l/min = 45
60 l/min = 60
75 l/min = 75
90 l/min = 90
2)
= 11
V = FKM seals
6)

suitable for
to DIN 51524
E = Piston overlap
5)
0 0,5 % negative
to EN 175201-804
see page 6
4)
210 = 10 to 210 bar
315 = 10 to 315 bar
3)
page 6
4WS2E M 10 5X B 11 XN K31 E V
1)
Flow code

2)

page 6.
3)
Control oil

internal.
4)

account.
5)
Piston overlap

0.5 mm of the control piston.
6)
Seal materials

Please ask if you require different seal material.
A B
T P
a, b
503
04
T
A
P
B
T1
6
3
2
4
5
1
9
7
8
4WS2EM 10-5X/...XN
to ISO 4401 05 05. They are predominantly employed for
the servo valve.
Type 4WS2EM 10XN
504
Technical data
General
Mounting hole configuration ISO 4401 - 05 - 05
sufficient pressure 10 bar) when starting up the system!)
Cap Anodized
Weight kg 3.56
Hydraulic
Viscosity range mm
2
Purity class to ISO code Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure fluid
to ISO 4406 (c) Class 18/16/13
1)
Zero flow q
V,L

2)

l/min
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0,7
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
0,9
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1,2
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1,5
p
P

4)
L
70bar min
1,7
Nominal flow q
v nom
10%
3)
p
= 70 bar
Control piston stroke mm 0.29 0.43 0.74 0.99 1.1
P
30
P
% / 100 bar 2
P
4)
% / bar 1
1)
2)
q
V,L
3)
q
v nom
4)
p
P
505
04
A
B
C
D
E
F
85
1
3
,
5
Technical data
Plug-in connector
A
= 0.3 Nm
EN 175201-804
Metal version
A
C
B
D
E
F
P
E
connection.
and A T.
Coil A
Coil B
Servo amplifier
(order separately)
Note: The external servo amplifier must be operated outside the potentially explosive atmosphere!
Type of
protection
to EN 50021 EEx nA II T5
to EN 50281 IP 65, T100 C
Max. permitted operating voltage of servo amplifier U
max
V 32
Electrical
506
5
10
20
30
40
70
100
50
200
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
30 20 10 70 50 40 200 300 100
1
2
8
15
45
60
75
90
60
oil
= 40 C 5 C)
100
90
60
80
20
40
20
60
40
100
90
80
-20 -40 -60 -80
40 20 60 80
-5
5
110
-100
100
110
F
l
o
w

i
n

l
/
m
i
n

p
(inlet pressure p
P
minus
load pressure p
L
and
T
)
P A; B T
P B; A T
Flow code Curve
5 l/min 1
10 l/min 2
20 l/min 3
30 l/min 4
45 l/min 5
60 l/min 6
75 l/min 7
90 l/min 8
Flow in %
Setpoint in %
Typical flow
curve
Tolerance
zone
507
04
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10 100 700
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
50 500 20 200
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


508
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
0 20
40
60
80
100
10
20
30 40
30
50
70
10
90
2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200
2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
509
04
0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
40 0 30
40
60
80
100
10
20
20
30
50
70
10
90
40
2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200 2 20 50 100
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
300 700
150
120
90
60
30
10
0 30
200
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
50 100 150 200 250 300 325
P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n


P
i
s
t
o
n

s
t
r
o
k
e

i
n

%

Time in ms
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

i
n

d
B

Frequency in Hz
P
h
a
s
e

a
n
g
l
e

i
n

5% X
eN
25% X
eN
100% X
eN
I
n
p
u
t

a
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

i
n

%


oil
= 40 C 5 C)
510
95 15 68
9,5
M6
8
0
6
06
4
3
2
9
6
1
0
3 1
54 24
102
127
12,5
4
6
6
5
3
,
7
9
,
5
P
A B
T1 T
Y X
5 7 8 10
1
,
5
6
2
4
0,01/100mm
R 4
max
of mating component
1 Cap
2 Plug-in connector
SW22, M
A
= 30 Nm
6 Nameplate
7 Same seals for ports A, B, P, T and T1
8 Same seals for ports X and Y.
Ports X and Y are also pressurized when
ports as per ISO 4401 - 05 - 05
F1 F2
P
B A
T
F3 F4
105
25,5
6
8
1
1
T1
9
ordered separately.
G 66/01 (G3/8)
G 67/01 (G1/2)
with ports X and Y:
G 535/01 (G3/4)
G 535/02 (M27 x 2)
G 536/01 (G1)
G 536/02 (M33 x 2)
511
04
9
,
5
4
0
,
5
4
6
,
5
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
Flushing plate with mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-05-05 (dimensions in mm)
T P X A B Y T1
Symbol
weight: 2 kg
Same seals for ports A, B, P, T and T1
Same seals for X, Y
Fastening bolts
Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-05-05
Note
In order to ensure that the servo valves function perfectly, it
is essential to flush the system before commissioning it into
service.
RE 29583-XN-B3.
512
Electronics and accessories

G
U
Amplifier, safety modul
Amplifier module for controlling explosion-protected proportional
directional valves 4WRA...XE, 3DREP 6...XE and 4WRZ...XE VT-MSPA2-200 1X 30228-200 515
Safety module for monitoring and limiting solenoid currents
in proportional valves VT-MUXA2-1 1X 30290-B2 523
Pressure switch
Hydro-electric pressure switch HED8...XN 1X 50060-XN-B2 531
Designation Type Series
Data
sheet no. Page
01
03
04
05
05
513
514
1/8
Amplifier module for controlling
1)

explosion-protected
proportional directional valves
4WRA...XE, 3DREP 6...XE and 4WRZ...XE
Type VT-MSPA2-200
Component series 1X
RE 30228-200/07.05
Table of contents Features
Amplifier is not subject to
Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX Directive)
In conjunction with Rexroth safety module VT-MUXA2, suitable
for controlling proportional directional valves without electri-
cal position feedback, types 4WRA...XE, 3DREP 6...XE and
4WRZ...XE
Command value input 10 V (differential input)
Ramp generator with separately adjustable up/down ramp times
Characteristic curve correction through separately adjustable
step-change heights
Enable input
Reverse polarity protection for voltage supply
Power supply unit with DC/DC converter without raised zero
point for internal supply
LED lamps: Ready for operation (green)
Enable (yellow)
Suitable power supply units:
If power is to be provided also for safety module VT-MUXA:
Type VT-NE40-1X to data sheet RE 29891,
permissible ambient temperature 40 C
Without supply of safety module VT-MUXA:
Type VT-NE30-1X to data sheet RE 29929
H 7282
Contents Page
Features 1
Ordering code 2
Functional description 2
Block circuit diagram 3
Technical data 4
Terminal assignment 6
View / unit dimensions 6
Important notes / adjustment recommendations 7
1)
To achieve the prescribed level of safety when operating
one of the listed valves in a potentially explosive atmos-
phere, this amplifier module must be connected to safety
module VT-MUXA2.
In this context, read operating instructions RE 30290-B0
for the safety module!
515
05
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics VT-MSPA2-200 RE 30228-200/07.05
Ordering code
Analogue amplifier of modular design
for controlling explosion-protected valves
4WRA...XE (component series 2X),
3DREP 6...XE (component series 2X)
and 4WRZ...XE (component series 7X) = 200
Component series 10 to 19 = 1X
(10 to 19: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)
Further details in clear text
0 = Basic version
V0 = Basic version
VT-MSPA2 200 1X V0 0
*
Functional description
General
The amplifier modules are to be snapped onto hat rails accord-
ing to EN 60715. They are electrically connected by means of
screw terminals. The modules are operated with 24 V DC.
Power supply unit (1)
The amplifier modules are shipped with a power supply unit
with switch-on current limitation. It provides all internally
required positive and negative supply voltages. The switch-on
current limitation prevents excessive switch-on current peaks.
Command value
The internal command value signal is generated from the exter-
nal command value signal applied to differential input (2).
A positive command value causes in increase in current in
solenoid b and therefore a flow in the valve from P A and
from B T.
A negative command value causes in increase in current in
solenoid a and therefore a flow in the valve from P B and
from A T.
Enable function (10)
The enable function is used for enabling the current output
stages and passing the internal command value signal on to
the ramp generator. The enable signal is signalled by an LED
on the front panel. When the enable is granted, the internal
command value (with optional command value feedforward)
changes with the set ramp time. A valve does therefore not
open suddenly when activated.
Ramp generator (3)
The ramp generator limits the gradient of the control output.
The downstream step functions do not extend or shorten the
ramp time.
Note on the adjustment and measurement of the ramp time:
Value at measuring socket "t <" or "t >" U
t
in V 5 3 2
Current ramp time ( 20 %) t in ms 20 33 50
U
t
in V 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.03 0.02
t in ms 100 200 333 500 1000 2000 3333 5000
The following is
valid:
t =
100 Vms
U
t
Example: Measured U
t
= 5 V
results in t =
100 Vms
= 20 ms
5 V
Characteristic curve generator (4)
The adjustable characteristic curve generator can be used to
adjust the step-change height separately for positive and nega-
tive signals to the requirements of the hydraulic system. The
actual course of the characteristic curve through the zero point
is not stepped, but linear. (Characteristic curve, see page 5)
Amplitude limiter (5)
The command value is limited to approx. 110 % of the nomi-
nal range.
Current regulator (6)
The current is regulated in dependence upon the command
value.
Current output stage (7)
The current output stage generates the clocked solenoid cur-
rent for the proportional valve. The nominal solenoid current
is 1000 mA per output. The output stage outputs are short-
circuit-proof. In the event of an internal fault signal or missing
enable, the output stages are de-energised.
Clock-pulse generator (8)
The clock-pulse generator generates clock frequency f of the
output stages.
f = 150 Hz 400 Hz, adjustable with the help of potentiome-
ter f (pre-set to 240 Hz)
Fault detector (10)
Monitors the solenoid cables for cable break and the output
stage for overcurrent.
Command value inversion (11)
The command value generated from the input signal and the
zero point offset signal can be inverted by means of an external
signal.
516
4 5
t
63
U
L
D
C
D
C
L
0
+
1
5
V
+
1
0
V
M
0
-
1
0
V
-
1
5
V
2 1
S
w
+
S
w
-
U
I
w
R
t

>
-
1
M
0
U
U
>
5
0
k
(
1
)
(
9
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
7
)
&
o
k
o
k
o
k
(
1
0
)
1
0
0
F
f
(
8
)
t

<
w
t

<
(
2
)
78 9
1
0
(
1
1
)
t

>
S123
>
5
0
k
I
V
T
-
M
S
P
A
2
-
2
0
0
(
1
2
)
(
1
2
)
V T - M U X A 2 - 1
ab
1
5
1
4
1
3
1
6
1
1
1
2 9
1
0
V T - M U X A 2 - 1
56
2 1
(
1
3
)
Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 30228-200/07.05 VT-MSPA2-200 3/8
Block circuit diagram
E
x
p
l
o
s
i
o
n
-
p
r
o
-
t
e
c
t
e
d

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
+
I
N
)

1
0

V
C
o
m
m
a
n
d

v
a
l
u
e
(
I
N
)

0

V
I
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n
E
n
a
b
l
e
(
U
O
)

2
4

V
t

>
R
a
m
p

t
i
m
e

d
o
w
n
t

<
R
a
m
p

t
i
m
e

u
p
S
w
S
t
e
p
-
c
h
a
n
g
e

h
e
i
g
h
t
w
C
o
m
m
a
n
d

v
a
l
u
e
w
R
C
o
m
m
a
n
d

v
a
l
u
e

a
f
t
e
r

r
a
m
p
R
e
a
d
y

f
o
r

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
E
n
a
b
l
e
(
1
)
P
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

u
n
i
t
(
2
)

D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

a
m
p
l
i
f
i
e
r
(
3
)
R
a
m
p

g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
(
4
)
C
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c

c
u
r
v
e

g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
(
5
)
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

l
i
m
i
t
e
r
(
6
)
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

r
e
g
u
l
a
t
o
r
(
7
)
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

o
u
t
p
u
t

s
t
a
g
e
(
8
)
C
l
o
c
k
-
p
u
l
s
e

g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
(
9
)
E
n
a
b
l
e

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
(
1
0
)
F
a
u
l
t

d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
1
1
)
I
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n
(
1
2
)
S
a
f
e
t

m
o
d
u
l
e
(
t
o

b
e

o
r
d
e
r
e
d

s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e
l
y
)
(
1
3
)
T
w
o

f
e
r
r
i
t
e

s
l
e
e
v
e
s

(
i
n
c
l
u
d
e
d

o
n
l
y

i
n

t
h
e

s
c
o
p
e

o
f

s
u
p
l
y

o
f

t
h
e

s
a
f
e
t
y

m
o
d
u
l
e
)
N
o
t

e
x
p
l
o
s
i
o
n
-
p
r
o
-
t
e
c
t
e
d

s
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
)

0

V
517
05
Operating voltage Nominal value U
O
24 VDC
Maximum value u
O
(t)
max
35 V
Minimum value u
O
(t)
min
18 V
Power consumption P < 24 VA
Current consumption I < 1 A
Fuse Thermal overload fuse (with reset when temperature falls
below a threshold )
Inputs
Analogue Command value (differential input) U
i
0 10 V; R
i
> 50 k
Digital Enable ON U 8.5 V U
O
; R
i
> 100 k
OFF U 0 6.5 V; R
i
> 100 k
Inversion ON U 8.5 V U
O
; R
i
> 100 k

OFF U 0 6.5 V; R
i
> 100 k
Adjustment ranges
Clock frequency f adjustable from 150 Hz 400 Hz, preset to 240 Hz
Ramp times (potentiometers t < and t >) t < , t > 20 ms 5 s
Step-change height (potentiometers Sw+ and Sw) 0 % 50 %
Outputs
Current output stages I 0 to 1000 mA, short-circuit-proof; clocked
Measuring sockets Ramp time t < U 20 mV 5 V
Ramp time t > U 20 mV 5 V
Actual value I U
0 1000 mV (value measured in mV solenoid current in mA)
Command value w U 0 10 V
Command value after ramp wR U 0 10 V
Type of connection Screw terminals
Connection cross-section A 0.5 2.5 mm
2
Type of mounting Hat rail TH 35-7.5 to EN 60715
Type of protection IP 20 to EN 60529
Dimensions (W x H x D) See unit dimensions
Permissible operating temperature range 0 +50 C
Storage temperature range 25 C +70 C
Weight m 0.14 kg
518
1000
800
600
500
400
200
10 8 6 4 2 0 +10 +8 +6 +4 +2
0,2 +0,2
150
Characteristic curves
O
u
t
p
u
t

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

i
n

m
A

Command value voltage in V

Solenoid a Solenoid b
Adjustment range of step-change height of output current: 0 500 mA
Factory setting: 150 mA
Dependence of output current on command value voltage
519
05
85,5
7
9
40
3 2 1
7
Sw+
Sw
t <
t >
8 9
4 5 6
10 11 12
t< t>
I w
wR
REXROTH
VT-MSPA2-200
f
1
2
3
Terminal assignment
Operating
voltage
+U
O
1 7
Solenoid b
0 V 2 8
Enable U
F
3 9
Solenoid a
Command
value input
0V ( IN ) 4 10
10V (+IN) 5 11 n.c.
Inversion 6 12 n.c.
View / unit dimensions (nominal dimensions in mm)
LED indicator lamps:
Ready for operation (green)
Enable (yellow)
Potentiometers
Sw+ Step-change height for positive direction
Sw Step-change height for negative direction
t < Ramp time for rising command values
t > Ramp time for falling command values
f Frequency setting, 240 Hz preset,
adjustable from 150 Hz 400 Hz

Operating mode selector switch: Without function

Measuring sockets:
t < Ramp time up
t > Ramp time down
I Actual current value
w Command value
wR Command value after ramp
Measurement zero
520
Adjustment information
Preconditions: The system-specific connections must have been made.
Signal Adjustment
Ramp time Adjust ramp time according to formula or table (see functional description of ramp generator) and
check at measuring sockets "t >" and "t <"
Step-change height Apply enable signal
Apply an external command value of +0.3 V and adjust the measured signal at "wR" to +0.3 V
Adjust the required positive step-change height using po ten tio me ter "Sw+"
Apply an external command value of 0.3 V and adjust the measured signal at "wR" to 0.3 V
Adjust the required positive step-change height using po ten tio me ter "Sw"
Note:
With external command value feedforward, the latter must result in at least +0.3 V / 0.3 V at measuring socket wR.
Clock frequency Factory setting: f = 240 Hz
Note: The frequency can be newly set with the help of a digital multimeter that is capable of measur-
ing frequencies. Measurement at connecting terminals 7 or 9 against 2 (ground).
Important notes / adjustment information
Risk of explosion in the case of incorrect installation !
To achieve the prescribed level of safety when operating one of the listed valves in a potentially explosive atmosphere,
this amplifier module must be connected to safety module VT-MUXA2.
In this context, read operating instructions RE 30290-B0 for the safety module!
This amplifier module and safety module VT-MUXA may only be installed outside potentially explosive atmospheres!
The amplifier module is not subject to Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX Directive) !
Further notes:
The amplifier module may only be wired when disconnected from the power supply!
Do not lay signal cables near power cables and lines!
Do not use free-wheeling diodes in solenoid cables!
The distance to aerial lines, radio sources and radar equipment must be at least 1 m!
Always shield command value cables and connect the shield to the protective earth (PE) on the module side!
Also shield solenoid cables!
For solenoid cables up to 50 m length, use cable type LiYCY 1.5 mm
2
!
In the case of greater lengths, please consult us!
For applications and use in conjunction with safety module VT-MUXA, please observe the installation instructions in the
associated operating instructions RE 30290-B0.
Use relays with gold-plated contacts for passing on command values (small voltages, small currents)!
Measurements on the module may only be taken with instruments with Ri > 100 k.
For adjusting the potentiometers, use a screwdriver with a blade width of 4 mm!
In the case of strongly fluctuating operating voltages, it may be required to install an external smoothing capacitor having a
capacitance of at least 2200 F.
Recommendation: Capacitor module VT 11073 (see RE 29750), sufficient for up to 3 amplifier modules
In conjunction with safety module VT-MUXA, the operating voltage must be directed via a capacitor module.
The solenoid current connections to safety module VT-MUXA must be routed via ferrite sleeves. These ferrite sleeves are in-
cluded in the scope of supply of safety module VT-MUXA.
The clock frequency is factory-set to 240 Hz. Turning of potentiometer f results in a change in the valve hysteresis and can
cause annoying noise.
521
05
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengieer 1
Phone +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Fax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It may not
be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
can be derived from our information. The information given does not
release the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It
wear and aging.
Notes
522
1/8
Safety module for monitoring and
limiting solenoid currents in
proportional valves
Type VT-MUXA2-1
Device series 1X
Maximum solenoid current 1,0 A
RE 30290-B2/08.05
H7312
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG II(2)G
Type of protection of monitored valve solenoid:
[EEx em] IIT4 to EN 50019:2000.07 / EN 50028:1987.02
Maximum solenoid current 1,0 A
ATEX units


These Operating Instructions apply to Rexroth safety modules for the protection of solenoid valves with Increased Safety
type of protection, and consist of the following three parts:
Part II Technical Data Sheet RE 30290-B2
Part III Product-specific Instructions RE 30290-B3
Mat. No. R901082207
523
05
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics VT-MUXA2-1 RE 30290-B2
Features
Satisfies Directives RL 94/9/EC (ATEX) and
RL 89/336/EWG (EMV)
Conforms to Safety Category 3 to EN 954-1, Appendix A
Reliable shutoff of solenoid current when the permitted
maximum current is exceeded
Additional correction of non safety-relevant setpoints
prevents premature shutoff of solenoid currents
Solenoid current circuits have additional fuse protection
through two non-replaceable 1.25AF fuses to IEC 60127-4
Redundant relay contacts for each solenoid current circuit
Redundant solenoid current measurement for each solenoid
current circuit
Reversed polarity protection of solenoid current circuits
Reversed polarity protection of operating voltage
Reset input, edge-triggered
Differential input
Setpoint output
OK output
DIN rail mounting
Plug-in terminals
Suitable power pack:
Type VT-NE40, see Technical Data Sheet RE 29891
Permitted ambient temperature 40 C
Contents Page
Overview of contents 2
Features 2
Application 3
Function 4
Circuit diagram 5
Technical data 6
Terminal assignment 8
Installation conditions and unit dimensions 8
524
Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 30290-B2 VT-MUXA2-1 3/8
Application
Analog module for monitoring solenoid coils
Monitoring of valves with two solenoids = 2
Further information in plain text
1A = I
max
= 1,0 A
V0 = Standard version
1X = Unit series 10 to 19
(10 to 19: technical data and
connections unchanged)
1 = Serial number (module type)
The VT-MUXA2-1 safety module is an associated piece of ap-
paratus in accordance with Directive RL 94/9/EC. It serves
the purpose of technical safety by monitoring and limiting the
solenoid currents of a proportional valve of the Increased
Safety explosion protection type, device group II, zone 1, gas
explosion protection.
The safety module contains two current circuits that are rele-
vant to safety. The solenoid currents are limited so as to pre-
vent the solenoids from overheating and potentially causing
sparks that would ignite the explosive atmosphere.
The solenoid currents required to operate the valve are sup-
plied by an amplifier (order separately).
The amplifier has been adapted in line with the nominal current
data of the solenoid (nominal current = 1.03 A). With a set-
point input of 10 V, it delivers an output current of 1.0 A.
The amplifier can supplier a current greater than 1.0 A in the
event of a fault or incorrect operation. Then, explosion protec-
tion is no longer guaranteed. The series-connected safety
module detects the excess current and reduces the setpoint
or shuts off the solenoid current.
Risk of explosion if incorrectly installed!
The following rules are essential!
1. The amplifier and the safety module must be installed
outside the potentially explosive area.
2. The safety module must be connected between the
amplifier output and the solenoid and between the
control output (setpoint input from higher-level
controller) and the amplifier input (see circuit diagram).
3. Valves with a maximum solenoid current of less than
1.0 A must not be connected.
Only connect valve solenoids with a maximum current
that matches the monitoring current of the safety
module.
VT-MUXA 2 1 1X V0 1A
*
Module operating instructions
Two ferrite sleeves for cables conducting solenoid current
between the amplifier and the safety module
525
05
Function
Power pack (1)
The internal power pack supplies the auxiliary voltages that
are required internally.
A green LED (power) indicates that the power pack is
functioning.
Power pack monitor (2)
If the internal supply voltages are missing, the signal NTF
causes the relay to be switched off. There is no additional
monitoring of voltages that are essential in order to trigger
the relay.
Ammeter (3)
The solenoid currents I
A
and I
B
are measured on their advance
and return paths (AV, AR, BV, BR). Both measurement results
are evaluated independently of one another. Protective diodes
are provided to ensure protection against reversed polarity.
The two currents I
A
and I
B
are added together, as neither the
individual solenoid current nor the sum total of currently may
exceed the specific limit value.
Symmetry monitor (4)
As the advancing and returning currents have to be identical,
the total currents IVS and IRS are also identical. In the event
of deviations, e.g. on short to ground or incorrect current meas-
urement, the fault signal DI is generated to trip the relay.
Corrective signal generator (5)
Corrective signals are used
a) as an auxiliary signal for the correction (absolute value re-
duction) of the setpoint conveyed to the amplifier as soon
as the maximum permitted solenoid current is exceeded.
b) as an auxiliary signal for shutting off the solenoid current
circuits if measure a) is ineffective.
Setpoint correction (6)
The setpoint emitted by the controller for the solenoid current
is conveyed to the valve amplifier unaffected, provided that the
solenoid current lies within the nominal range. If the maximum
permitted current is exceeded, however, within a few seconds
the setpoint value is reduced with a ramp-type characteristic,
until the current drops to the limit value. This prevents the
current from being shut off abruptly. If the corrected setpoint
reaches a value less than approx. 50 % of the nominal value
and the solenoid current does not decrease, it will be shut off
by the relay contacts.
The setpoint correction is not redundant in design. In the event
of circuit failure or a faulty setpoint signal, shutoff will always
be executed by the relay contacts if the solenoid currents have
exceeded the permitted level.
Relay trigger (7)
The relays for switching the solenoid currents on and off each
feature their own trigger electronics with the inputs DI, NTF
and the signals from the corrective signal generator (5).
Shutoff
Shutoff takes place when the permitted maximum current is
exceeded, as soon as at least one corrective signal does
not produce a reduction in current, or one of the redundant
ammeters reveals differences in measured values (symmetry
monitor). Furthermore, the relays remain off whilst the self-test
is running after switch-off or reset.
Switch-on
The relays are only ever switched on after the self-test has
been successfully completed.
Safety measures
In order to ensure compliance with Safety Category 3 as per
EN 954-1, the following technical measures have been imple-
mented in the circuitry:
Power pack monitoring
Redundant current measurement
Symmetry monitoring of current measurement
Redundant corrective signal generation
Redundant relay triggers and relays
Relay with positively driven contacts
Self test.
Self-test (8)
The self-test is necessary to ensure compliance with Safety
Category 3 to EN 954-1, since any errors that occur in the
redundant safety functions must be detected. The setpoint cor-
rection circuit (6) is not checked during the self-test. The self-
test is performed each time the operating voltage is switched
on and each time the electronics are reset both manually and
electronically. The self-test is started manually by pressing the
Reset button S1. The electronic reset is caused by a positive
edge at the 24V reset input.
Unintentional movement of plant/machine possible!
If the self-test is activated during operation, both relays
are opened. This considerably disrupts hydraulic function.
To prevent inadvertent actuation, the function of the S1
Reset button can be suppressed by a 24 V signal at the re-
set input. This 24 V signal must be removed again in order
to perform the self-test and check the safety module.
OK output (9)
As soon as the Test OK signal has been transmitted and both
relays have switched, this is indicated by a 24 V output signal
and by the LED.

526
N
T
F
2
4
V
N
T
F
D
I
K
1
N
T
F
D
I
K
2
K
2
1
,
2
5

A
1
,
2
5

A
K
1
K
1
I
V
S
I
R
S
A
V
A
V
A
R
B
V
B
V
B
R
B
R
A
R
R
E
F
R
E
F
D
C
D
C
3
7
5
m
A
I
V
S
I
R
S
K
2
RR R R
3
3
5 5
1
6
7
7
8
9
2
IIII
4
I
R
S
D
I
I
V
S
R
e
s
e
t
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
3456
2 1 8 7
1
2
1
1
1
0 9
ab
78 9
1
0
54
1
0
1
0
9
(
7
)
1
0
(
8
)
1
4
(
1
6
)
1
3
(
1
5
)
P
o
w
e
r

p
a
c
k
Circuit diagram
S
a
f
e
t
y

m
o
d
u
l
e

V
T
-
M
U
X
A
2
N
o
n
-
E
X

z
o
n
e
E
X

z
o
n
e
A
m
p
l
i
f
i
e
r

V
T
-
M
S
P
A
2
-
2
0
0
+
2
4

V
D
C

(
I
N
+
)

1
0

V

S
e
t
p
o
i
n
t

i
n
p
u
t

(
I
N
)

0

V

1
0

V

(
O
U
T
+
)
S
e
t
p
o
i
n
t

o
u
t
p
u
t
0

V

(
O
U
T
)
O
K

o
u
t
p
u
t
R
e
s
e
t

i
n
p
u
t
S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

o
u
t
p
u
t

1
,
0

A
S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d

o
u
t
p
u
t

1
,
0

A
V
a
l
v
e

1
0

V
0

V
(
1
)
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

p
o
w
e
r

p
a
c
k
(
5
)
C
o
r
r
e
c
t
i
v
e

s
i
g
n
a
l

g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
(
9
)
O
K

o
u
t
p
u
t
(
2
)
P
o
w
e
r

p
a
c
k

m
o
n
i
t
o
r
(
6
)
S
e
t
p
o
i
n
t

c
o
r
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
1
0
)
T
w
o

f
e
r
r
i
t
e

s
l
e
e
v
e
s
,

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

a
s

s
h
o
w
n

o
n

r
i
g
h
t
(
3
)
A
m
m
e
t
e
r
(
7
)
R
e
l
a
y

t
r
i
g
g
e
r
(
4
)
S
y
m
m
e
t
r
y

m
o
n
i
t
o
r
(
8
)
S
e
l
f
-
t
e
s
t
527
05
Technical data
Operating voltage Nominal value U
B
24 V DC
Maximum value u(t)
max
Max. 30 V at 0 C
U
40 C
1)
Minimum value u(t)
min
Min. 18 V at 0 C
U
40 C
1)
Reversed polarity protection Protects the safety module from being destroyed if supply
lines are connected with incorrect polarity
Power consumption P < 5 VA
Current input I < 0.2 A
Fuses/short-circuit protection
2 fuses for solenoid currents,
non-replaceable
I 1.25 A fast fuse (SMD)
Display LEDs OK green Lights up when self-test is completed, relays have picked up
and no faults are present
Power green Lights up as soon as the internal power pack is working
Inputs Setpoint differential input U 0 10 V
Reset input
Low
High
U
R
U
R
Edge-triggered, Low High
0 6.5 V
10 V U
B
2 monitored solenoid
current inputs
Permitted common-mode
voltage
Reversed polarity protection
Permitted clock frequency of
solenoid currents
U
Hz
2 V U
B
by diodes
0 500
Outputs Setpoint output U 0 10 V, I = 2 mA
(setpoint input to amplifier)
2 solenoid current outputs I 1.0 A (monitored to 2 %)
OK output High = OK U
B
3 V / 50 mA, short-circuit-proof
Low = OK < 2 V, R
i
= 10 k
Clearance and leakage paths To EN 50178
Permitted degree of contamination 2 to EN 60664
Type of connection 16-way terminal housing with removable terminals
Wire range A 0.2 2.5 mm
2
Type of mounting DIN rail TH 35-7.5 to EN 60715
Degree of protection IP 20 to EN 60529
Dimensions (W x H x D) See unit dimensions
Operating temperature range 0 +50 C
1)
Storage temperature range 25 +85 C
Weight m 0.15 kg
Maximum permitted operating hours h 40000
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG II(2)G
Type of protection of monitored valve solenoid [EEx em] IIT4
Type test certification PTB 05 ATEX 3017
Safety category 3 to EN 954-1
Ambient temperature range 0 +50 C
1)
1)
Also see derating curve on page 7
528
Characteristic curves
Temperature derating for operating voltage
Shutoff characteristic
30
27
21
18
0 20 40
50
0
Ambient temperature in C
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

v
o
l
t
a
g
e

i
n

V

700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070
1
2
Solenoid current in mA
S
h
u
t
o
f
f

t
i
m
e

i
n

s

1 and 2 are limit curves

529
05
22,5 115
113,6
9
9
MUXA2
Power
OK
Reset
13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
MUXA2
Power
OK
Reset
13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
> 10
Bosch Rexroth AG
Hydraulics
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
aging.
Terminal assignment
Terminal Function Terminal Function
1 Setpoint output 10V (OUT+) 9 Solenoid a: + output
2 Setpoint output 0 V (OUT) 10 Solenoid a: output
3 + U
B
11 Solenoid b: + output
4 Ground 12 Solenoid b: output
5 Setpoint input 10V (IN+) 13 Solenoid a: + input
6 Setpoint input 0 V (IN) 14 Solenoid a: input
7 Reset input 15 Solenoid b: + input
8 OK output 16 Solenoid b: input
Installation conditions and unit dimensions
DIN rail TH 35-7,5
Minimum distance to
adjacent device
530
1/8
Hydro-electric pressure switch
Type HED 8XN
Series 1X
RE 50060-XN-B2/04.04
H5546
Range of application in accordance with the
Explosion Protection Directive and type of
protection as per DIN EN 50014
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG II3D
Type of protection II3D T 100C to DIN EN 50281
ATEX units


These Operating Instructions apply to the explosion-proof version of Rexroth hydro-electric pressure switches,
You can find further information on the correct handling of Rexroth hydraulic products in our
publication General Product Information for Hydraulic Products, RE 07008.
Mat. No. R901022411
531
05
2/8 Bosch Rexroth AG Industrial Hydraulics Type HED 8XN RE 50060-XN-B2
Overview of Contents Features
Plunger-type pressure switch
Sandwich arrangement
1)
= OH
Subplate mounting = OP
Pipe installation = OA
unchanged)
Maximum setting pressure 50 bar = 50
Plunger-type pressure switch in explosion-proof design
No code = NBR-seals
V = FKM-seals
Note:
Take compatibility of seals and pressure
fluid into account!
No code = spindle without scale
S = spindle without scale,
with protective cap
A = spindle with scale
AS = spindle with scale,
with protective cap
KS
2)
= lockable rotary knob with scale
KW = rotary knob with scale
Z14 = Single terminal with plug and plug-in
connector to DIN EN 175301-803 and
ISO 4400, 3-way + PE
HED 8 1X XN Z14
Pressure switch operating instructions
Plug-in connector
1)
Intermediate plate for sandwich arrangement available
on request.
2)
H-key, Mat. No. R900008158, is included in scope of
delivery
Hydro-electric pressure switch for proper use in potentially
For pipe installation
Sandwich or longitudinal arrangement on request
5 pressure stages
4 adjusting elements:
Spindle with hexagon socket, with or without protective cap
(cap can be sealed)
Spindle with hexagon socket and scale, with or without
protective cap
Rotary knob with scale
Lockable rotary knob with scale
Plug-in connector included in scope of delivery
Contents Page
Features 2
Function, sectional diagrams, symbol 3

Technical data 4
Maximum switching hysteresis 6
Unit dimensions 7
Terminal assignment, typical circuits 8
532
Industrial Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG RE 50060-XN-B2 Type HED 8XN 3/8
Function, sectional diagrams, symbol
Symbol
P
The Type HED 8 hydro-electric pressure switch is a plunger-
type model.
It basically consists of a housing (1), cartridge unit comprising
plunger (2), compression spring (3), adjusting element (4) and
micro-switch (5).
The micro-switch (5) is operated if the monitored pressure lies
below the set value. The monitored pressure is available at
the plunger (2) via the nozzle (7). The plunger (2) rests on the
spring disk (6) and acts against the infinitely adjustable force
of the compression spring (3). The spring disk (6) transmits the
motion of the plunger (2) to the micro-switch (5), which is then
released once the set pressure is achieved. This then switches
the flow of electrical current on or off, depending on how the
circuit is arranged. The mechanical stop of the spring disk (6)
protects the micro-switch (5) from being destroyed in the
event of a sudden drop in pressure, and prevents excessive
compression of the spring (3) in the case of excess pressure.
Note:
To increase service life, the pressure switch should be
fitted in a such a way that it is not subject to high vibration
protected against hydraulic pressure surges.
P
1 3 6 5
7
2 4
P
1 3 6 5
7
2 4
P P
1 3 6 4 5
7
2
P
Type HED 8 OH1X/XNZ14
A
AS

S
KW
KS
Type HED 8 OP1X/ Type HED 8 OA1X/
533
05
Technical data
1)
2)
Suitable for FKM seals only
3)
components.
RE 50076 and RE 50081.
General
Installation position Optional, preferably horizontal
Ambient temperature range C See under hydraulic
Weight kg 0.8
Hydraulic
1)
; Rapidly
biodegradable pressure fluids to VDMA 24568
(also see RE 90221); HETG (rapeseed oil)
1)
;
HEPG (polyglycols)
2)
2)
;
Pressure fluid temperature range C -15 +80 (for NBR and FKM seals)
Ambient temperature range C -30 +70 (for NBR seals)
Viscosity range mm
2
/s 10 800
3)
Switching accuracy (repeat accuracy) % < of setting range
Permitted switching frequency 1/h 4800
Pressure setting ranges
Pressure stage
(maximum setting pressure)
bar

bar
Pressure setting range

bar
50 350 3 50
100 350 4 100
200 350 5 200
350 500 10 350
630 630 20 630
534
Technical data
Electrical
Electrical connection Plug-in connection to DIN EN 175301-803, ISO 4400,
3-way + PE
Maximum conductor cross-section mm
2
1.5
Maximum
contact rating
AC 250 V / 5 A
DC 50 V / 1 A; 125 V / 0.03 A; 250 V / 0.02 A
Degree of protection to EN 60529 IP 65 (only with correctly fitted plug-in connector)
Spark quenching must be provided to increase service life in DC circuits with inductive load.
Range of application as per Directive RL 94/9/EG II 3D
Type of protection to DIN EN 50281 II 3D T 100C
Ambient temperature range C -30 +70 (for NBR seals)
535
05
Maximum switching hysteresis
0
1
2
3
4
10 20 30 40 50
5
6
7
0
2
4
6
8
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
10
12
0
5
10
50 100 150 200 250 300 350
15
20
25
30
0
5
10
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
15
20
0
10
30
20
40
50
100 200 300 400 500 630
Pressure stage 50 Pressure stage 100
Pressure stage 200 Pressure stage 350
Pressure stage 630
Minimum switching pressure in bar
Minimum switching pressure in bar Minimum switching pressure in bar
Minimum switching pressure in bar Minimum switching pressure in bar
S
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g

h
y
s
t
e
r
e
s
i
s

i
n

b
a
r

S
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g

h
y
s
t
e
r
e
s
i
s

i
n

b
a
r

S
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g

h
y
s
t
e
r
e
s
i
s

i
n

b
a
r

S
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g

h
y
s
t
e
r
e
s
i
s

i
n

b
a
r

S
w
i
t
c
h
i
n
g

h
y
s
t
e
r
e
s
i
s

i
n

b
a
r

536
Unit dimensions ((in mm)
G 1/4
2
0
,
5
2
0
,
5
4
0
4
0
6
2
0
11 (16)
1)
37
4
2
M16x1,5
1
5
8
9
3
9
18 24 4
92
75
3
1
31
55
92
7 23
2 x 5,5
23
3
0
2 x 5,5
7 7
4
4
88
55
92
7
3
9
,
5
10
15 8 14 13
12 1 11
2 9
3
12
4
5
12
6
P
P
7
16
M
A
= 0,4 Nm
4
0
3
0
4
0
3
9
,
5
0,01/100mm
Rz1max 4
1 Adjusting element KW
2 Adjusting element KS
3 Adjusting element
4 Adjusting element S
5 Adjusting element A
6 Adjusting element AS
7 Sealing ring
8 Sealing ring
9 Space required for removing key
10 Space required for removing plug-in connector
11 Hexagon A/F 27 (for KS adjusting element)
12 Hexagon socket A/F 10
13 Plug-in connector to DIN EN 175301-803, ISO 4400,
3-way + PE
14 Fastening bolts for type HED 8 OH
2 x cheese-head bolts DIN 912 - M5 x 12 - 10.9
(DIN 912 - M5 x 16 - 10.9)
1)
,
15 Maximum diameter of mounting hole in mating
component (type HED 8 OH1X/)
16 Maximum diameter of mounting hole in mating
component (type HED 8 OP1X/)
Fastening bolts
for types HED 8 OA and HED 8 OP
ISO 4762 - M5 x 50 - 10.9 - flZn - 240h - L
Material-No. R913000064
Pipe thread G on type HED 8 OA conforms to
ISO 228/1.
1)
Figures in ( ) only apply to pressure stage 630 bar
of mating component for
versions OH and OP
Type HED 8 OH1X/..XN
Type HED 8 OP1X/..XN Type HED 8 OA1X/..XN
537
05
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengieer 1
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-0
Telefax +49 (0) 93 52 / 18-23 58
www.boschrexroth.de
Terminal assignment
1
3
2
PE
p
gn
1
ge
2 3
+ ()
(+)
p
gn
1
ge
2 3
gn
1
ge
2 3
min. max. p p
(+)
+ ()
Typical circuits
Simple circuit
(1 x HED 8)
Differential circuit with NO contact
(2 x HED 8)
Without light indicator
538
Notes
539
Notes
540
Notes
541
Notes
542
Notes
543
Notes
544

RE 00112 - Part 7

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

RE 00112 - Part 7

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

1

Type Material No. AV

Type Material No. b

Type Material No. CR

Type Material No. CK

Type Material No. CK

34/44 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics CDH2...X. / CGH2...X. RE 17334-X/09.05

Overcurrent fuse and cut-off voltage peak

Flow rate in l/min

Flow rate in l/min Flow rate in l/min

Flow rate in l/min Flow rate in l/min

Flow rate in l/min Flow rate in l/min

Flow rate in l/min Flow rate in l/min

Flow rate in l/min Flow rate in l/min

Flow rate in l/min Flow rate in l/min

Flow rate in l/min

Overcurrent fuse and cut-off voltage peak

Valve capacity limits with DC-voltage solenoids

Overcurrent fuse and cut-off voltage peak

(Please consult us for applications of this kind.)

Flow rate in l/min

Piston Switched position Piston Neutral

Piston Switched position

Flow rate in l/min

Pressure differential in bar

Pressure differential in bar

Pressure differential in bar

Input signal change [%]

Input signal change [%]

Interdependency of pressure and flow rate

Pressure stages 16, 25 and 45 bar

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

100 150 200 250 300 350

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

100 150 200 250 300 350

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

100 150 200 250 300 350

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Nominal flow 5, 10, 20 l/min Nominal flow 30 l/min

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Nominal flow 45 l/min Nominal flow 60 l/min

40 bar 70 bar 140 bar 210 bar 315 bar

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Nominal flow 75 l/min Nominal flow 90 l/min

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Nominal flow 5, 10, 20 l/min Nominal flow 30 l/min

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Nominal flow 45 l/min Nominal flow 60 l/min

40 bar 70 bar 140 bar 210 bar 315 bar

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Nominal flow 75 l/min Nominal flow 90 l/min

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Characteristic curves (measured with HLP 32,

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

40 bar 70 bar 140 bar 210 bar 315 bar

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Frequency at phase angle 90 in Hz

Nominal flow 45 l/min Nominal flow 60 l/min